FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017 Broadcom 802.11ag WLAN mini PCI card

 

Quick Start Guide CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer Technical Communications 550 Second Street SE Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 U.S.A. Intermec Technologies Corporation Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Ave.W. Everett, WA 98203 U.S.A. www.intermec.com The information contained herein is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and service Intermec-manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec Technologies Corpora-

tion. Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior notice and do not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation. 2003-2006 by Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, Norand, ArciTech, Beverage Routebook, CrossBar, dcBrowser, Duratherm, EasyADC, EasyCoder, EasySet, Fingerprint, i-gistics, INCA (under license), Intellitag, Intell-

itag Gen2, JANUS, LabelShop, MobileLAN, Picolink, Ready-to-Work, RoutePower, Sabre, ScanPlus, ShopScan, Smart Mobile Computing, TE 2000, Trakker Antares, and Vista Powered are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec Technologies Corporation. There are U.S. and foreign patents as well as U.S. and foreign patent applications pending. Contents CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer . 1 Unpacking the CV60 Computer . 1 Locating the CV60 Computer Ports. 2 Attaching an External Antenna. 3 Attaching a Cordless Bluetooth Scanner . 3 Windows CE .NET . 4 Windows XP/XPE . 5 Connecting to Other Serial Devices . 6 CV60 Computer Setup . 6 Device Configuration. 7 Connecting to the CV60 (Windows CE) .7 Specifications . 8 CV60 Hardware Features. 8 Processor/Memory/Storage . 9 System Software . 9 Power System . 9 Wired Connectivity . 9 Wireless Connectivity . 9 Peripherals/Accessories . 9 Troubleshooting . 10 ii CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer Quick Start Guide CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer The CV60 Computer is a rugged PC computing device consist-

ing of a 12.1-inch color, SVGA LCD display with touch screen for data input and menu navigation. Communication options include connectivity through two RS-232 serial ports, two USB ports (host), and Ethernet Wireless network connectivity is enabled through multiple LAN radio options. Peripherals supported include PS/2 keyboard, USB mouse, exter-

nal headset, wired RS-232 scanners, wireless printers, and USB data recovery drives. CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer with optional desk mount. Unpacking the CV60 Computer When removing the CV60 Computer from its box, save the box and shipping material in case you need to ship or store it. Check the contents of the box against the invoice for completeness and contact your local Intermec representative if there is a problem. CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer Quick Start Guide 1 The CV60 shipping box contains:

CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer (P/N: 245-287-10X) Documentation (P/N: 930-162-001) Locating the CV60 Computer Ports You connect power, a keyboard, scanner, and RS-232 serial devices to the ports that are located on the bottom panel of the CV60 Computer. Keyboard Membrane Vent Ethernet Speaker Power Switch Power Connector USB COM1 COM2 Microphone Headphone COM1 Use this port to connect the CV60 Computer to other RS-232 devices, such as PCs, scanners, scales, and printers, using an RS-232 null-modem adapter cable. The RS-232 null modem cable is an accessory, which is sold and ordered separately. COM2 Use this port to connect the CV60 Computer to other RS-232 devices, such as PCs, scales, and printers, using an RS-232 null-

modem adapter cable. The RS-232 null modem cable is an acces-

sory, which is sold and ordered separately. The CV60 Computer supports these Intermec scanning devices:

Intermec 1553 Laser Scanners Intermec SF51/SX51 Cordless Bluetooth Scanners 2 CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer Quick Start Guide Power Supply Connector This connector provides power to the CV60 Computer to one of the DC power supply kits (6-96 VDC) or to connect the AC power supply when operating the CV60 Computer from the desktop mounting stand. You must have a power supply con-

nected to operate the CV60 Computer. Keyboard Connector Use this connector to connect the CV60 keyboard or a PC-PS/2 keyboard to the CV60 Computer using the CV60 keyboard adapter cable. The keyboard and keyboard adapter cable are accessories, which are sold and ordered separately. USB Connectors Use these connectors to attach USB serial peripheral devices such as keyboards, mice, hubs to the CV60 Computer. The CV60 Computer supports USB version 1.1. Ethernet Connector Use this connector for connection to a 10baseT/100baseT Ether-

net LAN. Attaching an External Antenna You can use an Intermec-approved accessory antenna to improve RF communications. Note: See your Intermec representative for information about the CV60 Computer and a list of Intermec-

approved accessory antennas for the CV60 Computer. Attaching a Cordless Bluetooth Scanner You can attach a scanner, such as the SF51 or SX51 Scanner, to scan and input bar code data. Use the accessory scanner cables to connect a scanning device. 1 Insert the scanner cable connector straight into the COM1 port on the CV60 Computer. 2 Use a small straight-slot screwdriver to tighten the two screws in the scanner cable connector and secure the cable to the CV60 Computer. 3 Attach the other end of the scanner cable to your scanner. CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer Quick Start Guide 3 4 Make sure the cable is not pinched or rubbed by any moving parts on the vehicle. Windows CE .NET 1 Enable Bluetooth settings by selecting Start > Settings >

Control Panel > Local Bluetooth. Tap Turn On if you see the Bluetooth is off message, check Connectable, then tap OK. 2 Select Start > Run, then browse to Program Files > Intermec

> Network >BluetoothScannerWizard.exe to associate your scanner with the CV60 Computer. 3 Tap Add Device, then tap Quick Connect (Incoming) to have the Connection Wizard find your scanner. 4 Scan the bar code, then tap Finish to exit. After association, enter PIN 0000 in the Authentication dialog box. Note: If you have any problems scanning the bar code shown on the display, you can also scan the Bluetooth association bar code label on the side of the CV60 Computer. 4 CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer Quick Start Guide Windows XP/XPE With the Bluetooth Scanner Wizard, you can connect up to seven scanners using device search, manual entry, Quick Connect bar code scan, or choose from previously used devices. From the CV60 Computer, select Start > My Computer, browse to the C:\Program Files\Intermec\Bluetooth Scanner Wizard folder, double-click the BluetoothScannerWizardFull icon. 1 ,From the Bluetooth Scanner Wizard, tap Add Scanner. CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer Quick Start Guide 5 2 Select Quick Connect (Incoming), then tap Next:

3 Scan the bar code with your scanner, then tap Finish to close the wizard. Connecting to Other Serial Devices Use the CV60 Serial Port to transfer data between the CV60 Computer and a serial device. There are two serial ports (COM1 and COM2) that support RS-232 communications. Use COM1 and the accessory RS-232 null-modem adapter cable (P/N: 226-

106-00X) to connect to a serial device, such as a printer or scale. CV60 Computer Setup Your CV60 Computer may be loaded with one of three operat-

ing systems, installed at the factory: Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Embedded, or Windows CE. NET. 6 CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer Quick Start Guide Device Configuration Configure settings for the CV60 Computer using the Intermec Settings applet. Tap Start > Settings > Control Panel, then tap the Intermec Settings icon. Tap on folders to select and make setting changes. You will be prompted to save any changes. Connecting to the CV60 (Windows CE) 1 Connect the CV60 Computer to your desktop PC using an ActiveSync cable. Install ActiveSync on your desktop PC by downloading it from the Microsoft web site. 2 Tap the ActiveSync desktop icon to start communicating with your desktop PC. Follow the onscreen instructions for estab-

lishing a partnership. CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer Quick Start Guide 7 3 When the partnership is established, the device name of your CV60 Computer appears in the ActiveSync window on your desktop PC. Specifications CV60 Hardware Features Physical Weight: 5 kg (11.02 lbs) for base unit Size Height: 26 cm (9.44) Width: 34 cm (13.38) Depth: 9.5 cm (3.74) Environmental IP65 Compliant Recommended Operating Temperature Range (Solid State Drive): -20 C to 50 C (-4 to 122 F) Recommended Operating Temperature Range (Rotating Drive): 0 C to 50 C (32 to 122 F) Recommended Operating Temperature Range (Heater Option): -30 C to 50 C (-22 to 122 F) Recommended Storage Temperature Range: -30 C to 70 C

(-22 to 158 F) 8 CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer Quick Start Guide Processor/Memory/Storage Intel P-III 800Mhz embedded processor 256MB base memory with upgrade to 512MB SDRAM 512MB FLASH Removable IDE rotating media or solid state drive or PC Card solid state memory Resistive touch screen 12.1 Inch, Color TFT 800 x 600 SVGA System Software Windows XP Professional Windows XP Embedded Windows CE .NET Power System 6-96 VDC DC/DC converters AC/DC adapter supporting international power requirements Optional uninterruptible power supply Wired Connectivity Two RS-232 ports, supporting external tethered scanners 2 USB host ports 10BaseT/100BaseT Ethernet Wireless Connectivity 802.11b/g 2.4 GHz (Direct Sequence Spectrum) Bluetooth radio for cordless accessories Peripherals/Accessories External alpha/numeric keyboard, PS/2 Tethered bar code scanners Mounting brackets to meet a wide range of vehicles Intermec External Bar Code Scanners Sabre (1553) SF51/SX51/SR61/other similar Bluetooth Interface Scanners CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer Quick Start Guide 9 External Keyboards PS/2 interface with locking connector External Mouse Off-the-shelf USB mouse Audio Internal Speaker (mono) Stereo Line out/Headset Jack External microphone jack allows voice recording. (Mutes internal speaker when connected.) Troubleshooting CV60 Computer does not respond to applying power. Check to ensure that your CV60 Computer is connected to the correct power source. CV60 will not turn on when the On/Off button is pressed. Check the power supply connectors and cabling from the CV60 Computer. Check the connections from the dc power supply and verify that the green LED is lit. CV60 shuts down during operation. Check the power supply cable(s) for intermittent operation by moving or jiggling it. Check to see if the green LED on the back of the power supply is flickering or blinking at the moment the CV60 Computer shuts down. Check your installation, cables, etc. Flickering LEDs indicate the power supply has encountered an over-voltage, over-cur-

rent, or over-temperature event. See the Vehicle Power Supply Installation Guide (P/N: 932-003-001) for more information. CV60 does not turn off May not turn off when it is processing data. In the event that your vehicle mount computer locks up, hold the on/off button down for approximately 4-5 seconds. This causes an emergency forced shut down of the computer. Remove the DC power input and wait 20-30 seconds before reconnecting. 10 CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer Quick Start Guide Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer Quick Start Guide

*930-162-001*

P/N 930-162-001

 

 

Compliance Statement Insert Model Number: CV60 Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203 USA Device Name: Data Collection Computer The responsible party for the compliance of this device is:

This product conforms to the following approvals. The user(s) of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. FCC Digital Emissions Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the radio of television receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Canadian Digital Apparatus Compliance This device contains radio frequency transmitters approved by the Federal Communications Commission under FCC ID: EHABTM210 and FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017 . WARNING: Per the FCC radio frequency (RF) exposure requirements,

(1) Antennas must be supplied and installed as recommended by Intermec Technologies Corporation to insure compliance to RF exposure requirements. The integral antennas approved for use are not to be serviced by the user.

(2) When installing and using Intermec CV60, a 20-cm (8-inch) passing distance must be maintained from any body part of the user or nearby persons and the antennas at the top of the unit. The antenna area must not be touched during transmitter operation.

(3) RF safety requirements mandate this device cannot be co-located with other transmitters. 578-100-097 Revision C

*578-100-097C*

*578-100-097C*

Page 1 of 2 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

(According to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014) THE PRODUCT HEREWITH COMPLIES WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF :

THE LOW-VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 73/23/EEC. THE EMC DIRECTIVE 89/336/EEC. THE R&TTE DIRECTIVE 1999/05/EC. ITE/Residential, Commercial, and Light Industrial Product Options: ALL Date Issued: July 06, 2006 European Representative:

Intermec International Incorporated Reading Intl Business Park Basingstoke Road Reading, Berkshire RG2 6DD United Kingdom Manufacturers Name:

Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203 Declares that the product listed below:

Product Type:

Product Name: Data Collection Computer Model Number: CV60 Beginning Serial Number: All Conforms to the following product specifications:

Safety: IEC 60950-1 / EN 60950-1 EMC: EN 55022 : 1998 / CISPR Publication 22 : 1997, Class B Limits and Methods Radio: ETSI EN 300 328-2 I, the undersigned, hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directive(s) and Standard(s). Company Official: Michael Abel Signature:

European Contact: Intermec International Incorporated, Reading Intl Business Park, Basingstoke Road, Reading, Berkshire, RG2 6DD United Kingdom; Phone: +44 118 923 0800; Fax +44 118 923 0801 EN 55024 : 1998 (CISPR 24) Information Technology Equipment Immunity Characteristics Limits and Methods of Measurement EN61000-3-2 : 2000 Harmonic Current Emissions EN61000-3-3 : 1995 Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker Date: _06-July-2006_______ Position: Vice President Signed Copy on File ETSI EN 301 489-17 578-100-097 Revision C

*578-100-097C*

*578-100-097C*

Page 2 of 2

 

 

Boadcom 802.11ag WLAN Card User's Guide, BCM94318MPAGH The Solution BCM94318MPAGH enables access to wireless local area networks (WLANs), enables the sharing of a local printer and files with others in the network, enables Internet connection sharing, and enables roaming about the officewire-free. This wireless LAN solution is designed for both the home user and businessesand it is scalable so that users can be added and new network features can be enabled as networking needs grow. Configuring a Network Profile in Infrastructure Mode (Windows XP Environment) Before you can connect to a wireless network, you must configure a network profile for that network on your notebook computer. If you purchased your notebook computer with the Boadcom WLAN Card already installed and set up at the factory, follow the network profile configuration instructions provided below. If this is not the case, first verify that the Boadcom WLAN Card has been properly installed in your computer according to the installation instructions. Then proceed with the following instructions for configuring your network profiles. To begin configuring a network profile, open Wireless Network Connection Properties. 1. Click Start, click Control Panel, and then click Network Connections. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection. 3. Under Network Tasks, click Change settings of this connection. NOTEFor more information on how to configure a network profile and IEEE 802.1x authentication, click Learn about setting up wireless network configuration. You can configure a network profile for networks that are listed under Available networks as well as those that are not listed. When you have completed configuring a network profile, the network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. Your computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the list. Follow the applicable instruction set below, based on whether or not the network is listed and whether or not the network requires network key information (check with your network administrator or access point (AP) installer to see if network key information is required). NOTEBoth the network name and the network key information are case-sensitive. m Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require Network Key Information m Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires Network Key Information m Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require Network Key Information m Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Requires Network Key Information Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require Network Key Information (Windows XP Environment) 1. Click the network name under Available networks and click Configure. 2. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. 3. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon page to verify that you are connected to the Internet. for that network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires Network Key Information (Windows XP Environment) Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) Security 1. Click the network name under Available networks and then click Configure. 2. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically check box. 3. From the Network Authentication list, select Open. 4. From the Data encryption list, select WEP. 5. Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. 6. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. 7. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that you are connected to the Internet. for that network. If the bubble does not appear, click Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) Security Encryption 1. Click the network name under Available networks and then click Configure. 2. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically check box. 3. From the Network Authentication list, select the network authentication type specified by the network administrator/AP installer. 4. From the Data encryption list, select the data encryption type specified by the network administrator/AP installer. 5. If required by the network administrator/AP installer, type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEA network key is not required for WPA type network authentication. 6. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. 7. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that you are connected to the Internet. for that network. If the bubble does not appear, click AuthenticationConfiguring the Network for Light Extensible Authentication Protocol (LEAP) Support NOTEConfigure the network profile before you begin. 1. Click Start, click Control Panel, and then click Wireless Configuration Utility 2. Click the LEAP tab. 3. Select the Enable LEAP check box. 4. Click the network name, and then click Properties. 5. Type the network name, LEAP user name, and LEAP password in the respective boxes and click OK. Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require Network Key Information (Windows XP Environment) 1. Under Preferred networks, click Add. 2. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box and Click OK. 3. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties. The computer is connected to the added network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that you are connected to the Internet. for that network. If the bubble does not appear, click Using Wireless Utility:

Windows XP Environment 1. Open the TrueMobile Wireless Utility. 2. Click the Link Status tab. The quality of the connection (signal strength and noise) of the particular network you are connected to is indicated by the horizontal bars and the decibel level values that are displayed at the bottom of the Link Status tab. The connection quality is also indicated by the appearance of the utility icon cursor over the icon. in the desk top system tray. The description of the signal strength appears when you hover the The table below shows the quality level and suggested action for improving the signal quality for each icon image that may be displayed. If the signal strength indications are anything other than very good or excellent, you should take the appropriate suggested action. Four vertical green bars indicate that the signal strength is very good or excellent. Three vertical green bars indicate that the signal is good. Three vertical yellow bars indicate that the signal strength is low. Suggested action: Move closer to the access point. Two red vertical red bars indicates that the signal strength is very low. Suggested action: Move closer to the access point. Uncolored vertical bars indicate that there is no signal being received. Probable causes:

l The computer is trying to establish an initial connection but has not yet succeeded. l You may have moved out of range of the access point. Suggested action:

l Wait l Move closer to the access point. Uncolored vertical bars with a superimposed red letter x indicate that there is no radio connection. Probable cause: The radio is disabled. Suggested action: Enable the radio. To enable the radio, right-click the utility icon Enable Radio. in the system tray and click Disabling the Radio To disable the radio on your Broadcom WLAN Card, right-click the utility icon in the system tray and click Disable Radio. To enable the radio, right-click the icon radio can be enabled/disabled by pressing Fn + F2. and click Enable Radio. On newer Dell TrueMobile enabled notebooks, the Diagnostics You can run a number of diagnostics on your Broadcom WLAN Card to verify its operational and functional status. NOTEThe network connection is lost when you run the diagnostics. When the test run is over, however, your network connection is automatically reestablished. Windows XP Environment 1. Open the Wireless Configuration Utility. 2. Click the Diagnostics tab. 3. To see a description of the test, click each test and look in the Recommendations area. 4. All tests are selected by default. To run an individual test or some but not all of the tests, clear the check box for those tests that you do not want to run. 5. Click Run Tests. 6. If your Braodcom WLAN Card fails any of the diagnostics tests, see Troubleshooting. Regulatory Information:

Information for the User Regulatory Information Information for the User Wireless Interoperability The Broadcom WLAN Card products are designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) and orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:

l IEEE Std 802.11b-1999. Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN l IEEE draft Std 802.11g. Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN l IEEE Std 802.11a-1999. Standard on 5 GHz Wireless LAN The Broadcom WLAN Cards and Your Health The Broadcom WLAN Cards, like other radio devices, emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by these devices, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Broadcom WLAN Card devices operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of a Broadcom WLAN Card wireless device may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:

l Using the Broadcom WLAN Card equipment onboard airplanes, or l Using the Broadcom WLAN Card equipment in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), ask for authorization to use the Broadcom WLAN Card device before turning it on. Regulatory Statements for BCM94318MPAGH Regulatory Information USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. CAUTION This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. CAUTION: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 0.5 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. CanadaIndustry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. The term "IC" before the equipment certification number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Pour empecher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit etre utilize a l'interieur et devrait etre place loin des fenetres afin de Fournier un ecram de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'emission) est installe a l'exterieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. CAUTION This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas website www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. EuropeEU Declaration of Conformity and Restrictions Hereby, Broadcom Corp, declares that this equipment complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. This equipment is marked with the community. 0682 symbol and can be used throughout the European This indicates compliance with the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC and meets the relevant parts of following technical specifications:

EN 300 328 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission Systems; Data transmission equipment operating in the 2,4GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive. EN 301 893 - Broadband Radio Access Networks (BRAN); 5 GHz high performance RLAN; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive EN 301 489-17 - Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17 Specific Conditions for Wideband Data and HIPERLAN Equipment. EN 60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment. EN 50385 Product standard to demonstrate the compliances of radio base stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems with the basic restrictions or the reference levels related to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields. Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. France - 2.4GHz for Metropolitan France :

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power

(EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band 802.11a Restrictions:

- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (51505350 MHz).

- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.

- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point in installed.

- This product can be used as shown in the table below:

5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Taiwan DGT warning statement Translation:

Article 14 Without permission granted, the frequency change, transmitting power enhance or alter of original design characteristic as well as function by company, enterprise, or user for approved Low-power radio frequency devices is not allowed. Article 17 Low-power radio-frequency devices shall not influence aircraft security and interfere legal communications; If found, shall cease operating immediately until no interference is achieved. Above mentioned Legal Communications is defined as radio communications operation follows Telecommunications Act. Low-power radio-frequency devices must susceptible with the interference from legal communications, ISM radio wave radiated devices. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only.

 

 

Dell Latitude D800 User's Guide Page 1 of 1 Dell Latitude D800 User's Guide Click the links to the left for information on the features and operation of your computer. For information on other documentation included with your computer, see "Finding Information."

CAUTION: Follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide to help protect computer from damage and ensure your own personal safety. Notes, Notices, and Cautions NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or Abbreviations and Acronyms For a complete list of abbreviations and acronyms, see the Glossary. If you purchased a Dell n Series computer, any references in this document to Microsoft Windows operating systems are not applicable. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. 2003 Dell Computer Corporation. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Computer Corporation is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dell TravelLite, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, and are trademarks of Dell Computer Corporation; Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks and Intel SpeedStep and Centrino are trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and is used by Dell Computer Corporation under license; ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Dell Computer Corporation has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or products. Dell Computer Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model PP02X February 2003 P/N 4Y332 Rev. A00 file://C:\temp\~hhE8F0.htm 2/27/2003 Finding Information Page 1 of 2 Finding Information Safety Instructions Documentation Updates Using Microsoft Windows Using Devices Using the Dell Drivers and Utilities CD Fixing Problems Installing Parts Safety Instructions CAUTION: For precautions on safely handling and using your computer and preventing electrostatic discharge, see the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. Documentation Updates Documentation updates are sometimes included with your computer to describe changes to your computer or software. Always read these updates before consulting any other documentation because the updates contain the latest information. Readme files, which may be installed on your hard drive or located on CDs such as the Drivers and Utilities CD, provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your computer or advanced technical reference material intended for experienced users or technicians. Using Microsoft Windows Windows Help Your operating system provides complete online instructions for using it:

In Windows XP, click the Start button and click Help and Support. For more information, see "Using Microsoft Windows XP."

In Windows 2000, click the Start button and click Help. Microsoft Windows Guide For more information on using the Windows operating system, see the Windows documentation that came with your computer. file://C:\temp\~hh7DC9.htm 2/27/2003 Finding Information Page 2 of 2 Using Devices Device User's Guides For help with using your computer devices (such as a modem) and options you purchase separately from your computer, see the device user's guide.

In Windows XP, click the Start button and click Help and Support. In the Help and Support window, click User and system guides.

In Windows 2000, click the Start button, point to Programs, and then click User's Guides. Using the Dell Drivers and Utilities CD The Drivers and Utilities CD contains drivers and utilities, the Dell Diagnostics, and user's guides for your computer and optional devices. Dell ships your computer to you with required drivers and utilities already installedno further installation or configuration is needed. If you ever need to reinstall a driver or utility, diagnostics tests on your computer, or access the user's guides, use the Drivers and Utilities CD. See

"Reinstalling Software" and "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Fixing Problems For help with fixing computer problems, see "Solving Problems" and "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Microsoft Windows Guide For more information on troubleshooting problems, see the Windows documentation that came with your computer. Dell Support For personalized online support, driver updates, and instant answers to your questions, access Dell Support at support.dell.com. Installing Parts For help with adding parts to your computer, see "Adding and Replacing Parts"

For detailed information on the computer's parts and assemblies and how to remove and replace them, see computer Service Manual on support.dell.com. file://C:\temp\~hh7DC9.htm 2/27/2003 About Your Computer Page 1 of 11 About Your Computer Front View Left View Right View Back View Bottom View Front View 1 display latch 2 display 8 9 speakers track stick/touch pad buttons 3 power button 10 track stick 4 device status lights 11 volume control buttons 5 keyboard 6 touch pad 12 mute button 13 keyboard status lights 7 display latch button display latch Keeps the display closed. file://C:\temp\~hhE7D6.htm 2/27/2003 About Your Computer Page 2 of 11 display For more information about your display, see "Using the Display."

power button Press the power button to turn on the computer or to enter or exit a power management mode. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, turn off your computer by performing a Microsoft Windows rather than by pressing the power button. If the computer stops responding, press and hold the power button until the computer turns off completely

(which may take several seconds). device status lights Turns on when you turn on the computer and blinks when the computer is in a power management mode. Turns on when the computer reads or writes data. NOTICE: To avoid loss of data, never turn off the computer while the light is Turns on steadily or blinks to indicate battery charge status. Turns on when Bluetooth is enabled. To enable or disable Bluetooth, press

. NOTE: Bluetooth is an optional feature, so the computer. For more information, see the documentation that came with your Bluetooth wireless technology. icon turns on only if you ordered Bluetooth with If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the light operates as follows:

file://C:\temp\~hhE7D6.htm 2/27/2003 About Your Computer Page 3 of 11

Solid green: The battery is charging.

Flashing green: The battery is almost fully charged. If the computer is running on a battery, the light operates as follows:

Off: The battery is adequately charged, the computer is turned off, or the battery is not installed the computer.

Flashing orange: The battery charge is low.

Solid orange: The battery charge is critically low. keyboard The keyboard includes a numeric keypad as well as the Microsoft Windows logo key For information on supported keyboard shortcuts, see "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad."

. touch pad Touch pad and touch pad buttons provide the functionality of a mouse. See "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad" for more information. display latch button Press this button to release the display latch and open the display. speakers To adjust the volume of the integrated speakers, press the volume control buttons or volume-

control keyboard shortcuts. For more information, see "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad."

track stick/touch pad buttons Track stick and touch pad buttons provide the functionality of a mouse.

"Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad" for more information. track stick Track stick and track stick buttons provide the functionality of a mouse. See "Using the and Touch Pad" for more information. volume control buttons Press these buttons to adjust the volume. mute button Press this button to turn off the volume. keyboard status lights The green lights located above the keyboard indicate the following:

file://C:\temp\~hhE7D6.htm 2/27/2003 About Your Computer Page 4 of 11 Turns on when the numeric keypad is enabled. Turns on when the uppercase letter function is enabled. Turns on when the scroll lock function is enabled. Left View 1 air vents 5 infrared sensor 2 IEEE 1394 connector (4-pin) 6 audio connectors 3 PC Card slot 4 smart card slot 7 hard drive 8 security cable slot air vents The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. NOTE: The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fan or the computer. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do store your computer in a low-airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. IEEE 1394 connector (4-pin) Use to attach devices supporting IEEE 1394 high-speed transfer rates, such as some digital video cameras. PC Card slot Supports one PC Card, such as a modem or network adapter. The computer ships with a blank installed in the slot. For more information, see "Using PC Cards."

smart card slot Supports one smart card. For more information, see "Using Smart Cards."

infrared sensor Lets you transfer files from your computer to another infrared-compatible device without using cable connections. file://C:\temp\~hhE7D6.htm 2/27/2003 About Your Computer Page 5 of 11 When you receive your computer, the sensor is disabled. You can use the system setup program to enable the sensor. For information on transferring data, see Windows Help (Windows 2000), the Windows Help and Center (Windows XP), or the documentation that came with your infrared-compatible device. audio connectors Attach a microphone to the connector. Attach headphones or speakers to the hard drive Stores software and data. security cable slot Lets you attach a commercially available antitheft device to the computer. For more information, see the instructions included with the device. NOTICE: Before you buy an antitheft device, ensure that it will work with the security cable Right View file://C:\temp\~hhE7D6.htm 2/27/2003 About Your Computer Page 6 of 11 1 security cable slot 2 module bay 3 device latch release 4 Dell D/Bay connector security cable slot Lets you attach a commercially available antitheft device to the computer. For more information, see the instructions included with the device. NOTICE: Before you buy an antitheft device, ensure that it will work with the security cable module bay You can install devices such as an optical drive or Dell TravelLite module in the module bay. For more information, see "Using the Module Bay."

device latch release Releases a device. See "Using the Module Bay" or "Using a Battery" for instructions. Dell D/Bay connector file://C:\temp\~hhE7D6.htm 2/27/2003 About Your Computer Page 7 of 11 Connects the Dell D/Bay, which is an external media bay that accommodates an optical drive, floppy drive, or second hard drive. Back View 1 S-video TV-out connector 6 parallel connector 2 USB connectors (2) 7 serial connector 3 network connector (RJ-45) 8 video connector 4 modem connector (RJ-11) 9 AC adapter 5 air vent 10 air vents S-video TV-out connector Connects your computer to a TV. Also connects digital-audio capable devices using TV/digital-audio adapter cable. For more information, see "Connecting a Television to the Computer."

USB connectors (2) Connect USB devices, such as a mouse, keyboard, or printer. You can also connect the optional floppy drive directly to a USB connector using the optional floppy-drive cable, shown below. file://C:\temp\~hhE7D6.htm 2/27/2003 About Your Computer Page 8 of 11 network connector (RJ-45) NOTICE: The network connector is slightly larger than the modem connector. To avoid damaging the computer, do not plug a telephone line in to the network connector. Connects the computer to a network. The green and yellow lights next to the connector indicate activity for both wired and wireless network communications. For information on using the network adapter, see the online network-adapter documentation supplied with your computer. See "Finding Information."

modem connector (RJ-11) (optional) If you ordered the optional internal modem, connect the telephone line to the modem connector. For information on using the modem, see the online modem documentation supplied with your computer. See "Finding Information."

air vent The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the from overheating. parallel connector Connects a parallel device, such as a video connector Connects an external monitor. For more information, see "Using the file://C:\temp\~hhE7D6.htm 2/27/2003 About Your Computer serial connector Connects serial devices, such as a mouse or handheld AC adapter connector Attach an AC adapter to the computer. Page 9 of 11 The AC adapter converts AC power to the DC power required by the computer. You can connect the AC with your computer turned either on or off. CAUTION: The AC adapter works with electrical outlets worldwide. However, power connectors and power strips vary among countries. Using an incompatible cable or connecting the cable to the power strip or electrical outlet may cause fire or equipment damage. NOTICE: When you disconnect the AC adapter cable from the computer, grasp the connector, not the cable itself, and pull firmly but gently to avoid damaging the cable. air vents The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. NOTE: The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fan or the computer. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do store your computer in a low-airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. Bottom View file://C:\temp\~hhE7D6.htm 2/27/2003 About Your Computer Page 10 of 11 1 hard drive 5 battery charge gauge 2 Mini PCI card/modem 6 docking device slot 3 battery-bay latch release 7 memory module 4 battery 8 fan hard drive Stores software and data. Mini PCI card/modem cover Covers the compartment that contains the optional modem and optional PCI card. See "Adding and Replacing Parts."

battery-bay latch release Releases the battery. See "Using a Battery."

battery When a battery is installed, you can use the computer without connecting the computer to an electrical outlet. See "Using a Battery."

battery charge gauge Provides information on the battery charge. See "Using a Battery."

docking device slot Lets you attach your computer to a docking device. See the documentation that came with your docking device for additional information. memory module cover Covers the compartment that contains the memory modules. See "Adding and Replacing Parts."

fan The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer overheating. NOTE: The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fans or the computer. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do file://C:\temp\~hhE7D6.htm 2/27/2003 About Your Computer Page 11 of 11 store your computer in a low-airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. file://C:\temp\~hhE7D6.htm 2/27/2003 Using Microsoft Windows XP Page 1 of 4 Using Microsoft Windows XP Help and Support Center Switching to Classic View Desktop Cleanup Wizard User Accounts and Fast User Switching Files and Settings Transfer Wizard Program Compatibility Wizard Home and Small Office Networking Internet Connection Firewall Help and Support Center The Help and Support Center provides help with the Windows XP operating system and other support and educational tools. To access the Help and Support Center, click the Start button and click Help and Support. Switching to Classic View You may change the appearance of the Control Panel, the Start menu, and the Windows desktop to the classic view of previous Windows operating systems. Control Panel The Control Panel presents information as task-oriented categories. If you are accustomed to performing a particular task with the icon-oriented classic Control Panel, you can switch to the classic icon view. 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Switch to Classic View or Switch to Category View in the upper-left area of the Control Panel window. Start Menu 1. Right-click the empty area on the taskbar. 2. Click Properties. 3. Click the Start Menu tab. 4. Select Classic Start Menu and click OK. Window and Button Appearance 1. Right-click anywhere on the main desktop screen and click Properties. file://C:\temp\~hh8110.htm 2/27/2003 Using Microsoft Windows XP Page 2 of 4 2. Click the Appearance tab. 3. From the Windows and buttons drop-down menu, select Windows Classic style. 4. To customize color, font, and other classic desktop options, click Advanced. 5. When you have completed your appearance selections, click OK. Desktop Cleanup Wizard By default, the Desktop Cleanup Wizard moves program icons that you don't frequently use from your desktop to a designated folder 7 days after you first start your computer and every 60 days after that. The appearance of the Start menu changes as program icons are moved. To turn off the Desktop Cleanup Wizard:

1. Right-click an empty spot on the desktop and click Properties. 2. Click the Desktop tab and click Customize Desktop. 3. Click Run Desktop Cleanup Wizard every 60 days to remove the check mark. 4. Click OK. To run the Desktop Cleanup Wizard at any time:

1. Right-click an empty spot on the desktop and click Properties. 2. Click the Desktop tab and click Customize Desktop. 3. Click Clean Desktop Now. 4. When the Desktop Cleanup Wizard appears, click Next. 5. In the list of shortcuts, deselect any shortcuts you want to leave on the desktop and then click Next. 6. Click Finish to remove the shortcuts and close the wizard. User Accounts and Fast User Switching NOTE: Account options for Windows XP Home Edition differ from those available for Windows XP Professional. Also, options available in Windows XP Professional vary depending on whether the is connected to a domain. After Windows XP is installed, the administrator or a user with administrator rights can create additional user accounts. 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. In the Control Panel window, click User Accounts. 2. file://C:\temp\~hh8110.htm 2/27/2003 Using Microsoft Windows XP Page 3 of 4 3. Under Pick a task, click Create a new account. 4. Under Name the new account, type the name of the new user and click Next. 5. Under Pick an account type, click one of the following options:

Computer administrator You can change all computer settings.

Limited You can change only your own personal settings, such as your password. You cannot install programs or use the Internet. 6. Click Create Account. Fast User Switching NOTE: Fast User Switching is unavailable if the computer is running Windows XP Professional and is a member of a computer domain, or if the computer has less than 128 MB of memory. Fast User Switching allows multiple users to access one computer without requiring the previous user to log 1. Click the Start button and click Log Off. 2. In the Log Off Windows window, click Switch User. When you use Fast User Switching, programs that previous users were using remain running in the so you might experience slower computer activity. Also, multimedia programs, such as games and DVD software, might not work with Fast User Switching. For more information, see the Windows Help and Center. Files and Settings Transfer Wizard The Files and Settings Transfer Wizard allows you to transfer files and settings from one computer to another

(for instance, when upgrading to a new computer), even if the old computer is running an earlier operating system. The time required to collect and transfer data depends on the amount of data collected. Times can from just a few minutes to several hours. You can transfer the data to the new computer over a network or direct serial connection, or you can store it a removable medium such as a floppy disk or writable CD. If a CD drive is not available, the wizard allows you to create a wizard disk to run on your old computer. For more information, see the Windows Help and Support Center. Program Compatibility Wizard If you encounter problems running a program designed for an earlier Windows operating system, you can use the Program Compatibility Wizard to help resolve the problem. The Program Compatibility Wizard allows you configure a program to run in an environment closer to that of Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Millennium Edition (Me), Windows NT 4.0 with Service Pack 5, or Windows 2000. file://C:\temp\~hh8110.htm 2/27/2003 Using Microsoft Windows XP Page 4 of 4 If you experience problems with your operating system or other programs after performing an installation, can use the system restore feature to return your computer to a previous stable condition. For more information, see the Windows Help and Support Center. Home and Small Office Networking The Network Setup Wizard provides online documentation and support for setting up a home or small office network. The new wizard automatically enables the personal firewall (see "Internet Connection Firewall"). The Network Setup Wizard includes a checklist and steps to guide you through the process of sharing such as files, printers, or an Internet connection, between computers in a home or small office. For more information, see the Windows Help and Support Center. Internet Connection Firewall The Internet Connection Firewall provides basic protection from unauthorized access to the computer while computer is connected to the Internet. The firewall is automatically enabled when you run the Network Setup Wizard. When the firewall is enabled for a network connection, the firewall icon appears with a red background in the Network Connections portion of the Control Panel. Note that enabling the Internet Connection Firewall does not reduce the need for virus-checking software. For more information, see the Windows Help and Support Center. file://C:\temp\~hh8110.htm 2/27/2003 Dell QuickSet Features Page 1 of 1 Dell QuickSet Features Clicking the QuickSet Icon Double-Clicking the QuickSet Icon Right-Clicking the QuickSet Icon Dell QuickSet runs from the click, or right-click the icon. icon located in the taskbar and functions differently when you click, Clicking the QuickSet Icon Click the icon to perform the following tasks:

Adjust power management settings using the Power Management Wizard.

Adjust the size of icons and toolbars.

Select a power scheme that you set in the Power Management Wizard.

Turn presentation mode on or off. Double-Clicking the QuickSet Icon Double-click the icon to adjust power management settings using the Power Management Wizard. Right-Clicking the QuickSet Icon Right-click the icon to perform the following tasks:

Enable or disable the Brightness Meter on the screen.

Enable or disable the Volume Meter on the screen.

Turn wireless activity on or off.

View Dell QuickSet Help.

View the version and copyright date of the QuickSet program installed on your computer. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the icon in the taskbar and click Help. file://C:\temp\~hhEE20.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Page 1 of 5 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Numeric Keypad Keyboard Shortcuts Touch Pad Customizing the Touch Pad and Track Stick Numeric Keypad The keypad numbers and symbols are marked in blue on the right of the keypad keys. To type a number or symbol, ensure that the keypad is enabled and press keypad is active. and the desired key. The light indicates that Keyboard Shortcuts System Functions Opens the Task Manager window Enables and disables the numeric Enables and disables the scroll lock file://C:\temp\~hh41A5.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Page 2 of 5 Battery Displays the Dell QuickSet Battery CD or DVD Tray Requires Dell QuickSet to function. Ejects the tray out of the Display Functions Switches the video image to the next display in the following sequence: the integrated display only, the integrated display and an external CRT monitor simultaneously, an external CRT monitor only, the integrated display and an external DVI monitor simultaneously, external DVI monitor only, and external CRT monitor and external DVI monitor simultaneously. Increases brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor). Decreases brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor). Radios (Including Wireless Networking and Bluetooth) Enables and disables radios, including wireless networking and Power Management Activates the power management mode of your choice. You can program this keyboard on the Advanced tab in the Power Options Properties window. Speaker Functions If no sound comes from the speakers, press and adjust the volume. Increases the volume of the integrated speakers and external speakers, if Decreases the volume of the integrated speakers and external speakers, if Enables and disables the integrated speakers and external speakers, if attached file://C:\temp\~hh41A5.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Page 3 of 5 Microsoft Windows Logo Key Functions Minimizes all open windows Maximizes all windows Runs Windows Explorer Opens the Run dialog box Opens the Search Results dialog box Opens the Search Results-Computer dialog box (if the computer is connected to a network) Opens the System Properties dialog box To adjust keyboard operation, such as the character repeat rate, open the Control Panel, and click Printers Other Hardware (Windows XP) or double-click the Keyboard icon (Windows 2000). Touch Pad The touch pad detects the pressure and movement of your finger to allow you to move the cursor on the display. Use the touch pad and touch pad buttons as you would use a mouse. file://C:\temp\~hh41A5.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Page 4 of 5 1 2 3 4 touch pad track stick track stick buttons touch pad buttons

To move the cursor, lightly slide your finger over the touch pad.

To select an object, lightly tap once on the surface of the touch pad or use your thumb to press the left touch-pad button.

To select and move (or drag) an object, position the cursor on the object and tap down-up-down on the touch pad. On the second down motion, leave your finger on the touch pad and move the selected by sliding your finger over the surface.

To double-click an object, position the cursor on the object and tap twice on the touch pad or use your thumb to press the left touch-pad button twice. You can also use the track stick to move the cursor. Press the track stick left, right, up, or down to change the direction of the cursor on the display. Use the track stick and track stick buttons as you would use a mouse. Customizing the Touch Pad and Track Stick You can disable the touch pad and track stick or adjust their settings by using the Mouse Properties window. file://C:\temp\~hh41A5.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Page 5 of 5 1. Open the Control Panel and double-click the Mouse icon. 2. On the Mouse Properties window:

Click the Device Select tab to disable the touch pad and track stick.

Click the Pointer tab to adjust touch pad and track stick settings. 3. Select the desired settings and click Apply. 4. Click OK to save the settings and close the window. Changing the Track Stick Cap Your computer came with an additional track stick cap. You can purchase additional caps by visiting the Dell website at www.dell.com. You may need to change the track stick cap if it wears down from prolonged use. 1. Pull the cap off the track stick. 2. Align the new cap over the square track-stick post and gently press the cap down onto the post. 3. Test the track stick to ensure that the cap is seated properly. file://C:\temp\~hh41A5.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Display Page 1 of 2 Using the Display Adjusting Brightness Switching the Video Image Setting Display Resolution Adjusting Brightness When the Dell computer is running on battery power, you can conserve power by setting the brightness to lowest comfortable setting using the appropriate keyboard shortcuts for the display. The Dell QuickSet Brightness Meter shows the current brightness setting for the display. Right-click the icon in the taskbar to enable or disable the Brightness Meter on the screen. 1 Brightness Meter NOTE: By default, the Brightness Meter appears in the lower-right corner of the display. You can click and drag the meter to a new location, and the meter subsequently always appears at the new NOTE: Brightness keyboard shortcuts only affect the display on your portable computer, not monitors that you attach to your portable computer or docking device. If your computer is in CRT only mode you try to change the brightness level, the Brightness Meter appears, but the brightness level on the monitor does not change. You can enable or disable the Brightness Meter from the QuickSet taskbar menu. When the meter is press the following keys to adjust brightness:

Press

Press to increase brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor). to decrease brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor). For more information about QuickSet, right-click the icon in the taskbar and click Help. Switching the Video Image When you start the computer with an external device (such as an external monitor or projector) attached and turned on, the image may appear on either the display or the external device. file://C:\temp\~hh94EE.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Display Page 2 of 2 to switch the video image to the integrated display only, the integrated display and an Press external CRT monitor simultaneously, an external CRT monitor only, the integrated display and external DVI monitor simultaneously, external DVI monitor only, and external CRT monitor and external DVI monitor simultaneously. Setting Display Resolution To display a program at a specific resolution, both the video controller and the display must support the program, and the necessary video drivers must be installed. Before you change any of the default display settings, make a note of the default settings for future NOTE: Use only the Dell-installed video drivers, which are designed to offer the best performance with your Dell-installed operating system. If you choose a resolution or color palette that is higher than the display supports, the settings adjust automatically to the closest possible setting. Microsoft Windows XP 3. Under Pick a task..., click the area you want to change, or under or pick a Control Panel icon, click 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Under Pick a category, click Appearance and Themes. 4. Try different settings for Color quality and Screen resolution. Display. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Display icon and click the Settings tab. 3. Try different settings for Colors and Screen area. NOTE: As the resolution increases, icons and text appear smaller on the If the video resolution setting is higher than that supported by the display, the computer enters pan mode. pan mode, the screen cannot be completely displayed. For example, the taskbar that usually appears at the bottom of the desktop may no longer be visible. To view the rest of the screen, use the touch pad or track to move the cursor past the top, bottom, left, and right borders of the screen. NOTICE: You can damage an external monitor by using an unsupported refresh rate. Before adjusting the refresh rate on an external monitor, see the monitor user's guide. file://C:\temp\~hh94EE.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Module Bay Page 1 of 12 Using the Module Bay About the Module Bay Checking the Charge on the Second Battery Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Turned Off Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Running Using the CD or DVD Tray About the Module Bay You can install devices such as a floppy drive, CD drive, CD-RW drive, DVD drive, CD-RW/DVD drive, Dell TravelLite module, second battery, or second hard drive in the module bay. NOTE: All devices that you install in the module bay, except a second battery, can also be installed in Dell D/Bay. Your Dell computer ships with an optical drive installed in the module bay. However, the device screw is not installed in the optical drive but packaged separately. When you install your device in the module bay, you can install the device screw. NOTE: You do not need to install the device screw unless you want to secure the module inside the computer for security purposes. Checking the Charge on the Second Battery Before you install a second battery, press the status button on the battery charge gauge to illuminate the charge-level lights. Each light represents approximately 20 percent of the total battery charge. For example, if the battery has 80 percent of its charge remaining, four of the lights are on. If no lights appear, the battery no charge. file://C:\temp\~hhE94F.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Module Bay Page 2 of 12 1 status button on the charge gauge 2 second battery (top) Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Turned Off NOTE: If the device screw is not installed, you can remove and install devices while the computer is running and connected to a docking device (docked). Your computer ships with an optical drive installed in the module bay. However, the device screw is not in the optical drive but packaged separately. When you install your device in the module bay, you can install device screw. NOTE: You do not need to install the device screw unless you want to secure the module inside the computer for security purposes. If the Device Screw Is Not Installed NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. 1. Press the device latch release. file://C:\temp\~hhE94F.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Module Bay Page 3 of 12 1 device latch release 2. Pull the device out of the module bay. 3. Insert the new device into the bay, and push the device until you feel a click. If the Device Screw Is Installed 1. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. file://C:\temp\~hhE94F.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Module Bay Page 4 of 12 4. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the device screw from the bottom of the computer. 3. Close the display and turn the computer over. 5. Press the device latch release. 1 device latch release 6. Pull the device out of the module bay. NOTICE: Insert devices into the module bay before you dock and turn on the 7. Insert the new device into the bay, and push the device until you feel a click. 8. Replace the device screw. file://C:\temp\~hhE94F.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Module Bay Page 5 of 12 9. Turn on the computer. Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Running NOTE: If the device screw is not installed, you can remove and install devices while the computer is running and connected to a docking device (docked). Your computer ships with an optical drive installed in the module bay. However, the device screw is not in the optical drive but packaged separately. When you install your device in the module bay, you can install device screw. NOTE: You do not need to install the device screw unless you want to secure the module inside the computer for security purposes. If the Device Screw Is Not Installed Microsoft Windows XP 1. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the taskbar. 2. Click the device you want to eject. NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. 3. Press the device latch release. 1 device latch release file://C:\temp\~hhE94F.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Module Bay Page 6 of 12 4. Pull the device out of the module bay. 5. Insert the new device into the bay, and push the device until you feel a click. Windows XP automatically recognizes the new device. 6. If necessary, enter your password to unlock your computer. Windows 2000 1. Click the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon on the taskbar. 2. Click the device you want to eject and click Stop. 3. Press the device latch release. 1 device latch release file://C:\temp\~hhE94F.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Module Bay Page 7 of 12 4. Pull the device out of the bay. 5. Insert the new device into the bay, and push the device until you feel a click. 6. When the operating system recognizes the new device, click Close. If the Device Screw Is Installed Windows XP 1. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the taskbar. 2. Click the device you want to eject. 3. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. 4. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the device screw from the bottom of the computer. 5. Press the device latch release. file://C:\temp\~hhE94F.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Module Bay Page 8 of 12 1 device latch release 6. Pull the device out of the module bay. 7. Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and replace the screw. Windows XP automatically recognizes the new device. 8. If necessary, enter your password to unlock your computer. Windows 2000 1. Click the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon on the taskbar. 2. Click the device you want to eject and click Stop. 3. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the device screw from the bottom of the computer. file://C:\temp\~hhE94F.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Module Bay Page 9 of 12 4. Press the device latch release. 1 device latch release 5. Pull the device out of the module bay. 6. Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and then replace the screw. 7. When the operating system recognizes the new device, click Close. Using the CD or DVD Tray file://C:\temp\~hhE94F.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Module Bay Page 10 of 12 NOTICE: Do not press down on the drive tray when opening or closing it. Keep the tray closed when are not using the drive. NOTICE: Do not move the computer while playing CDs or 1. Press the eject button on the front of the drive. 2. Pull the tray out. 3. Place the disc, label side up, in the center of the tray. 4. Snap the disc onto the spindle. 1 eject button 5. Push the tray back into the drive. NOTE: If you use a module bay that shipped with another computer, you need to install the drivers and software necessary to play DVDs or write data. For more information, see the Drivers and Utilities CD. You can play a DVD on your computer if the computer shipped with a DVD drive or a CD-RW/DVD combo You can write data to a blank CD on your computer if the computer shipped with a CD-RW or CD-RW/DVD combo drive. For more information on playing CDs or watching movies, click Help on the CD player or DVD player (if available). Adjusting the Volume NOTE: If the speakers are muted, you do not hear the CD or DVD file://C:\temp\~hhE94F.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Module Bay Page 11 of 12 1. Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories Entertainment (or Multimedia), and 2. then click Volume Control. In the Volume Control window, click and drag the bar in the Volume Control column and slide the up or down to increase or decrease the volume. For more information on volume control options, click Help in the Volume Control window. The Volume Meter displays the current volume level, including mute, on your computer. Either right-click the icon in the taskbar or press the volume control buttons to enable or disable the Volume Meter on the screen. 1 volume icon 2 Volume Meter 3 mute icon NOTE: By default, the Volume Meter appears in the lower-right corner of the display. You can click drag the meter to a new location, and the meter subsequently always appears at the new location. When the meter is enabled, adjust the volume using the volume control buttons or by pressing the following keys:

Press

Press

Press to increase volume. to decrease volume. to mute volume. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the icon in the taskbar, and click Help. Adjusting the Picture If an error message notifies you that the current resolution and color depth are using too much memory and preventing DVD playback, adjust the display properties. Windows XP file://C:\temp\~hhE94F.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Module Bay Page 12 of 12 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Under Pick a category, click Appearance and Themes. 3. Under Pick a task..., click Change the screen resolution. 4. In the Display Properties window, click and drag the bar in Screen resolution to change the setting 1280 by 800 pixels. 5. Under Color quality, click the drop-down menu and click Medium (16 bit). 6. Click OK. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Display icon and click the Settings tab. 3. Click and drag the bar in Screen area to change the setting to 1280 by 800 pixels. 4. Under Color quality, click the drop-down menu and click High Color (16 bit). 5. Click Apply. 6. Click OK to save the settings and close the window. file://C:\temp\~hhE94F.htm 2/27/2003 Using a Battery Page 1 of 4 Using a Battery Battery Performance Checking the Battery Charge Charging the Battery Removing a Battery Installing a Battery Storing a Battery Battery Performance NOTE: Batteries for portable computers are covered only during the initial one-year period of the warranty for your computer. For more information about the Dell warranty for your computer, see the System Information Guide. Use a battery to power the computer when it is not connected to an electrical outlet. One battery is supplied standard equipment in the battery bay. Battery operating time varies depending on operating conditions. With average usage, you may expect from 3 4 hours from a single fully charged battery. You can install an optional second battery in the module bay to significantly increase operating time. For more information about the second battery, see "Using the Module Bay."

NOTE: The module bay in your computer supports a second battery. The Dell D/Bay does not support a second battery. Operating time is significantly reduced when you perform operations including, but not limited to, the NOTE: It is recommended that you connect your computer to an electrical outlet when writing to a

Using optical drives, especially DVD and CD-RW drives

Using wireless communications devices, PC Cards, or USB devices

Using high-brightness display settings, 3D screen savers, or other power-intensive programs such as

Running the computer in maximum performance mode You can check the battery charge before you insert the battery into the computer. You can also set power management options to alert you when the battery charge is low. NOTE: You can conserve battery life by setting the Maximum Power Savings option for your graphics card. For more information, see the documentation that came with your graphics card. CAUTION: Using an incompatible battery may increase the risk of fire or explosion. Replace the battery only with a compatible battery purchased from Dell. The lithium-ion battery is designed to work with your Dell computer. Do not use a battery from other computers your computer. file://C:\temp\~hh9849.htm 2/27/2003 games Using a Battery Page 2 of 4 CAUTION: Do not dispose of batteries with household waste. When your battery no longer holds a charge, call your local waste disposal or environmental agency for advice on of a lithium-ion battery. See "Battery Disposal" in your System Information Guide. CAUTION: Misuse of the battery may increase the risk of fire or chemical burn. Do not puncture, incinerate, disassemble, or expose the battery to temperatures above 65C Keep the battery away from children. Handle damaged or leaking batteries with extreme Damaged batteries may leak and cause personal injury or equipment damage. Checking the Battery Charge The Dell QuickSet battery meter, the Microsoft Windows power meter window and charge gauge and health gauge, and the low-battery warning provide information on the battery charge. icon, the battery For more information about checking the charge on the second battery, see "Using the Module Bay."

Dell QuickSet Battery Meter Press to display the QuickSet Battery Meter. The Battery Meter screen displays status, charge level, and charge completion time for the primary and batteries in your computer. NOTE: You can use your docking device to charge a computer battery. However, a battery in a docking device does not power the docking device or computer. In addition, when your computer is connected to a docking device (docked), the Battery Meter screen a Dock Battery tab, which displays the charge level and current status of the docking device battery. The following icons appear in the Battery Meter screen:

The computer or docking device is running on battery power.

The battery is discharging or idle.

The computer or docking device is connected to an electrical outlet and running on AC

The battery is charging.

The computer or docking device is connected to an electrical outlet and running on AC

The battery is discharging, idle, or charging. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the icon in the taskbar, and click Help. Microsoft Windows Power Meter The Windows power meter indicates the remaining battery charge. To check the power meter, double-click the icon on the taskbar. For more information on the Power Meter tab, see "Power Management."

If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, a icon appears. file://C:\temp\~hh9849.htm 2/27/2003 Using a Battery Page 3 of 4 Charge Gauge Before you insert a battery, press the status button on the battery charge gauge to illuminate the charge-level lights. Each light represents approximately 20 percent of the total battery charge. For example, if the has 80 percent of its charge remaining, four of the lights are on. If no lights appear, the battery has no Health Gauge The battery operating time is largely determined by the number of times it is charged. After hundreds of and discharge cycles, batteries lose some charge capacity, or battery health. To check the battery health, and hold the status button on the battery charge gauge for at least 3 seconds. If no lights appear, the battery in good condition, and more than 80 percent of its original charge capacity remains. Each light represents incremental degradation. If five lights appear, less than 60 percent of the charge capacity remains, and you should consider replacing the battery. See "Specifications" for more information about the battery operating time. Low-Battery Warning NOTICE: To avoid losing or corrupting data, save your work immediately after a low-battery warning. Then connect the computer to an electrical outlet, or install a second battery in the module bay. If battery runs completely out of power, hibernate mode begins automatically. A low-battery warning occurs when the battery charge is approximately 90 percent depleted. The computer beeps once, indicating that minimal battery operating time remains. During that time, the speaker beeps periodically. If two batteries are installed, the low-battery warning means that the combined charge of both batteries is approximately 90 percent depleted. The computer enters hibernate mode when the battery charge at a critically low level. For more information on low-battery alarms, see "Power Management."

Charging the Battery NOTE: The AC adapter charges a completely discharged battery in approximately 1 hour with the computer turned off. Charge time is longer with the computer turned on. You can leave the battery in computer as long as you like. The battery internal circuitry prevents the battery from overcharging. When you connect the computer to an electrical outlet or install a battery while the computer is connected to electrical outlet, the computer checks the battery charge and temperature. If necessary, the AC adapter then charges the battery and maintains the battery charge. If the battery is hot from being used in your computer or being in a hot environment, the battery may not charge when you connect the computer to an electrical outlet. The battery is too hot to start charging if the computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet, and allow the computer and the battery to cool room temperature. Then connect the computer to an electrical outlet to continue charging the battery. light flashes alternately green and orange. Shut down the For more information on resolving problems with a battery, see "Power Problems."

file://C:\temp\~hh9849.htm 2/27/2003 Using a Battery Page 4 of 4 Removing a Battery For more information about removing the second battery, see "Using the Module Bay."

CAUTION: Before performing these procedures, turn off the computer, disconnect it from the electrical outlet, and disconnect the modem from the telephone wall jack. NOTICE: If you choose to replace the battery with the computer in standby mode, you have up to 90 seconds to complete the battery replacement before the computer shuts down and loses any unsaved data. 1. Ensure that the computer is turned off, suspended in a power management mode, or connected to an 2. electrical outlet. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 3. Slide and hold the battery-bay latch release on the bottom of the computer, and then remove the from the bay. Installing a Battery Slide the battery into the bay and lower the battery until the latch release clicks. For information about installing the second battery, see "Using the Module Bay."

Storing a Battery Remove the battery when you store your computer for an extended period of time. A battery discharges prolonged storage. After a long storage period, recharge the battery fully before you use it. file://C:\temp\~hh9849.htm 2/27/2003 Power Management Page 1 of 6 Power Management Power Management Tips Power Management Wizard Power Management Modes Power Options Properties Power Management Tips NOTE: See "Using a Battery" for more information on conserving battery

Connect the computer to an electrical outlet when possible because battery life is largely determined by

Place the computer in standby mode or hibernate mode when you leave the computer unattended for the number of times the battery is charged. long periods of time.

To enter a power management mode, close the display or press

To exit a power management mode, open the display or press the power button. Power Management Wizard NOTE: The Power Management Wizard is not available if you have restricted access Click or double-click the icon to open the Power Management Wizard. The first two screens of the wizardWelcome and What is Power Management?describe and define various power management options. NOTE: On the What is Power Management? screen, you can select Do not show this page again. When you select this option, the Welcome screen also does not appear again. Use the following screens of the Power Management Wizard to set various power management options, including sleep modes, power schemes, and low battery charge alarms. Setting Sleep Modes The screen defines standby and hibernate modes. From the screen you can:

Set standby-mode password options.

Enable or disable hibernate mode. file://C:\temp\~hh1F99.htm 2/27/2003 Power Management Page 2 of 6

Select how the computer will respond when you close the display:

Select how the computer will respond when you press the power button:

Shut down the Microsoft Windows operating system and turn off the computer.

Prompt a user for an action (Ask me what to do).

Select how the computer will respond when you press

Choose no action.

Enter standby mode.

Enter hibernate mode.

Choose no action.

Enter standby mode.

Enter hibernate mode.

Choose no action.

Enter standby mode.

Enter hibernate mode.

Shut down Microsoft Windows and turn off the computer.

Prompt a user for an action (Ask me what to do). Selecting a Power Scheme NOTE: When your computer is running on battery power, the Network Disabled power scheme your internal network and wireless activity. When your computer is connected to an electrical outlet docking device, the Network Disabled power scheme disables only your wireless activity. You must the power scheme through QuickSet (not Microsoft Windows) for Network Disabled to work. The screen allows you to select, create, and edit power scheme settings. In addition, you can delete power schemes that you create, but you cannot delete Dell QuickSet predefined power schemes (Maximum Battery, Maximum Performance, Presentation, and Network Disabled). NOTE: QuickSet automatically adds the word (QuickSet) after the names of power schemes created using QuickSet. All QuickSet power schemes are displayed in a drop-down menu near the center of the screen. The power settings for each scheme in the menu are listed below the menu. The power settings are listed separately when the computer is running on battery or connected to an electrical outlet. The Power Management Wizard also allows you to associate the display brightness level with a power scheme. You must enable brightness-level power schemes through QuickSet in order to set the brightness The display brightness, internal network card activity, and wireless activity features are not available the Microsoft Windows Control Panel power schemes. In order to make use of these value-added you must set them through QuickSet power schemes. file://C:\temp\~hh1F99.htm 2/27/2003 Power Management Page 3 of 6 NOTE: Brightness shortcut keys only affect the display on your portable computer, not monitors that attach to your portable computer or docking device. If your computer is in CRT only mode and you change the brightness level, the Brightness Meter appears, but the brightness level on the monitor not change. Setting Battery Alarms and Actions The screen allows you to enable the low-battery and critical-battery alarms and to change settings for the alarms. For example, you can set the low-battery alarm to 20% to remind you to save work and switch to AC power, and you can set the critical-battery alarm to 10% to enter hibernate mode. From the screen, you can:

Select whether the alarm will notify you by sound or text.

Adjust the power level at which you want the alarm to notify you.

Select how the computer will respond when the alarm notifies you:

Choose no action.

Enter standby mode.

Enter hibernate mode.

Shut down Windows and turn off the computer. Completing the Power Management Wizard The screen summarizes the QuickSet power scheme, sleep mode, and battery alarm settings for your Review the settings you have selected and click Finish. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the icon in the taskbar and click Help. Power Management Modes Standby Mode Standby mode conserves power by turning off the display and the hard drive after a predetermined period of inactivity (a time-out). When the computer exits standby mode, it returns to the same operating state it was before entering standby mode. NOTICE: If your computer loses AC and battery power while in standby mode, it may lose To enter standby mode:

In the Microsoft Windows XP operating system, click the Start button, click Turn off computer, then click Stand by. In Windows 2000, click the Start button, click Shutdown, click Standby, and then click OK. file://C:\temp\~hh1F99.htm 2/27/2003 Power Management or Page 4 of 6

Depending on how you set the power management options on the Advanced tab in the Power Properties window, use one of the following methods:

Close the display.

Press

. To exit standby mode, press the power button or open the display depending on how you set the options on Advanced tab. You cannot make the computer exit standby mode by pressing a key or touching the touch or track stick. Hibernate Mode Hibernate mode conserves power by copying system data to a reserved area on the hard drive and then completely turning off the computer. When the computer exits hibernate mode, it returns to the same state it was in before entering hibernate mode. NOTICE: You cannot remove devices or disconnect your computer from a docking device while your computer is in hibernate mode. Your computer enters hibernate mode if the battery charge level becomes critically low. To manually enter hibernate mode:

In Windows XP, click the Start button, click Turn off computer, press and hold

, and then click Hibernate. In Windows 2000, if hibernate support is enabled, click the Start button, click Shutdown, click Hibernate, and then click OK. or

Depending on how you set the power management options on the Advanced tab in the Power Properties window, use one of the following methods to enter hibernate mode:

Close the display.

Press

. NOTE: Some PC Cards may not operate correctly after the computer exits hibernate mode. Remove reinsert the card, or simply restart (reboot) your computer. To exit hibernate mode, press the power button. The computer may take a short time to exit hibernate mode. You cannot make the computer exit hibernate mode by pressing a key or touching the touch pad or track For more information on hibernate mode, see the documentation that came with your operating system. Power Options Properties file://C:\temp\~hh1F99.htm 2/27/2003 Power Management Page 5 of 6 The Power Options Properties window helps you to manage power consumption and monitor battery status. To access the Microsoft Windows Power Options Properties window:

In Windows XP, click the Start button, click Control Panel, click Performance and Maintenance, then click Power Options.

In Windows 2000, open the Control Panel and double-click the Power Options icon. Power Schemes Tab Windows XP controls the performance level of the processor depending on the power scheme you select. You not need to make any further adjustments to set the performance level. For information on setting processor performance for other operating systems, see "Intel SpeedStep Technology Tab."

Each preset power scheme has different time-out settings for entering standby mode, turning off the and turning off the hard drive. For more information on power management options, see the Help and Center (Windows Help in Windows 2000). Alarms Tab NOTE: To enable audible alarms, click each Alarm Action button and select Sound The Low battery alarm and Critical battery alarm settings alert you with a message when the battery charge falls below a certain percentage. When you receive your computer, the Low battery alarm and battery alarm check boxes are selected. It is recommended that you continue to use these settings. See

"Using a Battery" for more information on low-battery warnings. Power Meter Tab The Power Meter tab displays the current power source and amount of battery charge remaining. Advanced Tab The Advanced tab allows you to:

Set power icon and standby mode password options.

Program the following functions (depending on your operating system):

Prompt a user for an action (Ask me what to do).

Enter standby mode.

Enter hibernate mode.

Shut down Windows and turn off the computer.

Choose no action (None or Do nothing). To program these functions, click an option from the corresponding drop-down menu and then click OK. Hibernate Tab file://C:\temp\~hh1F99.htm 2/27/2003 Power Management Page 6 of 6 The Hibernate tab lets you enable hibernate mode by clicking the Enable hibernate support check box. Intel SpeedStep Technology Tab NOTE: Windows XP controls the performance level of the processor depending on the power scheme you select. See "Power Schemes Tab."

NOTE: To use Intel SpeedStep technology, a Windows operating system must be Depending on your operating system and microprocessor, the Power Options Properties window includes Intel SpeedStep technology tab. Intel SpeedStep technology allows you to set the performance level of processor according to whether the computer is running on battery or AC power. Depending on your system, typical options are:

Automatic The processor runs at its highest possible speed (Maximum Performance mode) when the computer is running on AC power. When the computer is running on battery power, the processor Battery Optimized mode.

Maximum Performance The processor runs at its highest possible speed even if the computer is running on battery power.

Battery Optimized Performance Processor speed is optimized for battery power even if the computer is connected to an electrical outlet.

Maximum Battery The processor runs at a slower speed to extend battery life. To change additional Intel SpeedStep options:

1. Click Advanced and click one of the following options:

Disable Intel SpeedStep technology control

Remove flag icon (from the notification area)

Disable audio notification when performance changes 2. Click OK to accept any changes and click OK to close the Intel SpeedStep technology window. You can also change the Intel SpeedStep settings by right-clicking the flag icon in the notification area. file://C:\temp\~hh1F99.htm 2/27/2003 Using PC Cards Page 1 of 3 Using PC Cards PC Card Types PC Card Blanks Extended PC Cards Installing a PC Card Removing a PC Card or Blank PC Card Types See "Specifications" for information on supported PC Cards. NOTE: A PC Card is not a bootable device. The PC Card slot has one connector that supports a single Type I or Type II card. The PC Card slot supports CardBus technology and extended PC Cards. "Type" of card refers to its thickness, not its functionality. PC Card Blanks Your computer shipped with a plastic blank installed in the PC Card slot. Blanks protect unused slots from dust and other particles. Save the blank for use when no PC Card is installed in the slot; blanks from other computers may not fit your computer. To remove the blank, see "Removing a PC Card or Blank."

Extended PC Cards An extended PC Card (for example, a wireless network adapter) is longer than a standard PC Card and extends outside the computer. Follow these precautions when using extended PC Cards:

Protect the exposed end of an installed card. Striking the end of the card can damage the system board.

Always remove an extended PC Card before you pack the computer in its carrying case. Installing a PC Card You can install a PC Card in the computer while the computer is running. The computer automatically detects file://C:\temp\~hh736E.htm 2/27/2003 Using PC Cards the card. Page 2 of 3 PC Cards are generally marked with a symbol (such as a triangle or an arrow) to indicate which end to insert into the slot. The cards are keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If card orientation is not clear, see the documentation that came with the card. To install a PC Card:

1. Hold the card with its orientation symbol pointing into the slot and the top side of the card facing up. latch may need to be in the "in" position before you insert the card. 2. Slide the card into the slot until the card is completely seated in its connector. If you encounter too much resistance, do not force the card. Check the card orientation and try again. The computer recognizes most PC Cards and automatically loads the appropriate device driver. If the configuration program tells you to load the manufacturer's drivers, use the floppy disk or CD that came with PC Card. Removing a PC Card or Blank NOTICE: Use the PC Card configuration utility functioning before you remove it from the computer. If you do not stop the card in the configuration utility, you could lose data. Do not attempt to eject a card by pulling its cable, if one is attached. on the taskbar to select a card and stop it from Press the latch and gently remove the card or blank. For some latches, you must press the latch twice: once pop the latch out, and then a second time to pop the card out. 3. Gently remove the card or blank. Save a blank to use when no PC Card is installed in a slot. Blanks protect unused slots from dust and other particles. file://C:\temp\~hh736E.htm 2/27/2003 Using PC Cards Page 3 of 3 file://C:\temp\~hh736E.htm 2/27/2003 Using Smart Cards Page 1 of 2 Using Smart Cards About Smart Cards Installing a Smart Card About Smart Cards Smart cards are small portable credit-card shaped devices with internal integrated circuits. Smart cards come in two varieties: memory and microprocessor. Memory smart cards store data but cannot process information. Microprocessor smart cards can add, delete, and manipulate information in the card memory. The top surface of the microprocessor smart card contains an embedded microprocessor located under the gold contact pad. Microprocessor smart cards can be used for programs such as:

Secure log-on and authentication of users to PCs and networks

Secure business-to-business (B2B) and business-to-consumer (B2C) e-commerce

Storage of digital certificates, credentials, and passwords

Encryption of sensitive data NOTE: To use a smart card for secure PC log-on and authentication, B2B and B2C e-commerce, local file encryption, and storage of digital certificates, additional software is required. To use a smart card for secure network log-on and authentication, file and e-mail encryption, and Virtual Private Network

(VPN) log-on, you need to enable Microsoft Windows PKI support. The combination of the small size and integrated circuits make smart cards valuable tools for security, data storage, and special programs. Using smart cards can improve system security by combining something a user has (the smart card) with something only the user should know (a PIN) to provide more secure user-

authentication than passwords alone. Installing a Smart Card You can install a smart card in the computer while the computer is running. The computer automatically detects the card. To install a smart card:

1. Remove the smart card blank from the smart card slot. 2. Hold the card face up with the gold contact pad on the top surface and pointing toward the smart card slot. file://C:\temp\~hhBE43.htm 2/27/2003 Using Smart Cards Page 2 of 2 1 2 gold contact pad smart card (top) 3. Slide the smart card into the smart card slot until the card is completely seated in its connector. The smart card will protrude approximately 1.27 cm (0.5 inch) from the slot. The smart card slot is located below the PC Card slot. If you encounter too much resistance, do not force the card. Check the card orientation and try again. 1 PC Card slot (top) 2 smart card slot (bottom) 3 smart card file://C:\temp\~hhBE43.htm 2/27/2003 Traveling With Your Computer Page 1 of 3 Traveling With Your Computer Identifying Your Computer Packing the Computer Travel Tips Identifying Your Computer

Attach a name tag or business card to the computer, or use a permanent marker or stencil to write a unique identifying mark (such as your driver's license number) on the computer.

Write down your service tag and store it in a safe place away from the computer or carrying case. Use the service tag if you need to report a loss or theft to law enforcement officials and to Dell.

Create a file on the Microsoft Windows desktop called if_found. Place information such as your name, address, and telephone number in this file.

Contact your credit card company and ask if it offers coded identification tags. Packing the Computer

Remove any external devices attached to the computer and store them in a safe place. Remove any cables attached to installed PC Cards, and remove any extended PC Cards.

To make the computer as light as possible, replace any devices installed in the module bay with the Dell TravelLite module.

Fully charge the main battery and any spare batteries you plan to carry with you.

Shut down the computer.

Disconnect the AC adapter. NOTICE: When the display is closed, extraneous items on the keyboard or palm rest could damage the display.

Remove any extraneous items, such as paper clips, pens, and paper, from the keyboard and palm rest and close the display.

Use the optional Dell carrying case to pack the computer and its accessories together safely.

Avoid packing the computer with items such as shaving cream, colognes, perfumes, or food.

Protect the computer, the batteries, and the hard drive from hazards such as extreme temperatures and overexposure to sunlight, dirt, dust, or liquids. NOTICE: If the computer has been exposed to extreme temperatures, allow it to acclimate to room file://C:\temp\~hhE61.htm 2/27/2003 Traveling With Your Computer Page 2 of 3 temperature for 1 hour before turning it on.

Pack the computer so that it does not slide around in the trunk of your car or in an overhead storage compartment. NOTICE: Do not check the computer as Travel Tips NOTICE: Do not move the computer while using the optical drive. Doing so can result in loss of

Consider disabling wireless activity on your computer to maximize battery operating time. To disable wireless activity, press

Consider changing your power management options to maximize battery operating time.

If you are traveling internationally, carry proof of ownershipor of your right to use the computer if it is company-ownedto speed your passage through customs. Investigate the customs regulations of the countries you plan to visit, and consider acquiring an international carnet (also known as a merchandise passport) from your government.

Ensure that you know which electrical outlets are used in the countries you will visit, and have

Check with your credit card company for information about the kinds of emergency travel assistance it appropriate power adapters. offers to users of portable computers. Traveling by Air

Ensure that you have a charged battery available in case you are asked to turn on the computer. NOTICE: Do not walk the computer through a metal detector. Send the computer through an X-ray machine or have it hand inspected.

Before you use the computer on an airplane, verify that such usage is permitted. Some airlines forbid use of electronic devices during the flight. All airlines forbid the use of electronic devices during takeoff and landing. If Your Computer Is Lost or Stolen

Call a law enforcement agency to report the lost or stolen computer. Include the service tag in your description of the computer. Ask that a case number be assigned and write down the number, along the name, address, and telephone number of the law enforcement agency. If possible, obtain the name the investigating officer. NOTE: If you know where the computer was lost or stolen, call a law enforcement agency in that area. you do not know, call a law enforcement agency where you live. file://C:\temp\~hhE61.htm 2/27/2003 Traveling With Your Computer Page 3 of 3

If the computer belongs to a company, notify the security office of the company.

Contact Dell customer service to report the missing computer. Provide the computer service tag, the number, and the name, address, and telephone number of the law enforcement agency to which you reported the missing computer. If possible, give the name of the investigating officer. The Dell customer service representative will log your report under the computer service tag and flag the computer as missing or stolen. If someone calls Dell for technical assistance and gives your service tag, the computer is identified automatically as missing or stolen. The representative will attempt to get the phone number and address of the caller. Dell will then contact the law enforcement agency to which you made the report of the missing computer. file://C:\temp\~hhE61.htm 2/27/2003 Passwords Page 1 of 5 Passwords About Passwords Using a Primary Password Using an Administrator Password Using a Hard Drive Password Assigning an Asset Tag About Passwords NOTE: Passwords are disabled when you receive your A primary password prevents unauthorized access to the computer at start-up. You can use an administrator password instead of the primary password. A hard drive password helps prevent unauthorized access to data the drive, even when the drive is installed in another computer. NOTE: Only hard drives purchased from Dell for use with the Dell Latitude D-Family computers support hard drive passwords. NOTICE: Passwords provide a high level of security for data in your computer or hard drive. However, they are not foolproof. If you require more security, obtain and use additional forms of protection, as smart cards, data encryption programs, or PC Cards with encryption features. If you forget any of your passwords, contact your system administrator or call Dell. For your protection, Dell technical support staff will ask you for proof of your identity to ensure that only an authorized person can use the computer. The following table identifies types and features of passwords available on your computer. Type of Password Primary Administrator Features

Protects the computer from unauthorized access

Gives system administrators or service technicians access to computers for repair reconfiguration

Allows you to restrict access to the system setup program in the same way a password restricts access to the computer

Can be used instead of the primary password Hard drive

Helps protect the data on your hard drive or external hard drive (if one is being used) from unauthorized access. Using a Primary Password The primary password allows you to protect the computer from unauthorized access. After assigning a primary password, you must enter it each time you turn on your computer. The following file://C:\temp\~hh5B03.htm 2/27/2003 Passwords Page 2 of 5 message appears each time you turn on the computer:

Please type in the primary or administrator password and press

. To continue, enter your password (maximum eight characters). If you do not enter a password within 2 minutes, the computer returns to its previous state. If you have assigned an administrator password, you can use it instead of the primary password. The does not specifically prompt you for the administrator password. NOTICE: If you disable the administrator password, the primary password is also Using an Administrator Password The administrator password is designed to give system administrators or service technicians access to computers for repair or reconfiguration. The administrators or technicians can assign identical administrator passwords to groups of computers, allowing you to assign the primary password. When you set an administrator password, the Configure Setup option becomes available in the system setup program. The Configure Setup option allows you to restrict access to the system setup program in the same way a primary password restricts access to the computer. The administrator password can be used instead of the primary password. Whenever you are prompted to the primary password, you can enter the administrator password. NOTE: The administrator password provides access to the computer, but it does not provide access to hard drive when a hard drive password is assigned. If you forget the primary password and do not have an administrator password assigned, or if you have primary and an administrator password assigned but forget them both, contact your system administrator contact Dell. NOTICE: If you disable the administrator password, the primary password is also Using a Hard Drive Password The hard drive password helps protect the data on your hard drive from unauthorized access. You can also assign a password for an external hard drive (if one is being used) that can be the same as or different from password for the primary hard drive. After assigning a hard drive password, you must enter it each time you turn on the computer and each time resume normal operation from standby mode. If the hard drive password is enabled, the following message appears each time you turn on the computer:

Please type in the hard-disk drive password and press

. file://C:\temp\~hh5B03.htm 2/27/2003 Passwords Page 3 of 5 To continue, enter your password (maximum eight characters). Press previous state. to return the computer to its If you do not enter a password within 2 minutes, the computer returns to its previous state. If you enter the wrong password, the following message appears:

Invalid password

[Press Enter to retry]

If the correct password is not entered in three attempts, the computer tries to boot from another bootable device if the Boot First Device option in the system setup program is set to allow it. If the Boot First option is not set to allow booting from another device, the computer returns to the state it was in when you turned it on. If the hard drive password, the external hard drive password, and the primary password are the same, you prompted only for the primary password. If the hard drive password is different from the primary password, are prompted for both. Two different passwords provide greater security. NOTE: The administrator password provides access to the computer, but it does not provide access to a hard drive that is protected by a hard drive password. Assigning an Asset Tag The Asset Tag utility allows you to enter an asset tag that you or your company assigns to the computer. After you enter an asset tag, the tag appears in the system setup screens. You can also use the Asset Tag utility to enter an owner tag that appears in the system log-on screen and with the primary password prompt. Use your Drivers and Utilities CD to create a bootable floppy disk, and then use the bootable floppy disk to assign an asset tag:

1. Save and close any open files and exit any open programs. 2. Connect the Dell D/Bay with a floppy drive to the Dell D/Bay connector on the right side of the computer, or connect a USB floppy drive to one of the two USB connectors on the back of the Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD. 3. 4. When the Welcome Dell System Owner window appears, click Next. 5. Select MS-DOS from the Operating System drop-down menu. 6. Click Dell Portables Asset Tag, click Extract, and then click Setup. 7. Insert a blank floppy disk and press Follow the instructions on the screen to create a bootable floppy disk. 8. Boot the computer using the bootable floppy disk:

a. Restart the computer. file://C:\temp\~hh5B03.htm 2/27/2003 Passwords Page 4 of 5 b. Press immediately after the DELL logo appears. If the operating system logo appears, wait until you see the Windows desktop, and then shut the computer and try again. c. Press the arrow keys to select Diskette Drive and press

. 9. Type asset and a space followed by the new asset tag, and press

. For example, type the following command line and press

asset 1234$ABCD&

NOTE: An asset tag can have up to 10 characters; any combination of characters excluding spaces is valid. 10. When the computer prompts you to verify the asset tag, type y. The computer displays the new or modified asset tag and the service tag. 11. Restart your computer to exit the Asset Tag utility. Viewing Existing Asset and Service Tags 1. Boot the computer using the bootable floppy disk you created in "Assigning an Asset Tag."

2. Type asset and press

. Deleting an Asset Tag 1. Boot the computer using the bootable floppy disk you created in "Assigning an Asset Tag."

2. Type asset /d and press 3. When the computer prompts you to delete the asset tag, type y. Assigning an Owner Tag An owner tag can have up to 48 characters; any combination of letters, numbers, and spaces is valid. 1. Boot the computer using the bootable floppy disk you created in "Assigning an Asset Tag."

2. Type asset /o and a space followed by the new owner tag, and press

. file://C:\temp\~hh5B03.htm 2/27/2003

 

 

Passwords Page 5 of 5 For example, type the following command line and press

asset /o ABC Company 3. When the computer prompts you to verify the owner tag, type y. The computer displays the new owner tag. Deleting an Owner Tag NOTE: For security, you cannot set, change, or delete the owner tag if the primary or administrator passwords are set. 1. Boot the computer using the bootable floppy disk you created in "Assigning an Asset Tag."

2. Type asset /o /d and press 3. When the computer prompts you to delete the owner tag, type y. Asset Tag Options To use one of the asset tag options (see the following table):

1. Boot the computer using the bootable floppy disk you created in "Assigning an Asset Tag."

2. Type asset and a space followed by the option, and then press

. Asset Tag Option

/d

/o owner tag

/o /d

Description Deletes the asset tag Specifies a new owner tag Deletes the owner tag Displays the Asset Tag utility help screen file://C:\temp\~hh5B03.htm 2/27/2003 Solving Problems Page 1 of 17 Solving Problems Power Problems Error Messages Video and Display Problems Sound and Speaker Problems Printer Problems Modem and Internet Connection Touch Pad or Mouse Problems External Keyboard Problems Unexpected Characters Drive Problems PC Card Problems Smart Card Problems Network Problems General Program Problems If Your Dell Computer Gets Wet If You Drop or Damage Your Resolving Other Technical Problems Power Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Check the power light When the power light is lit or blinking, the computer has power. If the power light is blinking, the computer is in standby modepress the power button to exit mode. If the light is off, press the power button to turn on the computer. Charge the battery The battery charge may be depleted. 1. Reinstall the battery. 2. Use the AC adapter to connect the computer to an electrical outlet. 3. Turn on the computer. Check the battery status light If the battery status light flashes orange or is a steady the battery charge is low or depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. If the battery status light flashes green and orange, the battery is too hot to charge. Shut down the computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet, and then let the battery and computer cool to room temperature. If the battery status light rapidly flashes orange, the battery may be defective. Contact Dell. Check the battery temperature If the battery temperature is below 0 C (32 F), the computer will not start up. Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with device, such as a lamp. Check the AC adapter Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on. Connect the computer directly to an electrical outlet Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and the extension cable to verify that the computer turns on. Eliminate possible interference Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. Adjust the power properties See "Power Management."

Reseat the memory modules If the computer power light turns on but the display remains blank, reseat the memory modules. file://C:\temp\~hhB588.htm 2/27/2003 Solving Problems Page 2 of 17 Ensuring Sufficient Power for Your Computer Your computer is designed to use the 90-W AC adapter; for optimum system performance, you should always use this adapter. The 65-W AC adapters used in other Dell portable computers can be used with your computer, but they will decrease system performance. Using less-powerful AC adapters, including the 65-W AC adapter, will cause to receive a WARNING message. Docking Power Considerations Due to the extra power consumption when a computer is docked to the Dell D/Dock, normal computer is not possible on battery power alone. Ensure that the 90-W AC adapter is connected to your computer when the computer is docked to the Dell D/Dock. Docking While the Computer Is Running If a computer is connected to the Dell D/Dock or Dell D/Port while the computer is running, presence of the docking device is ignored until the AC adapter is connected to the computer. AC Power Loss While the Computer Is Docked If a computer loses AC power while docked to the Dell D/Dock or Dell D/Port, the computer immediately goes into low-performance mode. Error Messages If the message is not listed, see the documentation for the operating system or the program that was running the time the message appeared. Auxiliary device failure The touch pad, track stick, or external mouse may be faulty. For an external mouse, check the cable connection. Enable the Pointing Device option in the system setup program. If the problem persists, contact Dell. Bad command or file name Ensure that you have spelled the command correctly, put in the proper place, and used the correct pathname. Cache disabled due to failure The primary cache internal to the microprocessor has failed. Contact Dell. CD drive controller failure The CD drive does not respond to commands from the computer. See "Drive Problems."

Data error The hard drive cannot read the data. See "Drive Problems."

Decreasing available memory One or more memory modules may be faulty or improperly seated. Reseat the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. See "Adding Memory."

Disk C: failed initialization The hard drive failed initialization. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Drive not ready The operation requires a hard drive in the bay before it can continue. Install hard drive in the hard drive bay. file://C:\temp\~hhB588.htm 2/27/2003 Solving Problems Page 3 of 17 Error reading PCMCIA card The computer cannot identify the PC Card. Reinsert the card or try another PC Card. Extended memory size has changed The amount of memory recorded in NVRAM does not match the memory installed in the computer. Restart the computer. If the error appears again, contact Dell. Gate A20 failure A memory module may be loose. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. General failure The operating system is unable to carry out the command. The message is usually followed by specific informationfor example, Printer out of paper. Take the appropriate action. Hard-disk drive configuration error The computer cannot identify the drive type. Shut the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a CD. Then shut down the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Hard-disk drive controller failure 0 The hard drive does not respond to commands from computer. Shut down the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a CD. Then shut down the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the persists, try another drive. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Hard-disk drive failure The hard drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Shut down the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a CD. Then shut down the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, another drive. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Hard-disk drive read failure The hard drive may be defective. Shut down the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a CD. Then shut down the computer, the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Insert bootable media The operating system is trying to boot to a nonbootable CD. Insert a CD. Invalid configuration information-please run System Setup Program The system configuration information does not match the hardware configuration. The message is most to occur after a memory module is installed. Correct the appropriate options in the system program. See "Using the System Setup Program."

Keyboard clock line failure For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Keyboard controller failure For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or the mouse during the boot routine. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Keyboard data line failure For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Keyboard stuck key failure For external keyboards or keypads, check the cable connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or keys during the boot routine. Run Stuck Key test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Memory address line failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory allocation error The software you are attempting to run is conflicting with the operating system, another program, or a utility. Shut down the computer, wait 30 seconds, and then restart it. Try to run the program again. If the error message still appears, see the documentation. file://C:\temp\~hhB588.htm 2/27/2003 Solving Problems Page 4 of 17 Memory data line failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory double word logic failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory odd/even logic failure at address, read value expecting value A memory may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory write/read failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. No boot device available The computer cannot find the hard drive. If the hard drive is your boot device, ensure that the drive is installed, properly seated, and partitioned as a boot No boot sector on hard drive The operating system may be corrupted. Contact Dell. No timer tick interrupt A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Operating system not found Contact Dell. Optional ROM bad checksum The optional ROM apparently failed. Contact Dell. A required .DLL file was not found The program that you are trying to open is missing an essential file. Remove and then reinstall the program. Microsoft Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Add or Remove Programs. 3. Select the program you want to remove. 4. Click Remove or Change/Remove and follow the prompts on the screen. 5. See the program documentation for installation instructions. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon. 3. Select the program that you want to remove. 4. Click Change or Remove Programs. 5. See the program documentation for installation instructions. Sector not found The operating system cannot locate a sector on the hard drive. You may have a defective sector or corrupted FAT on the hard drive. Run the Windows error-checking to check the file structure on the hard drive. See Windows Help for instructions. If a large of sectors are defective, back up the data (if possible), and then reformat the hard drive. Seek error The operating system cannot find a specific track on the hard drive. Shutdown failure A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Time-of-day clock lost power System configuration settings are corrupted. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, try to restore the data by entering the system setup program. Then immediately exit the program. See "Using System Setup Program." If the message reappears, contact Dell. Time-of-day clock stopped The reserve battery that supports the system configuration settings may require recharging. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, contact Dell. file://C:\temp\~hhB588.htm 2/27/2003 Solving Problems Page 5 of 17 Time-of-day not set-please run the System Setup program The time or date stored in system setup program does not match the system clock. Correct the settings for the Date and Time options. See "Using the System Setup Program."

Timer chip counter 2 failed A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Unexpected interrupt in protected mode The keyboard controller may be malfunctioning, a memory module may be loose. Run the System Memory tests and the Keyboard Controller as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

x:\ is not accessible. The device is not ready Insert a disk into the drive and try again. Warning: Battery is critically low The battery is running out of charge. Replace the battery, or connect the computer to an electrical outlet. Otherwise, activate hibernate mode or shut the computer. Video and Display Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If the display is blank NOTE: If you are using a program that requires a higher resolution than your computer supports, it is recommended that you attach an external monitor to your computer. Check the battery If you are using a battery to power your computer, the battery charge be depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet using the AC adapter, and turn on the computer. Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with device, such as a lamp. Check the AC adapter Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on. Connect the computer directly to an electrical outlet Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and the extension cable to verify that the computer turns on. Adjust the power properties Search for the keyword standby in Windows Help or the Windows Help and Support Center. Switch the video image If your computer is attached to an external monitor, press to switch the video image to the display. If the display is difficult to read Adjust the brightness See "Adjusting Brightness" for instructions on adjusting the Move the subwoofer away from the computer or monitor If your external speaker includes a subwoofer, ensure that the subwoofer is at least 60 cm (2 ft) away from the or external monitor. file://C:\temp\~hhB588.htm 2/27/2003 Solving Problems Page 6 of 17 Eliminate possible interference Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. Rotate the computer to face a different direction Eliminate sunlight glare, which can poor picture quality. Adjust the Windows display settings Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and then click Control Panel. 2. Click Appearance and Themes. 3. Click the area you want to change or click the Display icon. 4. Try different settings for Color quality and Screen resolution. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Display icon and click the Settings tab. 3. Try different settings for Colors, Screen area, and Advanced Settings. Run the Video diagnostics tests If no error message appears and you still have a display problem, but the display is not completely blank, run the Video device group in the Dell Diagnostics. Then contact Dell. See "Error Messages" If an error message appears, see "Error Messages."

If only part of the display is readable Connect an external monitor 1. Shut down your computer and connect an external monitor to the computer. 2. Turn on the computer and the monitor and adjust the monitor brightness and contrast controls. If the external monitor works, the computer display or video controller may be defective. Contact Dell. Sound and Speaker Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If you have a problem with integrated speakers Adjust the Windows volume control Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Adjust volume, bass, or treble controls to eliminate distortion. Adjust the volume using keyboard shortcuts See "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad."

Press to disable (mute) or reenable the integrated speakers. Reinstall the sound (audio) driver See "Reinstalling Software."

file://C:\temp\~hhB588.htm 2/27/2003 Solving Problems Page 7 of 17 For Windows 2000 only, ensure that digital audio for the CD drive is enabled 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the System icon. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Double-click DVD/CD-ROM drives. 6. Double-click the name of the drive. 7. On the drive Properties screen, click the Properties tab. 8. Click the box near the bottom of the screen to enable digital audio for your CD or DVD If you have a problem with external speakers NOTE: The volume control in some MP3 players overrides the Windows volume setting. If you have listening to MP3 songs, make sure that you did not turn the player volume down or off. Check the speaker cable connections See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with device, such as a lamp. Ensure that the speakers are turned on See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. Adjust the Windows volume control Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Adjust volume, bass, or treble controls to eliminate distortion. Test the speakers Plug the speaker audio cable in to the Ensure that the headphone volume control is turned up. Play a music CD. connector on the computer. Run the speaker self-test Some speaker systems have a self-test button on the subwoofer. See the speaker documentation for self-test instructions. Eliminate possible interference Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, or halogen lamps check for interference. Reinstall the sound (audio) driver See "Reinstalling Software."

Run the Misc. PCI Devices diagnostic test See "Using the Dell Diagnostics." If the tests complete successfully, the controller is functioning properly. If the problem persists, or if the tests do not complete successfully, contact Dell. For Windows 2000 only, ensure that digital audio for the CD drive is enabled 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the System icon. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Double-click DVD/CD-ROM drives. 6. Double-click the name of the drive. 7. On the drive Properties screen, click the Properties tab. 8. Click the box near the bottom of the screen to enable digital audio for your CD or DVD Printer Problems file://C:\temp\~hhB588.htm 2/27/2003 Solving Problems Page 8 of 17 Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. Check the printer cable connections Ensure that the printer cable is properly connected to the computer. Check the printer cable 1. Shut down the computer and turn off the printer. 2. Swap the printer cable with a cable that you know is working. 3. Turn on the printer and computer, and try again to print. 4. If you print successfully, contact Dell for assistance in obtaining a new printer cable. Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with device, such as a lamp. Ensure that the printer is turned on See the documentation supplied with the printer. Verify that Windows recognizes the printer Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware. 3. Click View installed printers or fax printers. If the printer model is listed, right-click 4. Click Properties and click the Ports tab. Ensure that the Print to the following port printer icon. setting is LPT1 (Printer Port). Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Printers. If the printer model is listed, right-click the printer icon. 2. Click Properties and click the Ports tab. 3. Ensure that the Print to the following port: option is set for your printer type:

For a parallel printer: LPT1 (Printer Port)

For a USB printer: USB Reinstall the printer driver See "Reinstalling Software."

Check the printer Run the printer self-test. If the test does not complete successfully, the printer is probably defective. Contact the printer manufacturer. Modem and Internet Connection Problems NOTICE: Connect the modem to an analog telephone wall jack only. Connecting the modem to a telephone network may damage the modem. NOTICE: Modem and network connectors look similar. Do not plug a telephone line in to the network connector. Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. file://C:\temp\~hhB588.htm 2/27/2003 Solving Problems Page 9 of 17 NOTE: If you can connect to your Internet service provider (ISP), your modem is functioning properly. you are sure that your modem is working properly and you still experience problems, contact your Check the telephone wall jack Disconnect the telephone line from the modem and connect to a telephone. Listen for a dial tone. Ensure that you have touchtone telephone service. Try connecting the modem to a different telephone wall jack. Slow connection speeds can be caused by telephone noise as well as by telephone line or conditions. Contact your telephone company or network administrator for more information. Connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack If you have other telephone devices sharing the line, such as an answering machine, fax machine, surge protector, or line splitter, then bypass them and use the telephone line to connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack. Check the connection Verify that the telephone line is connected to the modem. Check the telephone line Try using a different telephone line. If you are using a line that is m (10 ft) or more in length, try a shorter one. Irregular dial tone If you have voice mail service, you might hear an irregular dial tone you have messages. Contact your telephone company for instructions on restoring a dial tone. Turn off call waiting (catch-phone) See your telephone directory for instructions on deactivating this feature. Then adjust the dial-up networking connection properties. Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware, click Phone and Modem Options, click the 3. Rules tab, and then click Edit.... In the Edit Location window, ensure that To disable call waiting, dial: is checked, and then select the proper code as listed in your telephone directory. 4. Click Apply and click OK. 5. Close the Phone and Modems Options window. 6. Close the Control Panel window. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Click Phone and Modem Options. 3. Click the Dialing Rules tab and click Edit. 4. Ensure that To disable call waiting, dial: is checked, and then select the proper code as listed in your telephone directory. 5. Click Apply and click OK. 6. Close the Phone and Modem Options window. Verify that the modem is communicating with Windows Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware and click Phone and Modem Options. 3. Click the Modems tab. 4. Click the COM port for your modem. 5. Click Properties, click the Diagnostics tab, and then click Query Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows. If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly. file://C:\temp\~hhB588.htm 2/27/2003 Solving Problems Windows 2000 Page 10 of 17 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Phone and Modem Options. If multiple entries for the same modem or modems are listed but not installed, delete entries, restart the computer, and repeat steps 1 and 2. 3. Click the Diagnostics tab. 4. Click the COM port for your modem. 5. Click Query Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows. If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly. Touch Pad or Mouse Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. Check the touch pad settings Windows XP 1. Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Printers and Other 2. Click Mouse. 3. Try adjusting the settings. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Mouse icon. 3. Try adjusting the settings. Check the mouse cable Shut down the computer. Disconnect the mouse cable, check it for damage, and firmly reconnect the cable. If you are using a mouse extension cable, disconnect it and connect the mouse directly to the computer. To verify that the problem is with the mouse, check the touch pad 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect the mouse. 3. Turn on the computer. 4. At the Windows desktop, use the touch pad to move the cursor around, select an icon, and open it. If the touch pad operates correctly, the mouse may be defective. Check the system setup program settings Verify that the system setup program lists the correct device for the pointing device option. (The computer automatically recognizes a USB without making any setting adjustments.) Test the mouse controller To test the mouse controller (which affects pointer movement) the operation of the touch pad or mouse buttons, run the Mouse test in the Pointing Devices file://C:\temp\~hhB588.htm 2/27/2003 Solving Problems Page 11 of 17 group in the Dell Diagnostics. Reinstall the touch pad driver See "Reinstalling Software."

External Keyboard Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. NOTE: Use the integrated keyboard when working in MS-DOS mode or when running the Dell Diagnostics or the system setup program. When you attach an external keyboard, the integrated keyboard remains fully functional. Check the keyboard cable Shut down the computer. Disconnect the keyboard cable and it for damage, and firmly reconnect the cable. If you are using a keyboard extension cable, disconnect it and connect the keyboard directly to computer. Check the external keyboard 1. Shut down the computer, wait 1 minute, and turn it on again. 2. Verify that the numbers, capitals, and scroll lock lights on the keyboard blink during the boot routine. 3. From the Windows desktop, click the Start button, point to Programs, point to Accessories, and click Notepad. 4. Type some characters on the external keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If you cannot verify these steps, you may have a defective external keyboard. To verify that the problem is with the external keyboard, check the integrated 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect the external keyboard. 3. Turn on the computer. 4. From the Windows desktop, click the Start button, point to Programs, point to Accessories, and click Notepad. 5. Type some characters on the external keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If the characters appear now but did not with the external keyboard, you may have a defective external keyboard. Run the keyboard diagnostics tests Run the PC-AT Compatible Keyboards tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If the tests indicate a defective external keyboard, contact Dell. Unexpected Characters Disable the numeric keypad Press to disable the numeric keypad if numbers are file://C:\temp\~hhB588.htm 2/27/2003 Solving Problems Page 12 of 17 displayed instead of letters. Verify that the numbers lock light is not lit. Drive Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If you cannot play a CD, CD-RW, DVD, or DVD+RW NOTE: Because of different worldwide file types, not all DVD titles work in all DVD High-speed CD drive vibration is normal and may cause noise. The noise does not indicate a defect with the drive or the CD. Ensure that Windows recognizes the drive In Windows XP, click the Start button and click My Computer. In other operating systems, double-click My Computer. If the drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. Insert a bootable disk and restart the computer. Try another disc Insert another disc to eliminate the possibility that the original disc is defective. Adjust the Windows volume control Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Reinstall the drive 1. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2. Remove the drive. See "Using the Module Bay" for instructions. 3. Reinstall the drive. 4. Turn on the computer. Clean the drive or disc See "Cleaning Your Computer" for instructions. Check the drive for errors If a drive error message appears, see "Error Messages" for an explanation. Run the IDE Drives tests as described in the Dell Diagnostics. If you cannot eject the CD, CD-RW, DVD, or DVD+RW drive tray 1. Ensure that the computer is shut down. 2. Straighten a paper clip and insert one end into the eject hole at the front of the drive;

firmly until the tray is partially ejected. 3. Gently pull out the tray until it stops. If you hear an unfamiliar scraping or grinding sound

Ensure that the sound is not caused by the program that is running. file://C:\temp\~hhB588.htm 2/27/2003 Solving Problems Page 13 of 17

Ensure that the disk or disc is inserted properly. If the CD-RW or DVD+RW drive stops writing Disable standby or hibernate mode in Windows before writing to a CD-RW Search for the keyword standby or hibernate in Windows Help or the Windows Help and Support Center. Change the write speed to a slower rate See the help files for your CD or DVD creation software. Exit all other open programs Exiting all other open programs before writing to the CD-RW DVD+RW may alleviate the problem. If you have problems with a hard drive Allow the computer to cool before turning it on A hot hard drive may prevent the system from starting. Try allowing the computer to return to room temperature before turning on. Check the drive for errors

Run the Windows error-checking tool:

1. In Windows XP, click the Start button and click My Computer. In Windows 2000, double-

click My Computer. 2. Right-click the drive letter (local disk) that you want to scan for errors, and then click Properties. 3. Click the Tools tab. 4. Under Error-checking, click Check Now. 5. Click Start.

Run the IDE Drives tests as described in the Dell Diagnostics. PC Card Problems Check the PC Card Ensure that the PC Card is properly inserted into the connector. Ensure that the card is recognized by Windows Double-click the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon in the Windows taskbar. Ensure that the card is listed. Run the PC Card diagnostics test See the documentation that came with the PC Card for instructions if a diagnostics test was provided with the card. If you have problems with a Dell-provided PC Card Contact Dell. If you have problems with a PC Card not provided by Dell Contact the PC Card manufacturer. Smart Card Problems file://C:\temp\~hhB588.htm 2/27/2003 Solving Problems Page 14 of 17 Check the smart card Ensure that the smart card is properly inserted into the smart card If you have problems with a Dell-provided smart card Contact Dell. If you have problems with a smart card not provided by Dell Contact the smart card manufacturer. Network Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Check the network cable connector Ensure that the network cable connector is firmly connected to the connector on the computer and the network wall jack. Check the network lights on the network connector Green indicates that the network connection is active. If the status light is not green, try replacing the network cable. Amber indicates that the network adapter driver is loaded and the adapter is detecting activity. Restart the computer Try to log on to the network again. Contact your network administrator Verify that your network settings are correct and that the network is functioning. General Program Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. A program crashes NOTE: Software usually includes installation instructions in its documentation or on a See the software documentation Many software manufacturers maintain websites with information that may help you solve the problem. Ensure that you properly installed and configured the program. Reinstall the program if necessary. A program stops responding End the program 1. Simultaneously press 2. Click the Applications tab, and then select the program that is no longer responding. 3. Click End Task. A solid blue screen appears file://C:\temp\~hhB588.htm 2/27/2003 Solving Problems Page 15 of 17 Turn the computer off If the computer does not respond to a keystroke or a proper press the power button until the computer turns off. Press the power button again to restart computer. Windows XP The computer restarts. Windows 2000 The solid blue screen appears because you were not able to perform a proper Windows ScanDisk automatically runs during the start-up process. Follow the instructions on the screen. Error messages appear Review "Error Messages" Look up the message and take the appropriate action. See the software documentation. Confirm that the problem is software-related Run the System Board Devices tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If all tests in the device group run successfully, the problem may be software-

related. See the software documentation. If Your Dell Computer Gets Wet CAUTION: Perform this procedure only after you are certain that it is safe to do so. If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, it is recommended that you turn off AC the circuit breaker before attempting to remove the power cables from the electrical Use the utmost caution when removing wet cables from a live power source. 1. Shut down the computer, disconnect the AC adapter from the computer, and then disconnect the AC 2. Turn off any attached external devices, and disconnect them from their power sources and then from 3. Ground yourself by touching one of the metal connectors on the back of the computer. 4. Remove the module bay device and any installed PC Cards, and put them in a safe place to dry. adapter from the electrical outlet. computer. 5. Remove the battery. 6. Wipe off the battery and put it in a safe place to dry. 7. Remove the hard drive. 8. Remove the memory module(s). 9. Open the display and place the computer right-side up across two books or similar props to let air circulate all around it. Let the computer dry for at least 24 hours in a dry area at room temperature. NOTICE: Do not use artificial means, such as a hair dryer or a fan, to speed the drying file://C:\temp\~hhB588.htm 2/27/2003 Solving Problems Page 16 of 17 CAUTION: To help prevent electrical shock, verify that the computer is thoroughly dry before continuing with the rest of this procedure. 10. Ground yourself by touching one of the metal connectors on the back of the computer. 11. Replace the memory module(s), the memory module cover, and the screw(s). 12. Replace the hard drive. 14. Replace the battery. 13. Replace the module bay device and any PC Cards you removed. 15. Turn on the computer and verify that it is working properly. NOTE: See your System Information Guide for information on your warranty If the computer does not start, or if you cannot identify the damaged components, contact Dell. If You Drop or Damage Your Computer 1. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect the AC adapter from the computer and from the electrical outlet. 3. Turn off any attached external devices, and disconnect them from their power sources and then from computer. 4. Remove and reinstall the battery. 5. Turn on the computer. NOTE: See your System Information Guide for information on your warranty If the computer does not start, or if you cannot identify the damaged components, contact Dell. Resolving Other Technical Problems Go to the Dell Support website Go to support.dell.com for help with general usage, installation, and troubleshooting questions. See "Getting Help" for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. E-mail Dell Go to support.dell.com and then click E-Mail Dell in the Communicate list. Send an e-mail message to Dell about your problem; you can expect to receive an e-mail from Dell within hours. See "Getting Help" for a description of the hardware and software provided by Dell. file://C:\temp\~hhB588.htm 2/27/2003 Solving Problems Page 17 of 17 Contact Dell If you cannot solve your problem using the Dell Support website

(support.dell.com) or e-mail service, call Dell for technical assistance. See "Getting Help" for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. file://C:\temp\~hhB588.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Dell Diagnostics Page 1 of 3 Using the Dell Diagnostics When to Use the Dell Diagnostics Features of the Dell Diagnostics Starting the Dell Diagnostics When to Use the Dell Diagnostics Whenever a major component or device in your computer does not function properly, you may have a component failure. If you are experiencing a problem with your Dell computer, perform the checks in

"Solving Problems" and run the Dell Diagnostics before you call Dell for technical assistance. Running the Dell Diagnostics may help you to resolve the problem yourself quickly without having to contact Dell for If you are experienced with computers and know what component(s) you need to test, select the diagnostic test group(s) or subtest(s). If you are unsure about how to begin diagnosing a problem, see

"Starting the Dell Diagnostics."

Features of the Dell Diagnostics The Dell Diagnostics helps you to check your computer hardware without any additional equipment and without destroying any data. By using the diagnostics, you can have confidence in the operation of your computer. If you find a problem that you cannot solve by yourself, the diagnostic tests can provide you with important information you need when talking to Dell's service and support personnel. NOTICE: Use the Dell Diagnostics to test only your Dell computer. Using this program with other computers may cause incorrect computer responses or result in error messages. The diagnostic test groups or subtests also have the following features:

Options that let you perform express, extended, or custom tests on one or all devices

An option that allows you to select tests based on a symptom of the problem you are having

An option that allows you to choose the number of times a test group or subtest is repeated

The ability to display test results

Options to temporarily suspend testing if an error is detected, or to terminate testing

Extensive online Help that describes the tests and devices

Status messages that inform you whether test groups or subtests were completed successfully

Error messages that appear if any problems are detected file://C:\temp\~hh1A57.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Dell Diagnostics Page 2 of 3 Starting the Dell Diagnostics The Dell Diagnostics is located on a hidden Diagnostic utility partition on your hard drive. NOTE: If your computer cannot display a screen image, contact 1. Shut down the computer. 2. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 3. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. NOTE: If you cannot see anything on your display, you can hold down the mute button and press the power button (instead of F12) to begin the Dell Diagnostics. You do not need to highlight Diagnostics and press

. The computer automatically runs the Pre-boot System Assessment. 4. Turn on the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long the Microsoft Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 5. When the boot device list appears, highlight Diagnostics and press

. The computer begins to run the Pre-boot System Assessment, a series of embedded diagnostics that perform initial testing on your system board, keyboard, hard drive, and display.

During the assessment, answer any questions that appear.

If a component failure is detected, the computer stops and beeps. To stop the assessment and reboot to the operating system, press

; to continue to the next test, press

; to the component that failed, press

If failures are detected during the Pre-boot System Assessment, write down the error code(s) contact Dell before continuing on to the Dell Diagnostics.

If you receive a message stating that no Diagnostics utility partition has been found, follow the instructions on the screen to run the Dell Diagnostics from your Drivers and Utilities CD. If the Pre-boot System Assessment completes successfully, you receive the message Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue. 6. Press any key to start the Dell Diagnostics from the Diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive. 7. After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the option you want. NOTE: The service tag for your computer is located in the title bar of each file://C:\temp\~hh1A57.htm 2/27/2003 Using the Dell Diagnostics Page 3 of 3 Option Function Express Test Performs a quick test of devices. The test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to increase the possibility of tracing the quickly. Extended Test Performs a thorough check of devices. The test typically takes 1 hour or more and requires you to answer questions periodically. Custom Test Tests a specific device. You can customize the tests to be run. Symptom Tree Allows you to select tests based on a symptom of the problem you are experiencing. The lists the most common symptoms. 8. 9. If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears, displaying the error code and a of the problem. Write down the error code and problem description and follow the instructions on the screen. If you cannot resolve the error condition, contact Dell. If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for more information. Tab Function Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered. Errors Help Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and problem description. Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the test. Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device. The Dell Diagnostics obtains your configuration information for all devices from the system setup program, memory, and various internal tests and displays the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on your computer or all devices attached to your computer. Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings. 10. When you have finished running a test, close the screen to return to the Main Menu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and reboot the computer, close the Main Menu screen. file://C:\temp\~hh1A57.htm 2/27/2003 Cleaning Your Computer Page 1 of 2 Cleaning Your Computer Preparing to Clean Your Computer Computer, Keyboard, and Display Touch Pad Optical Media Preparing to Clean Your Computer 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Remove any installed batteries and disconnect the AC adapter. Computer, Keyboard, and Display

Gently use a vacuum cleaner with a brush attachment to remove dust from the slots and holes on your computer and between the keys on the keyboard. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer or display, do not spray cleaning solution directly onto the display. Only use products specifically designed for cleaning LCDs, and follow the instructions that are included with the product.

Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or an LCD cleaner, and wipe the display until it is clean.

Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or an LCD cleaner, and wipe the computer and keyboard. Do not allow water from the cloth to seep between the touch pad and the surrounding palm rest. Touch Pad 1. Shut down and turn off your computer, disconnect any attached devices, and disconnect them from their electrical outlets. 2. Remove any installed batteries and disconnect the AC adapter. 3. Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water, and stroke it gently across the surface of the touch pad. Do not allow water from the cloth to seep between the touch pad and the surrounding palm rest. Optical Media file://C:\temp\~hh6952.htm 2/27/2003 Cleaning Your Computer Page 2 of 2 NOTICE: Always use compressed air to clean the lens in the drive, and follow the instructions that are included with the compressed air. Never touch the lens in the drive. If you notice problems, such as skipping, with the playback quality of your CDs or DVDs, try cleaning the 1. Hold the disc by its outer edge. You can also touch the inside edge of the center hole. NOTICE: To prevent damaging the surface, do not wipe in a circular motion around the 2. With a soft, lint-free cloth, gently wipe the bottom of the disc (the unlabeled side) in a straight line the center to the outer edge of the disc. You can also purchase commercial products that clean discs and provide some protection from dust, fingerprints, and scratches. Cleaning products for CDs are safe to use on DVDs. 3. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. file://C:\temp\~hh6952.htm 2/27/2003 Reinstalling Software Page 1 of 11 Reinstalling Software Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities Using Microsoft Windows System Restore Reinstalling Microsoft Windows XP Reinstalling Windows 2000 Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities Dell ships your computer to you with required drivers and utilities already installedno further installation or configuration is needed. NOTICE: The Drivers and Utilities CD may contain drivers for operating systems that are not on your computer. Ensure that you are installing software appropriate for your operating system. To reinstall drivers for optional devices such as wireless communications and DVD drives, you may need the and documentation that came with those devices. NOTICE: The Dell Support website, support.dell.com, and the Drivers and Utilities CD provide approved drivers for Dell computers. If you install drivers from other sources, your computer might work correctly. To reinstall a driver or utility from your Drivers and Utilities CD:

1. Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. 2. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD. In most cases, the CD starts running automatically. If it does not, start Microsoft Windows click your CD drive directory to display the CD contents, and then double-click the autorcd.exe file. first time that you run the CD, it might prompt you to install setup files. Click OK, and follow the instructions on the screen to continue. 3. From the Language drop-down menu in the toolbar, select your preferred language for the driver or utility (if available). A welcome screen appears. 4. Click Next. The CD automatically scans your hardware to detect drivers and utilities used by your computer. After the CD completes the hardware scan, you can also detect other drivers and utilities. Under Criteria, select the appropriate categories from the System Model, Operating System, and Topic drop-down menus. A link or links appear(s) for the specific drivers and utilities used by your computer. 5. Click the link of a specific driver or utility to display information about the driver or utility that you want to install. file://C:\temp\~hhBF4E.htm 2/27/2003 Reinstalling Software Page 2 of 11 6. Click the Install button (if present) to begin installing the driver or utility. At the welcome screen, the screen prompts to complete the installation. If no Install button is present, automatic installation is not an option. For installation instructions, see the appropriate instructions in the following subsections, or click Extract, follow the extracting instructions, and read the readme file. If instructed to navigate to the driver files, click the CD directory on the driver information window to display the files associated with that driver. Manually Reinstalling Drivers for Windows XP NOTE: If you are reinstalling an infrared-sensor driver, you must first enable the infrared sensor in the system setup program before continuing with the driver installation. 1. After extracting the driver files to your hard drive as described previously, click the Start button, point Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Click the Start button and right-click My Computer. 3. Click Properties. 4. Click the Hardware tab and click Device Manager. 5. Double-click the type of device for which you are installing the driver (for example, Modems or devices). 6. Double-click the name of the device for which you are installing the driver. 7. Click the Driver tab and click Update Driver. 8. Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced) and click Next. 9. Click Browse, and browse to the location to which you previously extracted the driver files. 10. When the name of the appropriate driver appears, click Next. 11. Click Finish and restart your computer. Using the Windows XP Device Driver Rollback If you install a new device driver that causes system instability, you can use the Windows XP Device Driver Rollback to replace the new device driver with the previously installed version of the device driver. If you reinstall your previous driver by using the Device Driver Rollback process, then use System Restore to return your operating system to its previous operating state before you installed the new device driver. To use Driver Rollback:

1. Click the Start button and right-click My Computer. 2. Click Properties. 3. Click the Hardware tab and click Device Manager. 4. In the Device Manager window, right-click the device for which the new driver was installed and then click Properties. file://C:\temp\~hhBF4E.htm 2/27/2003 Reinstalling Software Page 3 of 11 5. Click the Drivers tab. 6. Click Roll Back Driver. Manually Reinstalling Drivers for Windows 2000 NOTE: If you are reinstalling an infrared driver, you must first enable the infrared sensor in the system setup program before continuing with the driver installation. 1. After extracting the driver files to your hard drive as described previously, click the Start button, point Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the System icon. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. devices). 6. Double-click the name of the device. 7. Click the Driver tab and click Update Driver. 5. Double-click the type of device for which you are installing the driver (for example, Modems or 9. Ensure that Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended) is selected, and then click 10. Ensure that the Specify a location check box is checked and that all other check boxes are unchecked, 8. Click Next. Next. and click Next. 11. Click Browse to browse to the location to which you previously extracted the driver files. 12. When the name of the appropriate driver appears, click Next. 13. Click Finish and restart your computer. Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities In the Microsoft Windows XP and Windows 2000 operating systems, IRQ conflicts occur if a device either is not detected during the operating system setup or is detected but incorrectly configured. See the following subsection that corresponds to your operating system to check for IRQ conflicts on your computer. Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Performance and Maintenance and click System. 3. Click the Hardware tab and click Device Manager. In the Device Manager list, check for conflicts with the other devices. 4. file://C:\temp\~hhBF4E.htm 2/27/2003 Reinstalling Software Page 4 of 11 Conflicts are indicated by a yellow exclamation point (!) beside the conflicting device or a red X if the device has been disabled. 5. Double-click any conflicting device listed to bring up the Properties window so that you can determine what needs to be reconfigured or removed from the Device Manager. 6. Resolve these conflicts before checking specific devices. 7. Double-click the malfunctioning device type in the Device Manager list. 8. Double-click the icon for the specific device in the expanded list. The Properties window appears. If an IRQ conflict exists, the Device status area in the Properties window reports what other devices are sharing the device's IRQ. 9. Resolve any IRQ conflicts. You can also use the Windows XP Hardware Troubleshooter. To use the troubleshooter, click the Start button and click Help and Support. Type hardware troubleshooter in the Search field, and then click the arrow start the search. Click Hardware Troubleshooter in the Search Results list. In the Hardware Troubleshooter list, click I need to resolve a hardware conflict on my computer and click Next. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the System icon. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Click View and click Resources by connection. 6. Double-click Interrupt request (IRQ) to view the IRQ assignments. Conflicts are indicated by a yellow exclamation point (!) beside the conflicting device or a red X if the device has been disabled. 7. Double-click any conflicting device listed to bring up the Properties window so that you can determine what needs to be reconfigured or removed from the Device Manager. Resolve these conflicts before checking specific devices. 8. Double-click the malfunctioning device type in the Device Manager list. 9. Double-click the icon for the specific device in the expanded list. The Properties window appears. If an IRQ conflict exists, the Device status area in the Properties window reports what other devices are sharing the device's IRQ. 10. Resolve any IRQ conflicts. file://C:\temp\~hhBF4E.htm 2/27/2003 Reinstalling Software Page 5 of 11 You can also use the Windows 2000 Hardware Troubleshooter. To use the troubleshooter, click the Start and click Help. Click Troubleshooting and Maintenance on the Contents tab, click Windows 2000 troubleshooters, and then click Hardware. In the Hardware Troubleshooter list, click I need to resolve hardware conflict on my computer, and then click Next. Using Microsoft Windows System Restore The Microsoft Windows XP operating system provides a System Restore feature that allows you to return your computer to an earlier operating state if changes to the computer's hardware, software (including new or program installations), or system settings have left the computer in an undesirable operating state. You can also undo the last system restore. System Restore automatically creates system checkpoints. You can also manually create your own by creating restore points. To limit the amount of hard disk space used, older restore points will be automatically purged. To resolve an operating system problem, you can use System Restore from Safe Mode or Normal Mode to your computer to an earlier operating state. System Restore does not cause you to lose personal files stored in the My Documents folder, data files, or mail messages after restoring the computer to an earlier time. If you restore the computer to an operating that existed before you installed a program, the program's data files are not lost, but you must reinstall the actual program again. NOTICE: It is important to make regular backups of your data files. System Restore does not monitor changes to or recover your data files. If the original data on the hard disk is accidentally erased or overwritten, or if it becomes inaccessible because of a hard disk malfunction, use your backup files to recover the lost or damaged data. System Restore is enabled on your new computer. However, if you reinstall Windows XP with less than 200 of free hard-disk space available, System Restore is automatically disabled. Before you use System Restore, confirm that it is enabled:

1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click the Performance and Maintenance. 3. Click System. 4. Click the System Restore tab. 5. Ensure that Turn off System Restore is not checked. Creating a Restore Point In Windows XP, you can either use the System Restore Wizard or manually create a restore point. Using the System Restore Wizard To use the System Restore Wizard, click the Start button, click Help and Support, click System Restore, then follow the instructions in the System Restore Wizard window. You can also create and name a restore point if you are logged on as the computer administrator or a user with administrator rights. file://C:\temp\~hhBF4E.htm 2/27/2003 3. Click Next. 5. Click Create. 6. Click OK. Reinstalling Software Page 6 of 11 Manually Creating a Restore Point 1. Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2. Click Create a restore point. 4. Type a name for the new restore point in the Restore point description field. The present date and time are automatically added to the description of the new restore point. Restoring the Computer to an Earlier Operating State If problems occur after installing a device driver, first try using Device Driver Rollback. If Device Driver does not resolve the problem, then use System Restore. NOTICE: Before restoring the computer to an earlier operating state, save and close all open files and exit all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system complete. 1. Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2. Ensure that Restore my computer to an earlier time is selected and click Next. 3. Click a calendar date to which you want to restore your computer. The Select a Restore Point screen provides a calendar that allows you to see and select restore All calendar dates with available restore points appear in bold. 4. Select a restore point and click Next. If a calendar date has only one restore point, then that restore point is automatically selected. If two more restore points are available, click the restore point that you want to use. NOTICE: Save and close all open files and exit all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any or programs until the system restoration is complete. 5. Click Next. In Windows XP, the Restoration Complete screen appears after System Restore finishes collecting and then the computer automatically restarts. 6. After the computer restarts, click OK. To change the restore point, you can either repeat the steps using a different restore point, or you undo the restoration. file://C:\temp\~hhBF4E.htm 2/27/2003 Reinstalling Software Page 7 of 11 Undoing the Last System Restore NOTICE: Save and close all open files and exit all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any or programs until the system restoration is complete. 1. Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2. Select Undo my last restoration and click Next. NOTICE: Save and close all open files and exit all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any or programs until the system restoration is complete. 3. Click Next. The System Restore screen appears, and then the computer automatically restarts. 4. After the computer restarts, click OK. Reinstalling Microsoft Windows XP Before You Reinstall If you are considering reinstalling the Windows XP operating system to correct a problem with a newly driver, first try using Windows XP Device Driver Rollback. If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, then use System Restore to return your operating system to the operating state it was in before you installed the new device driver. Reinstalling Windows XP To reinstall Windows XP, perform all the steps in the following sections in the order in which they are listed. The reinstallation process can take 1 to 2 hours to complete. After you reinstall the operating system, you also reinstall the device drivers, virus protection program, and other software. NOTICE: The Operating System CD provides options for reinstalling Windows XP. The options can overwrite files and possibly affect programs installed on your hard drive. Therefore, do not reinstall Windows XP unless instructed to do so by a Dell technical support representative. NOTICE: To prevent conflicts with Windows XP, disable any virus protection software installed on your computer before you reinstall Windows XP. See the documentation that came with the software for instructions. Booting From the Operating System CD 1. Save and close any open files and exit any open programs. Insert the Operating System CD. If any program starts automatically, exit the program before 2. file://C:\temp\~hhBF4E.htm 2/27/2003 Reinstalling Software Page 8 of 11 proceeding. 3. Shut down the computer through the Start menu and restart the computer. 4. Press immediately after the DELL logo appears. If the operating system logo appears, wait until you see the Windows desktop, and then shut down the computer and try again. 5. Press the arrow keys to select CD-ROM, and then press 6. When the Press any key to boot from CD message appears, press any key. Windows XP Setup 1. When the Windows XP Setup screen appears, press to select To set up Windows now. 2. Read the information on the Microsoft Windows Licensing Agreement screen, and press to accept the license agreement. If your computer already has Windows XP installed and you want to recover your current Windows XP data, type r to select the repair option, and then remove the CD from the drive. If you want to install a new copy of Windows XP, press to select that option. 5. Press to select the highlighted partition

(recommended), and then follow the instructions on the screen. The Windows XP Setup screen appears, and the operating system begins to copy files and install the devices. The computer automatically restarts multiple times. NOTE: The time required to complete the setup depends on the size of the hard drive and the speed of your computer. NOTICE: Do not press any key when the following message appears: Press any key to boot from the CD. 3. 4. 6. When the Regional and Language Options screen appears, select the settings for your location, and then click Next. 7. Enter your name and organization (optional) in the Personalize Your Software screen and click 8. If you are reinstalling Windows XP Home Edition, at the What's your computer's name window, a name for your computer (or accept the name provided) and click Next. If you are reinstalling Windows XP Professional, at the Computer Name and Administrator window, enter a name for your computer (or accept the one provided) and a password, and then click Next. 9. If the Modem Dialing Information screen appears, enter the requested information and click Next. file://C:\temp\~hhBF4E.htm 2/27/2003 Reinstalling Software Page 9 of 11 10. Enter the date, time, and time zone in the Date and Time Settings window and click Next. 11. 12. If the Networking Settings screen appears, click Typical and click Next. If you are reinstalling Windows XP Professional and you are prompted to provide further information regarding your network configuration, enter your selections. If you are unsure of your settings, accept the default selections. Windows XP installs the operating system components and configures the computer. The computer automatically restarts. NOTICE: Do not press any key when the following message appears: Press any key to boot from the CD. 13. When the Welcome to Microsoft screen appears, click Next. 14. When the How will this computer connect to the Internet? message appears, click Skip. 15. When the Ready to register with Microsoft? screen appears, select No, not at this time and click 16. When the Who will use this computer? screen appears, you can enter up to five users. Click Next. 17. Click Finish to complete the setup, and remove the CD from the drive. Reinstalling Drivers and Software 1. Reinstall the appropriate drivers. 2. Reinstall your virus protection software. See the documentation that came with the software for 3. Reinstall your other software programs. See the documentation that came with the software for Next. instructions. instructions. Reinstalling Windows 2000 NOTICE: The Operating System CD provides options for reinstalling the Windows 2000 operating system. The options can potentially overwrite files installed by Dell and possibly affect programs on your hard drive. Therefore, do not reinstall your operating system unless instructed to do so by a technical support representative. Booting From the Operating System CD 1. Save and close any open files and exit any open programs. 2. Insert the Operating System CD. If any program starts automatically, exit the program before proceeding. 3. Shut down the computer through the Start menu and restart the computer. file://C:\temp\~hhBF4E.htm 2/27/2003 Reinstalling Software Page 10 of 11 4. Press immediately after the DELL logo appears. If the operating system logo appears, wait until you see the Windows desktop, and then shut down the computer and try again. 5. Press the arrow keys to select CD-ROM, and then press 6. When the Press any key to boot from CD message appears, press any key. Windows 2000 Setup 1. When the Windows 2000 Setup window appears, ensure that To setup Win2000 now, press is highlighted. Then press

. 2. Read the information in the License Agreement window and press to continue. 3. When the Windows 2000 Professional Setup window appears, press the arrow keys to select the Windows 2000 partition option that you want. Then press the key for the partition option you chose. 4. When the Windows 2000 Professional Setup window reappears, press the arrow keys to select the type of file system that you want Windows 2000 to use, and then press

. 5. Press again to restart your computer. 6. Click Next when the Welcome to the Windows 2000 Setup Wizard window appears. 7. When the Regional Settings window appears, select your region, and then click Next. 8. Enter your name and organization in the Personalize Your Software window and click Next. 9. Enter the Windows product key, which is printed on the Microsoft label on your computer. Then click Next. 10. When the Computer Name and Administrator Password window appears, enter a name for your computer and a password, if desired. Then click Next. 11. Enter the date and time in the Date and Time Settings window and click Next. Windows 2000 installs components and configures the computer. 12. When the Completing the Windows 2000 Setup Wizard window appears, remove the CD from the drive and click Finish. The computer automatically restarts. Enabling Hibernate Mode 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings and click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Power Management icon. 3. Click the Hibernate tab. file://C:\temp\~hhBF4E.htm 2/27/2003 Reinstalling Software Page 11 of 11 4. Ensure that Enable hibernate support is selected and click Apply. 5. Click OK to close the Control Panel. file://C:\temp\~hhBF4E.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 1 of 21 Adding and Replacing Parts Adding Memory Adding a Mini PCI Card Adding a Modem Replacing the Hard Drive Replacing the Bluetooth Card Connecting a Television to the Computer Adding Memory You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board. See

"Specifications" for information on the memory supported by your computer. Install only memory modules are intended for your computer. NOTE: Memory modules purchased from Dell are covered under your computer CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. 1. Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent scratching the computer cover. 2. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. 3. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking station for instructions. 4. Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 5. Wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then disconnect any attached devices. 6. Remove any installed PC Cards, batteries, and module bay devices. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer. Continue to ground yourself periodically during this procedure. 7. Turn the computer over, loosen the captive screw from the memory module cover, and then remove cover. file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 2 of 21 1 captive screw 2 memory module cover NOTICE: To prevent damage to the memory module connector, do not use tools to spread the module securing clips. 8. If you are replacing a memory module, remove the existing module:

a. Use your fingertips to carefully spread apart the securing clips on each end of the memory connector until the module pops up. b. Remove the module from the connector. file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 3 of 21 1 securing clips (2 per connector) 2 memory module NOTICE: If you need to install memory modules in two connectors, install a memory module in the connector labeled "DIMM A" before you install a module in the connector labeled "DIMM B." Insert memory modules at a 45-degree angle to avoid damaging the connector. 9. Ground yourself and install the new memory module:

a. Align the notch in the module edge connector with the tab in the connector slot. b. Slide the module firmly into the slot at a 45-degree angle, and rotate the module down until it clicks into place. If you do not feel the click, remove the module and reinstall it. NOTE: If the memory module is not installed properly, the computer may not boot properly. No error message indicates this failure. 10. Replace the cover. NOTICE: If the cover is difficult to close, remove the module and reinstall it. Forcing the cover to close may damage your computer. file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 4 of 21 1 captive screw 2 memory module cover 11. Insert the battery into the battery bay, or connect the AC adapter to your computer and an electrical outlet. 12. Turn on the computer. As the computer boots, it detects the additional memory and automatically updates the system configuration information. To confirm the amount of memory installed in the computer:

In the Microsoft Windows XP operating system, click the Start button, click Help and Support, then click Computer Information.

In Windows 2000, right-click the My Computer icon on your desktop, and then click the General tab. Adding a Mini PCI Card If you ordered a Mini PCI card with your computer, the card is already installed. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. 1. Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent scratching the computer cover. 2. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. 3. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking station for instructions. file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 5 of 21 4. Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 5. Wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then disconnect any attached devices. 6. Remove any installed PC Cards, batteries, and module bay devices. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer. Continue to ground yourself periodically during this procedure. 7. Turn the computer over. 8. Loosen the captive screw from the Mini PCI card/modem cover, and remove the cover. 1 captive screw 2 Mini PCI card/modem cover 9. If a Mini PCI card is not already installed, go to step 10. If you are replacing a Mini PCI card, remove existing card:

a. Disconnect the Mini PCI card from any attached cables. b. Release the Mini PCI card by spreading the metal securing tabs until the card pops up slightly. c. Lift the Mini PCI card out of its connector. file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 6 of 21 1 Mini PCI card connector 2 Mini PCI card 3 antenna cables (2) NOTICE: To avoid damaging the Mini PCI card, never place cables on top of or under the NOTICE: The connectors are keyed to ensure correct insertion. If you feel resistance, check the connectors and realign the card. 10. Align the Mini PCI card with the connector at a 45-degree angle, and press the Mini PCI card into the connector until you feel a click. 11. Connect the antenna cables to the Mini PCI. file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 7 of 21 1 Mini PCI card 2 antenna cables (2) 12. Replace the cover and tighten the screw. Adding a Modem If you ordered the optional modem at the same time that you ordered your computer, Dell installed the for you. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and 1. Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent scratching the computer cover. 2. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 3. If the computer is docked, undock it. 4. Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 5. Wait 10 to 20 seconds and then disconnect any attached devices. 6. Remove any installed PC Cards, batteries, and devices. 7. Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer, and continue to do so periodically during this procedure. 8. Turn the computer over, and loosen the captive screw from the Mini PCI card/modem cover. file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 8 of 21 1 captive screw 2 Mini PCI card/modem cover 9. If a modem is not already installed, go to step 10. If you are replacing a modem, remove the existing modem:

a. Remove the screws securing the modem to the system board, and set it aside. b. Pull straight up on the attached pull-tab to lift the modem out of its connector on the system board, and disconnect the modem cable. file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 9 of 21 1 modem cable 2 modem 3 pull-tab 4 screw 5 system board connector 10. Connect the modem cable to the modem. NOTICE: The cable connectors are keyed for correct insertion; do not force the 11. Align the modem with the screw hole, and press the modem into the connector on the system board. 12. Install the screw to secure the modem to the system board. 13. Replace the Mini PCI card/modem cover. Replacing the Hard Drive CAUTION: If you remove the hard drive from the computer when the drive is hot, do not the metal housing of the hard drive. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent data loss, shut down your computer before removing the hard drive. Do not the hard drive while the computer is on, in standby mode, or in hibernate mode. NOTICE: Hard drives are extremely fragile; even a slight bump can damage the NOTE: Dell does not guarantee compatibility or provide support for hard drives from sources other than Dell. To replace the hard drive in the hard drive bay:

1. Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent scratching the computer cover. 2. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. 3. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking station for instructions. 4. Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 5. Wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then disconnect any attached devices. 6. Remove any installed PC Cards, batteries, and module bay devices. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer. Continue to ground yourself file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 10 of 21 periodically during this procedure. 7. Turn the computer over, and remove the hard drive screw. 1 hard drive screw NOTICE: When the hard drive is not in the computer, store it in protective antistatic packaging. For precautions on preventing electrostatic discharge, see the safety instructions in the System Guide. 8. Slide the hard drive out of the computer. 9. Remove the new drive from its packaging. Save the original packaging for storing or shipping the hard drive. NOTICE: Use firm and even pressure to slide the drive into place. If you use excessive force, you may damage the connector. 10. Slide the hard drive into the bay until it is fully seated. 11. Replace and tighten the screw. 12. Use the Operating System CD to install the operating system for your computer. 13. Use the Drivers and Utilities CD to install the drivers and utilities for your computer. Replacing the Bluetooth Card If you ordered a Bluetooth card with your computer, the card is already installed. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 11 of 21 1. Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent scratching the computer cover. 2. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. 3. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 4. Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 5. Wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then disconnect any attached devices. 6. Remove any installed PC Cards, batteries, and module bay devices. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer. Continue to ground yourself periodically during this procedure. 7. Remove the hard drive. 8. Pull the Bluetooth card connector out of the system board connector. 9. Pull the cable to remove the Bluetooth card from the computer. 1 Bluetooth card 2 system board connector 3 Bluetooth card connector 4 cable Connecting a Television to the Computer file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 12 of 21 NOTE: Video and audio cables for connecting your computer to a television are not included with your computer. Cables may be purchased at most consumer electronics stores. Your computer has an S-video TV-out connector that, together with the included TV/digital audio adapter enables you to connect the computer to a television and/or stereo audio device. The TV/digital audio adapter cable provides connections for S-video, composite video, and S/PDIF digital audio. 1 S-video TV-out connector 2 TV/digital audio adapter cable 3 S/PDIF digital audio connector 4 composite video connector 5 S-video connector For televisions and audio devices without support for S/PDIF digital audio, you can use the audio connector on the side of the computer to connect the computer to your television or audio device. It is recommended that you connect video and audio cables to your computer in one of the following combinations:

NOTE: Diagrams for each connection combination appear at the beginning of each subsection to help determine which method you should use.

S-video and standard audio

S-video and digital audio

Composite video and standard audio

Composite video and digital audio When you complete the cable connection, see "Enabling the Display Settings for a Television" to ensure that computer recognizes and works properly with the television. Additionally, if you are using S/PDIF digital see "Enabling S/PDIF Digital Audio". S-Video and Standard Audio file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 13 of 21 Before you begin, ensure that you have the following cables:

1 TV/digital audio adapter cable 2 S-video cable 3 audio cable 1. Turn off the computer and the television and/or audio device you want to connect. NOTE: You can connect an S-video cable directly to the S-video connector on the computer (without video adapter cable) if your television or audio device supports S-video but not S/PDIF digital audio. 2. Connect the TV/digital audio adapter cable to the S-video TV-out connector on your computer. 3. Plug one end of the S-video cable in to the S-video connector on the TV/digital audio adapter cable. file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 14 of 21 4. Plug the other end of the S-video cable in to your television. 5. Plug the single-connector end of the audio cable in to the headphone connector on your computer. 6. Plug the two RCA connectors on the other end of the audio cable in to the audio input connectors on 7. Turn on the television and any audio device you connected, and then turn on the computer. 8. See "Enabling the Display Settings for a Television" to ensure that the computer recognizes and works television or other audio device. properly with the television. S-Video and Digital Audio file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 15 of 21 Before you begin, ensure that you have the following cables:

1 TV/digital audio adapter cable 2 S-video cable 3 S/PDIF digital audio cable 1. Turn off the computer and the television and/or audio device you want to connect. 2. Connect the TV/digital audio adapter cable to the S-video TV-out connector on your computer. 3. Plug one end of the S-video cable in to the S-video connector on the TV/digital audio adapter cable. 4. Plug the other end of the S-video cable in to the S-video connector on the television. 5. Plug one end of the S/PDIF digital audio cable in to the digital audio connector on the TV/digital audio adapter cable. 6. Plug the other end of the S/PDIF digital audio cable in to the audio input connector on your television or file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 16 of 21 other audio device. Composite Video and Standard Audio Before you begin, ensure that you have the following cables:

1 TV/digital audio adapter cable 2 composite video cable 3 audio cable 1. Turn off the computer and the television and/or audio device you want to connect. 2. Connect the TV/digital audio adapter cable to the S-video TV-out connector on the computer. 3. Plug one end of the composite video cable in to the composite video connector on the TV/digital audio adapter cable. file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 17 of 21 4. Plug the other end of the composite video cable in to the composite video connector on the television. 5. Plug the single-connector end of the audio cable in to the headphone connector on the computer. 6. Plug the two RCA connectors on the other end of the audio cable in to the audio input connectors on television or other audio device. Composite Video and Digital Audio Before you begin, ensure that you have the following cables:

file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 18 of 21 1 TV/digital audio adapter cable 2 composite video cable 3 S/PDIF digital audio cable 1. Turn off the computer and the television and/or audio device you want to connect. 2. Connect the TV/digital audio adapter cable to the S-video TV-out connector on the computer. 3. Plug one end of the composite video cable in to the composite video connector on the TV/digital audio adapter cable. 4. Plug the other end of the composite video cable in to the composite video connector on the television. 5. Plug one end of the S/PDIF digital audio cable in to the S/PDIF audio connector on the TV/digital audio adapter cable. 6. Plug the other end of the digital audio cable in to the S/PDIF connector on your television or other audio device. file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 19 of 21 Enabling the Display Settings for a Television NVIDIA Video Controller NOTE: Ensure that you properly connect the television before you enable the display 1. Open the Control Panel window. In Windows XP, click the Start button and then click the Control Panel icon. In Windows 2000, click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Display icon, click the Settings tab, and then click Advanced. 3. Click the TwinView tab. 4. Click the Clone button to enable the television. NOTE: Various programs access the hardware in different ways. You may or may not need to click the primary button for operations other than playing DVDs. 5. Click Apply. 6. Click OK to confirm the settings change. 7. Click Yes to keep the new settings. 8. Click OK. Enabling S/PDIF Digital Audio To enable Dolby Digital 5.1 audio for DVD playback, see "Enabling Dolby Digital 5.1 Audio for DVD Playback."

Enabling Dolby Digital 5.1 Audio for DVD Playback If your computer has a DVD drive, you can enable Dolby Digital 5.1 audio for DVD playback. 1. Double-click the InterVideo WinDVD icon on the Windows desktop. 2. Insert a DVD into the DVD drive. If the DVD begins playing, click the stop button. file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 20 of 21 3. Click the Properties (wrench) icon. 4. Click the Audio tab. 5. Click Enable S/PDIF output. 6. Click Apply. 7. Click OK. Enabling S/PDIF in the Windows Audio Driver NOTE: Enabling S/PDIF in Windows disables the sound from the headphone 1. Double-click the speaker icon in the Windows notification area. 2. Click the Options menu and then click Advanced Controls. 3. Click Advanced. file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 21 of 21 4. Click Enable S/PDIF. 5. Click Close. 6. Click OK. file://C:\temp\~hh1CAE.htm 2/27/2003 Using the System Setup Program Page 1 of 4 Using the System Setup Program Overview Viewing the System Setup Screens System Setup Screens Commonly Used Options Overview NOTE: Your operating system may automatically configure most of the options available in the system setup program, thus overriding options that you set through the system setup program. (An the External Hot Key option, which you can disable or enable only through the system setup For more information on configuring features for your operating system, see your Microsoft Help or the Windows Help and Support Center. You can use the system setup program as follows:

To set or change user-selectable featuresfor example, your computer password

To verify information about the computer's current configuration, such as the amount of system After you set up the computer, run the system setup program to familiarize yourself with your system configuration information and optional settings. You may want to write down the information for future reference. The system setup screens display the current setup information and settings for your computer, such as:

System configuration

Boot order

Boot (start-up) configuration and docking-device configuration settings

Basic device configuration settings

System security and hard-drive password settings NOTICE: Unless you are an expert computer user or are directed to do so by Dell technical support, do not change the settings for the system setup program. Certain changes might make your computer incorrectly. Viewing the System Setup Screens 1. Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2. When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. file://C:\temp\~hhD9E6.htm 2/27/2003 Using the System Setup Program Page 2 of 4 System Setup Screens On each screen, the system setup options are listed at the left. To the right of each option is the setting or for that option. You can change settings that appear as white type on the screen. Options or values that you cannot change (because they are determined by the computer) appear less bright. The upper-right corner of the screen displays help information for the currently highlighted option; the lower-

right corner displays information about the computer. System setup key functions are listed across the bottom of the screen. Commonly Used Options Certain options require that you reboot the computer for new settings to take effect. Changing the Boot Sequence The boot sequence, or boot order, tells the computer where to look to find the software needed to start the operating system. You can control the boot sequence and enable/disable devices using the Boot Order page the system setup program. NOTE: To change the boot sequence on a one-time-only basis, see "Performing a One-Time The Boot Order page displays a general list of the bootable devices that may be installed in your computer, including but not limited to the following:

Diskette Drive

Modular bay HDD

Internal HDD

CD/DVD/CD-RW drive During the boot routine, the computer starts at the top of the list and scans each enabled device for the operating system start-up files. When the computer finds the files, it stops searching and starts the system. To control the boot devices, select (highlight) a device by pressing the disable the device or change its order in the list. or key, and then enable

To enable or disable a device, highlight the item and press

. Enabled items appear as white and display a small triangle to the left; disabled items appear blue or dimmed without a triangle.

To reorder a device in the list, highlight the device and then press move the highlighted device up or down. or

(not case-sensitive) file://C:\temp\~hhD9E6.htm 2/27/2003 Using the System Setup Program Page 3 of 4 Boot sequence changes take effect as soon as you save the changes and exit the system setup program. Performing a One-Time Boot You can set a one-time-only boot sequence without entering the system setup program. (You can also use this procedure to boot the Dell Diagnostics on the diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive.) 1. Turn off the computer. 2. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 3. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. 4. Turn on the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 5. When the boot device list appears, highlight the device from which you want to boot and press

. The computer boots to the selected device. The next time you reboot the computer, the previous boot order is restored. Changing Printer Modes Set the Parallel Mode option according to the type of printer or device connected to the parallel connector. determine the correct mode to use, see the documentation that came with the device. Setting Parallel Mode to Disabled disables the parallel port and the port's LPT address, freeing computer resources for another device to use. Changing COM Ports Serial Port allows you to map the serial port COM address or disable the serial port and its address, freeing computer resources for another device to use. Enabling the Infrared Sensor 1. Enter the system setup program:

a. Turn on your computer. b. Press when the DELL logo appears. 2. Press until you locate Infrared Data Port under Basic Device Configuration. file://C:\temp\~hhD9E6.htm 2/27/2003 Using the System Setup Program Page 4 of 4 NOTE: Ensure that the COM port that you select is different from the COM port assigned to the serial connector. 3. Press the down-arrow key to select the Infrared Data Port setting, and press the right-arrow key to change the setting to a COM port. 4. Press the down-arrow key to select the Infrared Mode setting, and press the right-arrow key to the setting to Fast IR or Slow IR. It is recommended that you use Fast IR. If the infrared device cannot communicate with your shut down the computer and repeat steps 1 through 5 to change the setting to Slow IR. 5. Press and then click Yes to save the changes and exit the system setup program. If you are prompted to restart your computer, click Yes. 6. Follow the instructions on the screen. 7. After the infrared sensor has been enabled, click Yes to restart the computer. NOTE: If neither Fast IR nor Slow IR work, contact the infrared device After you enable the infrared sensor, you can use it to establish a link to an infrared device. To set up and an infrared device, see the infrared device documentation and the Microsoft Windows Help and Support Center (Windows Help in Windows 2000). file://C:\temp\~hhD9E6.htm 2/27/2003 Alert Standard Format (ASF) Page 1 of 1 Alert Standard Format (ASF) ASF is a DMTF management standard that specifies "pre-operating system" or "operating system absent"

alerting techniques. The standard is designed to generate an alert on potential security and fault conditions when the operating system is in a sleep state or the system is turned off. ASF is designed to supersede operating system-absent alerting technologies. Your computer supports the following ASF alerts and remote capabilities:

Alert Chassis Intrusion Physical Security Violation/Chassis Intrusion Physical Security Violation Event Cleared Failure to Boot to BIOS System Password Violation Entity Presence Description The docking device has been opened the PCI slot has been compromised. The BIOS did not complete loading upon initiation. The system password is invalid (alert occurs after three failed attempts). Periodic heartbeats have been transmitted to verify system presence. For more information about Dell's ASF implementation, see ASF for Dell Portable Computers and the ASF Administrator's Guide for Dell Portable Computers, which are available on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. file://C:\temp\~hh410E.htm 2/27/2003 Getting Help Page 1 of 16 Getting Help Technical Assistance Problems With Your Order Product Information Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit Before You Call Contacting Dell Technical Assistance If you need help with a technical problem, Dell is ready to assist you. CAUTION: If you need to remove the computer covers, first disconnect the computer power and modem cables from all electrical outlets. 1. Complete the procedures in "Solving Problems."

2. Run the Dell Diagnostics. 3. Make a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist and fill it out. 4. Use Dell's extensive suite of online services available at Dell Support (support.dell.com) for help with installation and troubleshooting procedures. If the preceding steps have not resolved the problem, contact Dell. 5. NOTE: Call technical support from a telephone near or at the computer so that technical support can assist you with any necessary procedures. NOTE: Dell's Express Service Code system may not be available in all countries. When prompted by Dell's automated telephone system, enter your Express Service Code to route the call directly to the proper support personnel. If you do not have an Express Service Code, open the Accessories folder, double-click the Express Service Code icon, and follow the directions. For instructions on using the technical support service, see "Technical Support Service."

NOTE: Some of the following services are not always available in all locations outside the continental U.S. Call your local Dell representative for information on availability. Online Services You can access Dell Support at support.dell.com. Select your region on the WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT page, and fill in the requested details to access help tools and information. You can contact Dell electronically using the following addresses:

World Wide Web file://C:\temp\~hh9AFD.htm 2/27/2003 Getting Help Page 2 of 16 www.dell.com/

www.dell.com/ap/ (for Asian/Pacific countries only) www.euro.dell.com (for Europe only) www.dell.com/la/ (for Latin American countries)

Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP) ftp.dell.com/

Log in as user: anonymous, and use your e-mail address as your password.

Electronic Support Service mobile_support@us.dell.com support@us.dell.com apsupport@dell.com (for Asian/Pacific countries only) support.euro.dell.com (for Europe only)

Electronic Quote Service sales@dell.com apmarketing@dell.com (for Asian/Pacific countries only)

Electronic Information Service info@dell.com AutoTech Service Dell's automated technical support serviceAutoTechprovides recorded answers to the questions most frequently asked by Dell customers about their portable and desktop computers. When you call AutoTech, use your touch-tone telephone to select the subjects that correspond to your questions. The AutoTech service is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. You can also access this service through the technical support service. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. Automated Order-Status Service To check on the status of any Dell products that you have ordered, you can go to support.dell.com, or you call the automated order-status service. A recording prompts you for the information needed to locate and report on your order. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. Technical Support Service file://C:\temp\~hh9AFD.htm 2/27/2003 Getting Help Page 3 of 16 Dell's technical support service is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to answer your questions about hardware. Our technical support staff uses computer-based diagnostics to provide fast, accurate answers. To contact Dell's technical support service, see "Technical Assistance" and then call the number for your as listed in "Contacting Dell."

Problems With Your Order If you have a problem with your order, such as missing parts, wrong parts, or incorrect billing, contact Dell for customer assistance. Have your invoice or packing slip handy when you call. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. Product Information If you need information about additional products available from Dell, or if you would like to place an order, the Dell website at www.dell.com. For the telephone number to call to speak to a sales specialist, see the contact numbers for your region. Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit Prepare all items being returned, whether for repair or credit, as follows:

1. Call Dell to obtain a Return Material Authorization Number, and write it clearly and prominently on the outside of the box. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. 2. 3. 4. Include a copy of the invoice and a letter describing the reason for the return. Include a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist indicating the tests you have run and any error messages reported by the Dell Diagnostics. Include any accessories that belong with the item(s) being returned (power cables, software floppy guides, and so on) if the return is for credit. 5. Pack the equipment to be returned in the original (or equivalent) packing materials. You are responsible for paying shipping expenses. You are also responsible for insuring any product returned, and you assume the risk of loss during shipment to Dell. Collect On Delivery (C.O.D.) packages are not accepted. Returns that are missing any of the preceding requirements will be refused at Dell's receiving dock and to you. file://C:\temp\~hh9AFD.htm 2/27/2003 Getting Help Page 4 of 16 Before You Call NOTE: Have your Express Service Code ready when you call. The code helps Dell's automated-support telephone system direct your call more efficiently. Remember to fill out the Diagnostics Checklist. If possible, turn on your computer before you call Dell for technical assistance and call from a telephone at or near the computer. You may be asked to type some commands at the keyboard, relay detailed information during operations, or try other troubleshooting steps possible only at the computer itself. Ensure that the computer documentation is available. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. Diagnostics Checklist Name:

Date:

Address:

Phone number:

Service tag (bar code on the back of the computer):

Express Service Code:

Return Material Authorization Number (if provided by Dell support technician):

Operating system and version:

Devices:

Expansion cards:

Are you connected to a network? Yes No Network, version, and network adapter:

Programs and versions:

See your operating system documentation to determine the contents of the system's start-up files. If the computer is connected to a printer, print each file. Otherwise, record the contents of each file before calling Dell. Error message, beep code, or diagnostic code:

Description of problem and troubleshooting procedures you performed:

Contacting Dell To contact Dell electronically, you can access the following websites:

www.dell.com

support.dell.com (technical support) file://C:\temp\~hh9AFD.htm 2/27/2003 Getting Help Page 5 of 16

premiersupport.dell.com (technical support for educational, government, healthcare, and medium/large business customers, including Premier, Platinum, and Gold customers) For specific web addresses for your country, find the appropriate country section in the table below. NOTE: Toll-free numbers are for use within the country for which they are listed. When you need to contact Dell, use the electronic addresses, telephone numbers, and codes provided in the following table. If you need assistance in determining which codes to use, contact a local or an international operator. Country (City) International Code Country Code City Code Anguilla Antigua and Barbuda Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address General Support General Support Argentina (Buenos Aires) Website: www.dell.com.ar Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers toll-free: 800-335-0031 1-800-805-5924 Tech Support and Customer Care toll-free: 0-800-444-0733 International Access Code: 00 Sales Country Code: 54 Tech Support Fax City Code: 11 Aruba Customer Care Fax General Support Australia (Sydney) E-mail (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com International Access Code: 0011 Country Code: 61 City Code: 2 E-mail (New Zealand): nz_tech_support@dell.com Home and Small Business Government and Business Preferred Accounts Division (PAD) Customer Care Corporate Sales Transaction Sales Fax Austria (Vienna) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 900 Country Code: 43 City Code: 1 E-mail: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Home/Small Business Sales Home/Small Business Fax Home/Small Business Customer Care Preferred Accounts/Corporate Customer Care Home/Small Business Technical Support Preferred Accounts/Corporate Technical Support file://C:\temp\~hh9AFD.htm 0-810-444-3355 11 4515 7139 11 4515 7138 toll-free: 800-1578 1-300-65-55-33 toll-free: 1-800-633-559 toll-free: 1-800-060-889 toll-free: 1-800-819-339 toll-free: 1-800-808-385 toll-free: 1-800-808-312 toll-free: 1-800-818-341 01 795 67602 01 795 67605 01 795 67603 0660 8056 01 795 67604 0660 8779 2/27/2003 Getting Help Page 6 of 16 Bahamas Barbados Switchboard General Support General Support Belgium (Brussels) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 32 City Code: 2 E-mail: tech_be@dell.com E-mail for French Speaking Customers:

support.euro.dell.com/be/fr/emaildell/

Technical Support Customer Care 01 491 04 0 toll-free: 1-866-278-6818 1-800-534-3066 02 481 92 88 02 481 91 19 Home/Small Business Sales toll-free: 0800 16884 Corporate Sales Fax Switchboard General Support General Support Website: www.dell.com/br Customer Support, Technical Support Tech Support Fax Bermuda Bolivia Brazil International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 55 Customer Care Fax City Code: 51 British Virgin Islands Brunei Sales General Support Customer Technical Support (Penang, Malaysia) Country Code: 673 Canada (North York, Ontario) International Access Code: 011 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Transaction Sales (Penang, Malaysia) Automated Order-Status System AutoTech (automated technical support) TechFax Customer Care (home/small business) 02 481 91 00 02 481 92 99 02 481 91 00 1-800-342-0671 toll-free: 800-10-0238 0800 90 3355 51 481 5470 51 481 5480 0800 90 3390 toll-free: 1-866-278-6820 604 633 4966 604 633 4949 604 633 4955 toll-free: 1-800-433-9014 toll-free: 1-800-247-9362 toll-free: 1-800-950-1329 toll-free: 1-800-847-4096 Customer Care (med./large business, government) toll-free: 1-800-326-9463 Technical Support (home/small business) toll-free: 1-800-847-4096 Technical Support (med./large bus., government) toll-free: 1-800-847-4096 Sales (direct salesfrom outside Toronto) toll-free: 1-800-387-5752 Sales (direct salesfrom within Toronto) 416 758-2200 Sales (federal government, education, and medical) toll-free: 1-800-567-7542 Cayman Islands General Support 1-800-805-7541 Chile (Santiago) Sales, Customer Support, and Technical Support toll-free: 1230-020-4823 file://C:\temp\~hh9AFD.htm 2/27/2003 Home and Small Business Technical Support toll-free: 800 858 2437 Getting Help Country Code: 56 City Code: 2 China (Xiamen) Tech Support website: support.ap.dell.com/china Country Code: 86 City Code: 592 Colombia Costa Rica Czech Republic

(Prague) Tech Support E-mail: cn_support@dell.com Tech Support Fax Corporate Accounts Technical Support Customer Experience Home and Small Business Preferred Accounts Division Large Corporate Accounts GCP Large Corporate Accounts Key Accounts Large Corporate Accounts North Large Corporate Accounts North Government and Education Large Corporate Accounts East Large Corporate Accounts East Government and Education Large Corporate Accounts Queue Team Large Corporate Accounts South Large Corporate Accounts West Large Corporate Accounts Spare Parts General Support General Support Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: czech_dell@dell.com International Access Code: 00 Technical Support Customer Care Country Code: 420 Fax City Code: 2 Denmark

(Copenhagen) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 45 TechFax Switchboard Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail Support (portable computers):

den_nbk_support@dell.com E-mail Support (desktop computers):

den_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers):

Nordic_server_support@dell.com Page 7 of 16 818 1350 toll-free: 800 858 2333 toll-free: 800 858 2060 toll-free: 800 858 2222 toll-free: 800 858 2062 toll-free: 800 858 2055 toll-free: 800 858 2628 toll-free: 800 858 2999 toll-free: 800 858 2955 toll-free: 800 858 2020 toll-free: 800 858 2669 toll-free: 800 858 2572 toll-free: 800 858 2355 toll-free: 800 858 2811 toll-free: 800 858 2621 980-9-15-3978 0800-012-0435 02 22 83 27 27 02 22 83 27 11 02 22 83 27 14 02 22 83 27 28 02 22 83 27 11 file://C:\temp\~hh9AFD.htm 2/27/2003 Getting Help Technical Support Customer Care (Relational) Home/Small Business Customer Care Switchboard (Relational) Fax Switchboard (Relational) Switchboard (Home/Small Business) Fax Switchboard (Home/Small Business) Dominica General Support Dominican Republic General Support Ecuador El Salvador General Support General Support Finland (Helsinki) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 990 Country Code: 358 City Code: 9 E-mail: fin_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers): Nordic_support@dell.com Technical Support Technical Support Fax Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Customer Care Fax Switchboard France (Paris)

(Montpellier) Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/fr/fr/emaildell/

International Access Code: 00 Home and Small Business Technical Support Country Code: 33 Customer Care City Codes: (1) (4) Switchboard Switchboard (calls from outside of France) Sales Fax Fax (calls from outside of France) Corporate Technical Support Customer Care Switchboard Sales Fax Germany (Langen) Website: support.euro.dell.com file://C:\temp\~hh9AFD.htm Page 8 of 16 7023 0182 7023 0184 3287 5505 3287 1200 3287 1201 3287 5000 3287 5001 toll-free: 1-866-278-6821 1-800-148-0530 toll-free: 999-119 01-899-753-0777 09 253 313 60 09 253 313 81 09 253 313 38 09 693 791 94 09 253 313 99 09 253 313 00 0825 387 270 0825 823 833 0825 004 700 04 99 75 40 00 0825 004 700 0825 004 701 04 99 75 40 01 0825 004 719 0825 338 339 01 55 94 71 00 01 55 94 71 00 01 55 94 71 01 2/27/2003 Getting Help International Access Code: 00 E-mail: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Technical Support Country Code: 49 Home/Small Business Customer Care City Code: 6103 Global Segment Customer Care Preferred Accounts Customer Care Large Accounts Customer Care Public Accounts Customer Care Grenada Guatemala Guyana Hong Kong International Access Code: 001 Switchboard General Support General Support General Support Technical Support (Dimension and Inspiron) Technical Support (OptiPlex, Latitude, and Dell Precision) Page 9 of 16 06103 766-7200 0180-5-224400 06103 766-9570 06103 766-9420 06103 766-9560 06103 766-9555 06103 766-7000 toll-free: 1-866-540-3355 1-800-999-0136 toll-free: 1-877-270-4609 296 93188 296 93191 Customer Service (non-technical, post-sales issues) 800 93 8291 Country Code: 852 Transaction Sales Large Corporate Accounts HK Large Corporate Accounts GCP HK India Technical Support Sales Ireland

(Cherrywood) Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: dell_direct_support@dell.com International Access Code: 16 Ireland Technical Support U.K. Technical Support (dial within U.K. only) Country Code: 353 Home User Customer Care City Code: 1 Small Business Customer Care U.K. Customer Care (dial within U.K. only) Corporate Customer Care Ireland Sales U.K. Sales (dial within U.K. only) SalesFax Fax Switchboard Italy (Milan) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/it/it/emaildell/

Home and Small Business Country Code: 39 Technical Support file://C:\temp\~hh9AFD.htm toll-free: 800 96 4109 toll-free: 800 96 4108 toll-free: 800 90 3708 1600 33 8045 1600 33 8044 1850 543 543 0870 908 0800 01 204 4095 01 204 4444 0870 906 0010 01 204 4003 01 204 4444 0870 907 4000 01 204 0144 01 204 5960 01 204 4444 02 577 826 90 2/27/2003 Getting Help City Code: 02 Customer Care Fax Switchboard Corporate Technical Support Customer Care Fax Switchboard Page 10 of 16 02 696 821 14 02 696 821 13 02 696 821 12 02 577 826 90 02 577 825 55 02 575 035 30 02 577 821 Jamaica General Support (dial from within Jamaica only) 1-800-682-3639 Japan (Kawasaki) Website: support.jp.dell.com International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 81 City Code: 44 Technical Support (servers) toll-free: 0120-198-498 Technical Support outside of Japan (servers) 81-44-556-4162 Technical Support (Dimension and Inspiron) toll-free: 0120-198-226 Technical Support outside of Japan (Dimension and Inspiron) Technical Support (Dell Precision, OptiPlex, and Latitude) Technical Support outside of Japan (Dell Precision, OptiPlex, and Latitude) 24-Hour Automated Order Service Customer Care Business Sales Division (up to 400 employees) Preferred Accounts Division Sales (over 400 employees) Large Corporate Accounts Sales (over 3500 employees) Public Sales (government agencies, educational institutions, and medical institutions) Global Segment Japan Individual User Faxbox Service Switchboard 81-44-520-1435 toll-free:0120-198-433 81-44-556-3894 044-556-3801 044-556-4240 044-556-1465 044-556-3433 044-556-3430 044-556-1469 044-556-3469 044-556-1760 044-556-3490 044-556-4300 Korea (Seoul) Technical Support International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 82 City Code: 2 Sales Customer Service (Seoul, Korea) Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Fax Switchboard Latin America Customer Technical Support (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) toll-free: 080-200-3800 toll-free: 080-200-3600 toll-free: 080-200-3800 604 633 4949 2194-6202 2194-6000 512 728-4093 file://C:\temp\~hh9AFD.htm 2/27/2003 Getting Help Customer Service (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Fax (Technical Support and Customer Service) Texas, U.S.A.) Sales (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) SalesFax (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Luxembourg Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: tech_be@dell.com Page 11 of 16 512 728-3619 512 728-3883 512 728-4397 512 728-4600 or 512 728-3772 International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 352 Technical Support (Brussels, Belgium) 02 481 92 88 Home/Small Business Sales (Brussels, Belgium) toll-free: 080016884 Corporate Sales (Brussels, Belgium) Customer Care (Brussels, Belgium) Fax (Brussels, Belgium) Switchboard (Brussels, Belgium) Macao Technical Support Country Code: 853 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Transaction Sales Malaysia (Penang) Technical Support International Access Code: 00 Customer Service Country Code: 60 City Code: 4 Mexico Transaction Sales Corporate Sales Customer Technical Support International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 52 Sales Customer Service Main Montserrat General Support Netherlands Antilles General Support Netherlands

(Amsterdam) Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail (Technical Support):

02 481 91 00 02 481 91 19 02 481 92 99 02 481 91 00 toll-free: 0800 582 604 633 4949 toll-free: 0800 581 toll-free: 1 800 888 298 04 633 4949 toll-free: 1 800 888 202 toll-free: 1 800 888 213 001-877-384-8979 or 001-877-269-3383 50-81-8800 or 01-800-888-3355 001-877-384-8979 or 001-877-269-3383 50-81-8800 or 01-800-888-3355 toll-free: 1-866-278-6822 001-800-882-1519 file://C:\temp\~hh9AFD.htm 2/27/2003 Getting Help Page 12 of 16 International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 31 City Code: 20

(Enterprise): nl_server_support@dell.com

(Latitude): nl_latitude_support@dell.com

(Inspiron): nl_inspiron_support@dell.com

(Dimension): nl_dimension_support@dell.com

(OptiPlex): nl_optiplex_support@dell.com

(Dell Precision): nl_workstation_support@dell.com Technical Support Technical Support Fax Home/Small Business Customer Care Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Sales Relational Sales Home/Small Business Sales Fax Relational Sales Fax Switchboard Switchboard Fax New Zealand E-mail (New Zealand): nz_tech_support@dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 64 E-mail (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com Home and Small Business Government and Business Sales Fax 020 674 45 00 020 674 47 66 020 674 42 00 020 674 4325 020 674 55 00 020 674 50 00 020 674 47 75 020 674 47 50 020 674 50 00 020 674 47 50 0800 446 255 0800 444 617 0800 441 567 0800 441 566 Nicaragua General Support 001-800-220-1006 Norway (Lysaker) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 E-mail Support (portable computers):

nor_nbk_support@dell.com Country Code: 47 E-mail Support (desktop computers):

nor_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers):

nordic_server_support@dell.com Technical Support Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Customer Care Switchboard file://C:\temp\~hh9AFD.htm 671 16882 671 17514 23162298 671 16800 2/27/2003 Getting Help Panama Peru Fax Switchboard General Support General Support Poland (Warsaw) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 011 E-mail: pl_support@dell.com Customer Service Phone Country Code: 48 City Code: 22 Customer Care Sales Customer Service Fax Reception Desk Fax Switchboard Portugal E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/

International Access Code: 00 Technical Support Customer Care Country Code: 35 Sales Fax Puerto Rico General Support St. Kitts and Nevis General Support St. Lucia St. Vincent and the Grenadines General Support General Support Singapore

(Singapore) Technical Support Page 13 of 16 671 16865 001-800-507-0962 0800-50-669 57 95 700 57 95 999 57 95 999 57 95 806 57 95 998 57 95 999 800 834 077 800 300 415 or 800 834 075 800 300 410 or 800 300 411 or 800 300 412 or 121 422 07 10 121 424 01 12 1-800-805-7545 toll-free: 1-877-441-4731 1-800-882-1521 toll-free: 1-877-270-4609 toll-free: 800 6011 051 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) 604 633 4949 International Access Code: 005 Country Code: 65 South Africa

(Johannesburg) International Access Code:

Transaction Sales Corporate Sales Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: dell_za_support@dell.com Technical Support Customer Care 09/091 Country Code: 27 Sales Fax City Code: 11 Switchboard Southeast Asian and Customer Technical Support, Customer Service, and file://C:\temp\~hh9AFD.htm toll-free: 800 6011 054 toll-free: 800 6011 053 011 709 7710 011 709 7707 011 709 7700 011 706 0495 011 709 7700 604 633 4810 2/27/2003 Getting Help Pacific Countries Sales (Penang, Malaysia) Spain (Madrid) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 34 City Code: 91 E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/

Home and Small Business Technical Support Customer Care Sales Switchboard Fax Corporate Technical Support Customer Care Switchboard Fax Sweden (Upplands Vasby) Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: swe_support@dell.com International Access Code: 00 E-mail Support for Latitude and Inspiron:

Swe-nbk_kats@dell.com Country Code: 46 City Code: 8 E-mail Support for OptiPlex: Swe_kats@dell.com E-mail Support for Servers:

Nordic_server_support@dell.com Technical Support Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Customer Care Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Support Fax Technical Support Sales Switzerland

(Geneva) Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: swisstech@dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 41 E-mail for French-speaking HSB and Corporate Customers:

support.euro.dell.com/ch/fr/emaildell/

Technical Support (Home and Small Business) City Code: 22 Technical Support (Corporate) Customer Care (Home and Small Business) Customer Care (Corporate) Fax Switchboard file://C:\temp\~hh9AFD.htm Page 14 of 16 902 100 130 902 118 540 902 118 541 902 118 541 902 118 539 902 100 130 902 118 546 91 722 92 00 91 722 95 83 08 590 05 199 08 590 05 642 08 587 70 527 20 140 14 44 08 590 05 594 08 590 05 185 0844 811 411 0844 822 844 0848 802 202 0848 821 721 022 799 01 90 022 799 01 01 2/27/2003 Getting Help Page 15 of 16 Taiwan Technical Support (portable and desktop computers) toll-free: 00801 86 1011 International Access Code: 002 Country Code: 886 Technical Support (servers) Transaction Sales Corporate Sales Thailand Technical Support toll-free: 0080 60 1256 toll-free: 0080 651 228 or 0800 33 556 toll-free: 0080 651 227 or 0800 33 555 toll-free: 0880 060 07 International Access Code: 001 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) 604 633 4949 Country Code: 66 Sales Trinidad/Tobago General Support Turks and Caicos Islands General Support U.K. (Bracknell) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 44 City Code: 1344 Customer Care website:

dell.co.uk/lca/customerservices E-mail: dell_direct_support@dell.com Technical Support (Corporate/Preferred Accounts/PAD

[1000+ employees]) Technical Support (direct/PAD and general) Global Accounts Customer Care Home and Small Business Customer Care Corporate Customer Care Preferred Accounts (5005000 employees) Customer Care Central Government Customer Care Local Government & Education Customer Care Health Customer Care Home and Small Business Sales Corporate/Public Sector Sales toll-free: 0880 060 09 1-800-805-8035 toll-free: 1-866-540-3355 0870 908 0500 0870 908 0800 01344 373 185 or 01344 373 186 0870 906 0010 0870 908 0500 01344 373 196 01344 373 193 01344 373 199 01344 373 194 0870 907 4000 01344 860 456 Uruguay General Support toll-free: 000-413-598-

U.S.A. (Austin, Texas) International Access Code: 011 Country Code: 1 Automated Order-Status Service toll-free: 1-800-433-9014 AutoTech (portable and desktop computers) toll-free: 1-800-247-9362 Consumer (Home and Home Office) Technical Support Customer Service toll-free: 1-800-624-9896 toll-free: 1-800-624-9897 file://C:\temp\~hh9AFD.htm 2/27/2003 Getting Help Page 16 of 16 DellNet Service and Support toll-free: 1-877-Dellnet Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-695-8133 Financial Services website: www.dellfinancialservices.com Financial Services (lease/loans) toll-free: 1-877-577-3355 Financial Services (Dell Preferred Accounts [DPA]) toll-free: 1-800-283-2210

(1-877-335-5638) Business Customer Service and Technical Support toll-free: 1-800-822-8965 Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-695-8133 Projectors Technical Support toll-free: 1-877-459-7298 Public (government, education, and healthcare) Customer Service and Technical Support toll-free: 1-800-456-3355 Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-234-1490 Dell Sales toll-free: 1-800-289-3355 or toll-free: 1-800-879-

3355 Dell Outlet Store (Dell refurbished computers) toll-free: 1-888-798-7561 Software and Peripherals Sales Spare Parts Sales Extended Service and Warranty Sales Fax Dell Services for the Deaf, Hard-of-Hearing, or Impaired U.S. Virgin Islands General Support Venezuela General Support toll-free: 1-800-671-3355 toll-free: 1-800-357-3355 toll-free: 1-800-247-4618 toll-free: 1-800-727-8320 toll-free: 1-877-DELLTTY

(1-877-335-5889) 1-877-673-3355 8001-3605 file://C:\temp\~hh9AFD.htm 2/27/2003 Specifications Page 1 of 6 Specifications Microprocessor System Information PC Card Smart Card Memory Ports and Connectors Communications Video Audio Microprocessor Microprocessor type L1 cache L2 cache Display Keyboard Touch Pad Track Stick Battery AC Adapter Physical Environmental Intel Centrino Mobile Technology or Intel Pentium M 8 KB (internal) 1 MB (on die) External bus frequency 400 MHz System Information System chip set Data bus width DRAM bus width Intel 855 64 bits 64 bits Microprocessor address bus width 32 bits PC Card CardBus controller PC Card connector Cards supported TI 7510 CardBus controller supports one Type I or Type II card 3.3 V and 5 V PC Card connector size 68 pins Data width (maximum) PCMCIA 16 bits CardBus 32 bits Smart Card Read/write capabilities reads and writes to all ISO 7816 1/2/3/4 microprocessor cards (T=0, T=1) Cards supported 3V and 5V Program technology supported Java cards Interface speed 9600115,200 BPS file://C:\temp\~hh80D.htm 2/27/2003 Specifications EMV level WHQL certification Compatibility Insert/eject cycles Memory Page 2 of 6 level 1 certified PC/SC compatible within a PKI environment certified for up to 100,000 cycles Memory module connector two user-accessible SODIMM sockets Memory module capacities Memory type Minimum memory Maximum memory Ports and Connectors Serial Parallel Video Audio USB Dell D/Bay connector Infrared sensor S-video TV-out Mini PCI Modem Network adapter IEEE 1394 Communications Modem:

Type 128MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1024 MB 266-MHz DDR SDRAM 128 MB 2 GB 9-pin connector; 16550C-

16-byte buffer connector 25-hole connector; unidirectional, bidirectional, or ECP 15-hole connector microphone miniconnector, stereo headphones/speakers miniconnector two 4-pin USB 2.0compliant connectors 4-pin USB 2.0-compliant connectors and 4 power supply pins sensor compatible with IrDA Standard 1.1 (Fast IR) and IrDA Standard 1.0 (Slow IR) 7-pin mini-DIN connector for S-

video, composite video, and S/PDIF

(TV/digital audio-adapter cable supports composite video and S/PDIF) Type IIIA Mini PCI card slot RJ-11 port RJ-45 port 4-pin serial connector v.92 56K MDC file://C:\temp\~hh80D.htm 2/27/2003 Specifications Page 3 of 6 Controller Interface Network adapter Wireless Video Video type Video controller Video memory Data bus LCD interface TV support Audio Audio type Stereo conversion Interfaces:

Internal External Speaker softmodem internal AC'97 bus 10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN on system board internal Mini PCI Wi-Fi wireless support; Bluetooth (optional, available at point of sale only) 64-bit or 128-bit hardware accelerated NVIDIA GeForce4 4200 32 MB or 64 MB 4X AGP LVDS NTSC or PAL in S-video and composite modes Intel AC'97 20-bit (stereo digital-to-analog), 18-bit (stereo analog-to-digital) AC'97 microphone miniconnector, stereo headphones/speakers miniconnector two 4-ohm speakers Internal speaker amplifier 2-W channel into 4 ohms Volume controls Display Type Dimensions:

Height Width Diagonal Maximum resolutions keyboard shortcuts or program menus WXGA or WUXGA 222.5 mm (8.76 inches) 344.5 mm (13.56 inches) 391.2 mm (15.4 inches) 1280 x 800 (WXGA) 1920 x 1200 (WUXGA) Response time (typical) 35-ms fall (maximum) file://C:\temp\~hh80D.htm 2/27/2003 Page 4 of 6 Specifications Refresh rate Operating angle Viewing angles:

Horizontal Vertical Pixel pitch 60 Hz 0 (closed) to 180 65 50 0.2588 (WXGA) 0.1725 (WUXGA) Power Consumption:

Panel with backlight (typical) 5.5 W Controls Keyboard Number of keys Key travel Key spacing Layout Touch Pad X/Y position resolution

(graphics table mode) Size:

Width Height Track Stick X/Y position resolution

(graphics table mode) Size Battery Type Dimensions:

Depth Height Width brightness can be controlled through keyboard shortcuts 87 (U.S. and Canada); 88 (Europe);

91 (Japan) 2.7 mm 0.3 mm (0.11 inch 0.016 inch) 19.05 mm 0.3 mm (0.75 inch 0.012 inch) QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji 240 cpi 64.88-mm (2.55-inch) sensor-active area 48.88-mm (1.92-inch) rectangle 250 count/sec @ 100 gf protrudes 0.5 mm (0.02 inch) higher than surrounding keycaps 9-cell "smart" lithium ion (72 WHr) 222.8 mm (8.77 inches) 22.5 mm (0.89 inch) 67 mm (2.64 inches) file://C:\temp\~hh80D.htm 2/27/2003 Page 5 of 6 Specifications Weight Voltage Charge time with computer off Operating time 0.48 kg (1.06 lb) 11.1 VDC approximately 1 hour to reach 80 percent charge approximately 3 to 4 hours; can be significantly reduced under certain power-intensive conditions Temperature range:

Operating Storage 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) AC Adapter Input voltage Input current (maximum) Input frequency Output current Output power Rated output voltage Dimensions:

Height Width Depth Weight (with cables) Temperature range:

Operating Storage Physical Height Width Depth Weight:

With travel module and 72-

WHr battery With CD drive and 72-WHr battery 100240 VAC 1.5 A 5060 Hz 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 VDC 27.94 mm (1.1 inches) 58.42 mm (2.3 inches) 133.85 mm (5.25 inches) 0.4 kg (0.9 lb) 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) 38.6 mm (1.52 inches) 361.3 mm (14.22 inches) 276.2 mm (10.87 inches) 3.18 kg (7.0 lb) 3.36 kg (7.4 lb) Environmental Temperature range:

file://C:\temp\~hh80D.htm 2/27/2003 Specifications Page 6 of 6 Operating Storage 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) Relative humidity (maximum):

Operating Storage 10% to 90% (noncondensing) 5% to 95% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration (using a vibration spectrum that simulates user environment):

Operating Storage 0.66 GRMS 1.30 GRMS Maximum shock (measured with drive in head-parked position and a 2-ms half-sine pulse):

Operating Storage Altitude (maximum):

Operating Storage 122 G 163 G 15.2 to 3048 m (50 to 10,000 ft) 15.2 to 10,668 m (50 to 35,000 file://C:\temp\~hh80D.htm 2/27/2003 Appendix Page 1 of 14 Appendix Macrovision Product Notice Ergonomic Computing Habits Regulatory Notices Warranty and Return Policy Macrovision Product Notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Ergonomic Computing Habits CAUTION: Improper or prolonged keyboard use may result in CAUTION: Viewing the display or external monitor screen for extended periods of time may result in eye strain. For comfort and efficiency, observe the following ergonomic guidelines when setting up and using your workstation:

Position your computer directly in front of you as you work.

Adjust the tilt of the computer's display, its contrast and/or brightness settings, and the lighting around you (such as overhead lights, desk lamps, and the curtains or blinds on nearby windows) to minimize reflections and glare on the display.

When using an external monitor with your computer, set the monitor at a comfortable viewing distance

(usually 450 to 610 millimeters [18 to 24 inches] from your eyes). Make sure the monitor screen is at level or slightly lower when you are sitting in front of the monitor.

Use a chair that provides good lower-back support.

Keep your forearms horizontal with your wrists in a neutral, comfortable position while using the

Always use the palm rest with the keyboard, touch pad, or track stick. Leave space to rest your hands keyboard, touch pad, track stick, or external mouse. when using an external mouse.

Let your upper arms hang naturally at your sides.

Ensure that your feet are resting flat on the floor.

When sitting, make sure the weight of your legs is on your feet and not on the front of your chair seat. Adjust your chair's height or use a footrest, if necessary, to maintain proper posture. file://C:\temp\~hh6397.htm 2/27/2003 Appendix Page 2 of 14

Vary your work activities. Try to organize your work so that you do not have to type for extended of time. When you stop typing, try to do things that use both hands. For more information about ergonomic computing habits, see the BSR/HFES 100 standard, which can be purchased on the Human Factors and Ergonomics Society (HFES) website at:

www.hfes.org/publications/HFES100.htm References:

1. American National Standards Institute. ANSI/HFES 100: American National Standards for Human Factors Engineering of Visual Display Terminal Workstations. Santa Monica, CA: Human Factors Society, Inc., 1988. 2. Human Factors and Ergonomics Society. BSR/HFES 100 Draft standard for trial use: Human Factors Engineering of Computer Workstations. Santa Monica, CA: Human Factors and Ergonomics Society, 2002. 3. International Organization for Standardization (ISO). ISO 9241 Ergonomics requirements for office work visual display terminals (VDTs). Geneva, Switzerland: International Organization for Standardization, 1992. Regulatory Notices Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) is any signal or emission, radiated in free space or conducted along power signal leads, that endangers the functioning of a radio navigation or other safety service or seriously obstructs, or repeatedly interrupts a licensed radio communications service. Radio communications services include but are not limited to AM/FM commercial broadcast, television, cellular services, radar, air-traffic pager, and Personal Communication Services (PCS). These licensed services, along with unintentional such as digital devices, including computers, contribute to the electromagnetic environment. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) is the ability of items of electronic equipment to function properly in the electronic environment. While this computer has been designed and determined to be compliant with regulatory agency limits for EMI, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference with radio communications services, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the following measures:

circuits.

Reorient the receiving antenna.

Relocate the computer with respect to the receiver.

Move the computer away from the receiver.

Plug the computer into a different outlet so that the computer and the receiver are on different branch If necessary, consult a Dell Technical Support representative or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Dell computers are designed, tested, and classified for their intended electromagnetic environment. These electromagnetic environment classifications generally refer to the following harmonized definitions:

Class A is typically for business or industrial environments.

Class B is typically for residential environments. Information Technology Equipment (ITE), including devices, expansion cards, printers, input/output (I/O) file://C:\temp\~hh6397.htm 2/27/2003 Appendix Page 3 of 14 devices, monitors, and so on, that are integrated into or connected to the computer should match the electromagnetic environment classification of the computer. A Notice About Shielded Signal Cables: Use only shielded cables for connecting devices to any Dell device to reduce the possibility of interference with radio communications services. Using shielded cables ensures that you maintain the appropriate EMC classification for the intended environment. For parallel printers, a cable is available from Dell. If you prefer, you can order a cable from Dell on the World Wide Web at accessories.us.dell.com/sna/category.asp?category_id=4117. Most Dell computers are classified for Class B environments. However, the inclusion of certain options can change the rating of some configurations to Class A. To determine the electromagnetic classification for your computer or device, see the following sections specific for each regulatory agency. Each section provides country-specific EMC/EMI or product safety information. FCC Notices (U.S. Only) Most Dell computers are classified by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) as Class B digital To determine which classification applies to your computer, examine all FCC registration labels located on the bottom, side, or back panel of your computer, on card-mounting brackets, and on the cards themselves. If one of the labels carries a Class A rating, your entire computer is considered to be a Class A digital device. If labels carry an FCC Class B rating as distinguished by either an FCC ID number or the FCC logo, (

computer is considered to be a Class B digital device.

), your Once you have determined your computer's FCC classification, read the appropriate FCC notice. Note that regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell could void your authority operate this equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference.

This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Class A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction may cause harmful interference with radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area likely to cause harmful interference, in which case you will be required to correct the interference at your own expense. Class B This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may cause interference with communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. file://C:\temp\~hh6397.htm 2/27/2003 Appendix Page 4 of 14

Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. FCC Identification Information The following information is provided on the device or devices covered in this document in compliance with regulations:

Model number: PP02X

Company name:

Dell Computer Corporation One Dell Way Round Rock, Texas 78682 USA 512-338-4400 Modem Regulatory Information This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the bottom of your computer is a label that among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for your equipment. If requested, you must provide this information to the telephone company. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most the sum of all the RENs on your telephone line should be less than five to ensure proper service from the telephone company. To be certain of the number of devices that you may connect to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. The registration jack Universal Service Order Code (USOC) used by this equipment is RJ-11C. An FCC telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant. This equipment cannot be used on public coin-phone service provided by the telephone company. Connection party line service is subject to state tariffs. There are no user serviceable parts on the modem contained in your computer. If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that service may be temporarily discontinued. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service. If you experience trouble with this telephone equipment, see "Getting Help" in your computer's documentation or, for some computers, the section titled "Contacting Dell" in your computer's online guide to find the appropriate telephone number for obtaining customer assistance. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. Fax Branding file://C:\temp\~hh6397.htm 2/27/2003 Appendix Page 5 of 14 The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and it is sent, identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges. IC Notice (Canada Only) Most Dell computers (and other Dell digital apparatus) are classified by the Industry Canada (IC) Interference-

Causing Equipment Standard #3 (ICES-003) as Class B digital devices. To determine which classification A or B) applies to your computer (or other Dell digital apparatus), examine all registration labels located on bottom, side, or the back panel of your computer (or other digital apparatus). A statement in the form of "IC Class A ICES-003" or "IC Class B ICES-003" will be located on one of these labels. Note that Industry Canada regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell could void your authority to operate this equipment. Modem Regulatory Information The IC label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The IC label does not guarantee that the will operate to the user's satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any or alteration made by a user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telephone communications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water-pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. NOTICE: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves. Contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. NOTE: The REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed the number five. file://C:\temp\~hh6397.htm 2/27/2003 Appendix Page 6 of 14 The REN for the internal modem as stated on the IC regulatory label located on the bottom of the computer is 0.6 B. The following information is provided in compliance with IC regulations:

Dell Computer Corporation One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 USA 512-338-4400 CE Notice (European Union) Marking by the symbol Directive of the European Union. Such marking is indicative that this Dell system meets the following technical standards:

indicates compliance of this Dell computer to the EMC Directive and the Low

EN 55022 "Information Technology Equipment Radio Disturbance Characteristics Limits and Methods of Measurement."

Measurement."

EN 55024 "Information Technology Equipment - Immunity Characteristics - Limits and Methods of

EN 61000-3-2 "Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits - Section 2: Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions (Equipment Input Current Up to and Including 16 A Per Phase)."

EN 61000-3-3 "Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits - Section 3: Limitation of Fluctuations and Flicker in Low-Voltage Supply Systems for Equipment With Rated Current Up to and Including 16 A."

EN 60950 "Safety of Information Technology Equipment."

NOTE: EN 55022 emissions requirements provide for two classifications:

Class A is for typical commercial areas.

Class B is for typical domestic areas. This Dell device is classified for use in a typical Class B domestic environment. A "Declaration of Conformity" in accordance with the preceding directives and standards has been made and is on file at Dell Computer Corporation Products Europe BV, Limerick, Ireland. CE Mark Notice This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union Directive 1999/5/EC. file://C:\temp\~hh6397.htm 2/27/2003 Appendix Page 7 of 14 New Zealand Telecom Warnings General

"The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services."

"This equipment does not fully meet Telecom impedance requirements. Performance limitations may occur used in conjunction with some parts of the network. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties in such circumstances."

"This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom `111' Emergence Service."

"If a charge for local calls is unacceptable, the `Dial' button should NOT be used for local calls. Only the 7-

of the local number should be dialed from your telephone. DO NOT dial the area code digit or the `0' prefix."

"This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line."

Important Notice

"Under power failure conditions, this telephone may not operate. Please ensure that a separate telephone, not dependent on local power, is available for emergency use."

"Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specification:

1. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any file://C:\temp\~hh6397.htm 2/27/2003 Appendix Page 8 of 14 single manual call initiation, and the equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. 2. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall go on-line for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. 3. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing."

"All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is to be aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act of 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is used and what is disclosed to any other party."

ENERGY STAR Compliance Certain configurations of Dell computers comply with the requirements set forth by the Environmental Agency (EPA) for energy-efficient computers. If the front panel of your computer bears the ENERGY STAR Emblem, your original configuration complies with these requirements and all ENERGY STAR power management features of the computer are enabled. NOTE: Any Dell computer bearing the ENERGY STAR Emblem is certified to comply with EPA ENERGY requirements as configured when shipped by Dell. Any changes you make to this configuration (such as installing additional expansion cards or drives) may increase the computer's power consumption beyond the limits set by the EPA's ENERGY STAR Computers program. ENERGY STAR Emblem The EPA's ENERGY STAR Computers program is a joint effort between the EPA and computer manufacturers reduce air pollution by promoting energy-efficient computer products. The EPA estimates that use of ENERGY STAR computer products can save computer users up to two billion dollars annually in electricity costs. In turn, this reduction in electricity usage can reduce emissions of carbon dioxide, the gas primarily responsible the greenhouse effect, and sulfur dioxide and nitrogen oxides, the primary causes of acid rain. You can also help reduce electricity usage and its side effects by turning off your computer when it is not in for extended periods of time, particularly at night and on weekends. Simplified Chinese Class A Warning Notice (China Only) On Class A systems, the following warning will appear near the regulatory label:

Warning: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. EN 55022 Compliance (Czech Republic Only) file://C:\temp\~hh6397.htm 2/27/2003 Appendix Page 9 of 14 VCCI Notice (Japan Only) Most Dell computers are classified by the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) as Class B information technology equipment (ITE). However, the inclusion of certain options can change the rating of some configurations to Class A. ITE, including devices, expansion cards, printers, input/output (I/O) devices, monitors, and so on, integrated into or connected to the computer should match the electromagnetic environment classification (Class A or B) of the computer. To determine which classification applies to your computer, examine the regulatory labels/markings (see Class A ITE Regulatory Mark" and "VCCI Class B ITE Regulatory Mark") located on the bottom, side, or back panel of your computer. Once you have determined your computer's VCCI classification, read the appropriate VCCI notice. Class A ITE This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) for information technology equipment. If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio disturbance arise. When such trouble occurs, the user may be required to take corrective actions. VCCI Class A ITE Regulatory Mark If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class A product:

Class B ITE file://C:\temp\~hh6397.htm 2/27/2003 Appendix Page 10 of 14 This is a Class B product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) for information technology equipment. If this equipment is used near a radio or television receiver in a domestic environment, it may cause radio interference. Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual. VCCI Class B ITE Regulatory Mark If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class B product:

MIC Notice (Republic of Korea Only) To determine which classification (Class A or B) applies to your computer (or other Dell digital device), the Republic of Korean Ministry of Information and Communications (MIC) registration labels located on your computer (or other Dell digital device). The MIC label may be located separately from the other regulatory marking applied to your product. Line two of the label identifies the emissions class for the product"(A)" for Class A products or "(B)" for Class B products. NOTE: MIC emissions requirements provide for two classifications:

Class A devices are for business purposes.

Class B devices are for nonbusiness purposes. Class A Device Please note that this device has been approved for business purposes with regard to electromagnetic interference. If you find that this device is not suitable for your use, you may exchange it for a nonbusiness-

file://C:\temp\~hh6397.htm 2/27/2003 Appendix purpose device. Page 11 of 14 MIC Class A Regulatory Label If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class A product:

Class B Device Please note that this device has been approved for nonbusiness purposes and may be used in any including residential areas. MIC Class B Regulatory Label If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class B product. Polish Center for Testing and Certification Notice The equipment should draw power from a socket with an attached protection circuit (a 3-prong socket). All equipment that works together (computer, monitor, printer, and so on) should have the same power supply source. The phasing conductor of the room's electrical installation should have a reserve short-circuit protection in the form of a fuse with a nominal value no larger than 16 amperes (A). To completely switch off the equipment, the power supply cable must be removed from the power supply socket, which should be located near the equipment and easily accessible. A protection mark "B" confirms that the equipment is in compliance with the protection usage requirements of standards PN-93/T-42107 and PN-EN 55022. file://C:\temp\~hh6397.htm 2/27/2003 Appendix Page 12 of 14 BSMI Notice (Taiwan Only) If you find a label on the bottom, side, or back panel of your computer, the following section is applicable:

mark on the regulatory or file://C:\temp\~hh6397.htm 2/27/2003 Appendix Page 13 of 14 NOM Information (Mexico Only) The following information is provided on the device(s) described in this document in compliance with the requirements of the official Mexican standards (NOM):

Exporter:

Dell Computer Corporation One Dell Way file://C:\temp\~hh6397.htm 2/27/2003 Page 14 of 14 Appendix Importer:

Ship to:

Round Rock, TX 78682 Dell Computer de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11 Col. Lomas Altas 11950 Mxico, D.F. Dell Computer de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. al Cuidado de Kuehne Nagel de Mxico S. de R.I. Avenida Soles No. 55 Col. Peon de los Baos 15520 Mxico, D.F. Model number:

PP02X Supply voltage:

100240 VAC Frequency:

Current 5060 Hz 1.5 A Output voltage:

20 VDC Output current:

3.5 A Warranty and Return Policy Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your computer, see the System Information Guide. file://C:\temp\~hh6397.htm 2/27/2003 Glossary Glossary Page 1 of 14 A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P R S T U V W X Z Terms in this Glossary are provided for informational purposes only and may or may not describe features included with your particular computer. A AC alternating current The form of electricity that powers your computer when you plug the AC adapter power cable in to an electrical outlet. ACPI advanced configuration and power interface A power management specification that enables Microsoft Windows operating systems to put a computer in standby or hibernate mode to conserve the amount of electrical power allocated to each device attached to the computer. AGP accelerated graphics port A dedicated graphics port that allows system memory to be used for related tasks. AGP delivers a smooth, true-color video image because of the faster interface between the circuitry and the computer memory. antivirus software A program designed to identify, quarantine, and/or delete viruses from your computer. APR advanced port replicator A docking device that allows you to conveniently use a monitor, keyboard, mouse, and other devices with your portable computer. ASF alert standards format A standard to define a mechanism for reporting hardware and software alerts to a management console. ASF is designed to be platform- and operating system-independent. B backup A copy of a program or data file on a floppy disk, CD, or hard drive. As a precaution, back up the data files from your hard drive regularly. battery An internal power source used to operate portable computers when not connected to an AC and an electrical outlet. battery life span The length of time (years) during which a portable computer battery is able to be and recharged. battery operating time The length of time (minutes or hours) that a portable computer battery holds a charge while powering the computer. BIOS basic input/output system A program (or utility) that serves as an interface between the computer hardware and the operating system. Unless you understand what effect the settings have on the computer, not change the settings for this program. Also referred to as the system setup program. bit The smallest unit of data interpreted by your computer. Bluetooth A wireless technology standard for short-range (9 m [29 feet]) networking devices that allows file://C:\temp\~hhE039.htm 2/27/2003 Glossary Page 2 of 14 for enabled devices to automatically recognize each other. boot sequence Specifies the order of the devices from which the computer attempts to boot. bootable CD A CD that you can use to start your computer. In case your hard drive is damaged or your computer has a virus, ensure that you always have a bootable CD or floppy disk available. Your Drivers and Utilities or Resource CD is a bootable CD. bootable disk A disk that you can use to start your computer. In case your hard drive is damaged or your computer has a virus, ensure that you always have a bootable CD or floppy disk available. bps bits per second The standard unit for measuring data transmission speed. BTU British thermal unit A measurement of heat output. bus A communication pathway between the components in your computer. bus speed The speed, given in MHz, that indicates how fast a bus can transfer information. byte The basic data unit used by your computer. A byte is usually equal to 8 bits. C C Celsius A temperature measurement system where 0 is the freezing point and 100 is the boiling of water. cache A special high-speed storage mechanism which can be either a reserved section of main memory or independent high-speed storage device. The cache enhances the efficiency of many microprocessor L1 cache Primary cache stored inside the microprocessor. L2 cache Secondary cache which can either be external to the microprocessor or incorporated into microprocessor architecture. carnet An international customs document that facilitates temporary imports into foreign countries. Also known as a merchandise passport. CD compact disc An optical form of storage media, typically used for audio and software programs. CD drive A drive that uses optical technology to read data from CDs. CD player The software used to play music CDs. The CD player displays a window with buttons that you to play a CD. CD-R CD recordable A recordable version of a CD. Data can be recorded only once onto a CD-R. Once recorded, the data cannot be erased or written over. CD-RW CD rewritable A rewritable version of a CD. Data can be written to a CD-RW disc, and then and written over (rewritten). CD-RW drive A drive that can read CDs and write to CD-RW (rewritable CDs) and CD-R (recordable CDs) discs. You can write to CD-RW discs multiple times, but you can write to CD-R discs only once. file://C:\temp\~hhE039.htm 2/27/2003 Glossary Page 3 of 14 CD-RW/DVD drive A drive, sometimes referred to as a combo drive, that can read CDs and DVDs and to CD-RW (rewritable CDs) and CD-R (recordable CDs) discs. You can write to CD-RW discs multiple times, you can write to CD-R discs only once. clock speed The speed, given in MHz, that indicates how fast computer components that are connected to the system bus operate. COA Certificate of Authenticity The Windows alpha-numeric code located on a sticker on your computer. You may need the COA to complete the operating system setup or reinstallation. Also referred to as the Key or Product ID. Control Panel A Windows utility that allows you to modify operating system and hardware settings, such display settings. controller A chip that controls the transfer of data between the microprocessor and memory or between microprocessor and devices. CRIMM continuity rambus in-line memory module A special module that has no memory chips and is to fill unused RIMM slots. cursor The marker on a display or screen that shows where the next keyboard, touch pad, or mouse action will occur. It often is a blinking solid line, an underline character, or a small arrow. D DDR SDRAM double-data-rate SDRAM A type of SDRAM that doubles the data burst cycle, improving system performance. device Hardware such as a disk drive, printer, or keyboard that is installed in or connected to your device driver See driver. DIN connector A round, six-pin connector that conforms to DIN (Deutsche Industrie-Norm) standards; it typically used to connect PS/2 keyboard or mouse cable connectors. disk striping A technique for spreading data over multiple disk drives. Disk striping can speed up that retrieve data from disk storage. Computers that use disk striping generally allow the user to select the unit size or stripe width. DMA direct memory access A channel that allows certain types of data transfer between RAM and a to bypass the microprocessor. docking device See APR. DMTF Distributed Management Task Force A consortium of hardware and software companies who management standards for distributed desktop, network, enterprise, and Internet environments. domain A group of computers, programs, and devices on a network that are administered as a unit with common rules and procedures for use by a specific group of users. A user logs on to the domain to gain to the resources. DRAM dynamic random-access memory Memory that stores information in integrated circuits containing capacitors. file://C:\temp\~hhE039.htm 2/27/2003 Glossary Page 4 of 14 driver Software that allows the operating system to control a device such as a printer. Many devices do not work properly if the correct driver is not installed in the computer. DSL Digital Subscriber Line A technology that provides a constant, high-speed Internet connection an analog telephone line. dual display mode A display setting that allows you to use a second monitor as an extension of your display. Also referred to as extended display mode. DVD digital versatile disc A disc usually used to store movies. DVDs are double-sided, whereas CDs are single-sided. DVD drives read most CD media as well. DVD drive A drive that uses optical technology to read data from DVDs and CDs. DVD player The software used to watch DVD movies. The DVD player displays a window with buttons that you use to watch a movie. DVD+RW DVD rewritable A rewritable version of a DVD. Data can be written to a DVD+RW disc, and erased and written over (rewritten). (DVD+RW technology is different from DVD-RW technology.) DVD+RW drive A drive that can read DVDs and most CD media and write to DVD+RW (rewritable DVDs) discs. DVI digital video interface A standard for digital transmission between a computer and a digital video display; the DVI adapter works through the computer's integrated graphics. E ECC error checking and correction A type of memory that includes special circuitry for testing the of data as it passes in and out of memory. ECP extended capabilities port A parallel connector design that provides improved bidirectional data transmission. Similar to EPP, ECP uses direct memory access to transfer data and often improves EIDE enhanced integrated device electronics An improved version of the IDE interface for hard drives CD drives. EMI electromagnetic interference Electrical interference caused by electromagnetic radiation. ENERGY STAR Environmental Protection Agency requirements that decrease the overall consumption of electricity. EPP enhanced parallel port A parallel connector design that provides bidirectional data transmission. ESD electrostatic discharge A rapid discharge of static electricity. ESD can damage integrated circuits found in computer and communications equipment. expansion card A circuit board that installs in an expansion slot on the system board in some computers, expanding the capabilities of the computer. Examples include video, modem, and sound cards. expansion slot A connector on the system board (in some computers) where you insert an expansion connecting it to the system bus. file://C:\temp\~hhE039.htm 2/27/2003 Glossary Page 5 of 14 Express Service Code A numeric code located on a sticker on your Dell computer. Use the Express Service Code when contacting Dell for assistance. Express Service Code service may not be available in countries. extended display mode A display setting that allows you to use a second monitor as an extension of your display. Also referred to as dual display mode. extended PC Card A PC Card that extends beyond the edge of the PC Card slot when installed. NOTE: If your computer has two PC Card connectors, always install extended PC Cards in the top connector. NOTICE: Always remove an extended PC Card before packing the computer or traveling. If something strikes the exposed end of the PC Card, the system board may be damaged. F Fahrenheit A temperature measurement system where 32 is the freezing point and 212 is the boiling of water. FCC Federal Communications Commission A U.S. agency responsible for enforcing communications-

regulations that state how much radiation computers and other electronic equipment can emit. floppy drive A disk drive that can read and write to floppy disks. folder A term used to describe space on a disk or drive where files are organized and grouped. Files in a folder can be viewed and ordered in various ways, such as alphabetically, by date, and by size. format The process that prepares a drive or disk for file storage. When a drive or disk is formatted, the existing information on it is lost. FSB front side bus The data path and physical interface between the microprocessor and RAM. FTP file transfer protocol A standard Internet protocol used to exchange files between computers connected to the Internet. G G gravity A measurement of weight and force. GB gigabyte A measurement of data storage that equals 1024 MB (1,073,741,824 bytes). When used to refer to hard drive storage, the term is often rounded to 1,000,000,000 bytes. GHz gigahertz A measurement of frequency that equals one thousand million Hz, or one thousand MHz. The speeds for computer microprocessors, buses, and interfaces are often measured in GHz. graphics mode A video mode that can be defined as x horizontal pixels by y vertical pixels by z colors. Graphics modes can display an unlimited variety of shapes and fonts. GUI graphical user interface Software that interacts with the user by means of menus, windows, and file://C:\temp\~hhE039.htm 2/27/2003 Glossary Page 6 of 14 icons. Most programs that operate on the Windows operating systems are GUIs. H hard drive A drive that reads and writes data on a hard disk. The terms hard drive and hard disk are often used interchangeably. heat sink A metal plate on some microprocessors that helps dissipate heat. help file A file that contains descriptive or instructional information about a product. Some help files are associated with a particular program, such as Help in Microsoft Word. Other help files function as stand-alone reference sources. Help files typically have a filename extension of .hlp or .chm. hibernate mode A power management mode that saves everything in memory to a reserved space on the hard drive and then turns off the computer. When you restart the computer, the memory information that saved to the hard drive is automatically restored. HTML hypertext markup language A set of codes inserted into an Internet web page intended for display on an Internet browser. HTTP hypertext transfer protocol A protocol for exchanging files between computers connected to the Internet. Hz hertz A unit of frequency measurement that equals 1 cycle per second. Computers and electronic devices are often measured in kilohertz (kHz), megahertz (MHz), gigahertz (GHz), or terahertz (THz). I IC Industry Canada The Canadian regulatory body responsible for regulating emissions from electronic equipment, much as the FCC does in the United States. IC integrated circuit A semiconductor wafer, or chip, on which thousands or millions of tiny electronic components are fabricated for use in computer, audio, and video equipment. IDE integrated device electronics An interface for mass storage devices in which the controller is integrated into the hard drive or CD drive. IEEE 1394 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. A high-performance serial bus used to connect IEEE 1394-compatible devices, such as digital cameras and DVD players, to the computer. infrared sensor A port that allows you to transfer data between the computer and infrared-compatible devices without using a cable connection. integrated Usually refers to components that are physically located on the computer's system board. Also referred to as built-in. I/O input/output An operation or device that enters and extracts data from your computer. Keyboards printers are I/O devices. I/O address An address in RAM that is associated with a specific device (such as a serial connector, file://C:\temp\~hhE039.htm 2/27/2003 Glossary Page 7 of 14 connector, or expansion slot) and allows the microprocessor to communicate with that device. IRQ interrupt request An electronic pathway assigned to a specific device so that the device can communicate with the microprocessor. Each device connection must be assigned an IRQ. Although two can share the same IRQ assignment, you cannot operate both devices simultaneously. ISP Internet service provider A company that allows you to access its host server to connect directly to Internet, send and receive e-mail, and access websites. The ISP typically provides you with a software user name, and access phone numbers for a fee. K Kb kilobit A unit of data that equals 1024 bits. A measurement of the capacity of memory integrated circuits. KB kilobyte A unit of data that equals 1024 bytes but is often referred to as 1000 bytes. keyboard shortcut A command requiring you to press multiple keys at the same time. Also referred to as key combination. kHz kilohertz A measurement of frequency that equals 1000 Hz. L LAN local area network A computer network covering a small area. A LAN usually is confined to a or a few nearby buildings. A LAN can be connected to another LAN over any distance through telephone and radio waves to form a wide area network (WAN). LCD liquid crystal display The technology used by portable computer and flat-panel displays. LED light-emitting diode An electronic component that emits light to indicate the status of the computer. local bus A data bus that provides a fast throughput for devices to the microprocessor. LPT line print terminal The designation for a parallel connection to a printer or other parallel device. M Mb megabit A measurement of memory chip capacity that equals 1024 Kb. Mbps megabits per second One million bits per second. This measurement is typically used for transmission speeds for networks and modems. MB megabyte A measurement of data storage that equals 1,048,576 bytes. 1 MB equals 1024 KB. When used to refer to hard drive storage, the term is often rounded to 1,000,000 bytes. file://C:\temp\~hhE039.htm 2/27/2003 Glossary Page 8 of 14 MB/sec megabytes per second One million bytes per second. This measurement is typically used for transfer ratings. memory A temporary data storage area inside your computer. Because the data in memory is not permanent, it is recommended that you frequently save your files while you are working on them, and save your files before you shut down the computer. Your computer can contain several different forms of memory, such as RAM, ROM, and video memory. Frequently, the word memory is used as a synonym for memory address A specific location where data is temporarily stored in RAM. memory mapping The process by which the computer assigns memory addresses to physical locations at start-up. Devices and software can then identify information that the microprocessor can access. memory module A small circuit board containing memory chips, which connects to the system board. MHz megahertz A measure of frequency that equals 1 million cycles per second. The speeds for microprocessors, buses, and interfaces are often measured in MHz. microprocessor A computer chip that interprets and executes program instructions. Sometimes the microprocessor is referred to as the processor or the CPU (central processing unit). modem A device that allows your computer to communicate with other computers over analog telephone lines. Three types of modems include: external, PC Card, and internal. You typically use your modem to to the Internet and exchange e-mail. module bay A bay that supports devices such as optical drives, a second battery, or a Dell TravelLite module. monitor The high-resolution TV-like device that displays computer output. mouse A pointing device that controls the movement of the cursor on your screen. Typically you roll the mouse over a hard, flat surface to move the pointer or cursor on your screen. ms millisecond A measure of time that equals one thousandth of a second. Access times of storage are often measured in ms. N network adapter A chip that provides network capabilities. A computer may include a network adapter on its system board, or it may contain a PC Card with an adapter on it. A network adapter is also referred to as NIC (network interface controller). NIC See network adapter. notification area The section of the Windows taskbar that contains icons for providing quick access to programs and computer functions, such as the clock, volume control, and print status. Also referred to as system tray. ns nanosecond A measure of time that equals one billionth of a second. NVRAM nonvolatile random access memory A type of memory that stores data when the computer is turned off or loses its external power source. NVRAM is used for maintaining computer configuration such as date, time, and other system setup options that you can set. file://C:\temp\~hhE039.htm 2/27/2003 Glossary O Page 9 of 14 Optical Drive A drive that uses optical technology to read or write data from CDs, DVDs, or DVD+RWs. Example of optical drives include CD drives, DVD drives, CD-RW drives, and CD-RW/DVD combo drives. P parallel connector An I/O port often used to connect a parallel printer to your computer. Also referred to an LPT port. partition A physical storage area on a hard drive that is assigned to one or more logical storage areas as logical drives. Each partition can contain multiple logical drives. PC Card A removable I/O card adhering to the PCMCIA standard. Modems and network adapters are types of PC Cards. PCI peripheral component interconnect PCI is a local bus that supports 32-and 64-bit data paths, providing a high-speed data path between the microprocessor and devices such as video, drives, and PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association The organization that establishes standards for PC Cards. PIN personal identification number A sequence of numerals and/or letters used to restrict unauthorized access to computer networks and other secure systems. PIO programmed input/output A method of transferring data between two devices through the microprocessor as part of the data path. pixel A single point on a display screen. Pixels are arranged in rows and columns to create an image. A resolution, such as 800 x 600, is expressed as the number of pixels across by the number of pixels up and down. Plug-and-Play The ability of the computer to automatically configure devices. Plug and Play provides automatic installation, configuration, and compatibility with existing hardware if the BIOS, operating and all devices are Plug and Play compliant. POST power-on self-test Diagnostics programs, loaded automatically by the BIOS, that perform basic on the major computer components, such as memory, hard drives, and video. If no problems are detected during POST, the computer continues the start-up. program Any software that processes data for you, including spreadsheet, word processor, database, and game packages. Programs require an operating system to run. PS/2 personal system/2 A type of connector for attaching a PS/2-compatible keyboard, mouse, or PXE pre-boot execution environment A WfM (Wired for Management) standard that allows networked computers that do not have an operating system to be configured and started remotely. file://C:\temp\~hhE039.htm 2/27/2003 Glossary R Page 10 of 14 RAID redundant array of independent disks A system of two or more drives working together for performance and fault tolerance. RAID drives are typically used on servers and high-end PCs. The three most common RAID levels are 0, 3, and 5:

Level 0: Provides data striping but no redundancy. Level 0 improves performance but does not provide fault tolerance.

Level 3: Same as Level 0, but also reserves one dedicated drive for error correction data, good performance and some level of fault tolerance.

Level 5: Provides data striping at the byte level and also stripe error correction information, resulting in excellent performance and good fault tolerance. RAM random-access memory The primary temporary storage area for program instructions and data. information stored in RAM is lost when you shut down your computer. readme file A text file included with a software package or hardware product. Typically, readme files installation information and describe new product enhancements or corrections that have not yet been documented. read-Only Data and/or files you can view but cannot edit or delete. A file can have read-only status if:

It resides on a physically write-protected floppy disk, CD, or DVD.

It is located on a network in a directory and the system administrator has assigned rights only to specific individuals. refresh rate The frequency, measured in Hz, at which your screen's horizontal lines are recharged

(sometimes also referred to as its vertical frequency). The higher the refresh rate, the less video flicker can seen by the human eye. resolution The sharpness and clarity of an image produced by a printer or displayed on a monitor. The higher the resolution, the sharper the image. RFI radio frequency interference Interference that is generated at typical radio frequencies, in the range 10 kHz to 100,000 MHz. Radio frequencies are at the lower end of the electromagnetic frequency spectrum are more likely to have interference than the higher frequency radiations, such as infrared and light. ROM read-only memory Memory that stores data and programs that cannot be deleted or written to by computer. ROM, unlike RAM, retains its contents after you shut down your computer. Some programs to the operation of your computer reside in ROM. RPM revolutions per minute The number of rotations that occur per minute. Hard drive speed is often measured in rpm. RTC real time clock Battery-powered clock on the system board that keeps the date and time after you shut down the computer. RTCRST real-time clock reset A jumper on the system board of some computers that can often be used troubleshooting problems. file://C:\temp\~hhE039.htm 2/27/2003 Glossary S Page 11 of 14 ScanDisk A Microsoft utility that checks files, folders, and the hard disk's surface for errors. ScanDisk often runs when you restart the computer after it has stopped responding. SDRAM synchronous dynamic random-access memory A type of DRAM that is synchronized with the optimal clock speed of the microprocessor. serial connector An I/O port often used to connect devices such as a handheld digital device or digital camera to your computer. service tag A bar code label on your computer that identifies your computer when you access Dell Support at support.dell.com or when you call Dell for customer service or technical support. setup program A program that is used to install and configure hardware and software. The setup.exe or install.exe program comes with most Windows software packages. Setup program differs from system setup program. shortcut An icon that provides quick access to frequently used programs, files, folders, and drives. When place a shortcut on your Windows desktop and double-click the icon, you can open its corresponding folder file without having to find it first. Shortcut icons do not change the location of files. If you delete a shortcut, original file is not affected. Also, you can rename a shortcut icon. shutdown The process of closing windows and exiting programs, exiting the operating system, and turning off your computer. You can lose data if you turn off your computer before completing a shutdown. smart card A card that is embedded with a microprocessor and a memory chip. Smart cards can be used authenticate a user on computers equipped for smart cards. software Anything that can be stored electronically, such as computer files or programs. S/PDIF Sony/Philips Digital Interface An audio transfer file format that allows the transfer of audio from one file to another without converting it to and from an analog format, which could degrade the quality of file. standby mode A power management mode that shuts down all unnecessary computer operations to save energy. surge protectors Prevent voltage spikes, such as those that may occur during an electrical storm, from entering the computer through the electrical outlet. Surge protectors do not protect against lightning strikes against brownouts, which occur when the voltage drops more than 20 percent below the normal AC-line level. Network connections cannot be protected by surge protectors. Always disconnect the network cable from network connector during electrical storms. SVGA super-video graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers. Typical SVGA resolutions are 800 x 600 and 1024 x 768. The number of colors and resolution that a program displays depends on the capabilities of the monitor, the video controller and its drivers, and the amount of video memory installed in the computer. S-video TV-out A connector used to attach a TV or digital audio device to the computer. file://C:\temp\~hhE039.htm 2/27/2003 Glossary Page 12 of 14 SXGA super-extended graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1280 x 1024. SXGA+ super-extended graphics array plus A video standard for video cards and controllers that resolutions up to 1400 x 1050. system board The main circuit board in your computer. Also known as the motherboard. system setup program A utility that serves as an interface between the computer hardware and the operating system. System setup allows you to configure user-selectable options in the BIOS, such as date time or system password. Unless you understand what effect the settings have on the computer, do not the settings for this program. system tray See notification area. T TAPI telephony application programming interface Enables Windows programs to operate with a wide variety of telephony devices, including voice, data, fax, and video. text editor A program used to create and edit files that contain only text; for example, Windows Notepad uses a text editor. Text editors do not usually provide word wrap or formatting functionality (the option to underline, change fonts, and so on). travel module A plastic device designed to fit inside the module bay of a portable computer to reduce the weight of the computer. U UPS uninterruptible power supply A backup power source used when the electrical power fails or drops an unacceptable voltage level. A UPS keeps a computer running for a limited amount of time when there is electrical power. UPS systems typically provide surge suppression and may also provide voltage regulation. Small UPS systems provide battery power for a few minutes to enable you to shut down your computer. USB universal serial bus A hardware interface for a low-speed device such as a USB-compatible mouse, joystick, scanner, set of speakers, printer, broadband devices (DSL and cable modems), imaging devices, or storage devices. Devices are plugged directly in to a 4-pin socket on your computer or in to a port hub that plugs in to your computer. USB devices can be connected and disconnected while the turned on, and they can also be daisy-chained together. UTP unshielded twisted pair Describes a type of cable used in most telephone networks and some computer networks. Pairs of unshielded wires are twisted to protect against electromagnetic interference, than relying on a metal sheath around each pair of wires to protect against interference. UXGA ultra extended graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1600 x 1200. file://C:\temp\~hhE039.htm 2/27/2003 Glossary V Page 13 of 14 video controller The circuitry on a video card or on the system board (in computers with an integrated controller) that provides the video capabilitiesin combination with the monitorfor your computer. video memory Memory that consists of memory chips dedicated to video functions. Video memory is faster than system memory. The amount of video memory installed primarily influences the number of that a program can display. video mode A mode that describes how text and graphics are displayed on a monitor. Graphics-based software, such as Windows operating systems, displays in video modes that can be defined as x horizontal by y vertical pixels by z colors. Character-based software, such as text editors, displays in video modes that be defined as x columns by y rows of characters. video resolution See resolution. virus A program that is designed to inconvenience you or to destroy data stored on your computer. A virus program moves from one computer to another through an infected disk, software downloaded from the or e-mail attachments. When an infected program starts, its embedded virus also starts. A common type of virus is a boot virus, which is stored in the boot sectors of a floppy disk. If the floppy disk left in the drive when the computer is shut down and then turned on, the computer is infected when it reads boot sectors of the floppy disk expecting to find the operating system. If the computer is infected, the boot may replicate itself onto all the floppy disks that are read or written in that computer until the virus is eradicated. V volt The measurement of electric potential or electromotive force. One V appears across a resistance of ohm when a current of 1 ampere flows through that resistance. W W watt The measurement of electrical power. One W is 1 ampere of current flowing at 1 volt. WHr watt-hour A unit of measure commonly used to indicate the approximate capacity of a battery. For example, a 66-WHr battery can supply 66 W of power for 1 hour or 33 W for 2 hours. wallpaper The background pattern or picture on the Windows desktop. Change your wallpaper through the Windows Control Panel. You can also scan in your favorite picture and make it wallpaper. write-protected Files or media that cannot be changed. Use write-protection when you want to protect from being changed or destroyed. To write-protect a 3.5-inch floppy disk, slide its write-protect tab to the position. X XGA extended graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions to 1024 x 768. file://C:\temp\~hhE039.htm 2/27/2003 Glossary Z Page 14 of 14 ZIF zero insertion force A type of socket or connector that allows a computer chip to be installed or removed with no stress applied to either the chip or its socket. Zip A popular data compression format. Files that have been compressed with the Zip format are called Zip files and usually have a filename extension of .zip. A special kind of zipped file is a self-extracting file, which a filename extension of .exe. You can unzip a self-extracting file by double-clicking it. Zip drive A high-capacity floppy drive developed by Iomega Corporation that uses 3.5-inch removable called Zip disks. Zip disks are slightly larger than regular floppy disks, about twice as thick, and hold up to MB of data. file://C:\temp\~hhE039.htm 2/27/2003

 

 

4n142bk0.book Page 1 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Dell Inspiron 600m Owners Manual w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 4n142bk0.book Page 2 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Notes, Notices, and Cautions NOTE: A HINT indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Abbreviations and Acronyms For a complete list of abbreviations and acronyms, see the Tell Me How help file. To access the help file, see page 88. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. 2002 Dell Computer Corporation. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Computer Corporation is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, Dell TravelLite, Dell TrueMobile, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, DellNet, and Latitude are trademarks of Dell Computer Corporation; Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation; Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and is used by Dell Computer Corporation under license; EMC is a registered trademark of the EMC Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Computer Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model PP05L December 2002 P/N 4N142 Rev. A00 4n142bk0.book Page 3 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Contents CAUTION: Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Air Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 EMC Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 California Residents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 When Using Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Ergonomic Computing Habits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 When Working Inside Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 1 A Tour of Your Computer Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Left Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Right Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 2 Setting Up Your Computer Connecting to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Setting Up Your Internet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Contents 3 4n142bk0.book Page 4 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Modem and Internet Connection Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 E-Mail Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Transferring Information to a New Computer . . . . . . . . . . 37 Setting Up a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printer Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a Parallel Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a USB Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 39 39 40 Printer Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Setting Up the Docking Device to Connect to a Network . . . . 41 Power Protection Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Conditioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uninterruptible Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 42 42 42 Turning Off Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 3 Using Batteries and Module Bay Devices Using a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the Battery Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 46 47 49 49 50 50 Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 About the Module Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the Charge on the Second Battery . . . . . . . . . . 52 52 4 Contents 4n142bk0.book Page 5 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Turned Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 If the Device Screw Is Not Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 If the Device Screw Is Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 If the Device Screw Is Not Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 If the Device Screw Is Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 4 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 System Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 CD or DVD Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Display Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Radios (Including Wireless Networking and Bluetooth) . . . . 63 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Speaker Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Microsoft Windows Logo Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Customizing the Touch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Touch Pad or Mouse Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 External Keyboard Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Unexpected Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Contents 5 4n142bk0.book Page 6 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 5 Using CDs, DVDs, and Other Multimedia Using CDs and DVDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 CD and DVD Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot play a CD or DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot eject the CD, CD-RW, or DVD drive tray . . . . . If you hear an unfamiliar scraping or grinding sound . . . . . . If the CD-RW drive stops writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sound and Speaker Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a problem with integrated speakers . . . . . . . . . If you have a problem with external speakers . . . . . . . . . . Copying CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Easy CD Creator Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Blank CD-R Discs or Blank CD-RW Discs . . . . . . . . Helpful Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Copy a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a Television to the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-Video Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Composite Video Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling the Display Settings for a Television . . . . . . . . . 70 70 70 71 71 71 71 71 72 73 73 73 74 75 76 78 80 6 Setting Up a Home and Office Network Connecting to a Network Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Network Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Network Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 7 Solving Problems Finding Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Accessing Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 6 Contents 4n142bk0.book Page 7 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Video and Display Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 If the display is blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 If the display is difficult to read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 If only part of the display is readable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Scanner Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 If you cannot save a file to a floppy drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 If you have problems with a hard drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 PC Card Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 General Program Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 A program crashes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 A program stops responding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Error messages appear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 If Your Computer Gets Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 If You Drop or Damage Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Resolving Other Technical Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 What Is a Driver? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Identifying Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Manually Reinstalling Drivers for Windows XP . . . . . . . . . 99 Using System Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Creating a Restore Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Restoring the Computer to an Earlier Operating State . . . . . 100 Undoing the Last System Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities . . . . . . 102 Contents 7 4n142bk0.book Page 8 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Reinstalling Microsoft Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Before You Reinstall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Reinstalling Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Reinstalling Drivers and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 8 Adding and Replacing Parts Adding Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Adding a Mini PCI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Replacing the Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 9 Appendix Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Viewing the System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Commonly Used Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Definition of "Dell-Installed" Software and Peripherals . . . . . 129 Definition of "Third-Party" Software and Peripherals . . . . . . 129 Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Regulatory Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 NOM Information (Mexico Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Limited Warranties and Return Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Limited Warranty for the U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

"Total Satisfaction" Return Policy (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . 153 Limited Warranty Terms for Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

"Total Satisfaction" Return Policy (Canada Only) . . . . . . . . 157 Dell Software and Peripherals (Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 158 8 Contents 4n142bk0.book Page 9 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM One-Year End-User Manufacturer Guarantee

(Latin America and the Caribbean Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Intel Warranty Statement for Pentium and Celeron Processors Only (U.S. and Canada Only) . . . . . . . 161 Contents 9 4n142bk0.book Page 10 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 10 Contents 4n142bk0.book Page 11 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM CAUTION: Safety Instructions Use the following safety guidelines to help ensure your own personal safety and to help protect your computer and working environment from potential damage. General Do not attempt to service the computer yourself unless you are a trained service technician. Always follow installation instructions closely. If you use an extension power cable with your AC adapter, ensure that the total ampere rating of the products plugged in to the extension power cable does not exceed the ampere rating of the extension cable. Do not push objects into air vents or openings of your computer. Doing so can cause fire or electric shock by shorting out interior components. Do not store your computer in a low-airflow environment, such as a carrying case or a closed briefcase, while the computer is turned on. Restricting airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. Keep your computer away from radiators and heat sources. Also, do not block cooling vents. Avoid placing loose papers underneath your computer; do not place your computer in a closed-in wall unit or on a bed, sofa, or rug. Place the AC adapter in a ventilated area, such as a desk top or on the floor, when you use it to run the computer or to charge the battery. Do not cover the AC adapter with papers or other items that will reduce cooling; also, do not use the AC adapter inside a carrying case. The AC adapter may become hot during normal operation of your computer. Use care when handling the adapter during or immediately after operation. Do not allow your portable computer to operate with the base resting directly on exposed skin for extended periods of time. The surface temperature of the base will rise during normal operation (particularly when AC power is present). Allowing sustained contact with exposed skin can cause discomfort or, eventually, a burn. Do not use your computer in a wet environment, for example, near a bath tub, sink, or swimming pool or in a wet basement If your computer includes an integrated or optional (PC Card) modem, disconnect the modem cable if an electrical storm is approaching to avoid the remote risk of electric shock from lightning via the telephone line. CAUTION: Safety Instr uctions 11 4n142bk0.book Page 12 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w CAUTION: Safety Instructions (continued) To help avoid the potential hazard of electric shock, do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform maintenance or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. Do not use your computer during an electrical storm unless all cables have been disconnected and the computer is operating on battery power. If your computer includes a modem, the cable used with the modem should be manufactured with a minimum wire size of 26 American wire gauge (AWG) and an FCC-

compliant RJ-11 modular plug. Before you open the memory module/Mini PCI card/modem cover on the bottom of your computer, disconnect all cables from their electrical outlets and disconnect the telephone cable. If your computer has a modem RJ-11 connector and a network RJ-45 connector, insert the telephone cable into the RJ-11 connector, not the RJ-45 connector. PC Cards may become very warm during normal operation. Use care when removing PC Cards after their continuous operation. Before you clean your computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. Clean your computer with a soft cloth dampened with water. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners, which may contain flammable substances. Power Use only the Dell-provided AC adapter approved for use with this computer. Use of another AC adapter may cause a fire or explosion. Before you connect the computer to an electrical outlet, check the AC adapter voltage rating to ensure that the required voltage and frequency match the available power source. To remove the computer from all power sources, turn the computer off, remove the battery pack, and disconnect the AC adapter from the electrical outlet. To help prevent electric shock, plug the AC adapter and device power cables into properly grounded power sources. These power cables may be equipped with 3-prong plugs to provide an earth grounding connection. Do not use adapter plugs or remove the grounding prong from the power cable plug. If you use a power extension cable, use the appropriate type, 2-prong or 3-prong, to mate with the AC adapter power cable. Be sure that nothing rests on your AC adapters power cable and that the cable is not located where it can be tripped over or stepped on. 12 CAUTION: Safety Instr uctions 4n142bk0.book Page 13 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM CAUTION: Safety Instructions (continued) If you are using a multiple-outlet power strip, use caution when plugging the AC adapters power cable into the power strip. Some power strips may allow you to insert the plug incorrectly. Incorrect insertion of the power plug could result in permanent damage to your computer, as well as risk of electric shock and/or fire. Ensure that the ground prong of the power plug is inserted into the mating ground contact of the power strip. Battery Use only Dell battery modules that are approved for use with this computer. Use of other types may increase the risk of fire or explosion. Do not carry a battery pack in your pocket, purse, or other container where metal objects

(such as car keys or paper clips) could short-circuit the battery terminals. The resulting excessive current flow can cause extremely high temperatures and may result in damage to the battery pack or cause fire or burns. The battery poses a burn hazard if you handle it improperly. Do not disassemble it. Handle a damaged or leaking battery pack with extreme care. If the battery is damaged, electrolyte may leak from the cells and may cause personal injury. Keep the battery away from children. Do not store or leave your computer or battery pack near a heat source such as a radiator, fireplace, stove, electric heater, or other heat-generating appliance or otherwise expose it to temperatures in excess of 60C (140F). When heated to excessive temperatures, battery cells could explode or vent, posing a risk of fire. Do not dispose of your computers battery in a fire or with normal household waste. Battery cells may explode. Discard a used battery according to the manufacturers instructions or contact your local waste disposal agency for disposal instructions. Dispose of a spent or damaged battery promptly. CAUTION: Safety Instr uctions 13 4n142bk0.book Page 14 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w CAUTION: Safety Instructions (continued) Air Travel Certain Federal Aviation Administration regulations and/or airline-specific restrictions may apply to the operation of your Dell computer while you are on board an aircraft. For example, such regulations/restrictions may prohibit the use of any personal electronic device (PED) that has the capacity for intentional transmission of radio frequency or other electromagnetic signals while on an aircraft. In order to best comply with all such restrictions, if your Dell portable computer is equipped with Dell TrueMobile or some other wireless communication device, please disable this device before you board the aircraft and follow all instructions provided by airline personnel with regard to such device. Additionally, the use of any PED, such as a portable computer, may be prohibited in aircraft during certain critical phases of flight, for example, takeoff and landing. Some airlines may further define the critical flight phase as any time the aircraft is below 3050 m (10,000 ft). Please follow the airlines specific instructions as to when the use of a PED is allowed. EMC Instructions Use shielded signal cables to ensure that you maintain the appropriate EMC classification for the intended environment. For parallel printers, a cable is available from Dell. If you prefer, you can order a cable from Dell at its worldwide website at www.dell.com. Static electricity can harm electronic components inside your computer. To prevent static damage, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computers electronic components, such as a memory module. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computers input/output panel. California Residents WARNING: Handling the cord on this product, or cords associated with accessories sold with this product, will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash your hands after handling the cord. 14 CAUTION: Safety Instr uctions 4n142bk0.book Page 15 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM When Using Your Computer Observe the following safe-handling guidelines to prevent damage to your computer:

When setting up the computer for work, place it on a level surface. When traveling, do not check the computer as baggage. You can put your computer through an X-ray security machine, but never put your computer through a metal detector. If you have the computer checked by hand, be sure to have a charged battery available in case you are asked to turn on the computer. When traveling with the hard drive removed from the computer, wrap the drive in a nonconducting material, such as cloth or paper. If you have the drive checked by hand, be ready to install the drive in the computer. You can put the hard drive through an X-ray security machine, but never put the drive through a metal detector. When traveling, do not place the computer in overhead storage compartments where it could slide around. Do not drop your computer or subject it to other mechanical shocks. Protect your computer, battery, and hard drive from environmental hazards such as dirt, dust, food, liquids, temperature extremes, and overexposure to sunlight. When you move your computer between environments with very different temperature and/or humidity ranges, condensation may form on or within the computer. To avoid damaging the computer, allow sufficient time for the moisture to evaporate before using the computer. NOTICE: When taking the computer from low-temperature conditions into a warmer environment or from high-temperature conditions into a cooler environment, allow the computer to acclimate to room temperature before turning on power. When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable itself. As you pull out the connector, keep it evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable make sure both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. Handle components with care. Hold a component such as a memory module by its edges, not its pins. When preparing to remove a memory module from the system board or disconnect a device from the computer, turn off the computer, disconnect the AC adapter cable, and then wait 5 seconds before proceeding to help avoid possible damage to the system board. When Using Your Computer 15 4n142bk0.book Page 16 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w When Using Your Computer (continued) Clean the display with a soft, clean cloth and water. Apply the water to the cloth; then stroke the cloth across the display in one direction, moving from the top of the display to the bottom. Remove moisture from the display quickly and keep the display dry. Long-

term exposure to moisture can damage the display. Do not use a commercial window cleaner to clean your display. If your computer gets wet or is damaged, follow the procedures described in "If Your Computer Gets Wet" on page 95 or "If You Drop or Damage Your Computer" on page 96. If, after following these procedures, you confirm that your computer is not operating properly, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 129 for the appropriate contact information). Ergonomic Computing Habits CAUTION: Improper or prolonged keyboard use may result in injury. CAUTION: Viewing the display or external monitor screen for extended periods of time may result in eye strain. For comfort and efficiency, observe the ergonomic guidelines in the Tell Me How help file when setting up and using your computer. To access the help file, see "Accessing Help" on page 88. This portable computer is not designed for continuous operation as office equipment. For extended use in an office, it is recommended that you connect an external keyboard. When Working Inside Your Computer Before removing or installing memory modules, Mini PCI cards, or modems, perform the following steps in the sequence indicated. NOTICE: The only time you should ever access the inside of your computer is when you are installing memory modules, a Mini PCI card, or a modem. NOTICE: Wait 5 seconds after turning off the computer before disconnecting a device or removing a memory module, Mini PCI card, or modem to help prevent possible damage to the system board. 1 Shut down your computer and turn off any attached devices. 2 Disconnect your computer and devices from electrical outlets to reduce the potential for personal injury or shock. Also, disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 3 Remove the main battery from the battery bay and, if necessary, the secondary battery from the module bay. 16 When Using Your Computer 4n142bk0.book Page 17 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM When Using Your Computer (continued) 4 Ground yourself by touching the unpainted metal surface of the I/O panel on the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch the I/O panel to dissipate any static electricity that might harm internal components. Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge Static electricity can harm electronic components inside your computer. To prevent static damage, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computers electronic components, such as a memory module. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computers I/O panel. As you continue to work inside the computer, periodically touch an I/O connector to remove any static charge your body may have accumulated. You can also take the following steps to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD):

When unpacking a static-sensitive component from its shipping carton, do not remove the component from the antistatic packing material until you are ready to install the component. Just before unwrapping the antistatic packaging, be sure to discharge static electricity from your body. When transporting a sensitive component, first place it in an antistatic container or packaging. Handle all sensitive components in a static-safe area. If possible, use antistatic floor pads and workbench pads. Battery Disposal Your computer uses a lithium-ion battery and a reserve battery. For instructions about replacing the lithium-ion battery in your computer, see "Using a Battery" on page 46. The reserve battery is a long-life battery, and it is very possible that you will never need to replace it. However, should you need to replace it, the procedure must be performed by an authorized service technician. Do not dispose of the battery along with household waste. Contact your local waste disposal agency for the address of the nearest battery deposit site. When Using Your Computer 17 4n142bk0.book Page 18 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 18 When Using Your Computer 4n142bk0.book Page 19 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM S E C T I O N 1 A To u r o f You r C o m p u t e r Front View Left Side View Right Side View Back View Bottom View 4n142bk0.book Page 20 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Front View keyboard status lights mute button volume control buttons touch pad buttons display power button device status lights keyboard touch pad speaker speaker display latch DI S P LA Y For more information about your display, see the Tell Me How help file. To access the help file, see "Accessing Help" on page 88. P OW E R BU T T ON Press the power button to turn on the computer or exit a power management mode. For more information about power management, see the Tell Me How help file. To access the help file, see "Accessing Help" on page 88. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, turn off your computer by performing a Microsoft Windows operating system shutdown (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 43) rather than by pressing the power button. If the computer stops responding, press and hold the power button until the computer turns off completely (which may take several seconds). 20 A Tour of Your Computer 4n142bk0.book Page 21 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM DE VI CE S T A T U S LI GH TS Turns on when you turn on the computer and blinks when the computer is in a power management mode. Turns on when the computer reads or writes data. NOTICE: To avoid loss of data, never turn off the computer while the light is flashing. Turns on steadily or blinks to indicate battery charge status. Turns on when Bluetooth is enabled. To enable or disable Bluetooth, press If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the light operates as follows:

Solid green: The battery is charging. Flashing green: The battery is almost fully charged. If the computer is running on a battery, the light operates as follows:

Off: The battery is adequately charged (or the computer is turned off). Flashing orange: The battery charge is low. Solid orange: The battery charge is critically low. A Tour of Your Computer 21 4n142bk0.book Page 22 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w K EYB OA RD The keyboard includes a numeric keypad as well as the Windows

. For information on supported keyboard shortcuts, see "Using the logo key Keyboard and Touch Pad" on page 61. T OU C H P AD Provides the functionality of a mouse. See "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad" on page 61 for more information. S P EA K ERS To adjust the volume of the integrated speakers, press the volume control buttons, mute button, or volume-control keyboard shortcuts. For more information, see "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad" on page 61. DI S P LA Y L AT CH Keeps the display closed. T OU C H P AD BU T T O NS Provide the functionality of a mouse. See "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad" on page 61 for more information. VO LU M E C ON T RO L B UT T ON S Press these buttons to adjust the volume. M UT E B UT T ON Press this button to turn off the volume. K EYB OA RD S T AT U S LI GH TS 22 A Tour of Your Computer 4n142bk0.book Page 23 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM The green lights located above the keyboard indicate the following:

9 A Turns on when the numeric keypad is enabled. Turns on when the uppercase letter function is enabled. Turns on when the scroll lock function is enabled. Left Side View PC Card slot smart card slot infrared sensor air vents (2) audio connectors (2) security cable slot hard drive AI R VE NT S The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your Dell computer in a low-airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. PC CA RD SLO T Supports one PC Card, such as a modem or network adapter. The computer ships with a plastic blank installed in the slot. For more information, NOTE: The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fan or the computer. A Tour of Your Computer 23 4n142bk0.book Page 24 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w see the Tell Me How help file. To access the help file, see"Accessing Help" on page 88. S M AR T CA RD SLO T Supports one smart card. For more information, see the Tell Me How help file. To access the help file, see "Accessing Help" on page 88. I N FRA RED S E NS O R Lets you transfer files from your computer to another infrared-compatible device without using cable connections. When you receive your computer, the sensor is disabled. You can use the system setup program to enable the sensor. For information on transferring data, see the Help and Support Center or the documentation that came with your infrared-

compatible device. AU D IO C ON N ECT O RS Attach a microphone to the connector. Attach headphones or speakers to the connector. H AR D D RI VE Stores software and data. S EC U RI T Y C AB LE SLOT Lets you attach a commercially available antitheft device to the computer. For more information, see the instructions included with the device. NOTICE: Before you buy an antitheft device, ensure that it will work with the security cable slot. 24 A Tour of Your Computer 4n142bk0.book Page 25 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Right Side View security cable slot module bay device latch release S EC U RI T Y C AB LE SLOT Lets you attach a commercially available antitheft device to the computer. For more information, see the instructions included with the device. NOTICE: Before you buy an antitheft device, ensure that it will work with the security cable slot. A Tour of Your Computer 25 4n142bk0.book Page 26 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w M OD UL E B AY You can install devices such as an optical drive or a Dell TravelLite module in the module bay. For more information, see "About the Module Bay" on page 52. DE VI CE LA TCH R ELE AS E Releases the module bay device. See "About the Module Bay" on page 52 for instructions. Back View NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer, wait 5 seconds after turning off the computer before you disconnect an external device. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your computer in a low-

airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. 26 A Tour of Your Computer 4n142bk0.book Page 27 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM modem connector

(RJ-11) (optional) network connector

(RJ-45) video connector air vents parallel connector AC adapter connector S-video TV-out connector USB connectors (2) serial connector USB C ON N EC T OR S Connect USB devices, such as a mouse, keyboard, or printer. You can also connect the optional floppy drive directly to a USB connector using the optional floppy drive cable. A Tour of Your Computer 27 4n142bk0.book Page 28 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w S- VI DE O TV-O UT CO NN EC T OR Connects your computer to a TV. For more information, see "Connecting a Television to the Computer" on page 75. M OD EM C ON N ECT O R (RJ-11) (O P T I ON AL) If you ordered the optional internal modem, connect the telephone line to the modem connector. For information on using the modem, see the online modem documentation supplied with your computer. See "Accessing Help" on page 88. N ET W O RK C ON N ECT O R (RJ-45) NOTICE: The network connector is slightly larger than the modem connector. To avoid damaging the computer, do not plug a telephone line into the network connector. Connects the computer to a network. The green and yellow lights next to the connector indicate activity for both wired and wireless network communications. For information on using the network adapter, see the device users guide supplied with your computer. See

"Accessing Help" on page 88. PAR ALLE L C ON N EC T OR Connects a parallel device, such as a printer. VI D EO CO NN E CT O R Connects an external monitor. For more information, see the Tell Me How help file. To access the help file, see

"Accessing Help" on page 88. 28 A Tour of Your Computer 4n142bk0.book Page 29 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM S ER I AL CON N EC T OR Connects serial devices, such as a mouse or handheld device. AC AD AP T E R C ON N EC T OR Attach an AC adapter to the computer. The AC adapter converts AC power to the DC power required by the computer. You can connect the AC adapter with your computer turned either on or off. CAUTION: The AC adapter works with electrical outlets worldwide. However, power connectors and power strips vary among countries. Using an incompatible cable or improperly connecting the cable to the power strip or electrical outlet may cause fire or equipment damage. NOTICE: When you disconnect the AC adapter cable from the computer, grasp the connector, not the cable itself, and pull firmly but gently to avoid damaging the cable. AI R VE NT S The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. A Tour of Your Computer 29 4n142bk0.book Page 30 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fan or the computer. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your computer in a low-

airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. Bottom View memory module cover battery-bay latch release battery charge gauge battery hard drive Mini PCI card cover fan docking device slot M EM OR Y M ODU LE C OVE R Covers the compartment that contains the memory module(s). See "Adding Memory" on page 108. BA T T ER Y- BA Y LA TCH R ELE AS E Releases the battery. See "Using a Battery"

on page 46 for instructions. 30 A Tour of Your Computer 4n142bk0.book Page 31 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM BA T T ER Y CH AR GE GA UG E Provides information on the battery charge. See

"Using a Battery" on page 46. BA T T ER Y When a battery is installed, you can use the computer without connecting the computer to an electrical outlet. See "Using a Battery" on page 46. DO CK I N G D EV IC E SLOT Lets you attach your computer to a docking device. See the documentation that came with your docking device for additional information. FA N The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your computer in a low-

airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. MI N I PCI C AR D C OV ER Covers the compartment that contains the Mini PCI card. See "Adding a Mini PCI Card" on page 110. H ARD D RI VE Stores software and data. NOTE: The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fan or the computer. A Tour of Your Computer 31 4n142bk0.book Page 32 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 32 A Tour of Your Computer 4n142bk0.book Page 33 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM S E C T I O N 2 S e t t i n g U p Yo u r C o m p u t e r Connecting to the Internet Modem and Internet Connection Problems E-Mail Problems Transferring Information to a New Computer Setting Up a Printer Printer Problems Setting Up the Docking Device to Connect to a Network Power Protection Devices Turning Off Your Computer 4n142bk0.book Page 34 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM NOTE: ISPs and ISP offerings vary by country. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Connecting to the Internet To connect to the Internet, you need a modem or network connection and an Internet service provider (ISP), such as AOL or MSN. Your ISP will offer one or more of the following Internet connection options:

Dial-up connections that provide Internet access through a phone line. Dial-up connections are considerably slower than DSL and cable modem connections. DSL connections that provide high-speed Internet access through your existing phone line. With a DSL connection, you can access the Internet and use your phone on the same line simultaneously. Cable modem connections that provide high-speed Internet access through your local cable TV line. If you are using a dial-up connection, connect a telephone line to the modem connector on your computer and to the telephone wall jack before you set up your Internet connection. If you are using a DSL or cable modem connection, contact your ISP for setup instructions. Setting Up Your Internet Connection To set up an AOL or MSN connection:

1 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. 2 Double-click the MSN Explorer or AOL icon on the Windows desktop. 3 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. If you do not have an MSN Explorer or AOL icon on your desktop or if you want to set up an Internet connection with a different ISP:

1 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. 2 Click the Start button and click Internet Explorer. The New Connection Wizard appears. 3 Click Connect to the Internet. 4 In the next window, click the appropriate option:

If you do not have an ISP and want to select one, click Choose from a list of Internet service providers (ISPs). 34 Setting Up Your Computer 4n142bk0.book Page 35 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM If you have already obtained setup information from your ISP but you did not receive a setup CD, click Set up my connection manually. If you have a CD, click Use the CD I got from an ISP. 5 Click Next. If you selected Set up my connection manually, continue to step 6. Otherwise, follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. 6 Click the appropriate option under How do you want to connect to the Internet?, and then click Next. 7 Use the setup information provided by your ISP to complete the setup. If you cannot connect to the Internet but have successfully connected in the past, the ISP might have a service outage. Contact your ISP to check the service status, or try connecting again later. Modem and Internet Connection Problems NOTICE: Connect the modem to an analog telephone wall jack only. Connecting the modem to a digital telephone network damages the modem. NOTICE: Modem and network connectors look similar. Do not plug a telephone line into the network connector. CH EC K T H E T ELE PH O NE WA LL J AC K Disconnect the telephone line from the modem and connect it to a telephone. Listen for a dial tone. Ensure that you have touchtone telephone service. Try connecting the modem to a different telephone wall jack. Slow connection speeds can be caused by telephone noise as well as by telephone line or network conditions. Contact your telephone company or network administrator for more information. CO N NE CT T HE M OD EM D IR EC T LY T O T H E T EL E P H ON E WALL JA CK If you have other telephone devices sharing the line, such as an answering machine, fax machine, surge protector, or line splitter, then bypass them and use the telephone line to connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack. CH EC K T H E C ON N EC T I ON Verify that the telephone line is connected to the modem. CH EC K T H E T ELE PH O NE LI N E Try using a different telephone line. If you are using a line that is 3 m (10 ft) or more in length, try a shorter one. NOTE: If you do not know which type of connection to select, contact your ISP. NOTE: If you can connect to your Internet service provider (ISP), your modem is functioning properly. If you are sure that your modem is working properly and you still experience problems, contact your ISP. Setting Up Your Computer 35 4n142bk0.book Page 36 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w I RRE GU LA R D I AL T ON E If you have voice mail service, you might hear an irregular dial tone when you have messages. Contact your telephone company for instructions on restoring a dial tone. TU RN O FF C ALL W AI T I N G ( CA T CH-P H O NE) See your telephone directory for instructions on deactivating this feature. Then adjust the dial-up networking connection properties. 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware, click Phone and Modem Options, click the Dialing Rules tab, and then click Edit.... 3 In the Edit Location window, ensure that To disable call waiting, dial: is checked, and then select the proper code as listed in your telephone directory. 4 Click Apply and click OK. 5 Close the Phone and Modems Options window. 6 Close the Control Panel window. VER I FY T H A T T H E M O DE M IS CO M MU N I CAT I N G W I T H WI N DOW S 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware and click Phone and Modem Options. 3 Click the Modems tab. 4 Click the COM port for your modem. 5 Click Properties, click the Diagnostics tab, and then click Query Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows. If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly. E-Mail Problems EN S U RE T H AT YOU A RE CO N NE CT E D T O T H E IN T E RN ET With the Outlook Express e-mail program open, click File. If Work Offline has a check mark next to it, click the check mark to remove it and connect to the Internet. 36 Setting Up Your Computer 4n142bk0.book Page 37 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Transferring Information to a New Computer The Microsoft Windows XP operating system provides a Files and Settings Transfer wizard to move data from the source computer to the new computer. You can move data such as:

E-mails Toolbar settings Window sizes Internet bookmarks You can transfer the data to the new computer over a network or serial connection, or you can store it on a removable medium, such as a writable CD or floppy disk. To prepare the new computer for the file transfer:

1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories System Tools, and then click Files and Settings Transfer Wizard. 2 When the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard welcome screen appears, click Next. 3 On the Which computer is this? screen, click New Computer and click Next. 4 On the Do you have a Windows XP CD? screen, click I will use the wizard from the Windows XP CD and click Next. 5 When the Now go to your old computer screen appears, go to your old or source computer. Do not click Next at this time. To copy data from the old computer:

1 On the old computer, insert the Windows XP Operating System CD. 2 On the Welcome to Microsoft Windows XP screen, click Perform additional tasks. 3 Under What do you want to do?, click Transfer files and settings. 4 On the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard welcome screen, click Next. Setting Up Your Computer 37 4n142bk0.book Page 38 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 5 On the Which computer is this? screen, click Old Computer and click Next. 6 On the Select a transfer method screen, click the transfer method you prefer. 7 On the What do you want to transfer? screen, select the items you want to transfer and click Next. After the information has been copied, the Completing the Collection Phase screen appears. 8 Click Finish. To transfer data to the new computer:

1 On the Now go to your old computer screen on the new computer, click Next. 2 On the Where are the files and settings? screen, select the method you chose for transferring your settings and files and click Next. The wizard reads the collected files and settings and applies them to your new computer. When all of the settings and files have been applied, the Finished screen appears. 3 Click Finished and restart the new computer. Setting Up a Printer NOTICE: Complete the operating system setup before you connect a printer to the computer. See the documentation that came with the printer for setup information, including how to:

Obtain and install updated drivers. Connect the printer to the computer. Load paper and install the toner or ink cartridge. Contact the printer manufacturer for technical assistance. 38 Setting Up Your Computer 4n142bk0.book Page 39 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Printer Cable Your printer connects to your computer with either a USB cable or a parallel cable. Your printer may not come with a printer cable, so if you purchase a cable separately, ensure that it is compatible with your printer. If you purchased a printer cable at the same time you purchased your computer, the cable may arrive in the computer box. Connecting a Parallel Printer 1 Complete the operating system setup, if you have not already done so. 2 Shut down the computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 43). NOTICE: For best results, use a 3-m (10-ft) or shorter parallel cable. 3 Attach the parallel printer cable to the parallel connector on the computer and tighten the two screws. Attach the cable to the connector on the printer and snap the two clips into the two notches. parallel connector on computer connector on printer clips (2) screws (2) parallel printer cable notches (2) 4 Turn on the printer and then turn on the computer. If the Add New Hardware Wizard window appears, click Cancel. Setting Up Your Computer 39 4n142bk0.book Page 40 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM NOTE: You can connect USB devices while the computer is turned on. 5 Install the printer driver if necessary. See the documentation that came with your printer. Connecting a USB Printer 1 Complete the operating system setup if you have not already done so. 2 Install the printer driver if necessary. See the documentation that came with your printer. 3 Attach the USB printer cable to the USB connectors on the computer and the printer. The USB connectors fit only one way. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w USB connector on computer USB printer cable USB connector on printer Printer Problems CH E CK T H E PR I NT ER CAB LE CO NN E CT I ON S Ensure that the printer cable is properly connected to the computer. TES T T H E E LEC T RI CA L O U T LET Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. EN S U RE T H AT T H E P R IN T E R I S T UR N ED ON See the documentation supplied with the printer. 40 Setting Up Your Computer 4n142bk0.book Page 41 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM VER I FY T H AT WI N DO W S RE CO GN I Z ES T HE P RI N T ER 1 Click the Start button. 2 Click Control Panel. 3 Click Printers and Other Hardware. 4 Click View installed printers or fax printers. If the printer model is listed, right-

click the printer icon. 5 Click Properties, and then click the Ports tab. Ensure that the Print to the following port(s): setting is LPT1 (Printer Port). REI N S T ALL T H E P R I NT E R DRI V ER See "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities"

on page 98. Setting Up the Docking Device to Connect to a Network NOTICE: Do not install a network adapter or a network adapter/modem combination PC Card until you complete the docking device setup. NOTICE: To prevent serious operating system problems, do not connect your computer to a docking device until the Windows operating system setup on the computer is complete. A docking device allows you to more fully integrate your portable computer into a desktop environment. For instructions and details on setting up a docking device, refer to the documentation that came packaged with the device. Power Protection Devices Several devices are available to protect against power fluctuations and failures:

Surge protectors Line conditioners Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) NOTE: A network adapter is also referred to as a network interface controller (NIC). Setting Up Your Computer 41 4n142bk0.book Page 42 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: To ensure maximum battery operating time, connect only your computer to a UPS. Connect other devices, such as a printer, to a separate power strip that provides surge protection. Surge Protectors Surge protectors and power strips equipped with surge protection help to prevent damage to your computer from voltage spikes that can occur during electrical storms or following power interruptions. The level of protection is usually commensurate with the cost of the surge protector. Some surge protector manufacturers include warranty coverage for certain types of damage. Carefully read the device warranty when choosing a surge protector. A device with a higher joule rating offers more protection. Compare joule ratings to determine the relative effectiveness of different devices. NOTICE: Most surge protectors do not protect against power fluctuations or power interruptions caused by nearby lightning strikes. When lightning occurs in your area, disconnect the telephone line from the telephone wall jack and disconnect your computer from the electrical outlet. Many surge protectors have a telephone jack for modem protection. See the surge protector documentation for modem connection instructions. NOTICE: Not all surge protectors offer network adapter protection. Disconnect the network cable from the network wall jack during electrical storms. Line Conditioners NOTICE: Line conditioners do not protect against power interruptions. Line conditioners are designed to maintain AC voltage at a fairly constant level. Uninterruptible Power Supplies NOTICE: Loss of power while data is being saved to the hard drive may result in data loss or file damage. A UPS protects against power fluctuations and interruptions. UPS devices contain a battery that provides temporary power to connected devices when AC power is interrupted. The battery charges while AC power is available. See the UPS manufacturer documentation for information on battery operating time and to ensure that the device is approved by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 42 Setting Up Your Computer 4n142bk0.book Page 43 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Turning Off Your Computer NOTICE: To avoid losing data, turn off your computer by performing a Microsoft Windows operating system shutdown, as described next, rather than by pressing the power button. 1 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, click the Start button, and then click Turn Off Computer. 2 In the Turn off computer window, click Turn off. The computer turns off after the shutdown process finishes. NOTE: As an alternative to turning off your computer, you can set your computer to enter standby or hibernate mode. Setting Up Your Computer 43 4n142bk0.book Page 44 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 44 Setting Up Your Computer 4n142bk0.book Page 45 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM S E C T I O N 3 U s i n g B a t t e r i e s a n d M o d u l e B a y D e v i c e s Using a Battery Power Problems About the Module Bay Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Turned Off Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Running 4n142bk0.book Page 46 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: Batteries for portable computers are covered only during the initial one-year period of the limited warranty for your computer. For more information about the Dell warranty for your computer, see "Limited Warranties and Return Policy" on page 149. NOTE: It is recommended that you connect your computer to an electrical outlet when writing to a CD. Using a Battery Battery Performance Use a battery to power the computer when the computer is not connected to an electrical outlet. One battery is supplied as standard equipment in the battery bay. Battery operating time varies depending on operating conditions. With average usage, you may expect from 3 to 4 hours from a single, fully charged battery. You can install an optional second battery in the module bay to significantly increase operating time. For more information about the second battery, see "About the Module Bay" on page 52. Operating time is significantly reduced when you perform operations including, but not limited to, the following:

Using optical drives, especially DVD and CD-RW drives Using wireless communications devices, PC Cards, or USB devices Using high-brightness display settings, 3D screen savers, or other power-intensive programs, such as 3D games Running the computer in maximum performance mode You can check the battery charge on the bottom of the computer. You can also set power management options to alert you when the battery charge is low. CAUTION: Using an incompatible battery may increase the risk of fire or explosion. Replace the battery only with a compatible battery purchased from Dell. The lithium-ion battery is designed to work with your Dell computer. Do not use a battery from other computers with your computer. CAUTION: Do not dispose of batteries with household waste. When your battery no longer holds a charge, call your local waste disposal or environmental agency for advice on disposing of a lithium-ion battery. See the battery disposal instructions in

"Battery Disposal" on page 17. 46 Using Batteries and Module Bay Devices 4n142bk0.book Page 47 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM CAUTION: Misuse of the battery may increase the risk of fire or chemical burn. Do not puncture, incinerate, disassemble, or expose the battery to temperatures above 65C (149F). Keep the battery away from children. Handle damaged or leaking batteries with extreme care. Damaged batteries may leak and cause personal injury or equipment damage. Checking the Battery Charge The Dell QuickSet battery meter, Microsoft Windows power meter window and warning provide information on the battery charge. icon, the battery charge gauge, and the low-battery For more information about checking the charge on the second battery, see

"About the Module Bay" on page 52. Dell QuickSet Battery Meter Press to display the QuickSet Battery Meter. The Battery Meter screen displays status, charge level, and charge completion time for the primary and secondary batteries in your computer. The following icons appear in the Battery Meter screen:

The computer is running on battery power. The battery is discharging or idle. The computer is connected to an electrical outlet and running on AC power. The battery is charging. The computer is connected to an electrical outlet and running on AC power. The battery is discharging, idle, or charging. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the taskbar, and click Help. icon in the NOTE: Dell recommends that you connect your computer to an electrical outlet when writing to a CD. Using Batteries and Module Bay Devices 47 4n142bk0.book Page 48 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Microsoft Windows Power Meter The Windows power meter indicates the remaining battery charge. To check the power meter, double-click the information on the Power Meter tab, see the Tell Me How help file. To access the help file, see "Accessing Help" on page 88. icon on the taskbar. For more If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, a icon appears. Charge Gauge Press the status button on the battery charge gauge to illuminate the charge-level lights. Each light represents approximately 20 percent of the total battery charge. For example, if the battery has 80 percent of its charge remaining, four of the lights are on. If no lights appear, the battery has no charge. Low-Battery Warning NOTICE: To avoid losing or corrupting data, save your work immediately after a low-battery warning. Then connect the computer to an electrical outlet, or install a second battery in the module bay. If the battery runs completely out of power, hibernate mode begins automatically. 48 Using Batteries and Module Bay Devices 4n142bk0.book Page 49 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM A low-battery warning occurs when the battery charge is approximately 90 percent depleted. The computer beeps once, indicating that minimal battery operating time remains. During that time, the speaker beeps periodically. If two batteries are installed, the low-battery warning means that the combined charge of both batteries is approximately 90 percent depleted. The computer enters hibernate mode when the battery charge is at a critically low level. For more information on low-battery alarms, see the Tell Me How help file. To access the help file, see "Accessing Help" on page 88. Charging the Battery When you connect the computer to an electrical outlet or install a battery while the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the computer checks the battery charge and temperature. If necessary, the AC adapter then charges the battery and maintains the battery charge. If the battery is hot from being used in your computer or being in a hot environment, the battery may not charge when you connect the computer to an electrical outlet. Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet and allow the computer and the battery to cool to room temperature. Then connect the computer to an electrical outlet to continue charging the battery. For more information on resolving problems with a battery, see "Power Problems" on page 51. Removing a Battery For more information about removing the second battery, see "About the Module Bay" on page 52. CAUTION: Before performing these procedures, turn off the computer, disconnect it from the electrical outlet, and disconnect the modem from the telephone wall jack. NOTICE: If you choose to replace the battery with the computer in standby mode, you have up to 90 seconds to complete the battery replacement before the computer shuts down and loses any unsaved data. 1 Ensure that the computer is turned off, disconnected from an electrical outlet, and disconnected from the telephone wall jack. NOTE: The AC adapter charges a completely discharged battery in approximately 1 hour with the computer turned off. Charge time is longer with the computer turned on. You can leave the battery in the computer as long as you like. The battery internal circuitry prevents the battery from overcharging. Using Batteries and Module Bay Devices 49 4n142bk0.book Page 50 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 2 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 3 Slide and hold the battery-bay latch release on the bottom of the computer, and then remove the battery from the bay. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Installing a Battery Slide the battery into the bay until the latch release clicks. For more information about installing the second battery, see "About the Module Bay" on page 52. Storing a Battery Remove the battery when you store your computer for an extended period of time. A battery discharges during prolonged storage. After a long storage period, recharge the battery fully before you use it. 50 Using Batteries and Module Bay Devices 4n142bk0.book Page 51 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Power Problems CH EC K T H E P O W ER LI GH T When the power light is lit or blinking, the computer has power. If the power light is blinking, the computer is in standby modepress the power button to exit standby mode. If the light is off, press the power button to turn on the computer. CH AR GE T H E BAT T E R Y The battery charge may be depleted. 1 Reinstall the battery. 2 Use the AC adapter to connect the computer to an electrical outlet. 3 Turn on the computer. CH EC K T H E BAT T E R Y S T A T U S LI GH T If the battery status light flashes orange or is a steady orange, the battery charge is low or depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. If the battery status light flashes green and orange, the battery is too hot to charge. Turn off the computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 43), disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet, and then let the battery and computer cool to room temperature. If the battery status light rapidly flashes orange, the battery may be defective. Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 129). TES T T H E E LEC T RI CA L O UT LET Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. CH EC K T H E AC ADA P T ER Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on. Make sure that the AC adapter is a Dell AC adapter that is designed to work with your computer. CO N NE CT T HE CO M P UT E R DI RE CT LY T O AN E LEC T RI CA L O UT L ET Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and the extension cable to verify that the computer turns on. ELI M I N AT E P OS S I B LE IN T E R F ERE N CE Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. AD JU S T T HE POW ER P RO P ER T IE S See the Tell Me How help file or search for the keyword standby in the Help and Support Center. To access help, see

"Accessing Help" on page 88. RES E AT T H E M EM OR Y MO DU LE S If the computer power light turns on but the display remains blank, reseat the memory modules (see "Adding Memory" on page 108). Using Batteries and Module Bay Devices 51 4n142bk0.book Page 52 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM NOTE: See the Tell Me How help file for information on standby mode. To access the help file, see "Accessing Help"

on page 88. NOTE: You do not need to install the device screw unless you want to secure the module inside the computer for security purposes. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w About the Module Bay You can install devices such as a floppy drive, CD drive, CD-RW drive, DVD drive, CD-RW/DVD drive, DVD+RW, second battery, or second hard drive in the module bay. Your Dell computer ships with an optical drive installed in the module bay. However, the device screw is not installed in the optical drive but packaged separately. When you install your device in the module bay, you can install the device screw. Checking the Charge on the Second Battery Before you install a second battery, press the status button on the battery charge gauge to illuminate the charge-level lights. Each light represents approximately 20 percent of the total battery charge. For example, if the battery has 80 percent of its charge remaining, four of the lights are on. If no lights appear, the battery has no charge. status button on the battery charge gauge second battery (bottom) 52 Using Batteries and Module Bay Devices 4n142bk0.book Page 53 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Turned Off Your computer ships with an optical drive installed in the module bay. However, the device screw is not installed in the optical drive but packaged separately. When you install your device in the module bay, you can install the device screw. If the Device Screw Is Not Installed NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. 1 Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. NOTE: If the device screw is not installed, you can remove and install devices while the computer is running and connected to a docking device (docked). NOTE: You do not need to install the device screw unless you want to secure the module inside the computer for security purposes. device latch release Using Batteries and Module Bay Devices 53 4n142bk0.book Page 54 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 2 Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the module bay. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 3 Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. If the Device Screw Is Installed 1 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. 2 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. 3 Close the display and turn the computer over. 54 Using Batteries and Module Bay Devices 4n142bk0.book Page 55 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 4 Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the device screw from the bottom of the computer. device latch release 5 Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. 6 Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the module bay. Using Batteries and Module Bay Devices 55 4n142bk0.book Page 56 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: If the device screw is not installed, you can remove and install devices while the computer is running and connected to a docking device (docked). NOTE: You do not need to install the device screw unless you want to secure the module inside the computer for security purposes. NOTICE: Insert devices into the module bay before you dock and turn on the computer. 7 Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. 8 Replace the device screw. 9 Turn on the computer. Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Running Your computer ships with an optical drive installed in the module bay. However, the device screw is not installed in the optical drive but packaged separately. When you install your device in the module bay, you can install the device screw. If the Device Screw Is Not Installed 1 Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the taskbar. 2 Click Stop and wait for the operating system to confirm that the device has stopped. 3 Click the device you want to eject. NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. 56 Using Batteries and Module Bay Devices 4n142bk0.book Page 57 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 4 Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. device latch release 5 Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the module bay. Using Batteries and Module Bay Devices 57 4n142bk0.book Page 58 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 6 Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. Windows XP automatically recognizes the new device. 7 If necessary, enter your password to unlock your computer. If the Device Screw Is Installed 1 Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the taskbar. 2 Click the device you want to eject. 3 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. 4 Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the device screw from the bottom of the computer. device latch release 58 Using Batteries and Module Bay Devices 4n142bk0.book Page 59 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 5 Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. 6 Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the module bay. 7 Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. Windows XP automatically recognizes the new device. 8 If necessary, enter your password to unlock your computer. Using Batteries and Module Bay Devices 59 4n142bk0.book Page 60 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 60 Using Batteries and Module Bay Devices 4n142bk0.book Page 61 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM S E C T I O N 4 U s i n g t h e Ke y b o a r d a n d To u c h Pa d Numeric Keypad Keyboard Shortcuts Customizing the Touch Pad Touch Pad or Mouse Problems External Keyboard Problems Unexpected Characters 4n142bk0.book Page 62 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Numeric Keypad m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: When you connect an external keyboard or keypad to the computer, the keypad is disabled. NOTE: You can change options for using the numeric keypad in the system setup program. The keypad numbers and symbols are marked in blue on the right side of the keypad keys. To type a number or symbol, press to enable the numeric keypad, and then hold down and press the desired key. 62 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad 4n142bk0.book Page 63 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Keyboard Shortcuts System Functions Battery CD or DVD Tray Display Functions Opens the Windows Task Manager window. Enables and disables the numeric keypad. Enables and disables the scroll lock. Displays the Dell QuickSet Battery Meter. Ejects the tray out of the drive. Switches the video image to the next display in the following sequence: the integrated display only, the integrated display and an external CRT monitor simultaneously, an external CRT monitor only, the integrated display and an external DVI monitor simultaneously, and an external DVI monitor only. Increases brightness on the integrated display only

(not on an external monitor). Decreases brightness on the integrated display only

(not on an external monitor). Radios (Including Wireless Networking and Bluetooth) Enables and disables radios, including wireless networking and Bluetooth. Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad 63 4n142bk0.book Page 64 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Power Management Activates the power management mode of your choice. You can program this keyboard shortcut on the Advanced tab in the Power Options Properties window. Speaker Functions If no sound comes from the speakers, press volume. and adjust the Increases the volume of the integrated speakers and external speakers, if attached. Decreases the volume of the integrated speakers and external speakers, if attached. Enables and disables the integrated speakers and external speakers, if attached. Microsoft Windows Logo Key Functions Minimizes all open windows. Maximizes all windows. Runs Windows Explorer. Opens the Run dialog box. Opens the Search Results dialog box. Opens the Search Results-Computer dialog box (if the computer is connected to a network). Opens the System Properties dialog box. To adjust keyboard operation, such as the character repeat rate, open the Control Panel, and click Printers and Other Hardware. 64 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad 4n142bk0.book Page 65 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM The touch pad detects the pressure and movement of your finger to allow you to move the cursor on the display. Use the touch pad and touch pad buttons as you would use a mouse. touch pad touch pad buttons To move the cursor, lightly slide your finger over the touch pad. To select an object, lightly tap once on the surface of the touch pad or use your thumb to press the left touch-pad button. To select and move (or drag) an object, position the cursor on the object and tap down-up-down on the touch pad. On the second down motion, leave your finger on the touch pad and move the selected object by sliding your finger across the surface. To double-click an object, position the cursor on the object and then tap twice on the touch pad, or use your thumb to press the left touch-

pad button twice. Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad 65 4n142bk0.book Page 66 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Customizing the Touch Pad You can disable the touch pad or adjust their settings by using the Mouse Properties window. 1 Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Mouse icon. 2 On the Mouse Properties window:

Click the Device Select tab to disable the touch pad. Click the Pointer tab to adjust touch pad settings. 3 Select the desired settings and click Apply. 4 Click OK to save the settings and close the window. Touch Pad or Mouse Problems CH E CK T H E T OU CH P A D S ET T I N GS 1 Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Printers and Other Hardware. 2 Click Mouse. 3 Try adjusting the settings. TO V ER IF Y T H AT T H E P ROB L EM I S W I T H T H E M O US E, C H ECK T H E T OU CH P AD 1 Shut down the computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 43). 2 Disconnect the mouse. 3 Turn on the computer. 4 At the Windows desktop, use the touch pad to move the cursor around, select an icon, and open it. If the touch pad operates correctly, the mouse may be defective. REI N S T ALL T H E T O U CH P A D D RI VE R See "Reinstalling Drivers and Software" on page 105. External Keyboard Problems CH E CK T H E KE YBO AR D C AB LE Shut down the computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 43). Disconnect the keyboard cable and check it for damage. If you are using a keyboard extension cable, disconnect it and connect the keyboard directly to the computer. 66 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad 4n142bk0.book Page 67 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM CH EC K T H E EXT ER N AL K E YBO AR D 1 Turn off the computer, wait 1 minute, and turn it on again. 2 Verify that the numbers, capitals, and scroll lock lights on the keyboard blink during the boot routine. 3 From the Windows desktop, click the Start button, point to All Programs, point to Accessories, and click Notepad. 4 Type some characters on the external keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If you cannot verify these steps, you may have a defective external keyboard. TO VER I FY T H A T T H E PR OB LEM I S W I T H T HE EX T ER NA L K EY BOA RD, CH EC K T H E IN T E GRA T ED K EYB OA RD 1 Turn off the computer. 2 Disconnect the external keyboard. 3 Turn on the computer. 4 From the Windows desktop, click the Start button, point to All Programs, point to Accessories, and click Notepad. 5 Type some characters on the external keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If the characters appear now but did not with the external keyboard, you may have a defective external keyboard. Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 129). Unexpected Characters DI S A BLE T H E NU M ER IC K EY P AD Press of letters. Verify that the numbers lock light is not lit. to disable the numeric keypad if numbers are displayed instead NOTE: When you attach an external keyboard, the integrated keyboard remains fully functional. Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad 67 4n142bk0.book Page 68 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 68 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad 4n142bk0.book Page 69 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM S E C T I O N 5 U s i n g C D s , D V D s , a n d O t h e r M u l t i m e d i a Using CDs and DVDs CD and DVD Problems Sound and Speaker Problems Copying CDs Connecting a Television to the Computer 4n142bk0.book Page 70 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: Because of different worldwide file types, not all DVD titles work in all DVD drives. Using CDs and DVDs For information about using CDs and DVDs in your computer, see the Tell Me How help file. To access the help file, see "Accessing Help" on page 88. CD and DVD Problems If you cannot play a CD or DVD High-speed CD drive vibration is normal and may cause noise. This noise does not indicate a defect with the drive or the CD. light is blinking, indicating normal operation. EN S U RE T H AT WI ND OW S RE COG N IZ ES T H E DR I VE Click the Start button and click My Computer. If the drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. Insert a bootable disk and restart the computer. Verify that the TR Y AN OT H E R D I S C Insert another disc to eliminate the possibility that the original disc is defective. EN S U RE T H AT T H E CD I S S N AP P ED T O T H E S P I N DL E. AD JU S T T HE WI N DO W S V OLU M E CON T R OL Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. REI N S T ALL T H E D RI V E 1 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2 Remove the drive. See "Using the Module Bay" in the Tell Me How help file for instructions. To access the help file, see "Accessing Help" on page 88. 3 Reinstall the drive. 4 Turn on the computer. CL EAN T H E DR I VE OR DI S C See "Cleaning Your Computer" in the Tell Me How help file for instructions. To access the help file, see "Accessing Help" on page 88. If you cannot eject the CD, CD-RW, or DVD drive tray 1 Ensure that the computer is shut down and turned off (see page 43). 2 Straighten a paper clip and insert one end into the eject hole at the front of the drive; push firmly until the tray is partially ejected. 3 Gently pull out the tray until it stops. 70 Using CDs, DVDs, and Other Multimedia 4n142bk0.book Page 71 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM If you hear an unfamiliar scraping or grinding sound Ensure that the sound is not caused by the program that is running. Ensure that the disk or disc is inserted properly. If the CD-RW drive stops writing DI S A BLE S T A ND BY M ODE I N WI N DO W S B EFO RE W RI T I N G T O A CD-RW Search for the keyword standby in the Help and Support Center. To access help, see "Accessing Help" on page 88. CH AN G E T H E W RI T E S P EE D T O A SLO W ER R AT E See the help files for your CD creation software. EX I T ALL OT H E R O P EN P R OGR AM S Exiting all other open programs before writing to the CD-RW may alleviate the problem. Sound and Speaker Problems If you have a problem with integrated speakers AD JU S T T HE WI N DO W S V OLU M E C ON T RO L Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Adjust the volume, bass, or treble controls to eliminate distortion. AD JU S T T HE VO LU M E U S I N G T HE VO LU M E C ON T RO L B U T T ON S Press the volume control buttons and mute button, which are located above the keyboard. REI N S T ALL T H E S OU N D ( AU DI O) D RI V ER See "Reinstalling Drivers and Software" on page 105. If you have a problem with external speakers CH EC K T H E S P EAK E R C ABL E C ON N EC T IO N S See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. TES T T H E E LEC T RI CA L O UT LET Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. EN S U RE T H AT T HE S P E AK ER S AR E T UR N ED ON See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. AD JU S T T HE WI N DO W S V OLU M E CON T R OL Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Adjust the volume, bass, or treble controls to eliminate distortion. NOTE: The volume control in some MP3 players overrides the Windows volume setting. If you have been listening to MP3 songs, make sure that you did not turn the player volume down or off. Using CDs, DVDs, and Other Multimedia 71 4n142bk0.book Page 72 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: To "burn" a CD means to copy or create your own custom CD. Ensure that you follow all copyright laws when you create CDs. TES T T H E S P E AK ER S Plug the speaker audio cable into the line-out connector on the computer. Ensure that the headphone volume control is turned up. Play a music CD. R U N T HE S P E AK ER S EL F-T E S T Some speaker systems have a self-test button on the subwoofer. See the speaker documentation for self-test instructions. EL IM I N AT E P OS S I B LE IN T E R F ERE N CE Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, or halogen lamps to check for interference. REI N S T ALL T H E S OU N D ( AU DI O) DRI V ER See "Reinstalling Drivers and Software" on page 105. Copying CDs This section applies only to computers that have a CD- or DVD-recording device. The information in this section is based on the Roxio Easy CD Creator Basic documentation that came with your computer. See "Using Easy CD Creator Basic" on page 73 for instructions on how to locate that documentation. NOTE: The information in this section also applies to using Easy CD Creator Basic with a DVD+RW or a DVD+R drive. To burn CDs, you need to use CD-burner software. Roxio Easy CD Creator Basic is your computer's CD-burner software. The software includes the following project programs that enable you to record specialty CDs for different types of uses:

DirectCD allows you to format a blank CD-R or CD-RW disc so that you can use Microsoft Windows Explorer to drag and drop data files to the CD-RW drive. You can use a DirectCD-formatted CD-RW disc like another hard drive on your computer because CD-RW discs are fully rewritable (CD-R discs can be used with DirectCD, but that media type has overwriting limitationssee "Using Blank CD-R Discs or Blank CD-RW Discs" on page 73 for recording media differences). MusicCD allows you to burn custom music CDs. DataCD allows you to copy a variety of your documents, such as spreadsheet or accounting files, to a CD for permanent storage. 72 Using CDs, DVDs, and Other Multimedia NOTE: Some music and game CDs are copy-

protected. If you have a CD that cannot be copied, you must use the original CD for everyday use. 4n142bk0.book Page 73 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Disc Copier allows you to make a backup copy of almost any type of CD. This program allows you to make a copy of a CD for everyday use so that you can archive and save the original copy. (Disc Copier is titled "CD Copier" in some versions of Roxio CD Creator Basic.) All four project programs are available on the Easy CD Creator Basic Select a Project menu screen. To view the Select a Project menu screen, click the Start button, point to All Programs Roxio Easy CD Creator, and then click Project Selector. Using Easy CD Creator Basic See the Easy CD Creator Basic documentation for instructions on how to use the program, information about different recording techniques, and CD media limitations. The Easy CD Creator Basic documentation is located in the Help and Support Center (see "Accessing Help" on page 88). The documentation is also provided on the Roxio reinstallation CD, which is included with your computer. Each Easy CD Creator Basic project program also has thorough online help files. Using Blank CD-R Discs or Blank CD-RW Discs Your CD-RW drive writes to two different types of recording mediaCD-R and CD-RW discs. Use blank CD-R (CD-Recordable) disks to record music or permanently store data files. After creating a CD-R disc, you cannot write to that disc again without changing your method of recording (see the Roxio documentation for more information). Use blank CD-RW

(CD-ReWritable) discs when you want to write, erase, rewrite, and update your files onto CDs. Helpful Tips You must use the Easy CD Creator Basic project programs to copy and record all music and data CDs. You can use Windows Explorer to drag and drop files to a CD-R or CD-RW disc only after you first use DirectCD to format the disc. You must use CD-R discs to burn music CDs that you want to play in regular stereos. CD-RW discs do not play in most home or car stereos. Using CDs, DVDs, and Other Multimedia 73 4n142bk0.book Page 74 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w If you want to copy files from the Internet or files from a floppy or Zip drive, copy those files to your hard drive first, and then burn your CD. Your CD-RW drive requires a steady stream of data to properly record. Direct Internet downloads, floppy drives, and Zip drives may not be able to provide a steady data stream to your CD-RW drive. Music MP3 files can be played only on MP3 players or on computers that have MP3 software installed. Ensure that you set the sampling rate to at least 128 Kbps when you burn MP3 files to a CD. Otherwise, recording errors may occur. Do not burn a blank CD-R or CD-RW disc to its maximum capacity;

for example, do not copy a 650-MB file to a 650-MB blank CD. The CD-RW drive needs 1 or 2 MB of the blank CD to finalize the recording. Use a blank CD-RW disc to practice CD recording until you are familiar with CD recording techniques. If you make a mistake, you can erase the CD-RW disc and try again. You can also use blank CD-RW discs to test music file projects before you record the project permanently to a blank CD-R disc. See the Roxio support website at support.roxio.com for additional helpful tips. How to Copy a CD The procedure assumes that your computer is equipped with a single CD-RW drive (without an additional CD drive). If your computer is equipped with both types of drives, see the Roxio documentation for instructions on how to copy CDs from a CD drive to a CD-RW drive. 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs Roxio Easy CD Creator, and then click Project Selector. The Select a Project window appears. 2 Click Disc Copier. (Disc Copier is titled "CD Copier" in some versions of Easy CD Creator Basic.) The Disc Copier window appears and displays your CD-RW drive in the Copy from and the Record to lists. NOTE: If you have a DVD/CD-RW combo drive and you experience recording problems, first check for available software patches on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com and if necessary, the Roxio support website at support.roxio.com. 74 Using CDs, DVDs, and Other Multimedia 4n142bk0.book Page 75 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 3 Insert the source CD that you want to copy into the CD-RW drive. The Disc Copier project program briefly checks the source CD in the CD-RW drive to ensure that it is a readable CD. 4 Click Copy. Depending on the size of the files that are being copied, the copy process may take a few minutes. 5 After the source CD is copied, remove the source CD from the CD-RW drive tray. The CD-RW drive tray opens automatically after the source CD is copied. 6 Insert a blank CD into the CD-RW drive and close the tray. The recording starts automatically. 7 After the recording completes, click OK. Connecting a Television to the Computer Your computer has an S-video TV-out connector that enables you to connect the computer to a television. Using a commercially available S-video cable or composite video cable, you can connect the computer to a television in one of two ways:

S-video (for a television with S-video input) Composite video (for a television with only a composite video input;

also uses the Dell-supplied composite TV-out adapter cable) The audio connector on the side of the computer enables you to connect the computer to your television or audio device, using a commercially available audio cable. When you complete the cable connection, see "Enabling the Display Settings for a Television" on page 80 to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the television. NOTE: Video and audio cables for connecting your computer to a television are not included with your computer. Cables may be purchased at most consumer electronics stores. NOTE: Diagrams for each connection combination appear at the beginning of each subsection to help you determine which method you should use. Using CDs, DVDs, and Other Multimedia 75 4n142bk0.book Page 76 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM S-Video Connection m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Before you begin, ensure that you have the following cables:

S-video cable audio cable 1 Shut down the computer and the television and/or audio device you want to connect. 2 Plug one end of the S-video cable into the S-video connector on the computer. 76 Using CDs, DVDs, and Other Multimedia 4n142bk0.book Page 77 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 3 Plug the other end of the S-video cable into your television. 4 Plug the single-connector end of the audio cable into the headphone connector on your computer. 5 Plug the two RCA connectors on the other end of the audio cable into the audio input connectors on your television or audio device. 6 Turn on the television, turn on any audio device you connected, and then turn on the computer. 7 See "Enabling the Display Settings for a Television" on page 80 to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the television. Using CDs, DVDs, and Other Multimedia 77 4n142bk0.book Page 78 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Composite Video Connection m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w To connect the computer to a television that has a composite video input only, Dell provides a composite TV-out adapter cable. Before you begin, ensure that you have the following cables:

composite TV-out adapter cable composite video cable audio cable 1 Turn off the computer and the television and/or audio device you want to connect. 2 Connect the composite TV-out adapter cable to the S-video TV-out connector on the computer. 78 Using CDs, DVDs, and Other Multimedia 4n142bk0.book Page 79 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM S-video TV-out connector S-video connector composite video connector composite TV-out adapter cable 3 Plug one end of the composite video cable into the composite video connector on the composite TV-out adapter cable. 4 Plug the other end of the composite video cable into the composite video connector on the television. 5 Plug the single-connector end of the audio cable into the headphone connector on the computer. Using CDs, DVDs, and Other Multimedia 79 4n142bk0.book Page 80 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 6 Plug the two RCA connectors on the other end of the audio cable into the audio input connectors on your television or audio device. Enabling the Display Settings for a Television ATI Video Controller 1 To open the Control Panel window, click the Start button and then click the Control Panel icon. 2 Double-click the Display icon, click the Settings tab, and then click Advanced. 3 Click the Displays tab. 4 Click the upper-left corner of the TV button to enable the television. 5 To play a DVD on the television, click the small "primary" button

(resembles a bulls-eye) at the bottom-left under the TV picture. 6 Click Apply. 7 Click Yes to keep the new settings. 8 Click OK. DVD video is visible only on the display that is set to primary. While the DVD is playing, the DVD player window on your computer display is blank or (if the DVD player window is set to full-screen mode) the entire computer display screen is blank. NOTE: Ensure that you properly connect the television before you enable the display settings. NOTE: Various programs access the hardware in different ways. You may or may not need to click the primary button for operations other than playing DVDs. 80 Using CDs, DVDs, and Other Multimedia

 

 

4n142bk0.book Page 81 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM S E C T I O N 6 S e t t i n g U p a H o m e a n d O f f i c e N e t w o r k Connecting to a Network Adapter Network Setup Wizard Network Problems 4n142bk0.book Page 82 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Connecting to a Network Adapter Before you connect your computer to a network, the computer must have a network adapter installed and a network cable connected to it. To connect a network cable:

1 Connect the network cable to the network adapter connector on the back of your computer. 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to a network connection device, such as a network wall jack. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: Insert the cable until it clicks into place, and then gently pull it to ensure that it is secure. NOTE: Do not use a network cable with a telephone wall jack. network cable network adapter connector on computer Network Setup Wizard The Microsoft Windows XP operating system provides a Network Setup Wizard to guide you through the process of sharing files, printers, or an Internet connection between computers in a home or small office. 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories Communications, and then click Network Setup Wizard. 82 Setting Up a Home and Office Network 4n142bk0.book Page 83 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 2 On the welcome screen, click Next. 3 Click Checklist for creating a network. 4 Complete the checklist and required preparations, and return to the Network Setup Wizard. 5 Follow the instructions on the screen. Network Problems CH EC K T H E N E T W OR K CA BLE CO NN E CT O R Ensure that the network cable connector is firmly connected to the optional connector on the computer and the network wall jack. CH EC K T H E N E T W OR K LI GH TS O N T H E N E T W OR K CO NN EC T OR Green indicates that the network connection is active. If the status light is not green, try replacing the network cable. Amber indicates that the optional network adapter driver is loaded and the adapter is detecting activity. RES T A RT T H E CO M P UT E R Try to log on to the network again. CO N T ACT YOU R N ET W O RK A DM I NI S T R AT O R Verify that your network settings are correct and that the network is functioning. NOTE: Selecting the connection method This computer connects directly to the Internet enables the integrated firewall provided with Windows XP. Setting Up a Home and Office Network 83 4n142bk0.book Page 84 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 84 Setting Up a Home and Office Network 4n142bk0.book Page 85 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM S E C T I O N 7 S o l v i n g P r o b l e m s Finding Solutions Accessing Help Error Messages Video and Display Problems Scanner Problems Drive Problems PC Card Problems General Program Problems If Your Computer Gets Wet If You Drop or Damage Your Computer Resolving Other Technical Problems Drivers Using System Restore Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities Reinstalling Microsoft Windows XP 4n142bk0.book Page 86 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: If you have a problem with an external device, see the device documentation or contact the manufacturer. Finding Solutions Sometimes its difficult to figure out where to go for answers. Use this chart to quickly find the answers to your questions. See page 51. Press the power button to resume from standby mode. See the Tell Me How help file for more information on standby mode. Get technical assistance from Dell. See page 88. See page 88. 86 Solving Problems 4n142bk0.book Page 87 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM See page 89. See page 71. See page 40. See page 35. See page 91. See page 66. See page 66. See page 67. See page 92 See page 83. See page 88. See page 94. See page 34. See page 95. See page 96. Solving Problems 87 4n142bk0.book Page 88 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Accessing Help TO ACC ES S T H E TELL ME HOW HE LP FI LE 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2 Click User and system guides and click Users guides. 3 Click Tell Me How. TO ACC ES S H ELP 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2 Type a word or phrase that describes your problem and click the arrow icon. 3 Click the topic that describes your problem. 4 Follow the instructions shown on the screen. Error Messages If the message is not listed, see the documentation for the operating system or the program that was running at the time the message appeared. TH E FI LE BE IN G CO P I ED I S T OO LA RG E F OR T H E D ES T I N AT I O N DR I VE The file that you are trying to copy is too large to fit on the disk, or the disk is too full. Try copying the file to a different disk or use a larger capacity disk. A FI LEN AM E CA NN O T CO N T AI N AN Y OF T H E FO LLO WI NG CH A RAC T ER S: \ / : * ? < > | Do not use these characters in filenames. I NS E RT BO OT AB LE M EDI A The operating system is trying to boot to a nonbootable floppy disk or CD. Insert a bootable floppy disk or CD. N ON-S Y S T EM D IS K OR DI S K E RR OR A floppy disk is in the floppy drive. Remove the floppy disk and restart the computer. 88 Solving Problems 4n142bk0.book Page 89 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM N OT E N OU GH M EM O R Y OR R ES O UR CE S. E XI T S O M E P R OG RAM S AN D T R Y A GA IN You have too many programs open. Close all windows and open the program that you want to use. OP E RA T IN G SYSTE M N OT F OU N D Contact Dell (see "Accessing Help" on page 88). A REQ U IR ED .DLL F IL E W A S N OT FOU N D The program that you are trying to open is missing an essential file. Remove and then reinstall the program. 1 Click the Start button. 2 Click Control Panel. 3 Click Add or Remove Programs. 4 Select the program you want to remove. 5 Click Remove or Change/Remove and follow the prompts on the screen. 6 See the program documentation for installation instructions. X:\ I S NO T A CCE S S I BLE. T H E DEV I CE I S N OT REA DY Insert a disk into the drive and try again. Video and Display Problems If the display is blank CH EC K T H E has power. If the L IG H T When the light is blinking, the computer light is blinking, the computer is in standby modepress the power button to exit standby mode. If the If the light is off, press the power button. light is on, your power management settings may have caused the display to turn off. Try pressing any key or move the cursor to exit standby mode. CH EC K T H E BAT T E R Y If you are using a battery to power your computer, the battery charge may be depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet using the AC adapter, and turn on the computer. NOTE: If you are using a program that requires a higher resolution than your computer supports, it is recommended that you attach an external monitor to your computer. Solving Problems 89 4n142bk0.book Page 90 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM TES T T H E E LEC T RI CA L O U T LET Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. CH E CK T H E AC ADA P T ER Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that it is on. CO N NE CT T HE CO M P UT E R DI RE CT LY T O AN E LEC T RI CA L O UT L ET Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and the extension cable to verify that the computer turns on. To access the help file, see "Accessing Help" on page 88. AD JU S T T HE POW ER PRO P ER T IE S Search for the keyword standby in the Help and Support Center. For instructions on accessing help files, see

"Accessing Help" on page 88. SW I T C H T HE V ID EO I M AGE If your computer is attached to an external monitor, press to switch the video image to the display. If the display is difficult to read AD JU S T T HE BR I GH T N ES S See the Tell Me How help file for instructions on adjusting the brightness. To access the help file, see "Accessing Help" on page 88. MO VE T H E S UB W OO FER AW A Y FRO M T HE CO MP U T E R OR M ON I T OR If your external speaker system includes a subwoofer, ensure that the subwoofer is at least 60 cm (2 ft) away from the computer or external monitor. EL IM I N AT E P OS S I B LE IN T E R F ERE N CE Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. RO T AT E T H E COM P U T ER T O FA CE A D I FFER EN T D I REC T I ON Eliminate sunlight glare, which can cause poor picture quality. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 90 Solving Problems 4n142bk0.book Page 91 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM AD JU S T T HE WI N DO W S D IS P LAY S ET T I N GS 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Appearance and Themes. 3 Click the area you want to change or click the Display icon. 4 Try different settings for Color quality and Screen resolution. SE E "E RR OR MES S AG ES" If an error message appears, see "Error Messages" on page 88. If only part of the display is readable CO N NE CT A N EXT E RN AL M ON I T OR 1 Turn off your computer and connect an external monitor to the computer. 2 Turn on the computer and the monitor, and adjust the monitor brightness and contrast controls. If the external monitor works, the computer display or video controller may be defective. Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 129). Scanner Problems CH EC K T H E PO W ER C ABLE C ON N ECT I O N Ensure that the scanner power cable is firmly connected to a working electrical power source and that the scanner is turned on. CH EC K T H E S CAN N ER CA BLE C ON N ECT I O N Ensure that the scanner cable is firmly connected to the computer and to the scanner. U NLO CK T H E S CA N NE R Ensure that your scanner is unlocked if it has a locking tab or button. REI N S T ALL T H E S CAN N ER DR I VER See the scanner documentation for instructions. NOTE: If you can connect to your Internet service provider (ISP), your modem is functioning properly. If you are sure that your modem is working properly and you still experience problems, contact your ISP. Solving Problems 91 4n142bk0.book Page 92 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: For information on saving files to a floppy disk, see the Tell Me How help file. To access the help file, see "Accessing Help" on page 88. Drive Problems If you cannot save a file to a floppy drive EN S U RE T H AT WI ND OW S RE COG N IZ ES T H E DR I VE Click the Start button and click My Computer. If the drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. Insert a bootable disk and restart light is blinking, indicating normal operation. the computer. Verify that the EN S U RE T H AT T H E D I S K I S N OT W RI T E- P RO T ECT E D You cannot save data to a write-protected disk. See the following figure. back of floppy disk write-protected not write-protected TR Y AN OT H E R F L OP P Y DI S K Insert another disk to eliminate the possibility that the original disk is defective. 92 Solving Problems 4n142bk0.book Page 93 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM REI N S T ALL T H E D RI VE 1 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2 Remove the drive from the module bay. See "Using the Module Bay" in the Tell Me How help file for instructions. To access the help file, see "Accessing Help" on page 88. 3 Reinstall the drive. 4 Turn on the computer. CLE AN T H E DR I VE See "Cleaning Your Computer" in the Tell Me How help file for instructions. To access the help file, see "Accessing Help" on page 88. If you have problems with a hard drive ALL OW T HE CO M P UT E R T O C OO L B EFO RE T U RN I NG I T O N A hot hard drive may prevent the operating system from starting. Try allowing the computer to return to room temperature before turning it on. CH EC K T H E DRI V E FO R ERR OR S 1 Click the Start button and click My Computer. 2 Right-click the drive letter (local disk) that you want to scan for errors, and then click Properties. 3 Click the Tools tab. 4 Under Error-checking, click Check Now. 5 Click Start. PC Card Problems CH EC K T H E PC C AR D Ensure that the PC Card is properly inserted into the connector. EN S U RE T H AT T HE C ARD I S R EC OG NI Z E D B Y W IN D OW S Double-

click the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon in the Windows taskbar. Ensure that the card is listed. Solving Problems 93 4n142bk0.book Page 94 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w I F YO U H AVE P R OBL EM S W I T H A DE LL- PR OV I DED PC C ARD Contact Dell (see "Accessing Help" on page 88). I F YO U H AVE P R OBL EM S W I T H A PC CA RD N OT P R OV I DED B Y DE LL Contact the PC Card manufacturer. General Program Problems A program crashes NOTE: Software usually includes installation instructions in its documentation or on a floppy disk or CD. SE E T H E S OF T W AR E D OC UM E NT A T I ON Many software manufacturers maintain websites with information that may help you solve the problem. Ensure that you properly installed and configured the program. Reinstall the program if necessary. A program stops responding EN D T H E P R OG RAM 1 Simultaneously press 2 Click the Applications tab, and then select the program that is no longer

. responding. 3 Click End Task. Error messages appear REV IE W "E RR OR MES S A GE S" Look up the message and take the appropriate action. See the software documentation. 94 Solving Problems 4n142bk0.book Page 95 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM If Your Computer Gets Wet CAUTION: Perform this procedure only after you are certain that it is safe to do so. If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, it is recommended that you turn off AC power at the circuit breaker before attempting to remove the power cables from the electrical outlet. Use the utmost caution when removing wet cables from a live power source. 1 Shut down the computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 43), disconnect the AC adapter from the computer, and then disconnect the AC adapter from the electrical outlet. 2 Turn off any attached external devices, and disconnect them from their power sources and then from the computer. 3 Ground yourself by touching one of the metal connectors on the back of the computer. 4 Remove the module bay device and any installed PC Cards, and put them in a safe place to dry. 5 Remove the battery. 6 Wipe off the battery and put it in a safe place to dry. 7 Remove the hard drive (see "Replacing the Hard Drive" on page 113). 8 Remove the memory module(s) (see "Adding Memory" on page 108). 9 Open the display and place the computer right-side up across two books or similar props to let air circulate all around it. Let the computer dry for at least 24 hours in a dry area at room temperature. NOTICE: Do not use artificial means, such as a hair dryer or a fan, to speed the drying process. CAUTION: To help prevent electrical shock, verify that the computer is thoroughly dry before continuing with the rest of this procedure. 10 Ground yourself by touching one of the metal connectors on the back of the computer. 11 Replace the memory module(s), the memory module cover, and the screw(s). 12 Replace the hard drive. 13 Replace the module bay device and any PC Cards you removed. Solving Problems 95 4n142bk0.book Page 96 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM NOTE: See "Limited Warranties and Return Policy" on page 149 for information on your warranty coverage. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 14 Replace the battery. 15 Turn on the computer and verify that it is working properly. If the computer does not start, or if you cannot identify the damaged components, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 129). If You Drop or Damage Your Computer 1 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 43). 2 Disconnect the AC adapter from the computer and from the electrical outlet. 3 Turn off any attached external devices, and disconnect them from their power sources and then from the computer. 4 Remove and reinstall the battery. 5 Turn on the computer. NOTE: See "Limited Warranties and Return Policy" on page 149 for information on your warranty coverage. If the computer does not start, or if you cannot identify the damaged components, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 129). Resolving Other Technical Problems GO T O T H E D EL L S U P P OR T W E BS I T E Go to support.dell.com for help with general usage, installation, and troubleshooting questions. See "Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only)" on page 128 for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. E- M AI L D ELL Go to support.dell.com and then click E-Mail Dell in the Communicate list. Send an e-mail message to Dell about your problem; you can expect to receive an e-mail message from Dell within hours. See "Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only)" on page 128 for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. CO N T ACT DE LL If you cannot solve your problem using the Dell Support website or e-mail service, call Dell for technical assistance (see "Contacting Dell"

on page 129). See "Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only)" on page 128 for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. 96 Solving Problems 4n142bk0.book Page 97 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Drivers What Is a Driver?

A driver is a program that controls a device such as a printer, mouse, or keyboard. All devices require a driver program. A driver acts like a translator between the device and the programs that use the device. Each device has its own set of specialized commands that only its driver recognizes. Dell ships your computer to you with required drivers already installedno further installation or configuration is needed. NOTICE: The Drivers and Utilities CD may contain drivers for operating systems that are not on your computer. Ensure that you are installing software appropriate for your operating system. Many drivers, such as the keyboard driver, come with your Microsoft Windows operating system. You may need to install drivers if you:

Upgrade your operating system. Reinstall your operating system. Connect or install a new device. Identifying Drivers If you experience a problem with any device, identify whether the driver is the source of your problem and, if necessary, update the driver. 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Under Pick a Category, click Performance and Maintenance. 3 Click System. 4 In the System Properties window, click the Hardware tab. 5 Click Device Manager. 6 Scroll down the list to see if any device has an exclamation point (a yellow circle with a [!]) on the device icon. If an exclamation point is next to the device name, you may need to reinstall the driver or install a new driver. Solving Problems 97 4n142bk0.book Page 98 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities NOTICE: The Dell Support website at support.dell.com and your Drivers and Utilities CD provide approved drivers for Dell computers. If you install drivers obtained from other sources, your computer might not work correctly. Using Windows XP Device Driver Rollback If a problem occurs on your computer after you install or update a driver, use Windows XP Device Driver Rollback to replace the driver with the previously installed version. 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Under Pick a Category, click Performance and Maintenance. 3 Click System. 4 In the System Properties window, click the Hardware tab. 5 Click Device Manager. 6 Right-click the device for which the new driver was installed and click Properties. 7 Click the Drivers tab. 8 Click Roll Back Driver. If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, then use System Restore (see "Using System Restore" on page 100) to return your computer to the operating state that existed before you installed the new driver. Using the Drivers and Utilities CD If using Device Driver Rollback or System Restore (see "Using System Restore" on page 100) does not resolve the problem, then reinstall the driver from the Drivers and Utilities CD:

1 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. 2 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD. In most cases, the CD starts running automatically. If it does not, start Windows Explorer, click your CD drive directory to display the CD contents, and then double-click the autocd.exe file. The first time that you run the CD, it might prompt you to install setup files. Click OK, and follow the instructions on the screen to continue. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 98 Solving Problems 4n142bk0.book Page 99 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 3 From the Language drop-down menu in the toolbar, select your preferred language for the driver or utility (if available). A welcome screen appears. 4 Click Next. The CD automatically scans your hardware to detect drivers and utilities used by your computer. 5 After the CD completes the hardware scan, you can also detect other drivers and utilities. Under Search Criteria, select the appropriate categories from the System Model, Operating System, and Topic drop-down menus. A link or links appear(s) for the specific drivers and utilities used by your computer. 6 Click the link of a specific driver or utility to display information about the driver or utility that you want to install. 7 Click the Install button (if present) to begin installing the driver or utility. At the welcome screen, follow the screen prompts to complete the installation. If no Install button is present, automatic installation is not an option. For installation instructions, either see the appropriate instructions in the following subsections, or click Extract, follow the extracting instructions, and read the readme file. If instructed to navigate to the driver files, click the CD directory on the driver information window to display the files associated with that driver. Manually Reinstalling Drivers for Windows XP 1 After extracting the driver files to your hard drive as described in the previous section, click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. 2 Click the Start button and right-click My Computer. 3 Click Properties. 4 Click the Hardware tab and click Device Manager. 5 Double-click the type of device for which you are installing the driver

(for example, Modems or Infrared devices). NOTE: If you are reinstalling an infrared sensor driver, you must first enable the infrared sensor in the system setup program (see "System Setup Screens" on page 125) before continuing with the driver installation. Solving Problems 99 4n142bk0.book Page 100 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 6 Double-click the name of the device for which you are installing the driver. 7 Click the Driver tab and click Update Driver. 8 Click Install from a list or specific location (Advanced) and click Next. 9 Click Browse and browse to the location to which you previously extracted the driver files. 10 When the name of the appropriate driver appears, click Next. 11 Click Finish and restart your computer. Using System Restore The Microsoft Windows XP operating system provides System Restore to allow you to return your computer to an earlier operating state (without affecting data files) if changes to the hardware, software, or other system settings have left the computer in an undesirable operating state. See the Help and Support Center for information on using System Restore. To access help, see page 88. NOTICE: Make regular backups of your data files. System Restore does not monitor your data files or recover them. Creating a Restore Point 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2 Click System Restore. 3 Follow the instructions on the screen. Restoring the Computer to an Earlier Operating State NOTICE: Before you restore the computer to an earlier operating state, save and close all open files and close all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2 Ensure that Restore my computer to an earlier time is selected and click Next. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 100 Solving Problems 4n142bk0.book Page 101 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 3 Click a calendar date to which you want to restore your computer. The Select a Restore Point screen provides a calendar that allows you to see and select restore points. All calendar dates with available restore points appear in bold. 4 Select a restore point and click Next. If a calendar date has only one restore point, then that restore point is automatically selected. If two or more restore points are available, click the restore point that you prefer. 5 Click Next. The Restoration Complete screen appears after System Restore finishes collecting data and then the computer restarts. 6 After the computer restarts, click OK. To change the restore point, you can either repeat the steps using a different restore point, or you can undo the restoration. Undoing the Last System Restore NOTICE: Before you undo the last system restore, save and close all open files and close all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2 Click Undo my last restoration and click Next. 3 Click Next. The System Restore screen appears and the computer restarts. 4 After the computer restarts, click OK. Enabling System Restore If you reinstall Windows XP with less than 200 MB of free hard-disk space available, System Restore is automatically disabled. To see if System Restore is enabled:

1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Performance and Maintenance. 3 Click System. Solving Problems 101 4n142bk0.book Page 102 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 4 Click the System Restore tab. 5 Ensure that Turn off System Restore is unchecked. Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities Windows XP IRQ conflicts occur if a device either is not detected during the operating system setup or is detected but incorrectly configured. To check for conflicts on a computer running Windows XP:

1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Performance and Maintenance and click System. 3 Click the Hardware tab and click Device Manager. 4 In the Device Manager list, check for conflicts with the other devices. Conflicts are indicated by a yellow exclamation point (!) beside the conflicting device or a red X if the device has been disabled. 5 Double-click any conflict to display the Properties window. If an IRQ conflict exists, the Device status area in the Properties window reports the cards or devices that share the device's IRQ. 6 Resolve conflicts by reconfiguring the devices or removing the devices from the Device Manager. To use the Windows XP Hardware Troubleshooter:

1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2 Type hardware troubleshooter in the Search field and click the arrow to start the search. 3 Click Hardware Troubleshooter in the Search Results list. 4 In the Hardware Troubleshooter list, click I need to resolve a hardware conflict on my computer, and click Next. 102 Solving Problems 4n142bk0.book Page 103 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Reinstalling Microsoft Windows XP Before You Reinstall If you are considering reinstalling the Windows XP operating system to correct a problem with a newly installed driver, first try using Windows XP Device Driver Rollback (see "Using Windows XP Device Driver Rollback"

on page 98). If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, then use System Restore (see "Using System Restore" on page 100) to return your operating system to the operating state it was in before you installed the new device driver. Reinstalling Windows XP To reinstall Windows XP, perform all the steps in the following sections in the order in which they are listed. The reinstallation process can take 1 to 2 hours to complete. After you reinstall the operating system, you must also reinstall the device drivers, virus protection program, and other software. NOTICE: The Operating System CD provides options for reinstalling Windows XP. The options can overwrite files and possibly affect programs installed on your hard drive. Therefore, do not reinstall Windows XP unless instructed to do so by a Dell technical support representative. NOTICE: To prevent conflicts with Windows XP, disable any virus protection software installed on your computer before you reinstall Windows XP. See the documentation that came with the software for instructions. Booting From the Operating System CD 1 Save and close any open files and exit any open programs. 2 Insert the Operating System CD. If any program starts automatically, exit the program before proceeding. 3 Shut down the computer through the Start menu (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 43) and restart the computer. 4 Press immediately after the DELL logo appears. If the operating system logo appears, wait until you see the Windows desktop, and then shut down the computer and try again. Solving Problems 103 4n142bk0.book Page 104 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 5 Press the arrow keys to select CD-ROM, and then press 6 When the Press any key to boot from CD message appears, press any key. Windows XP Setup 1 When the Windows XP Setup screen appears, press select To set up Windows now. to 2 Read the information on the Microsoft Windows Licensing Agreement screen, and press to accept the license agreement. 3 If your computer already has Windows XP installed and you want to recover your current Windows XP data, type r to select the repair option, and then remove the CD from the drive. 4 If you want to install a new copy of Windows XP, press that option. to select 5 Press to select the highlighted partition

(recommended), and then follow the instructions on the screen. The Windows XP Setup screen appears, and the operating system begins to copy files and install the devices. The computer automatically restarts multiple times. NOTICE: Do not press any key when the following message appears: Press any key to boot from the CD. 6 When the Regional and Language Options screen appears, select the settings for your location, and then click Next. 7 Enter your name and organization (optional) in the Personalize Your Software screen and click Next. 8 If you are reinstalling Windows XP Home Edition, at the What's your computer's name window, enter a name for your computer (or accept the name provided) and click Next. If you are reinstalling Windows XP Professional, at the Computer Name and Administrator Password window, enter a name for your computer (or accept the one provided) and a password, and then click Next. 9 If the Modem Dialing Information screen appears, enter the requested information and click Next. NOTE: The time required to complete the setup depends on the size of the hard drive and the speed of your computer. 104 Solving Problems 4n142bk0.book Page 105 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 10 Enter the date, time, and time zone in the Date and Time Settings window and click Next. 11 If the Networking Settings screen appears, click Typical and click Next. 12 If you are reinstalling Windows XP Professional and you are prompted to provide further information regarding your network configuration, enter your selections. If you are unsure of your settings, accept the default selections. Windows XP installs the operating system components and configures the computer. The computer automatically restarts. NOTICE: Do not press any key when the following message appears: Press any key to boot from the CD. 13 When the Welcome to Microsoft screen appears, click Next. 14 When the How will this computer connect to the Internet? message appears, click Skip. 15 When the Ready to register with Microsoft? screen appears, select No, not at this time and click Next. 16 When the Who will use this computer? screen appears, you can enter up to five users. Click Next. 17 Click Finish to complete the setup, and remove the CD from the drive. Reinstalling Drivers and Software 1 Reinstall the appropriate drivers (see "Drivers" on page 97). 2 Reinstall your virus protection software. See the documentation that came with the software for instructions. 3 Reinstall your other software programs. See the documentation that came with the software for instructions. Solving Problems 105 4n142bk0.book Page 106 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 106 Solving Problems 4n142bk0.book Page 107 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM S E C T I O N 8 A d d i n g a n d Re p l a c i n g Pa r t s Adding Memory Adding a Mini PCI Card Replacing the Hard Drive 4n142bk0.book Page 108 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: Memory modules purchased from Dell are covered under your computer warranty. Adding Memory You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board. See "Specifications" on page 118 for information on the memory supported by your computer. Be sure to add only memory modules that are intended for your computer. CAUTION: Before working inside your Dell computer, read the safety instructions on page 11. 1 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 43). 2 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 3 Remove all installed batteries, and disconnect the AC adapter cable and any external devices from the computer. Wait 5 seconds before proceeding. 4 Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer, and continue to do so periodically during this procedure. NOTICE: While you work, periodically touch unpainted metal on the computer to dissipate static electricity that might harm internal components. 5 Turn the computer over, remove the screw from the memory module cover, and lift the cover. 108 Adding and Replacing Parts 4n142bk0.book Page 109 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM NOTICE: To prevent damage to the memory module connector, do not use tools to spread the inner metal tabs that secure the memory module. 6 If you are replacing a memory module, remove the existing module. NOTICE: Handle memory modules by their edges, and do not touch the components on a module. a Use your fingertips to carefully spread apart the securing clips on each end of the memory module connector until the module pops up. b Remove the module from the connector. NOTICE: If you need to install memory modules in two connectors, install a memory module in the connector labeled "SLOT 1" before you install a module in the other connector. 7 Ground yourself and install the new memory module:

a b Align the notch in the module with the slot in the center of the connector. Slide the edge of the module firmly into the connector, and rotate the module down until you feel a click. If you do not feel the click, remove the module and reinstall it. NOTE: If the memory module is not installed properly, the computer does not boot. No error message indicates this failure. 8 Replace the cover and screw. Adding and Replacing Parts 109 4n142bk0.book Page 110 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. NOTICE: If the memor y module cover is difficult to close, remove the module and reinstall it. Forcing the cover to close may damage your computer. 9 Insert the battery into the battery bay, or connect the AC adapter to your computer and an electrical outlet. 10 Turn on the computer. As the computer boots, it detects the additional memory and automatically updates the system configuration information. Adding a Mini PCI Card If you ordered a Mini PCI card at the same time that you ordered your computer, Dell has already installed the card for you. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions at the front of this guide (see page 11). 1 Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent scratching the computer cover. 2 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 43). 3 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 4 Remove all installed batteries, and disconnect the AC adapter cable and any external devices from the computer. Wait 5 seconds before proceeding. 5 Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer, and continue to do so periodically during this procedure. 110 Adding and Replacing Parts 4n142bk0.book Page 111 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 6 Turn the computer over, and remove the screw from the Mini PCI card cover. 7 Place your finger under the cover at the indentation, and lift and slide the cover open. Adding and Replacing Parts 111 4n142bk0.book Page 112 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 8 If a Mini PCI card is not already installed, go to step 9. If you are replacing a Mini PCI card, remove the existing card:

a Disconnect the Mini PCI card from any attached cables. b Release the Mini PCI card by spreading the metal securing tabs until the card pops up slightly. c Lift the Mini PCI card out of its connector. 9 Align the new Mini PCI card with the connector at a 45-degree angle, and press the Mini PCI card into the connector. 10 Connect the antenna cables from the Mini PCI card to the antenna connectors on the computer. NOTICE: The connectors are keyed for correct insertion; do not force the connections. antenna connectors on card (2) antenna cables (2) 11 Lower the Mini PCI card toward the inner tabs to approximately a 20-degree angle. 12 Continue lowering the Mini PCI card until it snaps into the inner tabs of the connector. 13 Replace the cover. 112 Adding and Replacing Parts 4n142bk0.book Page 113 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Replacing the Hard Drive NOTICE: To prevent data loss, shut down your computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 43) before removing the hard drive. Do not remove the hard drive while the computer is on, in standby mode, or in hibernate mode. NOTICE: Hard drives are extremely fragile; even a slight bump can damage the drive. CAUTION: If you remove the hard drive from the computer when the drive is hot, do not touch the metal housing of the hard drive. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions at the front of this guide (see page 11). 1 Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent scratching the computer cover. 2 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 43). 3 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 4 Remove all installed batteries, and disconnect the AC adapter cable and any external devices from the computer. Wait 5 seconds before proceeding. 5 Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer, and continue to do so periodically during this procedure. NOTE: Dell does not guarantee compatibility or provide support for hard drives from sources other than Dell. Adding and Replacing Parts 113 4n142bk0.book Page 114 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 6 Turn the computer over. Use a small screwdriver to loosen the M2.5 x 5-mm screw. NOTE: You need the Operating System CD to install the Microsoft Windows operating system. You also need the Drivers and Utilities CD for your computer to install the drivers and utilities on the new hard drive. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w M2.5 x 5-mm screw 7 Turn the computer over so that it is upright. NOTICE: When the hard drive is not in the computer, store it in protective antistatic packaging. See "Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge" on page 17. 8 Pull the hard drive cover out of the computer. 114 Adding and Replacing Parts 4n142bk0.book Page 115 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 9 Remove the new drive from its packaging. Save the original packaging for use when storing or shipping the hard drive. NOTICE: You cannot replace your hard drive unless you open your display first. 10 Ensure that the display is open approximately 2.54 cm (1 in). NOTICE: Use firm and even pressure to slide the drive into place. If you force the hard drive into place using excessive force, you may damage the hard drive connector. 11 Press the hard drive cover into the bay until it is fully seated in the bay. 12 Turn the computer over. Use a small screwdriver to tighten the screw. 13 Use the Operating System CD to install the operating system for your computer (see "Reinstalling Microsoft Windows XP" on page 103). 14 Use the Drivers and Utilities CD to install the drivers and utilities for your computer (see "Drivers" on page 97). Adding and Replacing Parts 115 4n142bk0.book Page 116 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 116 Adding and Replacing Parts 4n142bk0.book Page 117 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM S E C T I O N 9 A p p e n d i x Specifications Standard Settings Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only) Contacting Dell Regulatory Notices Limited Warranties and Return Policy 4n142bk0.book Page 118 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Specifications Microprocessor Microprocessor type L1 cache L2 cache External bus frequency System Information Data bus width DRAM bus width Microprocessor address bus width Flash EPROM Graphics bus PCI bus PC Card CardBus controller PC Card connector Cards supported PC Card connector size Data width (maximum) Smart Card Read/write capabilities Intel 32 KB (internal) 1 MB 400 MHz, source synchronous processor system bus 64 bits 64 bits 32 bits 1 MB 64 bits (with 32 MB of video memory);

128 bits (with 64 MB of video memory) 32 bits OZ711EC1 CardBus controller supports one Type I or Type II card 3.3 V and 5 V 68 pins PCMCIA 16 bits;

CardBus 32 bits reads and writes to all ISO 7816 1/2/3/4 microprocessor cards (T=0, T=1) Cards supported 3 V and 5 V Program technology supported Java cards m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 118 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 119 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Smart Card (continued) Interface speed EMV level 9600115,200 BPS level 1 certified WHQL certification PC/SC Compatibility Insert/eject cycles Memory compatible within a PKI environment certified for up to 100,000 cycles Minimum requirement 266 MHz Memory module connector two user-accessible DDR SDRAM connectors Memory module capacities 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1 GB Memory type Standard memory Maximum memory Ports and Connectors 3.3-V DDR SDRAM 128 MB 2 GB Serial Parallel Video Audio USB Infrared sensor S-video TV-out 9-pin connector; 16550C-compatible, 16-byte buffer connector 25-hole connector; unidirectional, bidirectional, or ECP 15-hole connector microphone miniconnector, stereo headphones/speakers miniconnector two 4-pin USB 2.0compliant connectors sensor compatible with IrDA Standard 1.1

(Fast IR) and IrDA Standard 1.0 (Slow IR) 7-pin mini-DIN connector (optional S-video to composite video adapter cable) Mini PCI Type IIIA Mini PCI card slot Appendix 119 4n142bk0.book Page 120 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Ports and Connectors (continued) Modem Network adapter Communications Modem:

Type Controller Interface Network adapter Wireless (optional) Video Video type Data bus Video controller Video memory LCD interface TV support Audio Audio type Audio controller Stereo conversion RJ-11 port RJ-45 port v.92 56K MDC softmodem internal AC 97 bus 10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN on system board internal Mini PCI Wi-Fi (802.11b and 802.11a) wireless support; Bluetooth 64-bit hardware accelerated 4X AGP ATI Mobility RADEON 9000 32 MB or 64 MB LVDS NTSC or PAL in S-video and composite modes compatible with Soundblaster and Microsoft Windows Sound System Intel AC 97 20-bit (stereo digital-to-analog);

18-bit (stereo analog-to-digital) m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 120 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 121 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Audio (continued) Interfaces:

Internal External Speaker AC 97 microphone miniconnector, stereo headphones/speakers miniconnector two 4-ohm speakers Internal speaker amplifier 2-W channel into 4 ohms Volume controls keyboard shortcuts or program menus Display Type (active-matrix TFT) XGA or SXGA+

Dimensions:

Height Width Diagonal Maximum resolutions Response time (typical) Refresh rate Operating angle Viewing angles:

Horizontal Vertical Pixel pitch 214.3 mm (8.4 inches) 285.7 mm (11.3 inches) 357.1 mm (14.1 inches) 1024 x 768 at 16.8 million colors (XGA);

1400 x 1050 at 16.8 million colors (SXGA+) 20-ms rise (maximum);

30-ms fall (maximum) 60 Hz 0 (closed) to 180 40

+10/30 0.28 x 0.28 mm (XGA);

0.20 x 0.20 mm (SXGA+) Appendix 121 4n142bk0.book Page 122 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Display (continued) Power Consumption:

Panel with backlight (typical) 6.5 W (XGA);

7.0 W (SXGA+) Controls Keyboard Number of keys Key travel Key spacing Layout Touch Pad brightness can be controlled through keyboard shortcuts 87 (U.S. and Canada); 88 (Europe); 91

(Japan) 2.7 mm 0.3 mm (0.11 inch 0.016 inch) 19.05 mm 0.3 mm (0.75 inch 0.012 inch) QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji X/Y position resolution

(graphics table mode) 240 cpi Size:

Width Height Battery Type Dimensions:

Depth Height Width Weight Voltage 64.88-mm (2.55-inch) sensor-active area 48.88-mm (1.92-inch) rectangle 6 cell, "smart" lithium ion (48 WHr);

4 cell, "smart" lithium ion (32 WHr) 77.5 mm (3.05 inches) 19.1 mm (0.75 inch) 123.4 mm (4.86 inches) 0.32 kg (0.7 lb) (6-cell battery);

0.23 kg (.5 lb) (4-cell battery) 14.8 VDC m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 122 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 123 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Battery (continued) Charge time with computer off

(approximate) Operating time approximately 2 hours approximately 3 to 4 hours (6-cell battery);

approximately 2 to 3 hours (4-cell battery) NOTE: Battery operating time can be significantly reduced under certain power-

intensive conditions. See page 46 for more information on battery life. Life span (approximate) 300 discharge/charge cycles Temperature range:

Operating Storage AC Adapter Input voltage Input current (maximum) Input frequency Output current Output power Rated output voltage Dimensions:

Height Width Depth Weight (with cables) Temperature range:

Operating Storage 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) 90264 VAC 1.7 A 4763 Hz 5.5 A (maximum at 4-second pulse);

4.5 A (continuous) 90 W or 65 W 19.5 VDC 27.94 mm (1.1 inches) 58.42 mm (2.3 inches) 133.85 mm (5.25 inches) 0.4 kg (0.9 lb) 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) Appendix 123 4n142bk0.book Page 124 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Physical Height Width Depth Weight:

30.8 mm (1.2 inches) 315 mm (12.4 inches) 259.4 mm (10.2 inches) With travel module With CD drive 2.26 kg (4.98 lb) 2.4 kg (5.3 lb) Environmental Temperature range:

Operating Storage 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) Relative humidity (maximum):

Operating Storage 10% to 90% (noncondensing) 5% to 95% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration (using a random-vibration spectrum that simulates user environment):

Operating Storage Maximum shock (measured with hard drive in head-parked position and a 2-ms half-sine pulse):

Operating Storage Altitude (maximum):

Operating Storage 0.66 GRMS 1.30 GRMS 122 G 163 G 15.2 to 3048 m (50 to 10,000 ft) 15.2 to 10,668 m (50 to 35,000 ft) m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 124 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 125 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Standard Settings NOTICE: Unless you are an expert computer user or are directed to do so by Dell technical support, do not change the settings for this program. Certain changes might make your computer work incorrectly. Viewing the System Setup Screens 1 Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2 When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 43) and try again. System Setup Screens The system setup screens display the current setup information and settings for your computer. On each screen, the system setup options are listed at the left of the screen. To the right of each option is the setting or value for that option. You can change settings that appear as white type on the screen. Options or values that you cannot change (because they are determined by the computer) appear less bright. The upper-right corner of the screen displays help information for the currently highlighted option; the lower-right corner displays information about the computer. System setup key functions are listed across the bottom of the screen. The screens display such information as:

System configuration Boot order Boot (start-up) configuration and docking-device configuration settings Basic device configuration settings Battery charge status System security and hard-drive password settings NOTE: To see information about a specific item on a system setup screen, highlight the item and refer to the Help area on the screen. Appendix 125 4n142bk0.book Page 126 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Commonly Used Options Certain options require that you reboot the computer for new settings to take effect. Changing the Boot Sequence The boot sequence, or boot order, tells the computer where to look to find the software needed to start the operating system. You can control the boot sequence using the Boot Order page of the system setup program. The Boot Order page displays a general list of the bootable devices that may be installed in your computer, including but not limited to the following:

Diskette Drive Modular bay HDD Internal HDD CD/DVD/CD-RW drive During the boot routine, the computer starts at the top of the list and scans each enabled device for the operating system start-up files. When the computer finds the files, it stops searching and starts the operating system. To control the boot devices, select (highlight) a device by pressing the or key, and then enable or disable the device or change its order in the list. To enable or disable a device, highlight the item and press

. Enabled items appear as white and display a small triangle to their left; disabled items appear blue or dimmed without a triangle. To reorder a device in the list, highlight the device and then press or or down.

(not case-sensitive) to move the highlighted device up Boot sequence changes take effect as soon as you save the changes and exit the system setup program. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 126 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 127 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Performing a One-Time Boot You can set a one-time-only boot sequence without entering the system setup program. (You can also use this procedure to boot the Dell Diagnostics on the diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive.) 1 Shut down the computer. 2 Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. 3 Turn on the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 4 When the boot device list appears, highlight the device from which you want to boot and press

. The computer boots to the selected device. The next time you reboot the computer, the normal boot order is restored. Changing Printer Modes Set the Parallel Mode option according to the type of printer or device connected to the parallel connector. To determine the correct mode to use, see the documentation that came with the device. Setting Parallel Mode to Disabled disables the parallel port and the ports LPT address, freeing its interrupt for another device to use. Changing COM Ports Serial Port allows you to map the serial port COM address or disable the serial port and its address, freeing its interrupt for another device to use. Enabling the Infrared Sensor 1 Enter the system setup program:

a Turn on your computer. b Press when the DELL logo appears. Appendix 127 4n142bk0.book Page 128 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM 2 Press until you locate Infrared Data Port under Basic Device Configuration. 3 Press the down-arrow key to highlight Disabled next to Infrared Data Port. 4 Press the right-arrow key to change the setting to a COM port. Ensure that the COM port that you select is different from the COM port assigned to the serial connector. 5 Press the down-arrow key to select Infrared Mode, and press the right-

arrow key to change the setting to Fast IR or Slow IR. It is recommended that you use Fast IR. If the infrared device cannot communicate with your computer, turn off the computer and repeat steps 1 through 5 to change the setting to Slow IR. 6 Press to save the changes and exit the system setup program. If you are prompted to restart your computer, click Yes. 7 Follow the instructions on the screen while the infrared sensor driver is being installed. 8 At the end of the installation process, click Yes to restart the computer. After you enable the infrared sensor, you can use it to establish a link to an infrared device. To set up and use an infrared device, see the infrared device documentation and the Windows Help and Support Center. Dell Technical Support Policy

(U.S. Only) Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the operating system, application software, and hardware drivers to the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate functionality of the computer and all Dell-

installed hardware. In addition to this technician-assisted technical support, online technical support is available at support.dell.com. Additional technical support options may be available for purchase. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: If the infrared device cannot communicate with your computer after you repeat steps 1 through 5 to change the system setup program setting to Slow IR, contact the infrared device manufacturer. 128 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 129 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Dell provides limited technical support for the computer and any "Dell-

installed" software and peripherals1. Support for third-party software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or installed through Dell Software and Peripherals, Readyware, and Custom Factory Integration2. 1 Repair services are provided pursuant to the terms and conditions of your limited warranty and any optional support service contract purchased with the computer. 2 All Dell-standard components included in a Custom Factory Integration (CFI) project are covered by the standard Dell limited warranty for your computer. However, Dell also extends a parts replacement program to cover all nonstand-

ard, third-party hardware components integrated through CFI for the duration of the computers service contract. Definition of "Dell-Installed" Software and Peripherals Dell-installed software includes the operating system and some of the application software that is preinstalled on the computer during the manufacturing process (Microsoft Office, Norton Antivirus, and so on). Dell-installed peripherals include any internal expansion cards, or Dell-

branded module bay or PC Card accessories. In addition, any Dell-branded monitors, keyboards, mice, speakers, microphones for telephonic modems, docking stations/port replicators, networking products, and all associated cabling are included. Definition of "Third-Party" Software and Peripherals Third-party software and peripherals include any peripheral, accessory, or application software sold by Dell not under the Dell brand (printers, scanners, cameras, games, and so on). Support for all third-party software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer of the product. Contacting Dell To contact Dell electronically, you can access the following websites:

www.dell.com support.dell.com (technical support) Appendix 129 4n142bk0.book Page 130 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w premiersupport.dell.com (technical support for educational, government, healthcare, and medium/large business customers, including Premier, Platinum, and Gold customers) For specific web addresses for your country, find the appropriate country section in the table below. NOTE: Toll-free numbers are for use within the country for which they are listed. When you need to contact Dell, use the electronic addresses, telephone numbers, and codes provided in the following table. If you need assistance in determining which codes to use, contact a local or an international operator. Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Anguilla Antigua and Barbuda Argentina (Buenos Aires) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 54 City Code: 11 Aruba Australia (Sydney) International Access Code: 0011 Country Code: 61 City Code: 2 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address General Support General Support Website: www.dell.com.ar Tech Support and Customer Care Sales Tech Support Fax Customer Care Fax General Support E-mail (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com E-mail (New Zealand): nz_tech_support@dell.com Home and Small Business Government and Business Preferred Accounts Division (PAD) Customer Care Corporate Sales Transaction Sales Fax Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers toll-free: 800-335-0031 1-800-805-5924 toll-free: 0-800-444-0733 0-810-444-3355 11 4515 7139 11 4515 7138 toll-free: 800-1578 1-300-65-55-33 toll-free: 1-800-633-559 toll-free: 1-800-060-889 toll-free: 1-800-819-339 toll-free: 1-800-808-385 toll-free: 1-800-808-312 toll-free: 1-800-818-341 130 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 131 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Austria (Vienna) International Access Code: 900 Country Code: 43 City Code: 1 Bahamas Barbados Belgium (Brussels) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 32 City Code: 2 Bermuda Bolivia Brazil International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 55 City Code: 51 British Virgin Islands Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Home/Small Business Sales Home/Small Business Fax Home/Small Business Customer Care Preferred Accounts/Corporate Customer Care Home/Small Business Technical Support Preferred Accounts/Corporate Technical Support Switchboard General Support General Support Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: tech_be@dell.com E-mail for French Speaking Customers:

support.euro.dell.com/be/fr/emaildell/

Technical Support Customer Care Home/Small Business Sales Corporate Sales Fax Switchboard General Support General Support Website: www.dell.com/br Customer Support, Technical Support Tech Support Fax Customer Care Fax Sales General Support 01 795 67602 01 795 67605 01 795 67603 0660 8056 01 795 67604 0660 8779 01 491 04 0 toll-free: 1-866-278-6818 1-800-534-3066 02 481 92 88 02 481 91 19 toll-free: 0800 16884 02 481 91 00 02 481 92 99 02 481 91 00 1-800-342-0671 toll-free: 800-10-0238 0800 90 3355 51 481 5470 51 481 5480 0800 90 3390 toll-free: 1-866-278-6820 Appendix 131 4n142bk0.book Page 132 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Brunei Country Code: 673 Canada (North York, Ontario) International Access Code: 011 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Cayman Islands Chile (Santiago) Country Code: 56 City Code: 2 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Customer Technical Support (Penang, Malaysia) Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Transaction Sales (Penang, Malaysia) Automated Order-Status System AutoTech (automated technical support) TechFax Customer Care (home/small business) Customer Care (med./large business, government) Technical Support (home/small business) Technical Support (med./large bus., government) Sales (direct salesfrom outside Toronto) Sales (direct salesfrom within Toronto) Sales (federal government, education, and medical) General Support Sales, Customer Support, and Technical Support Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers 604 633 4966 604 633 4949 604 633 4955 toll-free: 1-800-433-9014 toll-free: 1-800-247-9362 toll-free: 1-800-950-1329 toll-free: 1-800-847-4096 toll-free: 1-800-326-9463 toll-free: 1-800-847-4096 toll-free: 1-800-847-4096 toll-free: 1-800-387-5752 416 758-2200 toll-free: 1-800-567-7542 1-800-805-7541 toll-free: 1230-020-4823 132 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 133 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code China (Xiamen) Country Code: 86 City Code: 592 Colombia Costa Rica Czech Republic (Prague) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 420 City Code: 2 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Tech Support website: support.ap.dell.com/china Tech Support E-mail: cn_support@dell.com Tech Support Fax Home and Small Business Technical Support Corporate Accounts Technical Support Customer Experience Home and Small Business Preferred Accounts Division Large Corporate Accounts GCP Large Corporate Accounts Key Accounts Large Corporate Accounts North Large Corporate Accounts North Government and Education Large Corporate Accounts East Large Corporate Accounts East Government and Education Large Corporate Accounts Queue Team Large Corporate Accounts South Large Corporate Accounts West Large Corporate Accounts Spare Parts General Support General Support Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: czech_dell@dell.com Technical Support Customer Care Fax TechFax Switchboard 818 1350 toll-free: 800 858 2437 toll-free: 800 858 2333 toll-free: 800 858 2060 toll-free: 800 858 2222 toll-free: 800 858 2062 toll-free: 800 858 2055 toll-free: 800 858 2628 toll-free: 800 858 2999 toll-free: 800 858 2955 toll-free: 800 858 2020 toll-free: 800 858 2669 toll-free: 800 858 2572 toll-free: 800 858 2355 toll-free: 800 858 2811 toll-free: 800 858 2621 980-9-15-3978 0800-012-0435 02 22 83 27 27 02 22 83 27 11 02 22 83 27 14 02 22 83 27 28 02 22 83 27 11 Appendix 133 4n142bk0.book Page 134 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail Support (portable computers):

den_nbk_support@dell.com E-mail Support (desktop computers):

den_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers):

Nordic_server_support@dell.com Technical Support Customer Care (Relational) Home/Small Business Customer Care Switchboard (Relational) Fax Switchboard (Relational) Switchboard (Home/Small Business) Fax Switchboard (Home/Small Business) General Support General Support General Support General Support Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: fin_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers):

Nordic_support@dell.com Technical Support Technical Support Fax Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Customer Care Fax Switchboard 7023 0182 7023 0184 3287 5505 3287 1200 3287 1201 3287 5000 3287 5001 toll-free: 1-866-278-6821 1-800-148-0530 toll-free: 999-119 01-899-753-0777 09 253 313 60 09 253 313 81 09 253 313 38 09 693 791 94 09 253 313 99 09 253 313 00 Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Denmark (Copenhagen) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 45 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Dominica Dominican Republic Ecuador El Salvador Finland (Helsinki) International Access Code: 990 Country Code: 358 City Code: 9 134 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 135 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code France (Paris) (Montpellier) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 33 City Codes: (1) (4) Germany (Langen) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 49 City Code: 6103 Grenada Guatemala Guyana Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/fr/fr/emaildell/

Home and Small Business Technical Support Customer Care Switchboard Switchboard (calls from outside of France) Sales Fax Fax (calls from outside of France) Corporate Technical Support Customer Care Switchboard Sales Fax Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Technical Support Home/Small Business Customer Care Global Segment Customer Care Preferred Accounts Customer Care Large Accounts Customer Care Public Accounts Customer Care Switchboard General Support General Support General Support 0825 387 270 0825 823 833 0825 004 700 04 99 75 40 00 0825 004 700 0825 004 701 04 99 75 40 01 0825 004 719 0825 338 339 01 55 94 71 00 01 55 94 71 00 01 55 94 71 01 06103 766-7200 0180-5-224400 06103 766-9570 06103 766-9420 06103 766-9560 06103 766-9555 06103 766-7000 toll-free: 1-866-540-3355 1-800-999-0136 toll-free: 1-877-270-4609 Appendix 135 4n142bk0.book Page 136 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Hong Kong International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 852 India Ireland (Cherrywood) International Access Code: 16 Country Code: 353 City Code: 1 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Technical Support (Dimension and Inspiron) Technical Support (OptiPlex, Latitude, and Dell Precision) Customer Service (non-technical, post-sales issues) Transaction Sales Large Corporate Accounts HK Large Corporate Accounts GCP HK Technical Support Sales Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: dell_direct_support@dell.com Ireland Technical Support U.K. Technical Support (dial within U.K. only) Home User Customer Care Small Business Customer Care U.K. Customer Care (dial within U.K. only) Corporate Customer Care Ireland Sales U.K. Sales (dial within U.K. only) SalesFax Fax Switchboard Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers 296 93188 296 93191 800 93 8291 toll-free: 800 96 4109 toll-free: 800 96 4108 toll-free: 800 90 3708 1600 33 8045 1600 33 8044 1850 543 543 0870 908 0800 01 204 4095 01 204 4444 0870 906 0010 01 204 4003 01 204 4444 0870 907 4000 01 204 0144 01 204 5960 01 204 4444 136 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 137 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Italy (Milan) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 39 City Code: 02 Jamaica Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/it/it/emaildell/

Home and Small Business Technical Support Customer Care Fax Switchboard Corporate Technical Support Customer Care Fax Switchboard General Support (dial from within Jamaica only) 02 577 826 90 02 696 821 14 02 696 821 13 02 696 821 12 02 577 826 90 02 577 825 55 02 575 035 30 02 577 821 1-800-682-3639 Appendix 137 4n142bk0.book Page 138 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Website: support.jp.dell.com Technical Support (servers) Technical Support outside of Japan (servers) Technical Support (Dimension and Inspiron) Technical Support outside of Japan (Dimension and Inspiron) Technical Support (Dell Precision, OptiPlex, and Latitude) Technical Support outside of Japan (Dell Precision, OptiPlex, and Latitude) 24-Hour Automated Order Service Customer Care Business Sales Division (up to 400 employees) Preferred Accounts Division Sales (over 400 employees) Large Corporate Accounts Sales (over 3500 employees) Public Sales (government agencies, educational institutions, and medical institutions) Global Segment Japan Individual User Faxbox Service Switchboard Technical Support Sales Customer Service (Seoul, Korea) Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Fax Switchboard Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers toll-free: 0120-198-498 81-44-556-4162 toll-free: 0120-198-226 81-44-520-1435 toll-free:0120-198-433 81-44-556-3894 044-556-3801 044-556-4240 044-556-1465 044-556-3433 044-556-3430 044-556-1469 044-556-3469 044-556-1760 044-556-3490 044-556-4300 toll-free: 080-200-3800 toll-free: 080-200-3600 toll-free: 080-200-3800 604 633 4949 2194-6202 2194-6000 Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Japan (Kawasaki) International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 81 City Code: 44 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Korea (Seoul) International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 82 City Code: 2 138 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 139 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Latin America Luxembourg International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 352 Macao Country Code: 853 Malaysia (Penang) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 60 City Code: 4 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Customer Technical Support (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Customer Service (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Fax (Technical Support and Customer Service)

(Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Sales (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) SalesFax (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: tech_be@dell.com Technical Support (Brussels, Belgium) Home/Small Business Sales (Brussels, Belgium) Corporate Sales (Brussels, Belgium) Customer Care (Brussels, Belgium) Fax (Brussels, Belgium) Switchboard (Brussels, Belgium) Technical Support Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Transaction Sales Technical Support Customer Service Transaction Sales Corporate Sales 512 728-4093 512 728-3619 512 728-3883 512 728-4397 512 728-4600 or 512 728-3772 02 481 92 88 toll-free: 080016884 02 481 91 00 02 481 91 19 02 481 92 99 02 481 91 00 toll-free: 0800 582 604 633 4949 toll-free: 0800 581 toll-free: 1 800 888 298 04 633 4949 toll-free: 1 800 888 202 toll-free: 1 800 888 213 Appendix 139 4n142bk0.book Page 140 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Mexico International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 52 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Montserrat Netherlands Antilles Netherlands (Amsterdam) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 31 City Code: 20 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Customer Technical Support Sales Customer Service Main General Support General Support Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail (Technical Support):

(Enterprise): nl_server_support@dell.com

(Latitude): nl_latitude_support@dell.com

(Inspiron): nl_inspiron_support@dell.com

(Dimension): nl_dimension_support@dell.com

(OptiPlex): nl_optiplex_support@dell.com

(Dell Precision): nl_workstation_support@dell.com Technical Support Technical Support Fax Home/Small Business Customer Care Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Sales Relational Sales Home/Small Business Sales Fax Relational Sales Fax Switchboard Switchboard Fax Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers 001-877-384-8979 or 001-877-269-3383 50-81-8800 or 01-800-888-3355 001-877-384-8979 or 001-877-269-3383 50-81-8800 or 01-800-888-3355 toll-free: 1-866-278-6822 001-800-882-1519 020 674 45 00 020 674 47 66 020 674 42 00 020 674 4325 020 674 55 00 020 674 50 00 020 674 47 75 020 674 47 50 020 674 50 00 020 674 47 50 140 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 141 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code New Zealand International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 64 Nicaragua Norway (Lysaker) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 47 Panama Peru Poland (Warsaw) International Access Code: 011 Country Code: 48 City Code: 22 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers E-mail (New Zealand): nz_tech_support@dell.com E-mail (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com Home and Small Business Government and Business Sales Fax General Support Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail Support (portable computers):

nor_nbk_support@dell.com E-mail Support (desktop computers):

nor_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers):

nordic_server_support@dell.com Technical Support Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Customer Care Switchboard Fax Switchboard General Support General Support Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: pl_support@dell.com Customer Service Phone Customer Care Sales Customer Service Fax Reception Desk Fax Switchboard 0800 446 255 0800 444 617 0800 441 567 0800 441 566 001-800-220-1006 671 16882 671 17514 23162298 671 16800 671 16865 001-800-507-0962 0800-50-669 57 95 700 57 95 999 57 95 999 57 95 806 57 95 998 57 95 999 Appendix 141 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/

Technical Support Customer Care Sales 800 834 077 800 300 415 or 800 834 075 800 300 410 or 800 300 411 or 800 300 412 or 121 422 07 10 121 424 01 12 1-800-805-7545 toll-free: 1-877-441-4731 1-800-882-1521 toll-free: 1-877-270-4609 toll-free: 800 6011 051 604 633 4949 toll-free: 800 6011 054 toll-free: 800 6011 053 011 709 7710 011 709 7707 011 709 7700 011 706 0495 011 709 7700 604 633 4810 Technical Support Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Transaction Sales Corporate Sales Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: dell_za_support@dell.com Technical Support Customer Care Sales Fax Switchboard Customer Technical Support, Customer Service, and Sales (Penang, Malaysia) 4n142bk0.book Page 142 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Portugal International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 35 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Fax Puerto Rico General Support St. Kitts and Nevis General Support St. Lucia General Support St. Vincent and the Grenadines General Support Singapore (Singapore) International Access Code: 005 Country Code: 65 South Africa (Johannesburg) International Access Code:

09/091 Country Code: 27 City Code: 11 Southeast Asian and Pacific Countries 142 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 143 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Spain (Madrid) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 34 City Code: 91 Sweden (Upplands Vasby) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 46 City Code: 8 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/

Home and Small Business Technical Support Customer Care Sales Switchboard Fax Corporate Technical Support Customer Care Switchboard Fax Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: swe_support@dell.com E-mail Support for Latitude and Inspiron:

Swe-nbk_kats@dell.com E-mail Support for OptiPlex: Swe_kats@dell.com E-mail Support for Servers:

Nordic_server_support@dell.com Technical Support Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Customer Care Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Support Fax Technical Support Sales 902 100 130 902 118 540 902 118 541 902 118 541 902 118 539 902 100 130 902 118 546 91 722 92 00 91 722 95 83 08 590 05 199 08 590 05 642 08 587 70 527 20 140 14 44 08 590 05 594 08 590 05 185 Appendix 143 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers 4n142bk0.book Page 144 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Switzerland (Geneva) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 41 City Code: 22 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Taiwan International Access Code: 002 Country Code: 886 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: swisstech@dell.com E-mail for French-speaking HSB and Corporate Customers: support.euro.dell.com/ch/fr/emaildell/

Technical Support (Home and Small Business) Technical Support (Corporate) Customer Care (Home and Small Business) Customer Care (Corporate) Fax Switchboard Technical Support (portable and desktop computers) Technical Support (servers) Transaction Sales Corporate Sales Thailand International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 66 Trinidad/Tobago Turks and Caicos Islands Technical Support Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Sales General Support General Support 144 Appendix 0844 811 411 0844 822 844 0848 802 202 0848 821 721 022 799 01 90 022 799 01 01 toll-free: 00801 86 1011 toll-free: 0080 60 1256 toll-free: 0080 651 228 or 0800 33 556 toll-free: 0080 651 227 or 0800 33 555 toll-free: 0880 060 07 604 633 4949 toll-free: 0880 060 09 1-800-805-8035 toll-free: 1-866-540-3355 4n142bk0.book Page 145 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code U.K. (Bracknell) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 44 City Code: 1344 Uruguay Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Website: support.euro.dell.com Customer Care website:

dell.co.uk/lca/customerservices E-mail: dell_direct_support@dell.com Technical Support (Corporate/Preferred Accounts/PAD [1000+ employees]) Technical Support (direct/PAD and general) Global Accounts Customer Care Home and Small Business Customer Care Corporate Customer Care Preferred Accounts (5005000 employees) Customer Care Central Government Customer Care Local Government & Education Customer Care Health Customer Care Home and Small Business Sales Corporate/Public Sector Sales General Support 0870 908 0500 0870 908 0800 01344 373 185 or 01344 373 186 0870 906 0010 0870 908 0500 01344 373 196 01344 373 193 01344 373 199 01344 373 194 0870 907 4000 01344 860 456 toll-free: 000-413-598-2521 Appendix 145 4n142bk0.book Page 146 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code U.S.A. (Austin, Texas) International Access Code: 011 Country Code: 1 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Automated Order-Status Service AutoTech (portable and desktop computers) Consumer (Home and Home Office) Technical Support Customer Service DellNet Service and Support m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers Financial Services website: www.dellfinancialservices.com Financial Services (lease/loans) Financial Services (Dell Preferred Accounts [DPA]) Business Customer Service and Technical Support Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers Projectors Technical Support Public (government, education, and healthcare) Customer Service and Technical Support Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers Dell Sales Dell Outlet Store (Dell refurbished computers) Software and Peripherals Sales Spare Parts Sales Extended Service and Warranty Sales Fax Dell Services for the Deaf, Hard-of-Hearing, or Speech-Impaired U.S. Virgin Islands Venezuela General Support General Support 146 Appendix Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers toll-free: 1-800-433-9014 toll-free: 1-800-247-9362 toll-free: 1-800-624-9896 toll-free: 1-800-624-9897 toll-free: 1-877-Dellnet

(1-877-335-5638) toll-free: 1-800-695-8133 toll-free: 1-877-577-3355 toll-free: 1-800-283-2210 toll-free: 1-800-822-8965 toll-free: 1-800-695-8133 toll-free: 1-877-459-7298 toll-free: 1-800-456-3355 toll-free: 1-800-234-1490 toll-free: 1-800-289-3355 or toll-free: 1-800-879-3355 toll-free: 1-888-798-7561 toll-free: 1-800-671-3355 toll-free: 1-800-357-3355 toll-free: 1-800-247-4618 toll-free: 1-800-727-8320 toll-free: 1-877-DELLTTY

(1-877-335-5889) 1-877-673-3355 8001-3605 4n142bk0.book Page 147 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Regulatory Notices Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) is any signal or emission, radiated in free space or conducted along power or signal leads, that endangers the functioning of a radio navigation or other safety service or seriously degrades, obstructs, or repeatedly interrupts a licensed radio communications service. Radio communications services include but are not limited to AM/FM commercial broadcast, television, cellular services, radar, air-traffic control, pager, and Personal Communication Services

(PCS). These licensed services, along with unintentional radiators such as digital devices, including computers, contribute to the electromagnetic environment. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) is the ability of items of electronic equipment to function properly together in the electronic environment. While this computer has been designed and determined to be compliant with regulatory agency limits for EMI, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference with radio communications services, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient the receiving antenna. Relocate the computer with respect to the receiver. Move the computer away from the receiver. Plug the computer into a different outlet so that the computer and the receiver are on different branch circuits. If necessary, consult a Dell Technical Support representative or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. For additional regulatory information, see the Tell Me How help file that accompanied your computer. To access the help file, see "Accessing Help"

on page 88. Appendix 147 4n142bk0.book Page 148 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM NOM Information (Mexico Only) The following information is provided on the device(s) described in this document in compliance with the requirements of the official Mexican standards (NOM):

Exporter:

Importer:

Ship to:

Dell Computer Corporation One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 Dell Computer de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11 Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 Mxico, D.F. Dell Computer de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. al Cuidado de Kuehne &

Nagel de Mxico S. de R.I. Avenida Soles No. 55 Col. Peon de los Baos 15520 Mxico, D.F. Model number:

Supply voltage:

Frequency:

PP05L 100240 VAC 5060 Hz Current Consumption:

1.5 A Output voltage:

Output current:

19.5 VDC 4.92 A m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 148 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 149 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Limited Warranties and Return Policy Dell-branded hardware products purchased in the U.S. or Canada come with either a 90-day

(U.S. only), one-year, two-year, three-year, or four-year limited warranty. To determine which warranty you purchased, see the invoice that accompanied your hardware product(s). The following sections describe the limited warranties and return policy for the U.S., the limited warranties and return policy for Canada, and the manufacturer guarantee for Latin America and the Caribbean. Limited Warranty for the U.S. What is covered by this limited warranty?

This limited warranty covers defects in materials and workmanship in yourour end-user customer'sDell-branded hardware products, including Dell-branded peripheral products. What is not covered by this limited warranty?

This limited warranty does not cover:

Software, including the operating system and software added to the Dell-branded hardware products through our factory-integration system, third-party software, or the reloading of software Non-Dell-branded products and accessories Problems that result from:

External causes such as accident, abuse, misuse, or problems with electrical power Servicing not authorized by us Usage that is not in accordance with product instructions Failure to follow the product instructions or failure to perform preventive maintenance Problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by us Products with missing or altered service tags or serial numbers Products for which we have not received payment THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE (OR JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION). DELL'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MALFUNCITONS AND DEFECTS IN HARDWARE IS LIMITED TO REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT AS SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED IN TIME TO THE TERM OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD REFLECTED ON YOUR INVOICE. NO WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD HAS EXPIRED. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. Appendix 149 4n142bk0.book Page 150 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM WE DO NOT ACCEPT LIABILITY BEYOND THE REMEDIES PROVIDED FOR IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY LIABILTY FOR THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES, FOR PRODUCTS NOT BEING AVAILABLE FOR USE, OR FOR LOST DATA OR LOST SOFTWARE. OUR LIABILITY WILL BE NO MORE THAN THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT THAT IS THE SUBJECT OF A CLAIM. THIS IS THE MAXIMUM AMOUNT FOR WHICH WE ARE RESPONSIBLE. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. How long does this limited warranty last?

This limited warranty lasts for the time period indicated on your invoice, except that the limited warranty on Dell-branded batteries lasts only one year and the limited warranty on the lamps for Dell-branded projectors lasts only ninety days. The limited warranty begins on the date of the invoice. The warranty period is not extended if we repair or replace a warranted product or any parts. Dell may change the availability of limited warranties, at its discretion, but any changes will not be retroactive. What do I do if I need warranty service?

Before the warranty expires, please call us at the relevant number listed in the following table. Please also have your Dell service tag number or order number available. Individual Home Consumers:

Technical Support Customer Service 1-800-624-9896 1-800-624-9897 Individual Home Consumers who purchased through an Employee Purchase Program:

Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-822-8965 Home and Small Business Commercial Customers:

Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-456-3355 Medium, Large, or Global Commercial Customers, Healthcare Customers, and Value Added Resellers (VARs):

Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-822-8965 Government and Education Customers:

Technical Support and Customer Service Dell-Branded Memory 1-800-234-1490 1-888-363-5150 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 150 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 151 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM What will Dell do?

During the first 90 days of the 90-day limited warranty and the first year of all other limited warranties: For the first 90 days of the 90-day limited warranty and the first year of all other limited warranties, we will repair any Dell-branded hardware products returned to us that prove to be defective in materials or workmanship. If we are not able to repair the product, we will replace it with a comparable product that is new or refurbished. When you contact us, we will issue a Return Material Authorization Number for you to include with your return. You must return the products to us in their original or equivalent packaging, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk if the product is lost or damaged in shipment. We will return the repaired or replacement products to you. We will pay to ship the repaired or replaced products to you if you use an address in the United States

(excluding Puerto Rico and U.S. possessions and territories). Otherwise, we will ship the product to you freight collect. If we determine that the product is not covered under this warranty, we will notify you and inform you of service alternatives that are available to you on a fee basis. NOTE: Before you ship the product(s) to us, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). Remove any confidential, proprietary, or personal information and removable media such as floppy disks, CDs, or PC Cards. We are not responsible for any of your confidential, proprietary, or personal information; lost or corrupted data; or damaged or lost removable media. During the remaining years: For the remaining period of the limited warranty, we will replace any defective part with new or refurbished parts, if we agree that it needs to be replaced. When you contact us, we will require a valid credit card number at the time you request a replacement part, but we will not charge you for the replacement part as long as you return the original part to us within thirty days after we ship the replacement part to you. If we do not receive the original part within thirty days, we will charge to your credit card the then-current standard price for that part. We will pay to ship the part to you if you use an address in the United States (excluding Puerto Rico and U.S. possessions and territories). Otherwise, we will ship the part freight collect. We will also include a prepaid shipping container with each replacement part for your use in returning the replaced part to us. NOTE: Before you replace parts, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). We are not responsible for lost or corrupted data. What if I purchased a service contract?

If your on-site service contract is with Dell, on-site service will be provided to you under the terms of the on-site service agreement. Please refer to that contract for details on how to obtain service. If you purchased through us a service contract with one of our third-party service providers, please refer to that contract for details on how to obtain service. Appendix 151 4n142bk0.book Page 152 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM How will you fix my product?

We use new and refurbished parts made by various manufacturers in performing warranty repairs and in building replacement parts and systems. Refurbished parts and systems are parts or systems that have been returned to Dell, some of which were never used by a customer. All parts and systems are inspected and tested for quality. Replacement parts and systems are covered for the remaining period of the limited warranty for the product you bought. What do I do if I am not satisfied?

We pride ourselves on our great customer service. If you are not satisfied with the service you receive under this limited warranty, please let us know. We have found that the best way to resolve issues regarding our limited warranty is to work together. If, after those discussions, you are still not satisfied, we believe arbitration is the most expeditious way to resolve your concerns. Therefore, ANY CLAIM, DISPUTE, OR CONTROVERSY (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, WHETHER PREEXISTING, PRESENT, OR FUTURE, AND INCLUDING STATUTORY, COMMON LAW, INTENTIONAL TORT, AND EQUITABLE CLAIMS) AGAINST DELL arising from or relating to this limited warranty, its interpretation, or the breach, termination, or validity thereof, the relationships which result from this limited warranty (including, to the full extent permitted by applicable law, relationships with third parties), Dell's advertising, or any related purchase SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY AND FINALLY BY BINDING ARBITRATION ADMINISTERED BY THE NATIONAL ARBITRATION FORUM (NAF) under its Code of Procedure then in effect (available via the Internet at www.arb-forum.com/ or via telephone at 1-800-474-2371). The arbitration will be limited solely to the dispute or controversy between you and Dell. Any award of the arbitrator(s) shall be final and binding on each of the parties, and may be entered as a judgment in any court of competent jurisdiction. Information may be obtained and claims may be filed with the NAF at P.O. Box 50191, Minneapolis, MN 55405. This provision applies only to individual home consumers and consumers who purchased through an employee purchase program. It does not apply to small, medium, large, and global commercial customers or government, education, and healthcare customers. May I transfer the limited warranty?

Limited warranties on systems may be transferred if the current owner transfers ownership of the system and records the transfer with us. The limited warranty on Dell-branded memory may not be transferred. You may record your transfer by going to Dell's website:

If you are an Individual Home Consumer, go to www.dell.com/us/en/dhs/topics/sbtopic_015_ccare.htm If you are a Small, Medium, Large, or Global Commercial Customer, go to www.dell.com/us/en/biz/topics/sbtopic_ccare_nav_015_ccare.htm If you are a Government, Education, or Healthcare Customer, or an Individual Consumer who purchased through an employee purchase program, go to www.dell.com/us/en/pub/topics/sbtopic_015_ccare.htm If you do not have Internet access, call your customer care representative or call 1-800-624-

9897. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 152 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 153 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM

"Total Satisfaction" Return Policy (U.S. Only) We value our relationship with you and want to make sure that you're satisfied with your purchases. That's why we offer a "Total Satisfaction" return policy for most products that you the end-user customerpurchase directly from Dell. Under this policy, you may return to Dell products that you purchased directly from Dell for a credit or a refund of the purchase price paid, less shipping and handling and applicable restocking fees as follows:

New Hardware Products and Accessories All new hardware, accessories, parts, and unopened software still in its sealed package, excluding the products listed below, may be returned within thirty days from the invoice date. To return applications software or an operating system that has been installed by Dell, you must return the entire computer. A different return policy applies to nondefective products purchased through Dell's Software and Peripherals division by customers of our Small and Medium Business divisions. Those products may be returned within thirty days from the invoice date, but a fifteen percent (15%) restocking fee will be deducted from any refund or credit. The

"Total Satisfaction" Return Policy and Software and Peripherals division return policy are not available for Dell | EMC storage products, EMC-branded products, or enterprise software. Reconditioned or Refurbished Dell-Branded Hardware Products and Parts All reconditioned or refurbished Dell-branded server and storage products may be returned within thirty days from the invoice date. All other reconditioned or refurbished Dell-

branded hardware products and parts may be returned within fourteen days of the invoice date. To return products, e-mail or call Dell customer service to receive a Credit Return Authorization Number within the return policy period applicable to the product you want to return. You must obtain a Credit Return Authorization Number in order to return the product. See "Contacting Dell" on page 129 (or www.dell.com/us/en/gen/contact.htm) to find the appropriate contact information for obtaining customer assistance. You must ship the products to Dell within five days of the date that Dell issues the Credit Return Authorization Number. You must also return the products to Dell in their original packaging, in as-new condition along with any media, documentation, and all other items that were included in the original shipment, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during shipment. Limited Warranty Terms for Canada What is covered by this limited warranty?

This limited warranty covers defects in materials and workmanship in yourour end-user customer'sDell-branded hardware products, including Dell-branded peripheral products. What is not covered by this limited warranty?

This limited warranty does not cover:

Software, including the operating system and software added to the Dell-branded hardware products through our factory-integration system, or the reloading of the software Non-Dell branded products and accessories Appendix 153 4n142bk0.book Page 154 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Problems that result from:

External causes such as accident, abuse, misuse, or problems with electrical power Servicing not authorized by us Usage that is not in accordance with product instructions Failure to follow the product instructions or failure to perform preventive maintenance Problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by us Products with missing or altered service tags or serial numbers Products for which we have not received payment THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM PROVINCE TO PROVINCE. DELL'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MALFUNCTIONS AND DEFECTS IN PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT AS SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT, FOR THE TERM OF THE WARRANTY PERIOD REFLECTED ON YOUR INVOICE. EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES CONTAINED IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT, DELL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. SOME PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF CERTAIN IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION LASTS. THEREFORE, THE FOREGOING EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. WE DO NOT ACCEPT LIABILITY BEYOND THE REMEDIES PROVIDED FOR IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT OR FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY LIABILTY FOR THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES, FOR PRODUCTS NOT BEING AVAILABLE FOR USE, OR FOR LOST DATA OR LOST SOFTWARE. OUR LIABILITY WILL BE NO MORE THAN THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT THAT IS THE SUBJECT OF A CLAIM. THIS IS THE MAXIMUM AMOUNT FOR WHICH WE ARE RESPONSIBLE. SOME PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. How long does this limited warranty last?

This limited warranty lasts for the time period indicated on your invoice, except that the limited warranty on Dell-branded batteries lasts only one year and the limited warranty on the lamps for Dell-branded projectors lasts only ninety days. The limited warranty begins on the date of the invoice. The warranty period is not extended if we repair or replace a warranted product or any parts. Dell may change the terms and availability of limited warranties, at its discretion, but any changes will not be retroactive (that is, the warranty terms in place at the time of purchase will apply to your purchase). m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 154 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 155 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM What do I do if I need warranty service?

Before the warranty expires, please call us at the relevant number listed in the following table. Please also have your Dell service tag number or order number available. Individual Home Consumers; Home Office and Small Business Customers:

Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-847-4096 Medium, Large, and Global Commercial Customers;

Government, Education, and Healthcare Customers;

and Value Added Resellers (VARs):

Technical Support Customer Service 1-800-387-5757 1-800-326-9463 Government or Education Customers, or Individual Home Consumers who purchased through an Employee Purchase Program:

Technical Support Customer Service 1-800-387-5757 1-800-326-9463 (Extension 8221 for Individual Consumers) Dell-Branded Memory 1-888-363-5150 What will Dell do?

During the first year of all limited warranties: During the first year of all limited warranties, we will repair any Dell-branded hardware products returned to us that prove to be defective in materials or workmanship. If we are not able to repair the product, we will replace it with a comparable product that is new or refurbished. When you contact us, we will issue a Return Material Authorization Number for you to include with your return. You must return the products to us in their original or equivalent packaging, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk if the product is lost or damaged in shipment. We will return the repaired or replacement products to you. We will pay to ship the repaired or replaced products to you if you use an address in Canada. Otherwise, we will ship the product to you freight collect. If we determine that the problem is not covered under this warranty, we will notify you and inform you of service alternatives that are available to you on a fee basis. NOTE: Before you ship the product(s) to us, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). Remove any confidential, proprietary or personal information, removable media, such as floppy disks, CDs, or PC Cards. We are not responsible for any of your confidential, proprietary or personal information; lost or corrupted data; or damaged or lost removable media. Appendix 155 4n142bk0.book Page 156 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM During the remaining years following the first year of all limited warranties: We will replace any defective part with new or refurbished parts, if we agree that it needs to be replaced. When you contact us, we will require a valid credit card number at the time you request a replacement part, but we will not charge you for the replacement part as long as you return the original part to us within thirty days after we ship the replacement part to you. If we do not receive the original part within thirty days, we will charge to your credit card the then-current standard price for that part. We will pay to ship the part to you if you use an address in Canada. Otherwise, we will ship the part freight collect. We will also include a prepaid shipping container with each replacement part for your use in returning the replaced part to us. NOTE: Before you replace parts, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). We are not responsible for lost or corrupted data. What if I purchased an on-site service contract?

If your service contract is with Dell, service will be provided to you under the terms of the service contract. Please refer to that contract for details on how to obtain service. Dell's service contracts can be found online at www.dell.ca or by calling Customer Care at 1-800-847-4096. If you purchased through us a service contract with one of our third-party service providers, please refer to that contract (mailed to you with your invoice) for details on how to obtain service. How will you fix my product?

We use new and refurbished parts made by various manufacturers in performing warranty repairs and in building replacement parts and systems. Refurbished parts and systems are parts or systems that have been returned to Dell, some of which were never used by a customer. All parts and systems are inspected and tested for quality. Replacement parts and systems are covered for the remaining period of the limited warranty for the product you bought. Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. What do I do if I am not satisfied?

We pride ourselves on our great customer service. If you are not satisfied with the service you receive under this limited warranty, please let us know. We have found that the best way to resolve issues regarding our limited warranty is to work together. If, after those discussions, you are still not satisfied, we believe arbitration is the most expeditious way to resolve your concerns. Therefore, ANY CLAIM, DISPUTE, OR CONTROVERSY (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, WHETHER PREEXISTING, PRESENT OR FUTURE, AND INCLUDING STATUTORY, COMMON LAW, INTENTIONAL TORT, AND EQUITABLE CLAIMS) AGAINST DELL arising from or relating to this limited warranty, its interpretation, or the breach, termination or validity thereof, the relationships which result from this limited warranty (including, to the full extent permitted by applicable law, relationships with third parties), Dell's advertising, or any related purchase SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY AND FINALLY BY BINDING ARBITRATION ADMINISTERED BY THE NATIONAL ARBITRATION FORUM (NAF) under its Code of Procedure then in effect (available via the Internet at www.arb-forum.com/, or via telephone at 1-800-474-2371). The arbitration will be limited solely to the dispute or controversy between m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 156 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 157 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM you and Dell. Any award of the arbitrator(s) shall be final and binding on each of the parties, and may be entered as a judgment in any court of competent jurisdiction. Information may be obtained and claims may be filed with the NAF at P.O. Box 50191, Minneapolis, MN 55405. May I transfer the limited warranty?

Limited warranties on systems may be transferred if the current owner transfers ownership of the system and records the transfer with us. The limited warranty on Dell-branded memory may not be transferred. You may record your transfer by going to our website:

If you are an Individual Home Consumer, go to www.dell.com/us/en/dhs/topics/sbtopic_016_ccare.htm If you are a Home Office, Small, Medium, Large, or Global Commercial Customer, go to www.dell.com/us/en/biz/topics/sbtopic_ccare_nav_016_ccare.htm If you are a Government, Education, or Healthcare Customer, or an Individual Home Consumer who purchased through an Employee Purchase Program, go to www.dell.com/us/en/pub/topics/sbtopic_016_ccare.htm If you do not have Internet access, please call Dell at 1-800-326-9463.

"Total Satisfaction" Return Policy (Canada Only) If you are an end-user customer who bought new products directly from Dell, you may return them to Dell up to 30 days after you receive them for a refund or credit of the product purchase price. If you are an end-user customer who bought reconditioned or refurbished products from Dell, you may return them to Dell within 14 days after the date of invoice for a refund or credit of the product purchase price. In either case, the refund or credit will not include any shipping and handling charges shown on your invoice and will be subject to a fifteen percent (15%) restocking fee, unless otherwise prohibited by law. If you are an organization that bought the products under a written agreement with Dell, the agreement may contain different terms for the return of products than specified by this policy. To return products, you must call Dell Customer Service at 1-800-387-5759 to receive a Credit Return Authorization Number. To expedite the process of your refund or credit, Dell expects you to return the products to Dell in their original packaging within five days of the date that Dell issues the Credit Return Authorization Number. You must also prepay shipping charges and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during shipment. You may return software for a refund or credit only if the sealed package containing the floppy disk(s) or CD(s) is unopened. Returned products must be in as-new condition, and all of the manuals, floppy disk(s), CD(s), power cables, and other items included with a product must be returned with it. For customers who want to return, for refund or credit only, either application or operating system software that has been installed by Dell, the whole system must be returned, along with any media and documentation that may have been included in the original shipment. The "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy does not apply to Dell | EMC storage products. It also does not apply to products purchased through Dell's Software and Peripherals division. For those products, please instead refer to Dell's Software and Peripheral's then-current return policy (see the following section, "Dell Software and Peripherals (Canada Only)"). Appendix 157 4n142bk0.book Page 158 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Dell Software and Peripherals (Canada Only) Third-Party Software and Peripherals Products Similar to other resellers of software and peripherals, Dell does not warrant third-party products. Third-party software and peripheral products are covered by the warranties provided by the original manufacturer or publisher only. Third party manufacturer warranties vary from product to product. Consult your product documentation for specific warranty information. More information may also be available from the manufacturer or publisher. While Dell offers a wide selection of software and peripheral products, we do not specifically test or guarantee that all of the products we offer work with any or all of the various models of Dell computers, nor do we test or guarantee all of the products we sell on the hundreds of different brands of computers available today. If you have questions about compatibility, we recommend and encourage you to contact the third-party software and peripheral product manufacturer or publisher directly. Dell-Branded Peripheral Products Dell does provide a limited warranty for new Dell-branded peripheral products (products for which Dell is listed as the manufacturer) such as monitors, batteries, memory, docking stations, and projectors). To determine which limited warranty applies to the product you purchased, see the Dell invoice and/or the product documentation that accompanied your product. Descriptions of Dell's limited warranties are described in preceding sections. Return Policy If you are an end-user customer who bought Dell Software and Peripherals products directly from a Dell company, you may return Dell Software and Peripherals products that are in as-new condition to Dell up to 30 days from the date of invoice for a refund of the product purchase price if already paid. This refund will not include any shipping and handling charges shown on your invoice; you are responsible for those. To return products, you must call Dell Customer Service at 1-800-387-5759 to receive a Credit Return Authorization Number. You must ship the Dell Software and Peripherals products back to Dell in their original manufacturer's packaging (which must be in as-new condition), prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during shipment. To qualify for refund or replacement, returned products must be in as-new condition, software products must be unopened, and all of the manuals, floppy disk(s), CD(s), power cables, and other items included with a product must be returned with it. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 158 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 159 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM One-Year End-User Manufacturer Guarantee (Latin America and the Caribbean Only) Guarantee Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") warrants to the end user in accordance with the following provisions that its branded hardware products, purchased by the end user from a Dell company or an authorized Dell distributor in Latin America or the Caribbean, will be free from defects in materials, workmanship, and design affecting normal use, for a period of one year from the original purchase date. Products for which proper claims are made will, at Dells option, be repaired or replaced at Dells expense. Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. Dell uses new and reconditioned parts made by various manufacturers in performing repairs and building replacement products. Exclusions This Guarantee does not apply to defects resulting from: improper or inadequate installation, use, or maintenance; actions or modifications by unauthorized third parties or the end user;

accidental or willful damage; or normal wear and tear. Making a Claim Claims must be made in Latin America or the Caribbean by contacting the Dell point of sale within the guarantee period. The end user must always supply proof of purchase, indicating name and address of the seller, date of purchase, model and serial number, name and address of the customer, and details of symptoms and configuration at the time of malfunction, including peripherals and software used. Otherwise, Dell may refuse the guarantee claim. Upon diagnosis of a warranted defect, Dell will make arrangements and pay for ground freight and insurance to and from Dells repair/replacement center. The end user must ensure that the defective product is available for collection properly packed in original or equally protective packaging together with the details listed above and the return number provided to the end user by Dell. Limitation and Statutory Rights Dell makes no other warranty, guarantee or like statement other than as explicitly stated above, and this Guarantee is given in place of all other guarantees whatsoever, to the fullest extent permitted by law. In the absence of applicable legislation, this Guarantee will be the end users sole and exclusive remedy against Dell or any of its affiliates, and neither Dell nor any of its affiliates shall be liable for loss of profit or contracts, or any other indirect or consequential loss arising from negligence, breach of contract, or howsoever. This Guarantee does not impair or affect mandatory statutory rights of the end user against and/or any rights resulting from other contracts concluded by the end user with Dell and/or any other seller. Dell World Trade LP One Dell Way, Round Rock, TX 78682, USA Dell Computadores do Brasil Ltda (CNPJ No. 72.381.189/0001-10)/

Dell Commercial do Brasil Ltda (CNPJ No. 03 405 822/0001-40) Avenida Industrial Belgraf, 400 92990-000 - Eldorado do Sul RS - Brasil Appendix 159 4n142bk0.book Page 160 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Dell Computer de Chile Ltda Coyancura 2283, Piso 3- Of.302, Providencia, Santiago - Chile Dell Computer de Colombia Corporation Carrera 7 #115-33 Oficina 603 Bogota, Colombia Dell Computer de Mexico SA de CV Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11 Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 Mxico, D.F. 160 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 161 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Intel Warranty Statement for Pentium and Celeron Processors Only (U.S. and Canada Only) Limited Warranty Intel warrants that its family of Pentium and Celeron processors, if properly used and installed, will be free from defects in materials and workmanship and will substantially conform to Intels publicly available specifications for a period of three (3) years after the date the Pentium or Celeron processor was purchased (whether purchased separately or as part of a computer system). Intels Three Year Limited Warranty If the Pentium or Celeron processor, which is the subject of this Limited Warranty, fails during the warranty period for reasons covered by this Limited Warranty, Intel, at its option, will:

REPAIR the Pentium or Celeron processor by means of hardware and/or software; OR

REPLACE the Pentium or Celeron processor with another Pentium or Celeron processor; OR if Intel is unable to repair or replace the particular Pentium or Celeron processor,

REFUND the then-current value of the Pentium or Celeron processor. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER STATE LAW, APPLY ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PENTIUM OR CELERON PROCESSOR, OR PENTIUM OR CELERON PROCESSOR-BASED COMPUTER AND LAST ONLY FOR AS LONG AS SUCH PURCHASER CONTINUES TO OWN THE PROCESSOR. Extent of Limited Warranty Intel does not warrant that your Pentium or Celeron processor will be free from design defects or errors known as "errata." Current characterized errata are available upon request. This limited warranty is for purchasers in the United States and Canada only. The limited warranty does not cover any costs relating to removal or replacement of any Pentium or Celeron processors that are soldered or otherwise permanently affixed to your systems motherboard. This limited warranty does not cover damages due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper testing. How to Obtain Warranty Service To obtain warranty service for your Pentium or Celeron processor, you may contact your computer system manufacturer in accordance with its instructions, or you may contact Intel. To request warranty service from Intel, you should call Intel at 1-800-628-8686 during the warranty period during normal business hours (Pacific Time), excluding holidays. Please be prepared to provide:

(1) your name, address, and telephone numbers;

(2) proof of purchase;

(3) this Intel warranty card;

(4) a description of the computer system including the brand and model; and

(5) an explanation of the problem.

[Note: The Customer Service Representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem.]

The replacement processor is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions for the remainder of the original warranty period or one

(1) year, whichever is longer. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THESE WARRANTIES REPLACE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. INTEL MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES BEYOND THOSE STATED HERE. INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THESE LAWS APPLY, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTELS RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS, OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING YOUR PENTIUM PROCESSOR. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THE LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. Appendix 161 4n142bk0.book Page 162 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Intel Pentium and Celeron Processors are backed by a three-year limited warranty. Please refer to the reverse side of this card for complete warranty details. Intels Commitment to Quality Intel is committed to producing the highest quality processors available. Thats why we have hundreds of people dedicated to continuously improve our design, manufacturing, and testing technology. We put every one of our Pentium and Celeron processors through a rigorous battery of tests during the design and manufacturing processes. To verify that the new chip will correctly run the software written for Intel Architecture processors, a team of Intel engineers is dedicated to compatibility testing. In a state-of-art lab, this group runs an extensive set of operating systems, applications, network tests and stress tests repeatedly to ensure that the processor is compatible with representative software. Just as importantly, we work with hardware and software companies in the computer industry to ensure that our processors are compatible with their products. Additionally, a sampling of Intel processors are subjected to a rigorous "burn-in" test whereby the chip is operated at higher-than-normal temperatures and voltages. During this burn-in period, the processor experiences the equivalent of weeks of normal usage. These units are monitored for failures as part of our ongoing quality assurance process. As a result, todays microprocessors from Intel are among the most reliable components in computers. What are Errata?

Exhaustive product testing can highlight differences between the actual behavior of the microprocessor and its specifications. Sometimes the discrepancies are caused by a design defect or error, which we call errata. Rigorous validation identifies most errata during the development of the processor, but we do detect additional errata during the life cycle of a microprocessor. When an erratum is identified, our engineers work to characterize it and find a solution. We work with system designers and software developers to ensure that the discrepancy does not affect their products. If necessary, special software or hardware solutions (sometimes known as "work arounds") are implemented in the system design to prevent computer users from encountering the problem. Errata may then be corrected in future revisions of the microprocessor. No microprocessor is perfect, and Intel recognizes that some consumers want to know about any errata, whether or not the errata affect them. Intel makes documentation of all characterized Pentium and Celeron processor errata publicly available through our Technical Documentation Service. At Intel, our goal is to make every computer user satisfied with his or her Pentium or Celeron processor. Should you have any questions, comments or concerns about your Intel microprocessor, please call us at 1-800-628-8686. 1997, 1998 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. 162 Appendix 4n142bk0.book Page 163 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM I n d ex A air vents description, 23, 29 system view, 23, 29 audio connectors description, 24 system view, 24 B battery charge gauge, 48 charging, 49 checking the charge, 47 description, 31 installing, 50 low-battery warning, 48 performance, 46 power meter, 48 removing, 49 storing, 50 system view, 31 C CD-RW drive computer crashes, 94 specifications, 118 conflicts drivers, 97 resolving software and hardware incompatibilities, 102 copying CDs general information, 72 helpful tips, 73 instructions, 74 crashes, 94 D damaged computer testing, 96 Dell support policy, 128 Device Driver Rollback, 98 device latch release description, 26, 30 system view, 26, 30 device status lights, 21 description, 21 fixing problems, 72 display characters unexpected, 67 description, 20 system view, 20 display latch description, 22 system view, 22 docking device latch description, 31 system view, 31 drivers definition, 97 reinstalling, 98, 103 troubleshooting, 97 drives fixing problems, 92 E e-mail fixing problems, 36 F fan description, 31 system view, 31 Files and Settings Transfer Wizard, 37 finding solutions, 86 Index 163 164 4n142bk0.book Page 164 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Index floppy drive connecting to the parallel port, 27 fixing problems, 92 H hard drive description, 24, 31 preventing damage, 114 replacing, 113 system view, 24, 31 hardware drivers, 97 K keyboard description, 22 fixing problems, 67 shortcuts, 63 system view, 22 unexpected characters, 67 keyboard status lights description, 22 system view, 22 keypad numeric, 62 Hardware Troubleshooter, 102 help file accessing, 88 L line conditioners, 42 M memory adding, 108 removing, 109 memory module cover description, 30 system view, 30 Mini PCI card description, 30 system view, 30 modem description, 30 system view, 30 modem connector description, 28 system view, 28 I infrared sensor description, 24 system view, 24 Internet connection about, 34 options, 34 setting up, 34 IR sensor See infrared sensor IRQ conflicts, 102 164 Index module bay about, 52 description, 26 swapping devices while the computer is running, 56 swapping devices while the computer is turned off, 53 system view, 26 N network fixing problems, 83 network connector description, 28 system view, 28 P parallel connector description, 28 system view, 28 PC Card slot description, 23 system view, 23 PC Cards fixing problems, 93 power fixing problems, 51 turning off your computer, 43 power button description, 20 system view, 20 printer cable, 39 connecting, 38 4n142bk0.book Page 165 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM printer (continued) parallel, 39 setting up, 38 USB, 40 programs crashes, 94 fixing problems, 94 not responding, 94 R RAM. See memory reinstalling drivers, 98, 103 S safety instructions, 11 security cable slot description, 24-25 system view, 24-25 serial connector description, 29 system view, 29 shutting down your computer, 43 smart card slot description, 24 system view, 24 software fixing problems, 94 reinstalling software, 98, 103 speakers description, 22 system view, 22 specifications, system, 118 surge protectors, 42 S-video TV-out connector description, 28 system view, 28 System Restore, 100 system setup program commonly used options, 126 screens, 125 viewing, 125 system specifications, 118 system view, 21 T Tell Me How help file accessing, 88 touch pad customizing, 66 description, 22 system view, 22 touch pad buttons description, 22 system view, 22 troubleshooting about, 86 cannot save to floppy disk, 92 CD-RW drive stops writing, 72 conflicts, 102 Device Driver Rollback, 98 drivers, 97 dropped or damaged computer, 96 e-mail problems, 36 troubleshooting (continued) external keyboard problems, 67 Hardware Troubleshooter, 102 network problems, 83 PC Card problems, 93 power problems, 51 program crash, 94 program stopped responding, 94 scanner problems, 91 System Restore, 100 unexpected characters, 67 wet computer, 95 turning off your computer, 43 U unterruptible power supplies See UPS UPS, 42 USB connector description, 27 system view, 27 V video connector description, 28 system view, 28 W warranty, 149 wet computer, 95 Index 165 166 4n142bk0.book Page 166 Tuesday, December 17, 2002 2:54 PM Index Windows XP Device Driver Rollback, 98 Hardware Troubleshooter, 102 help, 88 System Restore, 100 166 Index DELL INFORMATION DEVELOPMENT Printing Specifications ENGLISH

(Completed by Information Development) LOCALIZATION

(Heavily outlined boxes completed by Agency) MILESTONE NAME:

B2 - Benz Owners Manual PATH:

(S:\SYSTEMS\Bondi_Benz\Benz\owner\A00\English) LANGUAGES:

English

PART and REVISION NUMBER:

SPEC SHEET PREPARED BY:

DATE SPEC SHEET COMPLETED:

CONTACTS:

AMF PRINT VENDOR AND/OR REGIONS:

Agency:

4N142 A00 Gloria Salinas 12/05/02 Cathy Brown Cathy_Brown@Dell.com 512-723-9330 Karen Johnson Karen_Johnson@Dell.com 512-728-0218 IPC, EMF, APCC, and CCC Same as English COMPUTER SOURCE:

_X_Dell PC Other__________________ ___Dell PC Other__________________ APPLICATION SFTWR FOR BOOK:

_X_ Frame ___ Word ___ Quark Other__________________ ___ Frame ___ Word ___ Quark Other___________________ APPLICATION SFTWR FOR COVER:

___ Frame ___ Word _X_ Quark Other__________________ ___ Frame ___ Word ___ Quark Other___________________ FILE TYPE:

_X_High Resolution PDF Other______________ ___High Resolution PDF Other_________________

.PS DRIVER USED:

_X_Scitex Dolev400 PSM L2 + Adobe PS COLORS/

SEPARATIONS:

Book COVER: _X_CMYK ___Gray Scale Book INTERIOR:_X_ Print all as Gray Scale

(Graphics Included) ___Scitex Dolev400 PSM L2

*Book COVER: ___CMYK ___Gray Scale Book INTERIOR: Print all as Gray Scale

(Graphics Included) OTHER: ___CMYK ___Gray Scale Pantone #s_________________________________ OTHER: ___CMYK ___Gray Scale Pantone #s_________________________________ FOR PROOF ONLY PDF:

___YES _X_ NO ___YES ___ NO PREFLIGHTED:

_X_YES PAGE SIZE:

PAGE SIZE FOLDED:

7.5 x 9 N/A ___YES Same as English Same as English PAPER STOCK:

_X_Dell Standard Other_______________ Same as English LINE SCREEN:

Per file Same as English FILE TRANSFER METHOD/MEDIA:

_X_ FTP ___ Email ___ Disk ___ AGILE Other____________ ___ FTP ___ Email ___ Disk ___ AGILE Other____________ Owner: Mike Whaley Last Revised: 11/14/02

* Refer to deliverables matrix in supplier tool kit Dell Confidential Continued on Back Page >

FILE NAME(S) & PAGE COUNT:

Section Filename Page Count Comments

* Localization Supplier:

Revise file name, page count, and page number columns TOTAL PAGE COUNT:

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR PRINT SUPPLIERS:

TRANSLATION INSTRUCTIONS:

English book/Interior:

Full Cover (AMF):

Or Full Cover (APCC):

Or Full Cover (CCC):

Or Full Cover (BCC):

4N1420HR.pdf 4N142am0HR.pdf 166 2 Separate Quark Covers 4N142ap0HR.pdf 4N142cc0HR.pdf 4N142bp0HR.pdf 168 Preflight exceptions: screen shots on pages 47, are acceptable resolution) Add blank pages needed to complete signatures:

Any document 3 pages or more, please add blank pages at the end of book to equal mul-

tiples of 4, 8, 16, or 32. Each new language begins on an odd numbered page and ends on an even numbered page. If this document contains Hebrew; add blank pages at the end of the Hebrew document (This would resemble the beginning of the document sec-

tions for all other languages) Keep in mind that Hebrew documents are read from RIGHT to LEFT. Any blank pages will follow the last page of the Hebrew document. Please refer to the Supplier Tool Kit. This document requires front and back Multilanguage covers. Please use the most current template to create these covers. Dell Confidential

 

 

Stan Lyles 5/18/2005 10:49:34 FCC Equipment Authorization System - reply. To:

Date:

Subject:

Message:

The response to this correspondence was submitted as an exhibit to the exhibit type Users Manual and the description User guide PP02X part 1

 

 

Dell Latitude D400 Users Guide FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\tp.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\tp.fm Click the links to the left for information on the features and operation of your computer. For information on other documentation included with your computer, see "Finding Information."

CAUTION: Follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide to help protect your computer from damage and ensure your own personal safety. Notes, Notices, and Cautions NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Abbreviations and Acronyms For a complete list of abbreviations and acronyms, see the Glossary. If you purchased a Dell n Series computer, any references in this document to Microsoft Windows operating systems are not applicable. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. 2003 Dell Computer Corporation. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Computer Corporation is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Latitude, Dell Precision, OptiPlex, Inspiron, Dimension, Dell TravelLite, and DellNet are trademarks of Dell Computer Corporation; Intel, Pentium, and Intel SpeedStep are registered trademarks and Centrino is a trademark of Intel Corporation; Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation; Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and is used by Dell Computer Corporation under license; ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Dell Computer Corporation has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Computer Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model PPT D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\tp.fm March 2003 P/N 2X468 Rev. A00 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\tp.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Contents 1 Finding Information Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Documentation Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Using Microsoft Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Windows Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Microsoft Windows Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Using Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Device Users Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Using the Drivers and Utilities CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Fixing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Microsoft Windows Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Dell Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Installing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2 About Your Computer Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Left View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Right View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Contents 3 3 UsingMicrosoft Windows XP Help and Support Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Switching to Classic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Window and Button Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 32 32 32 Desktop Cleanup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Transferring Information to a New Computer . . . . . . . . . . 33 User Accounts and Fast User Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast User Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Home and Office Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to a Network Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 35 35 36 36 36 Internet Connection Firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 4 Dell QuickSet Features Clicking the QuickSet Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Double-Clicking the QuickSet Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Right-Clicking the QuickSet Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 5 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD or DVD Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 44 45 45 4 Contents Display Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Radios (Including Wireless Networking and Bluetooth) . . . . 45 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Speaker Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Microsoft Windows Logo Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Touch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Customizing the Touch Pad and Track Stick . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Changing the Track Stick Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 6 Using the Display Adjusting Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Switching the Video Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Setting Display Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Microsoft Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 7 Using the Dell D/Bay About the Dell D/Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Removing and Installing Devices When the Computer is Turned Off . 56 Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Running 58 Using the CD or DVD Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Adjusting the Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Adjusting the Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 8 Using a Battery Battery Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Contents 5 Checking the Battery Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dell QuickSet Battery Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microsoft Windows Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Charge Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Health Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low-Battery Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 67 67 68 68 69 Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Removing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Installing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Storing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 9 Power Management Power Management Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Power Management Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Sleep Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Power Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Battery Alarms and Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Power Management Wizard . . . . . . . . . . Power Management Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hibernate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Options Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Schemes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Meter Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hibernate Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intel SpeedStep Technology Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 72 73 74 74 75 75 75 76 77 77 77 77 78 78 6 Contents 10 Using PC Cards PC Card Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 PC Card Blanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Extended PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Installing a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Removing a PC Card or Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 11 Using Smart Cards About Smart Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Installing a Smart Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 12 Traveling With Your Computer Identifying Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Packing the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Travel Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Traveling by Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 If Your Computer Is Lost or Stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 13 Passwords About Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Using a Primary Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Using an Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Using a Hard Drive Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Assigning an Asset Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Viewing Existing Asset and Service Tags . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Contents 7 Deleting an Asset Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Assigning an Owner Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Deleting an Owner Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Asset Tag Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 14 Solving Problems Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Video and Display Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 If the display is blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 If the display is difficult to read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 If only part of the display is readable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Sound and Speaker Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 If you have a problem with the integrated speaker . . . . . . . 113 If you have a problem with external speakers . . . . . . . . . . 114 Printer Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Modem and Internet Connection Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Touch Pad or Mouse Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 External Keyboard Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Unexpected Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 If you cannot save a file to a floppy drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 If you cannot play a CD, CD-RW, DVD, or DVD+RW . . . . . 123 If you cannot eject the CD, CD-RW, DVD, or DVD+RW drive tray . 124 If you hear an unfamiliar scraping or grinding sound . . . . . . 124 If the CD-RW or DVD+RW drive stops writing . . . . . . . . 124 If you have problems with a hard drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 PC Card Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 8 Contents Smart Card Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Network Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 General Program Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 A program crashes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 A program stops responding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 A solid blue screen appears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Error messages appear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 If Your Dell Computer Gets Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 If You Drop or Damage Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Resolving Other Technical Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 15 Using the Dell Diagnostics When to Use the Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Features of the Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Starting the Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 16 Cleaning Your Computer Computer, Keyboard, and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Touch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Floppy Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Optical Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 17 Reinstalling Software Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Manually Reinstalling Drivers for Windows XP . . . . . . . . 143 Using the Windows XP Device Driver Rollback . . . . . . . . 144 Manually Reinstalling Drivers for Windows 2000 . . . . . . . 144 Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities . . . . . . 145 Contents 9 Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Using Microsoft Windows System Restore . . . . . . . . . . 147 Creating a Restore Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Restoring the Computer to an Earlier Operating State . . . . . 148 Undoing the Last System Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Reinstalling Microsoft Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Before You Reinstall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Reinstalling Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Reinstalling Drivers and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Reinstalling Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Enabling Hibernate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 18 Adding and Replacing Parts Adding Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Installing a Memory Module Under the Memory Module/Modem Cover 156 Installing a Memory Module Under the Keyboard . . . . . . . 159 Adding a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Replacing the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Adding a Mini PCI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Replacing the Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Adding a Bluetooth Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 19 Using the System Setup Program Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Viewing the System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 10 Contents System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Commonly Used Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Changing the Boot Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Changing COM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Enabling the Infrared Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 20 Alert Standard Format (ASF) 21 Getting Help Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Online Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 AutoTech Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Automated Order-Status Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Technical Support Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Problems With Your Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit . . . . . . . . . 184 Before You Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 22 Specifications 23 Appendix Ergonomic Computing Habits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Regulatory Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 FCC Notices (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 IC Notice (Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Contents 11 CE Notice (European Union) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 CE Mark Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 New Zealand Telecom Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 ENERGY STAR Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Simplified Chinese Class A Warning Notice (China Only) . . . . 225 EN 55022 Compliance (Czech Republic Only) . . . . . . . . . 226 VCCI Notice (Japan Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 MIC Notice (Republic of Korea Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Polish Center for Testing and Certification Notice . . . . . . . 230 BSMI Notice (Taiwan Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 NOM Information (Mexico Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Warranty and Return Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 24 Glossary 12 Contents 1 S E C T I O N 1 F i n d i n g I n f o r m a t i o n FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\findinfo.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\findinfo.fm Safety Instructions CAUTION: For precautions on safely handling and using your computer and preventing electrostatic discharge, see the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. Documentation Updates Documentation updates are sometimes included with your computer to describe changes to your computer or software. Always read these updates before consulting any other documentation because the updates contain the latest information. Readme files, which may be installed on your hard drive or found on CDs such as the Dell Drivers and Utilities CD, provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your computer or advanced technical reference material intended for experienced users or technicians. Using Microsoft Windows Windows Help The Windows XP and Windows 2000 operating systems provide complete online instructions for using them:

In Windows XP, click the Start button and click Help and Support. For more information, see "Help and Support Center."

In Windows 2000, click the Start button and click Help. Microsoft Windows Guide For more information on using the Windows operating system, see the Microsoft Windows documentation that came with your computer. Using Devices Device Users Guides For help on using your computer's devices (such as a modem) and options you purchase separately from your computer, see the device users guide. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 14 Finding Information FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\findinfo.fm In Windows XP, click the Start button and click Help and Support. From the Help and Support window, click User and system guides. In Windows 2000, click the Start button, point to Programs, and then click Users Guides. Using the Drivers and Utilities CD The Drivers and Utilities CD contains drivers and utilities, the Dell Diagnostics, and users guides for your computer and optional devices. Dell ships your computer to you with required drivers and utilities already installedno further installation or configuration is needed. If you ever need to reinstall a driver or utility, run diagnostics tests on your computer, or access the users guides, use the Drivers and Utilities CD. See "Reinstalling Software" and "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Fixing Problems For help with fixing computer problems, see "Solving Problems" and "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Microsoft Windows Guide For more information on troubleshooting problems, see the Microsoft Windows documentation that came with your computer. Dell Support For personalized online support, driver updates, and instant answers to your questions, access the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Installing Parts For help with adding parts to your computer, see "Adding and Replacing Parts."

For detailed information on the computer parts and assemblies and how to remove and replace them, see the computer Service Manual on support.dell.com. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Finding Information 15 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\findinfo.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 16 Finding Information 2 S E C T I O N 2 A b o u t Yo u r C o m p u t e r FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\about.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\about.fm Front View 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 1 display latch 2 display 3 device status lights 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 touch pad battery/battery bay 8 9 10 track stick/touch pad buttons 4 keyboard status lights 5 power button 6 speaker 7 keyboard 11 track stick 12 microphone 13 volume control buttons 14 mute button D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 18 About Your Computer FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\about.fm D IS P L A Y L A T C H Slide the display latch to open the display. D IS P L A Y For more information about your display, see "Using the Display."

D E VI C E ST AT US L I G H T S Turns on when you turn on the computerm or blinks steadily when the computer is in standby mode. Turns on when the computer reads or writes data. NOTICE: To avoid loss of data, never turn off the computer while the light is flashing. Indicates battery charge status. Turns on when the wireless antenna is enabled. To enable or disable the

. antenna, press NOTE: The wireless features on your computer, including Bluetooth and Mini PCI Wi-Fi, are optional. The icon turns on only if you ordered a wireless option with your computer. For more information, see the documentation that came with your wireless technology. If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the light operates as D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY About Your Computer 19 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\about.fm follows:

Solid green: The battery is charging. Flashing green: The battery is almost fully charged. If the computer is running on a battery, the light operates as follows:

Off: The battery is adequately charged (or the computer is turned off). Flashing orange: The battery charge is low. Solid orange: The battery charge is critically low. KE Y B OA R D S T A T U S L IG H T S m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w The green lights located above the keyboard indicate the following:

9 A Turns on when the numeric keypad is enabled. Turns on when the uppercase letter function is enabled. Turns on when the scroll lock function is enabled. P O W E R B UT T O N Press the power button to turn on the computer or to exit a power management mode. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, turn off your computer by performing an operating system shutdown rather than by pressing the power button. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 20 About Your Computer FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\about.fm

. For information on supported keyboard shortcuts, see If the computer stops responding, press and hold the power button until the computer turns off completely (which may take several seconds). S P E A KE R To adjust the volume of the integrated speaker, press the volume control buttons or volume control keyboard shortcuts. For more information, see

"Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad."

KE Y BO A R D The keyboard includes a numeric keypad as well as the Microsoft Windows logo key

"Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad."

T O U C H P A D Touch pad and touch pad buttons provide the functionality of a mouse. See "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad" for more information. B AT T ER Y/B A T T E R Y BA Y When a battery is installed, you can use the computer without connecting the computer to an electrical outlet. See "Using a Battery."

T R A CK S T I C K/T O UC H P A D B U T T O N S Track stick and touch pad buttons provide the functionality of a mouse. See "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad" for more information. T R A CK S T I C K Track stick and track stick buttons provide the functionality of a mouse. See "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad" for more information. MI C R O PH O NE Allows you to record audio. V O L UM E C O N T R O L BU T T O N S Press these buttons to adjust the volume. MU TE B U T T O N Press this button to turn off the volume. Left View 1 2 3 4 5 6 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY About Your Computer 21 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\about.fm 1 Dell D/Bay connector 2 IEEE 1394 connector 3 audio connectors 4 audio connectors 5 infrared sensor 6 PC Card slot (plastic blank installed) D E L L D/B A Y C O NN E CT OR Connects the Dell D/Bay, which is an external media bay that accommodates an optical drive, floppy drive, or second hard drive; also connects standard USB devices IEEE 1394 C O NN E CT O R Use to attach devices supporting IEEE 1394 high-

speed transfer rates, such as some digital video cameras. A UD I O C O N NE C T O R S Attach a microphone to the connector. Attach headphones or speakers to the The connector is a stereo output connector. connector. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 22 About Your Computer FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\about.fm IN F R A R E D S E N S O R Lets you transfer files from your computer to another IrDA-compatible device without using cable connections. When you receive your computer, the sensor is disabled. You can use the system setup program to enable the sensor. For information on transferring data, see Windows Help, the Windows Help and Support Center, or the documentation that came with your IrDA-compatible device. PC C AR D S L O T Supports one PC Card, such as a modem or network adapter. The computer ships with a plastic blank installed in the slot. For more information, see "Using PC Cards."

Right View 1 2 3 4 5 1 hard drive 2 smart card slot 3 fan exhaust 4 air intake 5 security cable slot HA R D DR I V E Stores software and data. S M AR T C A RD S L OT Supports one smart card. For more information, see

"Using Smart Cards."

F A N EX H AU S T The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY About Your Computer 23 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\about.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets warm. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fan or the computer. NOTE: The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets warm. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fan or the computer. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your computer in a low-

airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. A IR IN TA KE The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your computer in a low-

airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. S E C UR I T Y C A BL E S L O T Allows you to attach a commercially available antitheft device to the computer. For more information, see the instructions included with the device. NOTICE: Before you buy an antitheft device, ensure that it will work with the security cable slot. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 24 About Your Computer FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\about.fm Back View 1 2 3 1 air intake 2 USB connector 3 serial connector 4 video connector 4 5 6 7 5 network connector (RJ-45) 6 modem connector (RJ-11)

(optional) AC Adapter connector 7 A IR IN TA KE The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your computer in a low-

airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. USB C O NN E CT O R NOTE: The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets warm. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fan or the computer. Connects USB devices, such as a mouse, keyboard, or printer. You can also connect the optional floppy drive directly to the USB connector using the optional floppy-

drive cable. S E R IA L C O NN E C T O R Connects serial devices, such as a mouse or handheld device. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY About Your Computer 25 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\about.fm V ID E O CO N NE C T O R Connects an external monitor. For more information, see

"Using the Display."

NE TWO R K C O N NE C T O R (RJ-45) NOTICE: The network connector is slightly larger than the modem connector. To avoid damaging the computer, do not plug a telephone line in to the network connector. Connects the computer to a network. The green and yellow lights next to the connector indicate activity for both wired and wireless network communications. For information on using the network adapter, see the online network-adapter documentation supplied with your computer. See "Finding Information."

MO D E M C O N NE C T O R (RJ-11) (O P T IO N A L) If you ordered the optional internal modem, connect the telephone line to the modem connector. For information on using the modem, see the online modem documentation supplied with your computer. See "Finding Information."

AC A D A P T ER C O NN EC T O R Attach an AC adapter to the computer. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 26 About Your Computer FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\about.fm The AC adapter converts AC power to the DC power required by the computer. You can connect the AC adapter with your computer turned either on or off. CAUTION: The AC adapter works with electrical outlets worldwide. However, power connectors and power strips vary among countries. Using an incompatible cable or improperly connecting the cable to the power strip or electrical outlet may cause fire or equipment damage. NOTICE: When you disconnect the AC adapter cable from the computer, grasp the connector, not the cable itself, and pull firmly but gently to avoid damaging the cable. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY About Your Computer 27 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\about.fm Bottom View 3 4 2 1 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 5 6 7 8 9 1 Bluetooth module cover 2 battery-bay latch release 3 battery 4 battery charge gauge 5 hard drive 9 air intake Service Tag 6 7 8 memory module/modem cover docking device slot B L U ET O O T H MO D U L E C O V E R Covers the compartment that contains the optional Bluetooth module. B A T T E R Y- BA Y L AT CH RE LE A S E Releases the battery. See "Removing a Battery" for instructions. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 28 About Your Computer FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\about.fm B AT T ER Y When a battery is installed, you can use the computer without connecting the computer to an electrical outlet. See "Using a Battery."

B AT T ER Y C H AR G E G A U GE Provides information on the battery charge. See

"Checking the Battery Charge."

HA R D DR I V E Stores software and data. A IR IN TA KE The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your computer in a low-

airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. SE R V IC E TA G Identifies your computer when you access Dell Support at support.dell.com or when you call Dell for customer service or technical support. ME M O R Y M O D UL E/ M O D EM CO V E R Covers the compartment that contains the memory module and optional modem. See "Adding and Replacing Parts."

D O C KI NG D EV I C E S L O T Lets you attach your computer to a docking device. See the documentation that came with your docking device for additional information. NOTE: The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets warm. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fans or the computer. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY About Your Computer 29 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\about.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 30 About Your Computer 3 S E C T I O N 3 U s i n g M i c r o s o f t W i n d o w s X P FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\xpfeat.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\xpfeat.fm NOTE: Windows XP Home Edition and Windows XP Professional offer different features and appearances. Also, options available in Windows XP Professional vary depending on whether your computer is connected to a domain. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Help and Support Center The Help and Support Center provides help with the Microsoft Windows XP operating system and also offers other support and educational tools. To access the Help and Support Center, click the Start button and click Help and Support. Switching to Classic View You can change the appearance of the Control Panel, the Start menu, and the Microsoft Windows desktop to the classic view of previous Windows operating systems. Control Panel The Control Panel presents information as task-oriented categories. If you are accustomed to performing a particular task with the icon-oriented classic Control Panel, you can switch to the classic icon view. 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Switch to Classic View or Switch to Category View in the upper-left area of the Control Panel window. Start Menu 1 Right-click the empty area on the taskbar. 2 Click Properties and click the Start Menu tab. 3 Click Classic Start Menu and click OK. Window and Button Appearance 1 Right-click anywhere on the main desktop screen and click Properties. 2 Click the Appearance tab. 3 From the Windows and buttons drop-down menu, click Windows Classic style. 4 To customize color, font, and other classic desktop options, click Advanced. 5 When you have completed your appearance selections, click OK. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 32 Using Microsof t Windows XP FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\xpfeat.fm Desktop Cleanup Wizard By default, the Desktop Cleanup Wizard moves desktop icons that are not frequently used from your desktop to a designated folder 7 days after you first start your computer and every 60 days after that. The appearance of the Start menu changes as desktop icons are moved. To turn off the Desktop Cleanup Wizard:

1 Right-click an empty spot on the desktop and click Properties. 2 Click the Desktop tab and click Customize Desktop. 3 Click Run Desktop Cleanup Wizard every 60 days to remove the check mark. 4 Click OK. To run the Desktop Cleanup Wizard at any time:

1 Right-click an empty spot on the desktop and click Properties. 2 Click the Desktop tab and click Customize Desktop. 3 Click Clean Desktop Now. 4 When the Desktop Cleanup Wizard screen appears, click Next. 5 To leave an icon on the desktop, click the icon name to remove the check mark, and then click Next. 6 Click Finish to remove the shortcuts and close the wizard. Transferring Information to a New Computer The Microsoft Windows XP operating system provides a Files and Settings Transfer wizard to move data from the source computer to the new computer. You can move data such as:

E-mails Toolbar settings Window sizes Internet bookmarks D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using Microsof t Windows XP 33 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\xpfeat.fm You can transfer the data to the new computer over a network or serial connection, or you can store it on a removable medium, such as a writable CD or floppy disk. To prepare the new computer for the file transfer:

1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories System Tools, and then click Files and Settings Transfer Wizard. 2 When the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard welcome screen appears, click Next. 3 On the Which computer is this? screen, click New Computer and click Next. 4 On the Do you have a Windows XP CD? screen, click I will use the wizard from the Windows XP CD and click Next. 5 When the Now go to your old computer screen appears, go to your old or source computer. Do not click Next at this time. To copy data from the old computer:

1 On the old computer, insert the Windows XP Operating System CD. 2 On the Welcome to Microsoft Windows XP screen, click Perform additional tasks. 3 Under What do you want to do?, click Transfer files and settings. 4 On the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard welcome screen, click Next. 5 On the Which computer is this? screen, click Old Computer and click Next. 6 On the Select a transfer method screen, click the transfer method you prefer. 7 On the What do you want to transfer? screen, select the items you want to transfer and click Next. After the information has been copied, the Completing the Collection Phase screen appears. 8 Click Finish. To transfer data to the new computer:

1 On the Now go to your old computer screen on the new computer, click Next. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 34 Using Microsof t Windows XP FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\xpfeat.fm 2 On the Where are the files and settings? screen, select the method you chose for transferring your settings and files and click Next. The wizard reads the collected files and settings and applies them to your new computer. When all of the settings and files have been applied, the Finished screen appears. 3 Click Finished and restart the new computer. User Accounts and Fast User Switching Adding User Accounts After the Microsoft Windows XP operating system is installed, the administrator or a user with administrator rights can create additional user accounts. 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 In the Control Panel window, click User Accounts. 3 Under Pick a task, click Create a new account. 4 Under Name the new account, type the name of the new user and click Next. 5 Under Pick an account type, click one of the following options:

Computer administrator You can change all computer settings. Limited You can change only your own personal settings, such as your password. You cannot install programs or use the Internet. 6 Click Create Account. Fast User Switching Fast User Switching allows multiple users to access one computer without requiring the previous user to log off. 1 Click the Start button and click Log Off. 2 In the Log Off Windows window, click Switch User. NOTE: Fast User Switching is unavailable if your computer is running Windows XP Professional and is a member of a computer domain, or if your computer has less than 128 MB of memory. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using Microsof t Windows XP 35 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\xpfeat.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: Insert the cable until it clicks into place, and then gently pull it to ensure that it is secure. NOTE: Do not use a network cable with a telephone wall jack. NOTE: Selecting the connection method This computer connects directly to the Internet enables the integrated firewall provided with Windows XP. When you use Fast User Switching, programs that previous users were using remain running in the background, so your computer might run slower. Also, multimedia programs, such as games and DVD software, might not work with Fast User Switching. For more information, see the Windows Help and Support Center. Setting Up a Home and Office Network Connecting to a Network Adapter Before you connect your computer to a network, the computer must have a network adapter installed and a functional network cable connected to it. To connect a network cable:

1 Connect the network cable to the network adapter connector on the back of your computer. 2 Connect the other end of the functional network cable to a network connection device, such as a network wall jack. Network Setup Wizard The Microsoft Windows XP operating system provides a Network Setup Wizard to guide you through the process of sharing files, printers, or an Internet connection between computers in a home or small office. 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories Communications, and then click Network Setup Wizard. 2 On the welcome screen, click Next. 3 Click Checklist for creating a network. 4 Complete the checklist and required preparations. 5 Return to the Network Setup Wizard and follow the instructions on the screen. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 36 Using Microsof t Windows XP FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\xpfeat.fm Internet Connection Firewall The Internet Connection Firewall provides basic protection from unauthorized access to the computer while the computer is connected to the Internet. The firewall is automatically enabled when you run the Network Setup Wizard. When the firewall is enabled for a network connection, the firewall icon appears with a red background in the Network Connections portion of the Control Panel. Note that enabling the Internet Connection Firewall does not reduce the need for virus-checking software. For more information, see the Help and Support Center. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using Microsof t Windows XP 37 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\xpfeat.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 38 Using Microsof t Windows XP 4 S E C T I O N 4 D e l l Q u i c k S e t Fe a t u r e s Horizontal Rule FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\quickset.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\quickset.fm Dell QuickSet provides you with easy access to configuration settings for power management schemes, battery resources, icon and font size, display brightness, volume, and network activity. If QuickSet is installed on your computer, it runs from the icon located in the taskbar. If QuickSet is not installed, you can download the program from support.dell.com. QuickSet functions differently when you click, double-click, or right-click the icon. Clicking the QuickSet Icon icon to perform the following tasks:

Click the Adjust power management settings using the Power Management Wizard. Adjust the size of icons and toolbars. Select a power scheme that you set in the Power Management Wizard. Turn presentation mode on or off. Double-Clicking the QuickSet Icon Double-click the Power Management Wizard. icon to adjust power management settings using the Right-Clicking the QuickSet Icon Right-click the icon to perform the following tasks:

Enable or disable the Brightness Meter on the screen. Enable or disable the Volume Meter on the screen. Turn wireless activity on or off. View Dell QuickSet Help. View the version and copyright date of the QuickSet program installed on your computer. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 40 Dell QuickSet Features FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\quickset.fm For more information about QuickSet, right-click the taskbar and click Help. icon in the D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Dell QuickSet Features 41 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\quickset.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 42 Dell QuickSet Features 5 S E C T I O N 5 U s i n g t h e Ke y b o a r d a n d To u c h Pa d FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\keyboard.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\keyboard.fm Numeric Keypad m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w The numeric keypad functions like the numeric keypad on an external keyboard. Each key on the keypad has multiple functions. The keypad numbers and symbols are marked in blue on the right of the keypad keys. To type a number or symbol, hold down and press the desired key. To enable the keypad, press the keypad is active. The 9 light indicates that To disable the keypad, press again. Keyboard Shortcuts System Functions Opens the Task Manager window Enables and disables the numeric keypad D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 44 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\keyboard.fm Battery CD or DVD Tray Display Functions Enables and disables the scroll lock Displays the Dell QuickSet Battery Meter (if QuickSet is installed) Ejects the tray out of the drive (if Dell QuickSet is installed) Switches the video image to the next display option. The options include the integrated display, an external monitor, and both displays simultaneously. Increases brightness on the integrated display only

(not on an external monitor). Decreases brightness on the integrated display only

(not on an external monitor). Radios (Including Wireless Networking and Bluetooth) Enables and disables radios, including wireless networking and Bluetooth (both optional) Power Management Activates a power management mode. You can reprogram this keyboard shortcut to activate a different power management mode using the Advanced tab in the Power Options Properties window. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad 45 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\keyboard.fm Speaker Functions Increases the volume of the integrated speaker and external speakers, if attached Decreases the volume of the integrated speaker and external speakers, if attached Enables and disables the integrated speaker and external speakers, if attached Microsoft Windows Logo Key Functions m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Minimizes all open windows Maximizes all windows Runs Windows Explorer Opens the Run dialog box Opens the Search Results dialog box Opens the Search Results-Computer dialog box (if the computer is connected to a network) Opens the System Properties dialog box To adjust keyboard operation, such as the character repeat rate:

In Windows XP, open the Control Panel, click Printers and Other Hardware, and click Keyboard. In Windows 2000, open the Control Panel and double-click the Keyboard icon. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 46 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\keyboard.fm Touch Pad The touch pad detects the pressure and movement of your finger to allow you to move the cursor on the display. Use the touch pad and touch pad buttons as you would use a mouse. 1 4 2 3 1 track stick 2 track stick buttons 3 touch pad 4 touch pad buttons To move the cursor, lightly slide your finger over the touch pad. To select an object, lightly tap once on the surface of the touch pad or use your thumb to press the left touch-pad button. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad 47 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\keyboard.fm To select and move (or drag) an object, position the cursor on the object and tap down-up-down on the touch pad. On the second down motion, leave your finger on the touch pad and move the selected object by sliding your finger over the surface. To double-click an object, position the cursor on the object and tap twice on the touch pad or use your thumb to press the left touch-pad button twice. You can also use the track stick to move the cursor. Press the track stick left, right, up, or down to change the direction of the cursor on the display. Use the track stick and track stick buttons as you would use a mouse. Customizing the Touch Pad and Track Stick You can use the Mouse Properties window to disable the touch pad and track stick or adjust their settings. 1 In Windows XP, open the Control Panel, click Printers and Other Hardware, and click Mouse. In Windows 2000, open the Control Panel and double-click the Mouse icon. 2 In the Mouse Properties window:

Click the Device Select tab to disable the touch pad and track stick. Click the Pointer tab to adjust touch pad and track stick settings. 3 Click OK to save the settings and close the window. Changing the Track Stick Cap You can replace your track stick cap if it wears down from prolonged use or if you prefer a different color. You can purchase additional caps by visiting the Dell website at www.dell.com. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 48 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\keyboard.fm 1 Pull the cap off the track stick. 2 Align the new cap over the square track-stick post and gently press the cap down onto the post. NOTICE: The track stick can damage the display if it is not properly seated on the post. 3 Test the track stick to ensure that the cap is seated properly. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad 49 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\keyboard.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 50 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad 6 S E C T I O N 6 U s i n g t h e D i s p l a y FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\display.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\display.fm Adjusting Brightness When the Dell computer is running on battery power, you can conserve power by setting the brightness to the lowest comfortable setting using the appropriate keyboard shortcuts for the display. If Dell QuickSet is installed, the QuickSet Brightness Meter shows the current brightness setting for the display. Right-click the taskbar to enable or disable the Brightness Meter on the screen. icon in the 1 1 Brightness Meter NOTE: By default, the Brightness Meter appears in the lower-right corner of the display. You can click and drag the meter to a new location, and the meter subsequently always appears at the new location. NOTE: Brightness keyboard shortcuts only affect the display on your portable computer, not monitors that you attach to your portable computer or docking device. If your computer is connected to an external monitor and you try to change the brightness level, the Brightness Meter appears, but the brightness level on the monitor does not change. You can enable or disable the Brightness Meter from the QuickSet taskbar menu. When the meter is enabled, press the following keys to adjust brightness:

Press to increase brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor). Press to decrease brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor). For more information about QuickSet, right-click the taskbar and click Help. icon in the D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 52 Using the Display FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\display.fm Switching the Video Image When you start the computer with an external device (such as an external monitor or projector) attached and turned on, the image may appear on either the display or the external device. Press device only, or the display and the external device simultaneously. to switch the video image to the display only, the external Setting Display Resolution To display a program at a specific resolution, both the video controller and the display must support the program, and the necessary video drivers must be installed. Before you change any of the default display settings, make a note of the default settings for future reference. If you choose a resolution or color palette that is higher than the display supports, the settings adjust automatically to the closest possible setting. Microsoft Windows XP 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Under Pick a category, click Appearance and Themes. 3 Under Pick a task..., click the area you want to change, or under or pick a Control Panel icon, click Display. 4 Try different settings for Color quality and Screen resolution. Windows 2000 1 Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2 Double-click the Display icon and click the Settings tab. 3 Try different settings for Colors and Screen area. NOTE: Use only the Dell-

installed video drivers, which are designed to offer the best performance with your Dell-installed operating system. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using the Display 53 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\display.fm NOTE: As the resolution increases, icons and text appear smaller on the screen. If the video resolution setting is higher than that supported by the display, the computer enters pan mode. In pan mode, the screen cannot be completely displayed. For example, the taskbar that usually appears at the bottom of the desktop may no longer be visible. To view the rest of the screen, use the touch pad or track stick to pan up, down, left, and right. NOTICE: You can damage an external monitor by using an unsupported refresh rate. Before adjusting the refresh rate on an external monitor, see the monitor user's guide. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 54 Using the Display 7 S E C T I O N 7 U s i n g t h e D e l l D / B a y FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\bay.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\bay.fm About the Dell D/Bay You can install Dell Latitude D-Family devices such as a floppy drive or an optical drive. Removing and Installing Devices When the Computer is Turned Off NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. 1 Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. 2 Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the D/Bay. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 56 Using the Dell D/Bay FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\bay.fm 3 Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. 4 Connect the D/Bay cable to the Dell D/Bay connector on the computer.. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using the Dell D/Bay 57 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\bay.fm Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Running Microsoft Windows XP 1 Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the taskbar. 2 Click the device you want to eject. NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. 3 Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 4 Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the D/Bay. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 58 Using the Dell D/Bay FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\bay.fm 5 Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. Windows XP automatically recognizes the new device. 6 If necessary, enter your password to unlock your drive. Windows 2000 1 Click the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon on the taskbar. 2 Click the device you want to eject and click Stop. 3 Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using the Dell D/Bay 59 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\bay.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 4 Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the D/Bay. 5 Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. 6 When the operating system recognizes the new device, click Close. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 60 Using the Dell D/Bay FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\bay.fm Using the CD or DVD Tray NOTICE: Do not press down on the drive tray when opening or closing it. Keep the tray closed when you are not using the drive. NOTICE: Do not move the computer while playing CDs or DVDs. 1 Press the eject button on the front of the drive. 2 Pull the tray out. 3 Place the disc, label side up, in the center of the tray. 4 Snap the disc onto the spindle. 1 1 eject button 5 Push the tray back into the drive. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using the Dell D/Bay 61 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\bay.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: If you use a module bay that shipped with another Latitude D-

Family computer, you need to install the drivers and software necessary to play DVDs or write data. For more information, see the Drivers and Utilities CD. NOTE: If the speaker is muted, you do not hear the CD or DVD playing. You can play a DVD on your computer if the computer shipped with a DVD drive or a CD-RW/DVD combo drive. You can write data to a blank CD on your computer if the computer shipped with a CD-RW or CD-RW/DVD combo drive. For more information on playing CDs or watching movies, click Help on the CD player or DVD player (if available). Adjusting the Volume 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories Entertainment (or Multimedia), and then click Volume Control. 2 In the Volume Control window, click and drag the bar in the Volume Control column and slide the bar up or down to increase or decrease the volume. For more information on volume control options, click Help in the Volume Control window. The Volume Meter displays the current volume level, including mute, on your computer. Either right-click the icon in the taskbar or press the volume control buttons to enable or disable the Volume Meter on the screen (if Dell QuickSet is installed). 1 3 2 1 volume icon 2 Volume Meter 3 mute icon D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 62 Using the Dell D/Bay FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\bay.fm NOTE: By default, the Volume Meter appears in the lower-right corner of the display. You can click and drag the meter to a new location, and the meter subsequently always appears at the new location. When the meter is enabled, adjust the volume using the volume control buttons or by pressing the following keys:

Press to increase volume. Press to decrease volume. Press to mute volume. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the taskbar and click Help. icon in the Adjusting the Picture If an error message notifies you that the current resolution and color depth are using too much memory and preventing DVD playback, adjust the display properties. Windows XP 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Under Pick a category, click Appearance and Themes. 3 Under Pick a task..., click Change the screen resolution. 4 In the Display Properties window, click and drag the bar in Screen resolution to change the setting to 1024 by 768 pixels. 5 Under Color quality, click the drop-down menu and click Medium (16 bit). 6 Click OK. Windows 2000 1 Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2 Double-click the Display icon and click the Settings tab. 3 Click and drag the bar in Screen area to change the setting to 1024 by 768 pixels. 4 Under Color quality, click the drop-down menu and click High Color

(16 bit). D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using the Dell D/Bay 63 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\bay.fm 5 Click Apply. 6 Click OK to save the settings and close the window. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 64 Using the Dell D/Bay 8 S E C T I O N 8 U s i n g a B a t t e r y FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\battery.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\battery.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: Batteries for portable computers are covered only during the initial one-year period of the limited warranty for your computer. For more information about the Dell warranty for your computer, see the System Information Guide. NOTE: It is recommended that you connect your computer to an electrical outlet when writing to a CD. Battery Performance Use a battery to power the computer when it is not connected to an electrical outlet. One battery is supplied as standard equipment in the battery bay. Battery operating time varies depending on operating conditions. Operating time is significantly reduced when you perform operations including, but not limited to, the following:

Using optical drives, especially DVD and CD-RW drives Using wireless communications devices, PC Cards, or USB devices Using high-brightness display settings, 3D screen savers, or other power-intensive programs such as 3D games Running the computer in maximum performance mode You can check the battery charge before you insert the battery into the computer. You can also set power management options to alert you when the battery charge is low. CAUTION: Using an incompatible battery may increase the risk of fire or explosion. Replace the battery only with a compatible battery purchased from Dell. The lithium-ion battery is designed to work with your Dell computer. Do not use batteries from other computers with your computer. CAUTION: Do not dispose of batteries with household waste. When your battery no longer holds a charge, call your local waste disposal or environmental agency for advice on disposing of a lithium-ion battery. See the battery disposal instructions in your System Information Guide. CAUTION: Misuse of the battery may increase the risk of fire or chemical burn. Do not puncture, incinerate, disassemble, or expose the battery to temperatures above 65C (149F). Keep the battery away from children. Handle damaged or leaking batteries with extreme care. Damaged batteries may leak and cause personal injury or equipment damage. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 66 Using a Batter y FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\battery.fm Checking the Battery Charge The Microsoft Windows power meter window and charge gauge and health gauge, and the low-battery warning provide information on the battery charge. icon, the battery Dell QuickSet Battery Meter If Dell QuickSet is installed, press Battery Meter. to display the QuickSet The Battery Meter screen displays status, charge level, and charge completion time for the battery in your computer. In addition, when your computer is connected to a docking device (docked), the Battery Meter screen includes a Dock Battery tab, which displays the charge level and current status of the docking device battery. The following icons appear in the Battery Meter screen:

The computer or docking device is running on battery power. The battery is discharging or idle. The computer or docking device is connected to an electrical outlet and running on AC power. The battery is charging. The computer or docking device is connected to an electrical outlet and running on AC power. The battery is discharging, idle, or charging. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the taskbar, and click Help. icon in the Microsoft Windows Power Meter The Windows power meter indicates the remaining battery charge. To check the power meter, double-click the information on the Power Meter tab, see "Power Management."

icon on the taskbar. For more NOTE: You can use your docking device to charge a computer battery. However, a battery in a docking device does not power the docking device or computer. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using a Batter y 67 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\battery.fm If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, a icon appears. Charge Gauge Press the status button on the battery charge gauge to illuminate the charge-level lights. Each light represents approximately 20 percent of the total battery charge. For example, if the battery has 80 percent of its charge remaining, four of the lights are on. If no lights appear, the battery has no charge. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Health Gauge The battery operating time is largely determined by the number of times it is charged. After hundreds of charge and discharge cycles, batteries lose some charge capacity, or battery health. To check the battery health, press and hold the status button on the battery charge gauge for at least 3 seconds. If no lights appear, the battery is in good condition, and more than 80 percent of its original charge capacity remains. Each light represents incremental degradation. If five lights appear, less than 60 percent of the charge capacity remains, and you should consider replacing the battery. See

"Specifications" for more information about the battery operating time. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 68 Using a Batter y FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\battery.fm Low-Battery Warning NOTICE: To avoid losing or corrupting data, save your work immediately after a low-battery warning. Then connect the computer to an electrical outlet, or install a second battery in the module bay. If the battery runs completely out of power, standby mode begins automatically. A pop-up window warns you when the battery charge is approximately 90 percent depleted. For more information on low-battery alarms, see "Power Management."

Charging the Battery When you connect the computer to an electrical outlet or install a battery while the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the computer checks the battery charge and temperature. If necessary, the AC adapter then charges the battery and maintains the battery charge. If the battery is warm from being used in your computer or being in a warm environment, the battery may not charge when you connect the computer to an electrical outlet. The battery is too warm to start charging if the light flashes alternately green and orange. Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet and allow the computer and the battery to cool to room temperature. Then connect the computer to an electrical outlet to continue charging the battery. For more information on resolving problems with a battery, see "Power Problems."

Removing a Battery CAUTION: Before performing these procedures, disconnect the modem from the telephone wall jack. NOTICE: If you choose to replace the battery with the computer in standby mode, you have up to 90 seconds to complete the battery replacement before the computer shuts down and loses any unsaved data. 1 Ensure that the computer is turned off, suspended in a power management mode, or connected to an electrical outlet. NOTE: Charge time is longer with the computer turned on. You can leave the battery in the computer as long as you like. The battery internal circuitry prevents the battery from overcharging. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using a Batter y 69 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\battery.fm 2 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 3 Slide and hold the battery-bay latch release on the bottom of the computer, and then remove the battery from the bay. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Installing a Battery Slide the battery into the bay until the latch release clicks. Storing a Battery Remove the battery when you store your computer for an extended period of time. A battery discharges during prolonged storage. After a long storage period, recharge the battery fully before you use it. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 70 Using a Batter y 9 S E C T I O N 9 Po w e r M a n a g e m e n t FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\power.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\power.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: See "Using a Battery" for more information on conserving battery power. NOTE: The power management options described in this section are for Microsoft Windows operating systems. Power management options may vary, depending on which operating system is installed. NOTE: The Power Management Wizard is not available if you have restricted access rights. NOTE: On the What is Power Management?

screen, you can select Do not show this page again. When you select this option, the Welcome screen also does not appear again. Power Management Tips Connect the computer to an electrical outlet when possible because battery life is largely determined by the number of times the battery is charged. Place the computer in standby mode or hibernate mode when you leave the computer unattended for long periods of time. To exit a power management mode, press the power button. Power Management Wizard If Dell QuickSet is installed, click or double-click the Power Management Wizard. icon to open the The first two screens of the wizardWelcome and What is Power Management?describe and define various power management options. Use the following screens of the Power Management Wizard to set various power management options, including sleep modes, power schemes, and low battery-charge alarms. Setting Sleep Modes The screen defines standby and hibernate modes. From the screen you can:

Set standby-mode password options. Enable or disable hibernate mode. Select how the computer will respond when you close the display:

Choose no action. Enter standby mode. Enter hibernate mode. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 72 Power Management FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\power.fm Select how the computer will respond when you press the power button:

Choose no action. Enter standby mode. Enter hibernate mode. Shut down the Microsoft Windows operating system and turn off the computer. Prompt a user for an action (Ask me what to do). Select how the computer will respond when you press

Choose no action. Enter standby mode. Enter hibernate mode. Shut down the operating system and turn off the computer. Prompt a user for an action (Ask me what to do). Selecting a Power Scheme The screen allows you to select, create, and edit power scheme settings. In addition, you can delete power schemes that you create, but you cannot delete Dell QuickSet predefined power schemes (Maximum Battery, Maximum Performance, Presentation, and Network Disabled). NOTE: When your computer is running on battery power, the Network Disabled power scheme disables your internal network and wireless activity. When your computer is connected to an electrical outlet or docking device, the Network Disabled power scheme disables only your wireless activity. You must set the power scheme through QuickSet

(not Microsoft Windows) for Network Disabled to work. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Power Management 73 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\power.fm NOTE: QuickSet automatically adds the word (QuickSet) after the names of power schemes created using QuickSet. All QuickSet power schemes are displayed in a drop-down menu near the center of the screen. The power settings for each scheme in the menu are listed below the menu. The power settings are listed separately for when the computer is running on battery or connected to an electrical outlet. NOTE: Brightness shortcut keys only affect the display on your portable computer, not monitors that you attach to your portable computer or docking device. If your computer is in CRT only mode and you try to change the brightness level, the Brightness Meter appears, but the brightness level on the monitor does not change. The Power Management Wizard also allows you to associate the display brightness level with a power scheme. You must enable brightness-level power schemes through QuickSet in order to set the brightness level. The display brightness, internal network-card activity, and wireless activity features are not available through the Microsoft Windows Control Panel power schemes. In order to make use of these value-added features, you must set them through QuickSet power schemes. Setting Battery Alarms and Actions The screen allows you to enable the low-battery and critical-battery alarms and to change settings for the alarms. For example, you can set the low-

battery alarm to 20% to remind you to save work and switch to AC power, and you can set the critical-battery alarm to 10% to enter hibernate mode. From the screen, you can:

Select whether the alarm will notify you by sound or text. Adjust the power level at which you want the alarm to notify you. Select how the computer will respond when the alarm notifies you:

Choose no action. Enter standby mode. Enter hibernate mode. Shut down Windows and turn off the computer. Completing the Power Management Wizard The screen summarizes the QuickSet power scheme, sleep mode, and battery alarm settings for your computer. Review the settings you have selected and click Finish. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the taskbar and click Help. icon in the D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 74 Power Management FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\power.fm Power Management Modes Standby Mode Standby mode conserves power by turning off the display and the hard drive after a predetermined period of inactivity (a time-out). When the computer exits standby mode, it returns to the same operating state it was in before entering standby mode. NOTICE: If your computer loses AC and battery power while in standby mode, it may lose data. To enter standby mode:

In the Microsoft Windows XP operating system, click the Start button, click Turn off computer, and then click Stand by. In Windows 2000, click the Start button, click Shutdown, click Standby, and then click OK. or Depending on how you set the power management options on the Advanced tab in the Power Options Properties window, use one of the following methods:

Close the display. Press the power button. Press

. To exit standby mode, press the power button or open the display depending on how you set the options on the Advanced tab. You cannot make the computer exit standby mode by pressing a key or touching the touch pad or track stick. Hibernate Mode Hibernate mode conserves power by copying system data to a reserved area on the hard drive and then completely turning off the computer. When the computer exits hibernate mode, it returns to the same operating state it was in before entering hibernate mode. NOTICE: You cannot remove devices or undock your computer while your computer is in hibernate mode. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Power Management 75 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\power.fm Your computer enters hibernate mode if the battery charge level becomes critically low. To manually enter hibernate mode:

In Windows XP, click the Start button, click Turn off computer, press and hold

, and then click Hibernate. In Windows 2000, if hibernate support is enabled, click the Start button, click Shutdown, click Hibernate, and then click OK. or Depending on how you set the power management options on the Advanced tab in the Power Options Properties window, use one of the following methods to enter hibernate mode:

Close the display. Press the power button. Press

. NOTE: Some PC Cards may not operate correctly after the computer exits hibernate mode. Remove and reinsert the card, or simply restart (reboot) your computer. To exit hibernate mode, press the power button. The computer may take a short time to exit hibernate mode. You cannot make the computer exit hibernate mode by pressing a key or touching the touch pad or track stick. For more information on hibernate mode, see the documentation that came with your operating system. Power Options Properties The Power Options Properties window helps you to manage power consumption and monitor battery charge status. To access the Microsoft Windows Power Options Properties window:

In Windows XP, click the Start button Control Panel Performance and Maintenance Power Options. In Windows 2000, open the Control Panel, and then double-click the Power Options icon. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 76 Power Management FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\power.fm Power Schemes Tab The Power schemes drop-down menu displays the selected preset power scheme. Keep the default Portable/Laptop power scheme to maximize battery power. Windows XP controls the performance level of the processor depending on the power scheme you select. You do not need to make any further adjustments to set the performance level. For information on setting processor performance for other operating systems, see "Intel SpeedStep Technology Tab."

Each preset power scheme has different time-out settings for entering standby mode, turning off the display, and turning off the hard drive. For more information on power management options, see the Help and Support Center (Windows Help in Windows 2000). Alarms Tab The Low battery alarm and Critical battery alarm settings alert you with a message when the battery charge falls below a certain percentage. When you receive your computer, the Low battery alarm and Critical battery alarm check boxes are selected. It is recommended that you continue to use these settings. See "Using a Battery" for more information on low-battery warnings. Power Meter Tab The Power Meter tab displays the current power source and amount of battery charge remaining. Advanced Tab The Advanced tab allows you to:

NOTE: To enable audible alarms, click each Alarm Action button and select Sound alarm. Set power icon and standby mode password options. Program the following functions (depending on your operating Prompt a user for an action (Ask me what to do). system):

Enter standby mode. Enter hibernate mode. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Power Management 77 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\power.fm Shut down Windows and turn off the computer. Choose no action (None or Do nothing). To program these functions, click an option from the corresponding drop-

down menu and then click OK. Hibernate Tab The Hibernate tab lets you enable hibernate mode by clicking the Enable hibernate support check box. Intel SpeedStep Technology Tab NOTE: Windows XP controls the performance level of the processor depending on the power scheme that you select. See "Power Schemes Tab."

NOTE: To use Intel SpeedStep technology, a Windows operating system must be running. Depending on your operating system and microprocessor, the Power Options Properties window includes the Intel SpeedStep technology tab. The Intel SpeedStep technology allows you to set the performance level of the processor according to whether the computer is running on battery or AC power. Depending on your operating system, typical options are:

Automatic The processor runs at its highest possible speed

(Maximum Performance mode) when the computer is running on AC power. When the computer is running on battery power, the processor runs in Battery Optimized mode. Maximum Performance The processor is capable of running at its highest possible speed even if the computer is running on battery power. Battery Optimized Performance Processor speed is optimized for battery power even if the computer is connected to an electrical outlet. To change additional Intel SpeedStep options:

1 Click Advanced and then click one of the following options:

Disable Intel SpeedStep technology control Remove flag icon (from the notification area) Disable audio notification when performance changes D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 78 Power Management FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\power.fm 2 Click OK to accept any changes, and then click OK to close the Intel SpeedStep technology window. You can also change the Intel SpeedStep settings by right-clicking the flag icon in the notification area. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Power Management 79 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\power.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 80 Power Management 10 S E C T I O N 1 0 U s i n g P C C a r d s FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\pccards.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\pccards.fm PC Card Types See "Specifications" for information on supported PC Cards. NOTE: A PC Card is not a bootable device. The PC Card slot has one connector that supports a single Type I or Type II card. The PC Card slot supports CardBus technology and extended PC Cards. "Type" of card refers to its thickness, not its functionality. PC Card Blanks Your computer shipped with a plastic blank installed in the PC Card slot. Blanks protect unused slots from dust and other particles. Save the blank for use when no PC Card is installed in the slot; blanks from other computers may not fit your computer. To remove the blank, see "Removing a PC Card or Blank."

Extended PC Cards An extended PC Card (for example, a wireless network adapter) is longer than a standard PC Card and extends outside the computer. Follow these precautions when using extended PC Cards:

Protect the exposed end of an installed card. Striking the end of the card can damage the system board. Always remove an extended PC Card before you pack the computer in its carrying case. Installing a PC Card You can install a PC Card in the computer while the computer is running. The computer automatically detects the card. PC Cards are generally marked with a symbol (such as a triangle or an arrow) to indicate which end to insert into the slot. The cards are keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If card orientation is not clear, see the documentation that came with the card. To install a PC Card:

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 82 Using PC Cards FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\pccards.fm 1 Hold the card with its orientation symbol pointing into the slot and the top side of the card facing up. The latch may need to be in the "in"

position before you insert the card. 2 Slide the card into the slot until the card is completely seated in its connector. If you encounter too much resistance, do not force the card. Check the card orientation and try again. The computer recognizes most PC Cards and automatically loads the appropriate device driver. If the configuration program tells you to load the manufacturer's drivers, use the floppy disk or CD that came with the PC Card. Removing a PC Card or Blank NOTICE: Use the PC Card configuration utility on the taskbar to select a card and stop it from functioning before you remove it from the computer. If you do not stop the card in the configuration utility, you could lose data. Do not attempt to eject a card by pulling its cable, if one is attached. 1 Press the eject button. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using PC Cards 83 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\pccards.fm 2 Press the eject button a second time. 3 Gently remove the card. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 84 Using PC Cards FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\pccards.fm Save a blank to use when no PC Card is installed in a slot. Blanks protect unused slots from dust and other particles. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using PC Cards 85 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\pccards.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 86 Using PC Cards 11 S E C T I O N 1 1 U s i n g S m a r t C a r d s FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\smart.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\smart.fm About Smart Cards Smart cards are small portable credit-card shaped devices with internal integrated circuits. Smart cards come in two varieties: memory and microprocessor. Memory smart cards store data but cannot process information. Microprocessor smart cards can add, delete, and manipulate information in the card memory. The top surface of the microprocessor smart card contains an embedded microprocessor located under the gold contact pad. Microprocessor smart cards can be used for programs such as:

Secure log-on and authentication of users to PCs and networks Secure business-to-business (B2B) and business-to-consumer (B2C) e-

commerce Storage of digital certificates, credentials, and passwords Encryption of sensitive data The combination of the small size and integrated circuits make smart cards valuable tools for security, data storage, and special programs. Using smart cards can improve system security by combining something a user has (the smart card) with something only the user should know (a PIN) to provide more secure user-authentication than passwords alone. Installing a Smart Card You can install a smart card in the computer while the computer is running. The computer automatically detects the card. To install a smart card:

1 Remove the smart card blank from the smart card slot. 2 Hold the card face up with the gold contact pad on the top surface and pointing toward the smart card slot. NOTE: To use a smart card for secure PC log-on and authentication, B2B and B2C e-commerce, local file encryption, and storage of digital certificates, additional software is required. To use a smart card for secure network log-on and authentication, file and e-

mail encryption, and Virtual Private Network

(VPN) log-on, you need to enable Microsoft Windows PKI support. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 88 Using Smart Cards FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\smart.fm 1 2 1 gold contact pad 2 smart card (top) 3 Slide the smart card into the smart card slot until the card is completely seated in its connector. The smart card will protrude from the slot. The smart card slot is located below the PC Card slot. If you encounter too much resistance, do not force the card. Check the card orientation and try again. 1 2 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using Smart Cards 89 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\smart.fm 1 smart card slot 2 smart card m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 90 Using Smart Cards 12 S E C T I O N 1 2 Tr a v e l i n g W i t h Yo u r C o m p u t e r FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\travel.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\travel.fm Identifying Your Computer Attach a name tag or business card to the computer, or use a permanent marker or stencil to write a unique identifying mark (such as your driver's license number) on the computer. Write down your Service Tag and store it in a safe place away from the computer or carrying case. Use the Service Tag if you need to report a loss or theft to law enforcement officials and to Dell. Assign an owner tag, which appears in the system log-on screen and cannot be changed or deleted if the primary or administrator passwords are set. Contact your credit card company and ask if it offers coded identification tags. Packing the Computer Remove any external devices attached to the computer and store them in a safe place. Remove any cables attached to installed PC Cards, and remove any extended PC Cards. To make the computer as light as possible, replace any devices installed in the module bay with the Dell TravelLite module. Fully charge the main battery and any spare batteries you plan to carry with you. Shut down the computer. Disconnect the AC adapter. NOTICE: When the display is closed, extraneous items on the keyboard or palm rest could damage the display. Remove any extraneous items, such as paper clips, pens, and paper, from the keyboard and palm rest and close the display. Use the optional Dell carrying case to pack the computer and its accessories together safely. Avoid packing the computer with items such as shaving cream, colognes, perfumes, or food. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 92 Traveling With Your Computer FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\travel.fm Protect the computer, the batteries, and the hard drive from hazards such as extreme temperatures and overexposure to sunlight, dirt, dust, or liquids. NOTICE: If the computer has been exposed to extreme temperatures, allow it to acclimate to room temperature for 1 hour before turning it on. Pack the computer so that it does not slide around in the trunk of your car or in an overhead storage compartment. NOTICE: Do not check the computer as baggage. Travel Tips NOTICE: Do not move the computer while using the optical drive. Doing so can result in loss of data. Consider disabling wireless activity on your computer to maximize battery operating time. To disable wireless activity, press

. Consider changing your power management options to maximize battery operating time. If you are traveling internationally, carry proof of ownershipor of your right to use the computer if it is company-ownedto speed your passage through customs. Investigate the customs regulations of the countries you plan to visit, and consider acquiring an international carnet (also known as a merchandise passport) from your government. Ensure that you know which electrical outlets are used in the countries you will visit, and have appropriate power adapters. Check with your credit card company for information about the kinds of emergency travel assistance it offers to users of portable computers. Traveling by Air Ensure that you have a charged battery available in case you are asked to turn on the computer. NOTICE: Do not walk the computer through a metal detector. Send the computer through an X-ray machine or have it hand inspected. Before you use the computer on an airplane, verify that such usage is permitted. Some airlines forbid the use of electronic devices during the flight. All airlines forbid the use of electronic devices during takeoff and landing. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Traveling With Your Computer 93 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\travel.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: If you know where the computer was lost or stolen, call a law enforcement agency in that area. If you do not know, call a law enforcement agency where you live. If Your Computer Is Lost or Stolen Call a law enforcement agency to report the lost or stolen computer. Include the Service Tag in your description of the computer. Ask that a case number be assigned and write down the number, along with the name, address, and telephone number of the law enforcement agency. If possible, obtain the name of the investigating officer. If the computer belongs to a company, notify the security office of the company. Contact Dell customer service to report the missing computer. Provide the computer Service Tag, the case number, and the name, address, and telephone number of the law enforcement agency to which you reported the missing computer. If possible, give the name of the investigating officer. The Dell customer service representative will log your report under the computer Service Tag and flag the computer as missing or stolen. If someone calls Dell for technical assistance and gives your Service Tag, the computer is identified automatically as missing or stolen. The representative will attempt to get the phone number and address of the caller. Dell will then contact the law enforcement agency to which you made the report of the missing computer. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 94 Traveling With Your Computer 13 S E C T I O N 1 3 Pa s s w o r d s FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\password.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\password.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: Passwords are disabled when you receive your computer. NOTE: Only hard drives purchased from Dell for use with the Dell Latitude D-Family computers support hard drive passwords. About Passwords A primary password prevents unauthorized access to the computer at start-

up. You can use an administrator password instead of the primary password. A hard drive password helps prevent unauthorized access to data on the drive, even when the drive is installed in another computer. NOTICE: Passwords provide a high level of security for data in your computer or hard drive. However, they are not foolproof. If you require more security, obtain and use additional forms of protection, such as data encryption programs or PC Cards with encryption features. If you forget any of your passwords, contact your system administrator or call Dell. For your protection, Dell technical support staff will ask you for proof of your identity to ensure that only an authorized person can use the computer. The following table identifies types and features of passwords available on your computer. Type of Password Primary Administrator Features Protects the computer from unauthorized access Gives system administrators or service technicians access to computers for repair or reconfiguration Allows you to restrict access to the system setup program in the same way a system password restricts access to the computer Hard drive Can be used instead of the primary password Helps protect the data on your hard drive or external hard drive (if one is being used) from unauthorized access. Using a Primary Password The primary password allows you to protect the computer from unauthorized access. After assigning a primary password, you must enter it each time you turn on your computer. The following message appears each time you turn on the computer:

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 96 Passwords FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\password.fm Please type in the primary or administrator password and press

. To continue, enter your password (maximum eight characters). If you do not enter a password within 2 minutes, the computer returns to its previous state. If you have assigned an administrator password, you can use it instead of the primary password. The computer does not specifically prompt you for the administrator password. NOTICE: If you disable the administrator password, the primary password is also disabled. Using an Administrator Password The administrator password is designed to give system administrators or service technicians access to computers for repair or reconfiguration. The administrators or technicians can assign identical administrator passwords to groups of computers, allowing you to assign the primary password. When you set an administrator password, the Configure Setup option becomes available in the system setup program. The Configure Setup option allows you to restrict access to the system setup program in the same way a primary password restricts access to the computer. The administrator password can be used instead of the primary password. Whenever you are prompted to enter the primary password, you can enter the administrator password. If you forget the primary password and do not have an administrator password assigned, or if you have both a primary and an administrator password assigned but forget them both, contact your system administrator or contact Dell. NOTICE: If you disable the administrator password, the primary password is also disabled. NOTE: The administrator password provides access to the computer, but it does not provide access to the hard drive when a hard drive password is assigned. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Passwords 97 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\password.fm Using a Hard Drive Password The hard drive password helps protect the data on your hard drive from unauthorized access. You can also assign a password for an external hard drive (if one is being used) that can be the same as or different from the password for the primary hard drive. After assigning a hard drive password, you must enter it each time you turn on the computer and each time you resume normal operation from standby mode. If the hard drive password is enabled, the following message appears each time you turn on the computer:

Please type in the hard-disk drive password and press

. To continue, enter your password (maximum eight characters). Press to return the computer to its previous state. If you do not enter a password within 2 minutes, the computer returns to its previous state. If you enter the wrong password, the following message appears:

Invalid password

[Press Enter to retry]

If the correct password is not entered in three attempts, the computer tries to boot from the next device in the Boot Order list in the system setup program. If there are no other enabled devices in the Boot Order list, the computer returns to the state it was in when you turned it on. If the hard drive password, the external hard drive password, and the primary password are the same, you are prompted only for the primary password. If the hard drive password is different from the primary password, you are prompted for both. Two different passwords provide greater security. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 98 Passwords FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\password.fm NOTE: The administrator password provides access to the computer, but it does not provide access to a hard drive that is protected by a hard drive password. Assigning an Asset Tag The Asset Tag utility allows you to enter an asset tag that you or your company assigns to the computer. After you enter an asset tag, the tag appears in the system setup screens. You can also use the Asset Tag utility to enter an owner tag that appears in the system log-on screen and with the primary password prompt. Use your Drivers and Utilities CD to create a bootable floppy disk, and then use the bootable floppy disk to assign an asset tag:

1 Save and close any open files and exit any open programs. 2 Connect the Dell D/Bay with a floppy drive to the powered USB connector on the computer, or connect a USB floppy drive to the USB connector on the back of the computer. 3 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD. 4 When the Welcome Dell System Owner window appears, click Next. 5 Select MS-DOS from the Operating System drop-down menu. 6 Click Dell Portables Asset Tag, click Extract, and then click Setup. 7 Insert a blank floppy disk and press

. Follow the instructions on the screen to create a bootable floppy disk. 8 Boot the computer using the bootable floppy disk:

a b c Restart the computer. Press immediately after the DELL logo appears. If the operating system logo appears, wait until you see the Windows desktop, and then shut down the computer and try again. Press the arrow keys to select Diskette Drive and press 9 Type asset and a space followed by the new asset tag, and press

. For example, type the following command line and press asset 1234$ABCD&

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Passwords 99 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\password.fm NOTE: An asset tag can have up to 10 characters;

any combination of characters excluding spaces is valid. 10 When the computer prompts you to verify the asset tag, type y. The computer displays the new or modified asset tag and the Service Tag. 11 Restart your computer to exit the Asset Tag utility. Viewing Existing Asset and Service Tags 1 Boot the computer using the bootable floppy disk you created in

"Assigning an Asset Tag."

2 Type asset and press

. Deleting an Asset Tag m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 1 Boot the computer using the bootable floppy disk you created in

"Assigning an Asset Tag."

2 Type asset /d and press

. 3 When the computer prompts you to delete the asset tag, type y. Assigning an Owner Tag An owner tag can have up to 48 characters; any combination of letters, numbers, and spaces is valid. 1 Boot the computer using the bootable floppy disk you created in

"Assigning an Asset Tag."

2 Type asset /o and a space followed by the new owner tag, and press

. For example, type the following command line and press asset /o ABC Company

3 When the computer prompts you to verify the owner tag, type y. The computer displays the new owner tag. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 100 Passwords FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\password.fm NOTE: For security, you cannot set, change, or delete the owner tag if the primary or administrator passwords are set. Deleting an Owner Tag 1 Boot the computer using the bootable floppy disk you created in

"Assigning an Asset Tag."

2 Type asset /o /d and press

. 3 When the computer prompts you to delete the owner tag, type y. Asset Tag Options To use one of the asset tag options (see the following table):

1 Boot the computer using the bootable floppy disk you created in

"Assigning an Asset Tag."

2 Type asset and a space followed by the option, and then press

. Asset Tag Option

/d

/o owner tag

/o /d

Description Deletes the asset tag Specifies a new owner tag Deletes the owner tag Displays the Asset Tag utility help screen D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Passwords 101 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\password.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 102 Passwords 14 S E C T I O N 1 4 S o l v i n g P r o b l e m s FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm Power Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. C HE C K T H E P O W E R L IG H T When the power light is lit or blinking, the computer has power. If the power light is blinking, the computer is in standby modepress the power button to exit standby mode. If the light is off, press the power button to turn on the computer or to exit hibernate mode. C HA R G E T H E B A T T E R Y The battery charge may be depleted. 1 Reinstall the battery. 2 Use the AC adapter to connect the computer to an electrical outlet. 3 Turn on the computer. C HE C K T H E B A T T E R Y S T A T US LI GHT If the battery status light flashes orange or is a steady orange the battery charge is low or depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. If the battery status light flashes green and orange, the battery is too warm to charge. Shut down the computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet, and then let the battery and computer cool to room temperature. If the battery status light rapidly flashes orange, the battery may be defective. Contact Dell. TE S T THE EL E CT RI C A L OU T LE T Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. C HE C K T H E AC A D A P T E R Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on. C O NN EC T T H E C O MP U T E R D I R EC T L Y T O A N E L EC T R I CA L O U T L E T Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and the extension cable to verify that the computer turns on. E LI MI NATE P O S S I BL E I NT E R FE R E NC E Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. A D J US T T H E P O W E R P R O P E RT IE S See "Power Management."

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 104 Solving Problems FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm RE S E A T THE ME M O R Y M O D UL ES If the computer power light turns on but the display remains blank, reseat the memory modules. Error Messages If the message is not listed, see the documentation for the operating system or the program that was running at the time the message appeared. A UX I LI AR Y D E V IC E FAIL URE The touch pad, track stick, or external mouse may be faulty. For an external mouse, check the cable connection. Enable the Pointing Device option in the system setup program. If the problem persists, contact Dell. B AD C O MM A ND O R FI LE NA M E Ensure that you have spelled the command correctly, put spaces in the proper place, and used the correct pathname. C AC H E D I S A B L E D D U E T O F A I LU RE The primary cache internal to the microprocessor has failed. Contact Dell. CD D R I VE C O NT R O L L ER F A I LU R E The CD drive does not respond to commands from the computer. See "Drive Problems."

D A T A E R R OR The floppy or hard drive cannot read the data. See "Drive Problems."

D E CR E A S I NG AV A I L A B L E M E MO R Y One or more memory modules may be faulty or improperly seated. Reseat the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. D IS K C: F A I LE D IN ITI A LI ZA TI ON The hard drive failed initialization. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

F L O P P Y D R I VE 0 S E E K F A I LU R E The system configuration information may not match the hardware configuration. Run the Diskette tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Solving Problems 105 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm D IS KETTE RE A D FAIL URE The floppy disk may be defective. If the drive access light turns on, try a different disk. See "Drive Problems."

D IS KETTE S U B S Y S T E M R E S E T F A I L E D The floppy drive controller may be faulty. Run the Diskette tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

D IS KETTE W R I T E- P R O T E CT E D Because the floppy disk is write-protected, the operation cannot be completed. Slide the write-protect notch. D R IV E NO T R EA D Y The operation requires a floppy disk in the drive or a hard drive in the bay before it can continue. Insert a floppy disk, or push the floppy disk all the way into the drive until the eject button pops out. Or, install a hard drive in the hard drive bay. E R RO R R EA D I NG PCMCIA CA R D The computer cannot identify the PC Card. Reinsert the card or try another PC Card. E X T EN D E D M E MO R Y S I Z E H A S CH A NG E D The amount of memory recorded in NVRAM does not match the memory installed in the computer. Restart the computer. If the error appears again, contact Dell. G A T E A20 F A I LU RE A memory module may be loose. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. G E NE R AL F A IL UR E The operating system is unable to carry out the command. The message is usually followed by specific informationfor example, Printer out of paper. Take the appropriate action. H A R D- DI S K D R I V E C O NF IG U RA T I O N E R RO R The computer cannot identify the drive type. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 106 Solving Problems FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm H A R D-D I S K D R I V E C O NT R O L L E R F A I LU RE 0 The hard drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in

"Using the Dell Diagnostics."

H A R D-D I S K D R I V E F A I LU RE The hard drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

H A R D-D I S K D R I V E R E AD F A I LU RE The hard drive may be defective. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

IN S E RT B O O T A B L E M E D IA The operating system is trying to boot to a nonbootable floppy disk or CD. Insert a bootable floppy disk or CD. IN VA L ID C O NF IG U RA T I O N I N F O R MA T I O N- P L E A S E R UN SY S T E M S E T UP PR O G R A M The system configuration information does not match the hardware configuration. The message is most likely to occur after a memory module is installed. Correct the appropriate options in the system setup program. See "Using the System Setup Program."

KE Y BO A R D CL O CK LI NE FAIL URE For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

KE Y BO A R D C O N T R O L L E R FAIL URE For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or the mouse during the boot routine. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in

"Using the Dell Diagnostics."

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Solving Problems 107 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm KE Y BO A R D D AT A LI NE F A I LU R E For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

KE Y BO A R D S T U C K K E Y F A I LU R E For external keyboards or keypads, check the cable connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or keys during the boot routine. Run the Stuck Key test as described in

"Using the Dell Diagnostics."

ME MO R Y A D D R ES S LIN E F A IL UR E A T A D D RE S S, R E A D V A L U E EX P E CT I N G V A L U E A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. ME MO R Y A L L O CA T I O N E R RO R The software you are attempting to run is conflicting with the operating system, another program, or a utility. Turn off the computer, wait 30 seconds, and then restart it. Try to run the program again. If the error message still appears, see the software documentation. ME MO R Y D A T A L IN E F A I LU RE A T A D D R E S S, R E A D V A L U E EX P E C T IN G V A L UE A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. ME MO R Y D O U BL E W O R D L O G I C FAIL URE AT A D D R ES S, R E A D V A L U E EX P E CT I N G V A L U E A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. ME MO R Y O D D/ EV E N L OG I C F AI LU R E A T A D DR E S S, R E AD V A L U E EX P E CT I N G V A L U E A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. ME MO R Y W R I T E/R E A D F AI LU R E A T A DD R E S S, R E AD V A L UE EX P E CT I N G V A L U E A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. N O BO O T D E V IC E AV A I L A B L E The computer cannot find the floppy disk or hard drive. If the floppy drive is your boot device, ensure that a bootable floppy disk is in the drive. If the hard drive is your boot device, ensure that the drive is installed, properly seated, and partitioned as a boot device. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 108 Solving Problems FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm N O BO O T S E C T O R O N H A R D D R IV E The operating system may be corrupted. Contact Dell. N O T I M E R T I C K IN T E R RU P T A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

N O N- S YS T E M D I S K O R D IS K ER R O R A floppy disk is in the floppy drive. Remove the floppy disk and restart the computer. N O T A B O O T DI S K E T T E The operating system is trying to boot to a nonbootable floppy disk. Insert a bootable floppy disk. O P ER A T I NG S Y S T E M NO T F O U ND Contact Dell. O P T IO N A L ROM B A D C H EC K S U M The optional ROM apparently failed. Contact Dell. A R E Q UI R E D .DLL FI LE W A S NO T FOUN D The program that you are trying to open is missing an essential file. Remove and then reinstall the program. Microsoft Windows XP 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Add or Remove Programs. 3 Select the program you want to remove. 4 Click Remove or Change/Remove and follow the prompts on the screen. 5 See the program documentation for installation instructions. Windows 2000 1 Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2 Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon. 3 Select the program that you want to remove. 4 Click Change or Remove Programs. 5 See the program documentation for installation instructions. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Solving Problems 109 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm SE C T O R NO T F O U ND The operating system cannot locate a sector on the floppy or hard drive. You may have a defective sector or corrupted FAT on the floppy disk or hard drive. Run the Windows error-checking utility to check the file structure on the floppy disk or hard drive. See the Windows Help and Support Center (Help in Windows 2000) for instructions. If a large number of sectors are defective, back up the data (if possible), and then reformat the floppy disk or hard drive. SE E K E R R O R The operating system cannot find a specific track on the floppy disk or hard drive. If the error is on the floppy disk, try another floppy disk. SH U T D OW N F A I LU R E A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

T IM E- O F- D A Y CL O C K L O S T P O W E R System configuration settings are corrupted. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, try to restore the data by entering the system setup program. Then immediately exit the program. See "Using the System Setup Program." If the message reappears, contact Dell. T IM E- O F- D A Y CL O C K S T O P P E D The reserve battery that supports the system configuration settings may require recharging. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, contact Dell. T IM E- O F- D A Y NO T S E T- P L E A S E R U N T H E S Y S T E M S E T UP P R O GR A M The time or date stored in the system setup program does not match the system clock. Correct the settings for the Date and Time options. See

"Using the System Setup Program."

T IM E R C H IP C OU NT ER 2 F A I LE D A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

U N EX PE C T E D IN TE RR U P T I N P R O T E C T ED M OD E The keyboard controller may be malfunctioning, or a memory module may be loose. Run the System Memory tests and the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 110 Solving Problems FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm X:\ IS N O T AC C E S S I B L E. T H E D E V IC E IS N OT R E A D Y Insert a disk into the drive and try again. WA R NI NG: B AT T ER Y I S CR I T I CA L LY L O W The battery is running out of charge. Replace the battery, or connect the computer to an electrical outlet. Otherwise, activate hibernate mode or turn off the computer. Video and Display Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If the display is blank C HE C K T H E B A T T E R Y If you are using a battery to power your computer, the battery charge may be depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet using the AC adapter, and turn on the computer. TE S T T HE EL E CT R I C AL O U T L E T Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. C HE C K T H E AC A D A P T E R Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on. C O NN EC T T H E C O MP U T E R D I RE C T L Y T O A N E L E C T R I CA L O U T L E T Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and the extension cable to verify that the computer turns on. A D JU S T T H E P O W E R P R O P E RT IE S Search for the keyword standby in Windows Help or the Windows Help and Support Center. SW IT C H T H E V I D EO I MA G E If your computer is attached to an external monitor, press to switch the video image to the display. NOTE: If you are using a program that requires a higher resolution than your computer supports, it is recommended that you attach an external monitor to your computer. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Solving Problems 111 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm If the display is difficult to read A D J US T T H E B R IG H T NE S S See "Adjusting Brightness" for instructions on adjusting the brightness. MO V E THE S U B W O O F E R A W A Y F R O M T H E CO M P UT E R O R MO N ITO R If your external speaker system includes a subwoofer, ensure that the subwoofer is at least 60 cm (2 ft) away from the computer or external monitor. E LI MI NATE P O S S I BL E I NT E R FE R E NC E Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. RO T A T E T H E C O MP U T E R T O F A C E A D IF F E R EN T D IR E C T IO N Eliminate sunlight glare, which can cause poor picture quality. A D J US T T H E W IN D O W S DI S P L AY S ET T IN G S Windows XP 1 Click the Start button and then click Control Panel. 2 Click Appearance and Themes. 3 Click the area you want to change or click the Display icon. 4 Try different settings for Color quality and Screen resolution. Windows 2000 1 Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2 Double-click the Display icon and click the Settings tab. 3 Try different settings for Colors, Screen area, and Advanced Settings. R UN T H E V I D EO D I AG N O S T I CS T E S T S If no error message appears and you still have a display problem, but the display is not completely blank, run the Video device group in the Dell Diagnostics. Then contact Dell. SE E "E R R O R ME S S A G E S" If an error message appears, see "Error Messages."

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 112 Solving Problems FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm If only part of the display is readable C O NN EC T A N EX T E R NA L MO N IT O R 1 Shut down your computer and connect an external monitor to the computer. 2 Turn on the computer and the monitor and adjust the monitor brightness and contrast controls. If the external monitor works, the computer display or video controller may be defective. Contact Dell. Sound and Speaker Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If you have a problem with the integrated speaker A D JU S T T H E WI N D OW S V O L UM E C O NT R O L Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Adjust the volume, bass, or treble controls to eliminate distortion. A D JU S T T H E V O L U ME USI NG KE Y B OA R D S H O R T C U T S See "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad." Press integrated speaker. to disable (mute) or reenable the RE I NS T AL L THE SOUN D ( AU D IO) D R IV E R See "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities."

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Solving Problems 113 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: The volume control in some MP3 players overrides the Windows volume setting. If you have been listening to MP3 songs, make sure that you did not turn the player volume down or off. FO R WI ND O W S 2000 O NL Y, E N S U RE T H A T D IG I T A L A UD I O F O R T H E CD D R I VE IS E N AB L ED 1 Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2 Double-click the System icon. 3 Click the Hardware tab. 4 Click Device Manager. 5 Double-click DVD/CD-ROM drives. 6 Double-click the name of the drive. 7 On the drive Properties screen, click the Properties tab. 8 Click the box near the bottom of the screen to enable digital audio for your CD or DVD drive. If you have a problem with external speakers C HE C K T H E S P E A K E R CA B LE C O NN EC T I O NS See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. TE S T THE EL E CT RI C A L OU T LE T Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. E NSU R E T H A T T HE S P EA K E RS A R E T U R NE D O N See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. A D J US T T H E W IN D O W S VO L UM E C O NT R O L Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Adjust the volume, bass, or treble controls to eliminate distortion. TE S T THE S P E AK E R S Plug the speaker audio cable into the connector on the computer. Ensure that the headphone volume control is turned up. Play a music CD. R UN T H E S PE A K ER S E L F-T ES T Some speaker systems have a self-test button on the subwoofer. See the speaker documentation for self-test instructions. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 114 Solving Problems FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm E LI MI NATE P OS S IB L E I NT E R FE R E NC E Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, or halogen lamps to check for interference. RE I NS T AL L THE SOUN D ( AU D IO) D R IV E R See "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities."

R U N T H E MI S C. PCI D E VI C E S D I A G NO S T I C T ES T See "Using the Dell Diagnostics." If the tests complete successfully, the controller is functioning properly. If the problem persists, or if the tests do not complete successfully, contact Dell. FO R WI ND O W S 2000 O NL Y, E N S UR E T H A T D IG I T A L A UD I O F OR T H E CD D R I VE IS E N AB L ED 1 Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2 Double-click the System icon. 3 Click the Hardware tab. 4 Click Device Manager. 5 Double-click DVD/CD-ROM drives. 6 Double-click the name of the drive. 7 On the drive Properties screen, click the Properties tab. 8 Click the box near the bottom of the screen to enable digital audio for your CD or DVD drive. Printer Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. C HE C K T H E P R IN T E R C A B L E C O N NE C T I ON S Ensure that the printer cable is properly connected to the computer. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Solving Problems 115 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm C HE C K T H E P R IN T E R C A B L E 1 Shut down the computer and turn off the printer. 2 Swap the printer cable with a cable that you know is working. 3 Turn on the printer and computer, and try again to print. 4 If you print successfully, contact Dell for assistance in obtaining a new printer cable. TE S T THE EL E CT RI C A L OU T LE T Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. E NSU R E T H A T T HE P R I NT E R IS T U R N E D ON See the documentation supplied with the printer. VE R IF Y T H A T WI ND O W S R E C O GN I Z E S T HE P R I NT E R Windows XP 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware. 3 Click View installed printers or fax printers. If the printer model is listed, right-click the printer icon. 4 Click Properties and click the Ports tab. Ensure that the Print to the following port(s): setting is LPT1 (Printer Port). Windows 2000 1 Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Printers. If the printer model is listed, right-click the printer icon. 2 Click Properties and click the Ports tab. 3 Ensure that the Print to the following port: option is set to USB. RE I NS T AL L THE P R IN T E R D R IV E R See "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities."

C HE C K T H E P R IN T E R Run the printer self-test. If the test does not complete successfully, the printer is probably defective. Contact the printer manufacturer. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 116 Solving Problems FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm Modem and Internet Connection Problems NOTICE: Connect the modem to an analog telephone wall jack only. Connecting the modem to a digital telephone network may damage the modem. NOTICE: Modem and network connectors look similar. Do not plug a telephone line into the network connector. Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. C HE C K T H E T E L E P H O N E W AL L J AC K Disconnect the telephone line from the modem and connect it to a telephone. Listen for a dial tone. Ensure that you have touchtone telephone service. Try connecting the modem to a different telephone wall jack. Slow connection speeds can be caused by telephone noise as well as by telephone line or network conditions. Contact your telephone company or network administrator for more information. C O NN EC T T H E M O DE M D I R E CT L Y T O THE T E L E P H O N E W A L L J A C K If you have other telephone devices sharing the line, such as an answering machine, fax machine, surge protector, or line splitter, then bypass them and use the telephone line to connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack. C HE C K T H E C O NN E CT IO N Verify that the telephone line is connected to the modem. C HE C K T H E T E L E P H O N E L IN E Try using a different telephone line. If you are using a line that is 3 m (10 ft) or more in length, try a shorter one. IR R E GU L A R D I A L TONE If you have voice mail service, you might hear an irregular dial tone when you have messages. Contact your telephone company for instructions on restoring a dial tone. NOTE: If you can connect to your Internet service provider (ISP), your modem is functioning properly. If you are sure that your modem is working properly and you still experience problems, contact your ISP. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Solving Problems 117 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm TUR N O F F CA L L W A I T I N G ( C AT CH- P HO N E) See your telephone directory for instructions on deactivating this feature. Then adjust the dial-up networking connection properties. Windows XP 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware, click Phone and Modem Options, click the Dialing Rules tab, and then click Edit.... 3 In the Edit Location window, ensure that To disable call waiting, dial: is checked, and then select the proper code as listed in your telephone directory. 4 Click Apply and click OK. 5 Close the Phone and Modems Options window. 6 Close the Control Panel window. Windows 2000 1 Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2 Click Phone and Modem Options. 3 Click the Dialing Rules tab and click Edit. 4 Ensure that To disable call waiting, dial: is checked, and then select the proper code as listed in your telephone directory. 5 Click Apply and click OK. 6 Close the Phone and Modem Options window. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 118 Solving Problems FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm VE RI F Y T H A T THE MO D E M I S CO M MU N IC A T IN G W IT H W IN D O W S Windows XP 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware and click Phone and Modem Options. 3 Click the Modems tab. 4 Click the COM port for your modem. 5 Click Properties, click the Diagnostics tab, and then click Query Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows. If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly. Windows 2000 1 Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2 Double-click Phone and Modem Options. If multiple entries for the same modem or modems are listed but not installed, delete the entries, restart the computer, and repeat steps 1 and 2. 3 Click the Diagnostics tab. 4 Click the COM port for your modem. 5 Click Query Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows. If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly. Touch Pad or Mouse Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. C HE C K T H E T O U CH PA D S E T T I N G S Windows XP 1 Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Printers and Other Hardware. 2 Click Mouse. 3 Try adjusting the settings. Windows 2000 1 Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2 Double-click the Mouse icon. 3 Try adjusting the settings. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Solving Problems 119 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm C HE C K T H E M O US E C AB L E Shut down the computer. Disconnect the mouse cable, check it for damage, and firmly reconnect the cable. If you are using a mouse extension cable, disconnect it and connect the mouse directly to the computer. TO V E R IF Y T H A T T H E P R O B L E M I S W I T H T H E M O US E, C HE C K T H E T O U C H P A D 1 Shut down the computer. 2 Disconnect the mouse. 3 Turn on the computer. 4 At the Windows desktop, use the touch pad to move the cursor around, select an icon, and open it. If the touch pad operates correctly, the mouse may be defective. C HE C K T H E S Y S T E M S E T U P P R O G R AM S E T T I N G S Verify that the system setup program lists the correct device for the pointing device option. (The computer automatically recognizes a USB mouse without making any setting adjustments.) TE S T THE MO U S E C O N T RO L L E R To test the mouse controller (which affects pointer movement) and the operation of the touch pad or mouse buttons, run the Mouse test in the Pointing Devices test group in the Dell Diagnostics. RE I NS T AL L THE T O U C H P A D D RI V E R See "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities."

External Keyboard Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 120 Solving Problems FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm NOTE: Use the integrated keyboard when working in MS-DOS mode or when running the Dell Diagnostics or the system setup program. When you attach an external keyboard, the integrated keyboard remains fully functional. C HE C K T H E K EY B O AR D C AB L E Shut down the computer. Disconnect the keyboard cable and check it for damage, and firmly reconnect the cable. If you are using a keyboard extension cable, disconnect it and connect the keyboard directly to the computer. C HE C K T H E EX T E R NA L KE Y B OA R D 1 Shut down the computer, wait 1 minute, and turn it on again. 2 Verify that the numbers, capitals, and scroll lock lights on the keyboard blink during the boot routine. 3 From the Windows desktop, click the Start button, point to Programs, point to Accessories, and click Notepad. 4 Type some characters on the external keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If you cannot verify these steps, you may have a defective external keyboard. TO V E R IF Y T H A T T H E P R O BL E M IS W I T H T H E EX T E R N AL K E YB O A RD, C HE C K T H E I NT E G R A T ED K EY B O AR D 1 Shut down the computer. 2 Disconnect the external keyboard. 3 Turn on the computer. 4 From the Windows desktop, click the Start button, point to Programs, point to Accessories, and click Notepad. 5 Type some characters on the external keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If the characters appear now but did not with the external keyboard, you may have a defective external keyboard. R U N T H E K E YB O A RD D IA G N O S T I CS T E S T S Run the PC-AT Compatible Keyboards tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If the tests indicate a defective external keyboard, contact Dell. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Solving Problems 121 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm Unexpected Characters D IS AB L E T H E N UM E RI C K E YP A D Press to disable the numeric keypad if numbers are displayed instead of letters. Verify that the numbers lock light is not lit. Drive Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If you cannot save a file to a floppy drive E NSU R E T H A T A N EX T E R N AL F L O P P Y D R IV E I S C O NN E CT E D T O THE C O MP U T E R Install the floppy drive in the Dell D/Bay or use the optional USB cable to connect the floppy drive to the computer. E NSU R E T H A T W IN D O W S R EC O G NI Z E S T H E D R IV E In Windows XP, click the Start button and click My Computer. In other operating systems, double-click My Computer. If the drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. Insert a bootable disk and restart the computer. E NSU R E T H A T T HE D I S K I S NO T W R I T E-P R O T E C T E D You cannot save data to a write-protected disk. TR Y A N O T HE R F L O P P Y D I S K Insert another disk to eliminate the possibility that the original disk is defective. RE I NS T AL L THE D R IV E 1 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2 Remove the drive from the Dell D/Bay. 3 Reinstall the drive. 4 Turn on the computer. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 122 Solving Problems FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm C HE C K T H E D/BA Y C A B L E Shut down the computer. Disconnect the D/Bay cable from the computer, and firmly reconnect the cable. C L E A N THE D R IV E See "Cleaning Your Computer" for instructions. C HE C K T H E D R IV E F O R E R R O R S If a drive error message appears, see "Error Messages" for an explanation. Run the Diskette tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

If you cannot play a CD, CD-RW, DVD, or DVD+RW High-speed CD drive vibration is normal and may cause noise. The noise does not indicate a defect with the drive or the CD. E NSU R E T H A T W IN D O W S R EC O G NI Z E S T H E D R IV E In Windows XP, click the Start button and click My Computer. In other operating systems, double-click My Computer. If the drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. Insert a bootable disk and restart the computer. TR Y A N O T HE R D I S C Insert another disc to eliminate the possibility that the original disc is defective. A D JU S T T H E WI N D OW S V O L UM E C O NT R O L Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. RE I NS T AL L THE D R IV E 1 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2 Remove the drive. See "Using the Dell D/Bay" for instructions. 3 Reinstall the drive. 4 Turn on the computer. NOTE: Because of different worldwide file types, not all DVD titles work in all DVD drives. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Solving Problems 123 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm C L E A N THE D R IV E OR D IS C See "Cleaning Your Computer" for instructions. C HE C K T H E D R IV E F O R E R R O R S If a drive error message appears, see "Error Messages" for an explanation. Run the IDE Drives tests as described in the Dell Diagnostics. If you cannot eject the CD, CD-RW, DVD, or DVD+RW drive tray 1 Ensure that the computer is shut down. 2 Straighten a paper clip and insert one end into the eject hole at the front of the drive; push firmly until the tray is partially ejected. 3 Gently pull out the tray until it stops. If you hear an unfamiliar scraping or grinding sound Ensure that the sound is not caused by the program that is running. Ensure that the disk or disc is inserted properly. If the CD-RW or DVD+RW drive stops writing D IS AB L E S T A N D BY O R HI B E R NA TE M O D E I N WI N D OW S B E F O R E WR IT IN G T O A CD-RW Search for the keyword standby or hibernate in Windows Help or the Windows Help and Support Center. C HA N GE THE WRIT E S P E E D T O A S LO W E R R A T E See the help files for your CD or DVD creation software. E X IT A L L O T H ER O P EN P RO G R A MS Exiting all other open programs before writing to the CD-RW or DVD+RW may alleviate the problem. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 124 Solving Problems FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm If you have problems with a hard drive A L L O W T H E C O MP U T E R T O C O OL B E F O R E T U R N I N G I T ON A warm hard drive may prevent the operating system from starting. Try allowing the computer to return to room temperature before turning it on. C HE C K T H E D R IV E F O R E R R O R S Run the Windows error-checking tool:

1 In Windows XP, click the Start button and click My Computer. In Windows 2000, double-click My Computer. 2 Right-click the drive letter (local disk) that you want to scan for errors, and then click Properties. 3 Click the Tools tab. 4 Under Error-checking, click Check Now. 5 Click Start. Run the IDE Drives tests as described in the Dell Diagnostics. PC Card Problems C HE C K T H E PC C A RD Ensure that the PC Card is properly inserted into the connector. E NSU R E T H A T T H E C A R D I S R E CO G N IZ E D B Y WI ND O W S Double-

click the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon in the Windows taskbar. Ensure that the card is listed. R U N T H E PC C A R D D I A GN O S T I C S T ES T See the documentation that came with the PC Card for instructions if a diagnostics test was provided with the card. IF Y O U HA V E P R O B L E MS W I T H A D EL L- P R O VI D E D PC C A R D Contact Dell. IF Y O U HA V E P R O B L E MS W I T H A PC C AR D NO T P R O VI D E D B Y D E L L Contact the PC Card manufacturer. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Solving Problems 125 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm Smart Card Problems C HE C K T H E S M A RT C A R D Ensure that the smart card is properly inserted into the smart card slot. E NSU R E T H A T T HE S MA R T CA R D IS R E C OG N IZ ED B Y WI ND O W S Double-click the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon in the Windows taskbar. Ensure that the smart card is listed. IF Y O U HA V E P R O B L E MS W I T H A D E L L- P R O V ID E D S MA R T CA R D Contact Dell. IF Y O U HA V E P R O B L E MS W I T H A S M AR T C A RD NO T P R O V ID E D B Y D E L L Contact the smart card manufacturer. Network Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. C HE C K T H E N ET W O RK CA B LE C O NN EC T O R Ensure that the network cable connector is firmly connected to the connector on the computer and the network wall jack. C HE C K T H E N ET W O RK LI GH TS O N T H E NE TW OR K C O N NE C T O R Green indicates that the network connection is active. If the status light is not green, try replacing the network cable. Amber indicates that the network adapter driver is loaded and the adapter is detecting activity. RE S T AR T T H E C O MP U T E R Try to log on to the network again. C O NT A C T Y O U R N ET W OR K A D M IN IS T R AT OR Verify that your network settings are correct and that the network is functioning. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 126 Solving Problems FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm General Program Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. A program crashes SE E THE S O F T W A R E DO C U ME N T AT IO N Many software manufacturers maintain websites with information that may help you solve the problem. Ensure that you properly installed and configured the program. Reinstall the program if necessary. NOTE: Software usually includes installation instructions in its documentation or on a floppy disk or CD. A program stops responding E ND THE P RO G R A M 1 Simultaneously press 2 Click the Applications tab, and then select the program that is no longer

. responding. 3 Click End Task. A solid blue screen appears TUR N T H E C O M P UT E R O F F If the computer does not respond to a keystroke or a proper shutdown, press the power button until the computer turns off. Press the power button again to restart the computer. Windows XP The computer restarts. Windows 2000 The solid blue screen appears because you were not able to perform a proper Windows shutdown. ScanDisk automatically runs during the start-up process. Follow the instructions on the screen. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Solving Problems 127 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm Error messages appear RE V I EW "Error Messages" Look up the message and take the appropriate action. See the software documentation. C O NF I R M T H A T T H E P R O B L E M I S S O F T W A R E- RE L AT ED Run the System Board Devices tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If all tests in the device group run successfully, the problem may be software-related. See the software documentation. If Your Dell Computer Gets Wet CAUTION: Perform this procedure only after you are certain that it is safe to do so. If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, Dell recommends that you turn off AC power at the circuit breaker before attempting to remove the power cables from the electrical outlet. Use the utmost caution when removing wet cables from a live power source. 1 Shut down the computer, disconnect the AC adapter from the computer, and then disconnect the AC adapter from the electrical outlet. 2 Turn off any attached external devices, and disconnect them from their power sources and then from the computer. 3 Ground yourself by touching one of the metal connectors on the back of the computer. 4 Remove any installed PC Cards and put them in a safe place to dry. 5 Remove the battery. 6 Wipe off the battery and put it in a safe place to dry. 7 Remove the hard drive. 8 Remove the memory modules. 9 Open the display and place the computer right-side up across two books or similar props to let air circulate all around it. Let the computer dry for at least 24 hours in a dry area at room temperature. NOTICE: Do not use artificial means, such as a hair dryer or a fan, to speed the drying process. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 128 Solving Problems FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm CAUTION: To help prevent electrical shock, verify that the computer is thoroughly dry before continuing with the rest of this procedure. 10 Ground yourself by touching one of the metal connectors on the back of the computer. 11 Replace the memory modules, the memory module cover, and the screws. 12 Replace the hard drive. 13 Connect the external module bay, and replace any PC Cards you removed. 14 Replace the battery. 15 Turn on the computer and verify that it is working properly. If the computer does not start, or if you cannot identify the damaged components, contact Dell. If You Drop or Damage Your Computer 1 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2 Disconnect the AC adapter from the computer and from the electrical outlet. 3 Turn off any attached external devices, and disconnect them from their power sources and then from the computer. 4 Remove and reinstall the battery. 5 Turn on the computer. If the computer does not start, or if you cannot identify the damaged components, contact Dell. NOTE: See your System Information Guide for information on your warranty coverage. NOTE: See your System Information Guide for information on your warranty coverage. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Solving Problems 129 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\problems.fm Resolving Other Technical Problems G O T O T H E D E L L S UP P O R T W EB S I T E Go to support.dell.com for help with general usage, installation, and troubleshooting questions. See "Getting Help" for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. E- MA I L D E L L Go to support.dell.com and then click E-Mail Dell in the Communicate list. Send an e-mail message to Dell about your problem; you can expect to receive an e-mail message from Dell within hours. See "Getting Help"

for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. C O NT A C T D EL L If you cannot solve your problem using the Dell Support website (support.dell.com) or e-mail service, call Dell for technical assistance. See "Getting Help" for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 130 Solving Problems 15 S E C T I O N 1 5 U s i n g t h e D e l l D i a g n o s t i c s FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\diag.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\diag.fm When to Use the Dell Diagnostics Whenever a major component or device in your computer does not function properly, you may have a component failure. If you are experiencing a problem with your Dell computer, perform the checks in

"Solving Problems" and run the Dell Diagnostics before you call Dell for technical assistance. Running the Dell Diagnostics may help you to resolve the problem yourself quickly without having to contact Dell for assistance. If you are experienced with computers and know what component(s) you need to test, select the appropriate diagnostic test group(s) or subtest(s). If you are unsure about how to begin diagnosing a problem, see "Starting the Dell Diagnostics."

Features of the Dell Diagnostics The Dell Diagnostics helps you to check your computer hardware without any additional equipment and without destroying any data. By using the diagnostics, you can have confidence in the operation of your computer. If you find a problem that you cannot solve by yourself, the diagnostic tests can provide you with important information you need when talking to Dell's service and support personnel. NOTICE: Use the Dell Diagnostics to test only your Dell computer. Using this program with other computers may cause incorrect computer responses or result in error messages. The diagnostic test groups or subtests also have the following features:

Options that let you perform express, extended, or custom tests on one or all devices An option that allows you to select tests based on a symptom of the problem you are having An option that allows you to choose the number of times a test group or subtest is repeated The ability to display test results Options to temporarily suspend testing if an error is detected, or to terminate testing Extensive online Help that describes the tests and devices D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 132 Using the Dell Diagnostics FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\diag.fm Status messages that inform you whether test groups or subtests were completed successfully Error messages that appear if any problems are detected Starting the Dell Diagnostics The Dell Diagnostics is located on a hidden Diagnostic utility partition on your hard drive. 1 Shut down the computer. 2 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 3 Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. 4 Turn on the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Microsoft Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 5 When the boot device list appears, highlight Diagnostics and press

. The computer begins to run the Pre-boot System Assessment, a series of embedded diagnostics that perform initial testing on your system board, keyboard, hard drive, and display. During the assessment, answer any questions that appear. If a component failure is detected, the computer stops and beeps. To stop the assessment and reboot to the operating system, press

; to continue to the next test, press

; to retest the component that failed, press

. If failures are detected during the Pre-boot System Assessment, write down the error code(s) and contact Dell before continuing on to the Dell Diagnostics. If you receive a message stating that no Diagnostics utility partition has been found, follow the instructions on the screen to run the Dell Diagnostics from your Drivers and Utilities CD. NOTE: If your computer cannot display a screen image, contact Dell. NOTE: If you cannot see anything on your display, you can hold down the mute button and press the power button (instead of

) to begin the Dell Diagnostics. You do not need to highlight Diagnostics and press

. The computer automatically runs the Pre-boot System Assessment. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using the Dell Diagnostics 133 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\diag.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located in the title bar of each screen. If the Pre-boot System Assessment completes successfully, you receive the message Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue. 6 Press any key to start the Dell Diagnostics from the Diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive. 7 After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the option you want. Option Function Express Test Performs a quick test of devices. The test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to increase the possibility of tracing the problem quickly. Extended Test Performs a thorough check of devices. The test typically takes 1 hour or more and requires you to answer questions periodically. Custom Test Tests a specific device. You can customize the tests to be run. Symptom Tree Allows you to select tests based on a symptom of the problem you are experiencing. The option lists the most common symptoms. 8 If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears, displaying the error code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and problem description and follow the instructions on the screen. If you cannot resolve the error condition, contact Dell. 9 If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for more information. Tab Results Function Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 134 Using the Dell Diagnostics FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\diag.fm Errors Help Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and problem description. Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the test. Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device. The Dell Diagnostics obtains your configuration information for all devices from the system setup program, memory, and various internal tests and displays the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on your computer or all devices attached to your computer. Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings. Parameters 10 When you have finished running a test, close the screen to return to the Main Menu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and reboot the computer, close the Main Menu screen. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using the Dell Diagnostics 135 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\diag.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 136 Using the Dell Diagnostics 16 S E C T I O N 1 6 C l e a n i n g Yo u r C o m p u t e r FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\cleaning.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\cleaning.fm 1 Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2 Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3 Remove the battery. Computer, Keyboard, and Display Gently use a vacuum cleaner with a brush attachment to remove dust from the slots and holes on your computer and between the keys on the keyboard. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer or display, do not spray cleaning solution directly onto the display. Only use products specifically designed for cleaning LCDs, and follow the instructions that are included with the product. Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or an LCD cleaner, and wipe the display until it is clean. Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or an LCD cleaner, and wipe the computer and keyboard. Do not allow water from the cloth to seep between the touch pad and the surrounding palm rest. Touch Pad 1 Shut down and turn off your computer, disconnect any attached devices, and disconnect them from their electrical outlets. 2 Remove the battery. 3 Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water, and stroke it gently across the surface of the touch pad. Do not allow water from the cloth to seep between the touch pad and the surrounding palm rest. Floppy Drive NOTICE: Do not attempt to clean drive heads with a swab. You might accidentally misalign the heads, which prevents the drive from operating. Clean your floppy drive using a commercially available cleaning kit. These kits contain pretreated floppy disks to remove contaminants that accumulate during normal operation. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 138 Cleaning Your Computer FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\cleaning.fm Optical Media NOTICE: Always use compressed air to clean the lens in the drive, and follow the instructions that are included with the compressed air. Never touch the lens in the drive. If you notice problems, such as skipping, with the playback quality of your CDs or DVDs, try cleaning the discs. 1 Hold the disc by its outer edge. You can also touch the inside edge of the center hole. NOTICE: To prevent damaging the surface, do not wipe in a circular motion around the disc. 2 With a soft, lint-free cloth, gently wipe the bottom of the disc (the unlabeled side) in a straight line from the center to the outer edge of the disc. You can also purchase commercial products that clean discs and provide some protection from dust, fingerprints, and scratches. Cleaning products for CDs are safe to use on DVDs. 3 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Cleaning Your Computer 139 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\cleaning.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 140 Cleaning Your Computer 17 S E C T I O N 1 7 Re i n s t a l l i n g S o f t w a r e FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\drivers.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\drivers.fm Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities Dell ships your computer to you with required drivers and utilities already installedno further installation or configuration is needed. NOTICE: The Drivers and Utilities CD may contain drivers for operating systems that are not on your computer. Ensure that you are installing software appropriate for your operating system. To reinstall drivers for optional devices such as wireless communications and DVD drives, you may need the CD and documentation that came with those devices. NOTICE: The Dell Support website, support.dell.com, and the Drivers and Utilities CD provide approved drivers for Dell computers. If you install drivers from other sources, your computer might not work correctly. To reinstall a driver or utility from your Drivers and Utilities CD:

1 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. 2 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD. In most cases, the CD starts running automatically. If it does not, start Microsoft Windows Explorer, click your CD drive directory to display the CD contents, and then double-click the autorcd.exe file. The first time that you run the CD, it might prompt you to install setup files. Click OK, and follow the instructions on the screen to continue. 3 From the Language drop-down menu in the toolbar, select your preferred language for the driver or utility (if available). A welcome screen appears. 4 Click Next. The CD automatically scans your hardware to detect drivers and utilities used by your computer. After the CD completes the hardware scan, you can also detect other drivers and utilities. Under Search Criteria, select the appropriate categories from the System Model, Operating System, and Topic drop-down menus. A link or links appear(s) for the specific drivers and utilities used by your computer. 5 Click the link of a specific driver or utility to display information about the driver or utility that you want to install. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 142 Reinstalling Sof tware FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\drivers.fm 6 Click the Install button (if present) to begin installing the driver or utility. At the welcome screen, follow the screen prompts to complete the installation. If no Install button is present, automatic installation is not an option. For installation instructions, either see the appropriate instructions in the following subsections, or click Extract, follow the extracting instructions, and read the readme file. If instructed to navigate to the driver files, click the CD directory on the driver information window to display the files associated with that driver. Manually Reinstalling Drivers for Windows XP 1 After extracting the driver files to your hard drive as described previously, click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2 Click the Start button and right-click My Computer. 3 Click Properties. 4 Click the Hardware tab and click Device Manager. 5 Double-click the type of device for which you are installing the driver

(for example, Modems or Infrared devices). 6 Double-click the name of the device for which you are installing the driver. 7 Click the Driver tab and click Update Driver. 8 Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced) and click Next. 9 Click Browse, and browse to the location to which you previously extracted the driver files. 10 When the name of the appropriate driver appears, click Next. 11 Click Finish and restart your computer. NOTE: If you are reinstalling an infrared-

sensor driver, you must first enable the infrared sensor in the system setup program before continuing with the driver installation. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Reinstalling Sof tware 143 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\drivers.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: If you are reinstalling an infrared driver, you must first enable the infrared sensor in the system setup program before continuing with the driver installation. Using the Windows XP Device Driver Rollback If you install a new device driver that causes system instability, you can use the Windows XP Device Driver Rollback to replace the new device driver with the previously installed version of the device driver. If you cannot reinstall your previous driver by using the Device Driver Rollback process, then use System Restore to return your operating system to its previous operating state before you installed the new device driver. To use Device Driver Rollback:

1 Click the Start button and right-click My Computer. 2 Click Properties. 3 Click the Hardware tab and click Device Manager. 4 In the Device Manager window, right-click the device for which the new driver was installed and then click Properties. 5 Click the Drivers tab. 6 Click Roll Back Driver. Manually Reinstalling Drivers for Windows 2000 1 After extracting the driver files to your hard drive as described previously, click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2 Double-click the System icon. 3 Click the Hardware tab. 4 Click Device Manager. 5 Double-click the type of device for which you are installing the driver

(for example, Modems or Infrared devices). 6 Double-click the name of the device. 7 Click the Driver tab and click Update Driver. 8 Click Next. 9 Ensure that Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended) is selected, and then click Next. 10 Ensure that the Specify a location check box is checked and that all other check boxes are unchecked, and click Next. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 144 Reinstalling Sof tware FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\drivers.fm 11 Click Browse to browse to the location to which you previously extracted the driver files. 12 When the name of the appropriate driver appears, click Next. 13 Click Finish and restart your computer. Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities In the Microsoft Windows XP and Windows 2000 operating systems, IRQ conflicts occur if a device either is not detected during the operating system setup or is detected but incorrectly configured. See the following subsection that corresponds to your operating system to check for IRQ conflicts on your computer. Windows XP 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Performance and Maintenance and click System. 3 Click the Hardware tab and click Device Manager. 4 In the Device Manager list, check for conflicts with the other devices. Conflicts are indicated by a yellow exclamation point (!) beside the conflicting device or a red X if the device has been disabled. 5 Double-click any conflicting device listed to bring up the Properties window so that you can determine what needs to be reconfigured or removed from the Device Manager. 6 Resolve these conflicts before checking specific devices. 7 Double-click the malfunctioning device type in the Device Manager list. 8 Double-click the icon for the specific device in the expanded list. The Properties window appears. If an IRQ conflict exists, the Device status area in the Properties window reports what other devices are sharing the device's IRQ. 9 Resolve any IRQ conflicts. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Reinstalling Sof tware 145 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\drivers.fm You can also use the Windows XP Hardware Troubleshooter. To use the troubleshooter, click the Start button and click Help and Support. Type hardware troubleshooter in the Search field, and then click the arrow to start the search. Click Hardware Troubleshooter in the Search Results list. In the Hardware Troubleshooter list, click I need to resolve a hardware conflict on my computer and click Next. Windows 2000 1 Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2 Double-click the System icon. 3 Click the Hardware tab. 4 Click Device Manager. 5 Click View and click Resources by connection. 6 Double-click Interrupt request (IRQ) to view the IRQ assignments. Conflicts are indicated by a yellow exclamation point (!) beside the conflicting device or a red X if the device has been disabled. 7 Double-click any conflicting device listed to bring up the Properties window so that you can determine what needs to be reconfigured or removed from the Device Manager. Resolve these conflicts before checking specific devices. 8 Double-click the malfunctioning device type in the Device Manager list. 9 Double-click the icon for the specific device in the expanded list. The Properties window appears. If an IRQ conflict exists, the Device status area in the Properties window reports what other devices are sharing the device's IRQ. 10 Resolve any IRQ conflicts. You can also use the Windows 2000 Hardware Troubleshooter. To use the troubleshooter, click the Start button and click Help. Click Troubleshooting and Maintenance on the Contents tab, click Windows 2000 troubleshooters, and then click Hardware. In the Hardware Troubleshooter list, click I need to resolve a hardware conflict on my computer, and then click Next. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 146 Reinstalling Sof tware FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\drivers.fm Using Microsoft Windows System Restore The Microsoft Windows XP operating system provides a System Restore feature that allows you to return your computer to an earlier operating state if changes to the computers hardware, software (including new hardware or program installations), or system settings have left the computer in an undesirable operating state. You can also undo the last system restore. System Restore automatically creates system checkpoints. You can also manually create your own checkpoints by creating restore points. To limit the amount of hard disk space used, older restore points will be automatically purged. To resolve an operating system problem, you can use System Restore from Safe Mode or Normal Mode to return your computer to an earlier operating state. System Restore does not cause you to lose personal files stored in the My Documents folder, data files, or e-mail messages after restoring the computer to an earlier time. If you restore the computer to an operating state that existed before you installed a program, the programs data files are not lost, but you must reinstall the actual program again. NOTICE: It is important to make regular backups of your data files. System Restore does not monitor changes to or recover your data files. If the original data on the hard disk is accidentally erased or overwritten, or if it becomes inaccessible because of a hard disk malfunction, use your backup files to recover the lost or damaged data. System Restore is enabled on your new computer. However, if you reinstall Windows XP with less than 200 MB of free hard-disk space available, System Restore is automatically disabled. Before you use System Restore, confirm that it is enabled:

1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click the Performance and Maintenance. 3 Click System. 4 Click the System Restore tab. 5 Ensure that Turn off System Restore is not checked. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Reinstalling Sof tware 147 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\drivers.fm Creating a Restore Point You can either use the System Restore Wizard or manually create a restore point. Using the System Restore Wizard To use the System Restore Wizard, click the Start button, click Help and Support, click System Restore, and then follow the instructions in the System Restore Wizard window. You can also create and name a restore point if you are logged on as the computer administrator or a user with administrator rights. Manually Creating a Restore Point 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2 Click Create a restore point. 3 Click Next. 4 Type a name for the new restore point in the Restore point description field. The present date and time are automatically added to the description of the new restore point. 5 Click Create. 6 Click OK. Restoring the Computer to an Earlier Operating State If problems occur after installing a device driver, first try using Device Driver Rollback. If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, then use System Restore. NOTICE: Before restoring the computer to an earlier operating state, save and close all open files and exit all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2 Ensure that Restore my computer to an earlier time is selected and click Next. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 148 Reinstalling Sof tware FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\drivers.fm 3 Click a calendar date to which you want to restore your computer. The Select a Restore Point screen provides a calendar that allows you to see and select restore points. All calendar dates with available restore points appear in bold. 4 Select a restore point and click Next. If a calendar date has only one restore point, then that restore point is automatically selected. If two or more restore points are available, click the restore point that you want to use. NOTICE: Save and close all open files and exit all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 5 Click Next. The Restoration Complete screen appears after System Restore finishes collecting data, and then the computer automatically restarts. 6 After the computer restarts, click OK. To change the restore point, you can either repeat the steps using a different restore point, or you can undo the restoration. Undoing the Last System Restore NOTICE: Save and close all open files and exit all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2 Select Undo my last restoration and click Next. NOTICE: Save and close all open files and exit all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 3 Click Next. The System Restore screen appears, and then the computer automatically restarts. 4 After the computer restarts, click OK. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Reinstalling Sof tware 149 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\drivers.fm Reinstalling Microsoft Windows XP Before You Reinstall If you are considering reinstalling the Windows XP operating system to correct a problem with a newly installed driver, first try using Windows XP Device Driver Rollback. If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, then use System Restore to return your operating system to the operating state it was in before you installed the new device driver. Reinstalling Windows XP To reinstall Windows XP, perform all the steps in the following sections in the order in which they are listed. The reinstallation process can take 1 to 2 hours to complete. After you reinstall the operating system, you must also reinstall the device drivers, virus protection program, and other software. NOTICE: The Operating System CD provides options for reinstalling Windows XP. The options can overwrite files and possibly affect programs installed on your hard drive. Therefore, do not reinstall Windows XP unless instructed to do so by a Dell technical support representative. NOTICE: To prevent conflicts with Windows XP, disable any virus protection software installed on your computer before you reinstall Windows XP. See the documentation that came with the software for instructions. Booting From the Operating System CD 1 Save and close any open files and exit any open programs. 2 Insert the Operating System CD. If any program starts automatically, exit the program before proceeding. 3 Shut down the computer through the Start menu and restart the computer. 4 Press immediately after the DELL logo appears. If the operating system logo appears, wait until you see the Windows desktop, and then shut down the computer and try again. 5 Press the arrow keys to select CD-ROM, and then press

. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 150 Reinstalling Sof tware FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\drivers.fm 6 When the Press any key to boot from CD message appears, press any key. Windows XP Setup 1 When the Windows XP Setup screen appears, press to select To set up Windows now. 2 Read the information on the Microsoft Windows Licensing Agreement screen, and press to accept the license agreement. 3 If your computer already has Windows XP installed and you want to recover your current Windows XP data, type r to select the repair option, and then remove the CD from the drive. 4 If you want to install a new copy of Windows XP, press that option. to select 5 Press to select the highlighted partition

(recommended), and then follow the instructions on the screen. The Windows XP Setup screen appears, and the operating system begins to copy files and install the devices. The computer automatically restarts multiple times. NOTICE: Do not press any key when the following message appears: Press any key to boot from the CD. 6 When the Regional and Language Options screen appears, select the settings for your location, and then click Next. 7 Enter your name and organization (optional) in the Personalize Your Software screen and click Next. 8 If you are reinstalling Windows XP Home Edition, at the What's your computer's name window, enter a name for your computer (or accept the name provided) and click Next. If you are reinstalling Windows XP Professional, at the Computer Name and Administrator Password window, enter a name for your computer (or accept the one provided) and a password, and then click Next. 9 If the Modem Dialing Information screen appears, enter the requested information and click Next. NOTE: The time required to complete the setup depends on the size of the hard drive and the speed of your computer. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Reinstalling Sof tware 151 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\drivers.fm 10 Enter the date, time, and time zone in the Date and Time Settings window and click Next. 11 If the Networking Settings screen appears, click Typical and click Next. 12 If you are reinstalling Windows XP Professional and you are prompted to provide further information regarding your network configuration, enter your selections. If you are unsure of your settings, accept the default selections. Windows XP installs the operating system components and configures the computer. The computer automatically restarts. NOTICE: Do not press any key when the following message appears: Press any key to boot from the CD. 13 When the Welcome to Microsoft screen appears, click Next. 14 When the How will this computer connect to the Internet? message appears, click Skip. 15 When the Ready to register with Microsoft? screen appears, select No, not at this time and click Next. 16 When the Who will use this computer? screen appears, you can enter up to five users. Click Next. 17 Click Finish to complete the setup, and remove the CD from the drive. Reinstalling Drivers and Software 1 Reinstall the appropriate drivers. 2 Reinstall your virus protection software. See the documentation that came with the software for instructions. 3 Reinstall your other software programs. See the documentation that came with the software for instructions. Reinstalling Windows 2000 NOTICE: The Operating System CD provides options for reinstalling the Windows 2000 operating system. The options can potentially overwrite files installed by Dell and possibly affect programs installed on your hard drive. Therefore, do not reinstall your operating system unless instructed to do so by a Dell technical support representative. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 152 Reinstalling Sof tware FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\drivers.fm Booting From the Operating System CD 1 Save and close any open files and exit any open programs. 2 Insert the Operating System CD. If any program starts automatically, exit the program before proceeding. 3 Shut down the computer through the Start menu and restart the computer. 4 Press immediately after the DELL logo appears. If the operating system logo appears, wait until you see the Windows desktop, and then shut down the computer and try again. 5 Press the arrow keys to select CD-ROM, and then press 6 When the Press any key to boot from CD message appears,

. press any key. Windows 2000 Setup 1 When the Windows 2000 Setup window appears, ensure that To setup Win2000 now, press ENTER is highlighted. Then press

. 2 Read the information in the License Agreement window and press to continue. 3 When the Windows 2000 Professional Setup window appears, press the arrow keys to select the Windows 2000 partition option that you want. Then press the key for the partition option you chose. 4 When the Windows 2000 Professional Setup window reappears, press the arrow keys to select the type of file system that you want Windows 2000 to use, and then press

. 5 Press 6 Click Next when the Welcome to the Windows 2000 Setup Wizard again to restart your computer. window appears. 7 When the Regional Settings window appears, select your region, and then click Next. 8 Enter your name and organization in the Personalize Your Software window and click Next. 9 Enter the Windows product key, which is printed on the Microsoft label on your computer. Then click Next. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Reinstalling Sof tware 153 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\drivers.fm 10 When the Computer Name and Administrator Password window appears, enter a name for your computer and a password, if desired. Then click Next. 11 Enter the date and time in the Date and Time Settings window and click Next. Windows 2000 installs components and configures the computer. 12 When the Completing the Windows 2000 Setup Wizard window appears, remove the CD from the drive and click Finish. The computer automatically restarts. Enabling Hibernate Mode 1 Click the Start button, point to Settings and click Control Panel. 2 Double-click the Power Management icon. 3 Click the Hibernate tab. 4 Ensure that Enable hibernate support is selected and click Apply. 5 Click OK to close the Control Panel. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 154 Reinstalling Sof tware 18 S E C T I O N 1 8 A d d i n g a n d Re p l a c i n g Pa r t s FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\r_r.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\r_r.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: Memory modules purchased from Dell are covered under your computer warranty. Adding Memory You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board. See "Specifications" for information on the memory supported by your computer. Install only memory modules that are intended for your computer. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. 1 Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent scratching the computer cover. 2 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. 3 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 4 Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 5 Wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then disconnect any attached devices. 6 Remove any installed PC Cards and the battery. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer. Continue to ground yourself periodically during this procedure. 7 Continue to the appropriate section:

"Installing a Memory Module Under the Memory Module/Modem Cover"

"Installing a Memory Module Under the Keyboard"

Installing a Memory Module Under the Memory Module/Modem Cover 1 Turn the computer over, loosen the captive screws on the memory module/modem cover, and then remove the cover. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 156 Adding and Replacing Parts FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\r_r.fm 1 2 NOTICE: To prevent damage to the memory module connector, do not use tools to spread the memory-module securing clips. 2 If you are replacing a memory module, remove the existing module:

a Use your fingertips to carefully spread apart the securing clips on each end of the memory module connector until the module pops up. b Remove the module from the connector. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Adding and Replacing Parts 157 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\r_r.fm 1 2 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 1 memory module 2 securing clips (2) 3 Ground yourself and install the new memory module:

a b Align the notch in the module edge connector with the tab in the connector slot. Slide the module firmly into the slot at a 45-degree angle, and rotate the module down until it clicks into place. If you do not feel the click, remove the module and reinstall it. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 158 Adding and Replacing Parts FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\r_r.fm NOTE: If the memory module is not installed properly, the computer may not boot properly. No error message indicates this failure. 4 Replace the cover. NOTICE: If the cover is difficult to close, remove the module and reinstall it. Forcing the cover to close may damage your computer. 5 Insert the battery into the battery bay, or connect the AC adapter to your computer and an electrical outlet. 6 Turn on the computer. As the computer boots, it detects the additional memory and automatically updates the system configuration information. To confirm the amount of memory installed in the computer:

In Windows XP, click the Start button, click Help and Support, and then click Computer Information. In Windows 2000, right-click the My Computer icon on your desktop, and then click the General tab. Installing a Memory Module Under the Keyboard 1 Remove the keyboard. 2 Loosen the two captive screws in the cover labeled "DIMM1."

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Adding and Replacing Parts 159 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\r_r.fm 1 2 5 3 4 1 captive screws (2) 2 DIMM1 cover 3 memory module 4 securing clips (2) 5 securing tabs (3) NOTICE: To prevent damage to the memory module connector, do not use tools to spread the memory-module securing clips. 3 If you are replacing a memory module, remove the existing module:

a Use your fingertips to carefully spread apart the securing clips on each end of the memory module connector until the module pops up. b Remove the module from the connector. 4 Ground yourself and install the new memory module:

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 160 Adding and Replacing Parts FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\r_r.fm NOTE: If the memory module is not installed properly, the computer may not boot properly. No error message indicates this failure. a b Align the notch in the module edge connector with the tab in the connector slot. Slide the module firmly into the slot at a 45-degree angle, and rotate the module down until it clicks into place. If you do not feel the click, remove the module and reinstall it. 5 Insert the 3 securing tabs on the DIMM1 cover into the notches above the memory module connector and tighten the captive screws. NOTICE: If the DIMM1 cover is difficult to replace, remove the module and reinstall it. Forcing the cover to close may damage your computer. 6 Replace the keyboard. 7 Insert the battery into the battery bay, or connect the AC adapter to your computer and an electrical outlet. 8 Turn on the computer. As the computer boots, it detects the additional memory and automatically updates the system configuration information. To confirm the amount of memory installed in the computer:

In Windows XP, click the Start button, click Help and Support, and then click Computer Information. In Windows 2000, right-click the My Computer icon on your desktop, and then click the General tab. Adding a Modem If you ordered the optional modem at the same time that you ordered your computer, Dell installed the modem for you. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information in your System Information Guide. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. 1 Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent scratching the computer cover. 2 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Adding and Replacing Parts 161 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\r_r.fm 3 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 4 Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 5 Wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then disconnect any attached devices. 6 Remove any installed PC Cards and the battery. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer. Continue to ground yourself periodically during this procedure. 7 Turn the computer over, loosen the captive screws on the memory module/modem cover, and then remove the cover. 1 2 8 If a modem is not already installed, go to step 9. If you are replacing a modem, remove the existing modem:

a b Remove the screw securing the modem to the system board, and set it aside. Pull straight up on the attached pull-tab to lift the modem out of its connector on the system board, and disconnect the modem cable. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 162 Adding and Replacing Parts FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\r_r.fm 9 Connect the modem cable to the modem. NOTICE: The cable connectors are keyed for correct insertion; do not force the connections. 10 Align the modem with the screw hole, and press the modem into the connector on the system board. 11 Install the screw to secure the modem to the system board. 12 Replace the modem cover. Replacing the Keyboard CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. 1 Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent scratching the computer cover. 2 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. 3 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 4 Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 5 Wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then disconnect any attached devices. 6 Remove any installed PC Cards and the battery. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer. Continue to ground yourself periodically during this procedure. 7 Open the display approximately 180 degrees. 8 Use a small flat-blade screwdriver or plastic scribe to lift the notched right edge of the center control cover, and pry the cover loose from the bottom case. 9 Remove the two screws from the top of the keyboard. 10 Use the pull tab to pull the keyboard up and out (towards the display) of the bottom case. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Adding and Replacing Parts 163 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\r_r.fm 1 2 3 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 6 5 4 1 keyboard 2 keyboard pull tab 3 screws (2) 4 securing tabs (5) 5 keyboard-connector pull tab 6 interface connector

(system board) 11 Rest the keyboard face down on the palm rest. 12 Pull straight up on the pull tab that is attached to the keyboard connector to disconnect the connector from the interface connector on the system board. To replace the keyboard:

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 164 Adding and Replacing Parts Adding and Replacing Parts from the interface connector on the system board. To replace the keyboard:

1. Connect the keyboard connector to the interface connector on the system board. 2. Insert the five securing tabs on the keyboard into their respective slots in the palm rest. 3. Replace the two screws at the top of the keyboard. 4. Replace the center control cover and snap it down so that it is flush with the palm rest. Adding a Mini PCI Card If you ordered a Mini PCI card with your computer, the card is already installed. CAUTION: FCC rules strictly prohibit users from installing new 5 GHz Wireless LAN Mini PCI cards. Under no circumstances should the user install such a device. Only trained Dell service personnel are authorized to dispatch an individual 5 GHz Mini PCI cards to a user for replacement If you are removing and/or installing a 2.4 GHz device, please follow the instructions noted below. Only products approved for use in your portable computer may be installed. Approved devices may be purchased only from Dell. NOTE: 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz Wireless LAN PC Cards may be removed and installed by the user. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. 1. Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent scratching the computer cover. 2. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. 3. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 4. Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 5. Wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then disconnect any attached devices. 6. Remove any installed PC Cards and the battery. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer. Continue to ground yourself periodically during this procedure. 7. Remove the keyboard. 8. If a Mini PCI card is not already installed, go to step 9. If you are replacing a Mini PCI card, remove the existing card:

a. Disconnect the Mini PCI card from the attached cables. 6/2/2003 Adding and Replacing Parts 1 antenna cables (2) 2 Mini PCI card b. Release the Mini PCI card by spreading the metal securing tabs until the card pops up slightly. c. Lift the Mini PCI card out of its connector. 6/2/2003 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\r_r.fm 1 2 1 securing tabs(2) 2 Mini PCI card connector NOTICE: To avoid damaging the Mini PCI card, never place cables on top of or under the card. NOTICE: The connectors are keyed to ensure correct insertion. If you feel resistance, check the connectors and realign the card. 9 Align the Mini PCI card with the connector at a 45-degree angle, and press the Mini PCI card into the connector until you feel a click. 10 Connect the antenna cables to the Mini PCI card. 11 Replace the keyboard. NOTE: If a Mini PCI card was not already installed, remove the foam that secures the antenna cables before you install the card. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Adding and Replacing Parts 167 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\r_r.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: Dell does not guarantee compatibility or provide support for hard drives from sources other than Dell. Replacing the Hard Drive CAUTION: If you remove the hard drive from the computer when the drive is warm, do not touch the metal housing of the hard drive. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent data loss, turn off your computer before removing the hard drive. Do not remove the hard drive while the computer is on, in standby mode, or in hibernate mode. NOTICE: Hard drives are extremely fragile; even a slight bump can damage the drive. To replace the hard drive in the hard drive bay:

1 Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent scratching the computer cover. 2 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. 3 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 4 Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 5 Wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then disconnect any attached devices. 6 Remove any installed PC Cards and the battery. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer. Continue to ground yourself periodically during this procedure. 7 Turn the computer over, and remove the hard drive screws. NOTICE: When the hard drive is not in the computer, store it in protective antistatic packaging. See "Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge" in your System Information Guide. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 168 Adding and Replacing Parts FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\r_r.fm 1 2 8 Slide the hard drive out of the computer. 9 Remove the new drive from its packaging. Save the original packaging for storing or shipping the hard drive. NOTICE: Use firm and even pressure to slide the drive into place. If you use excessive force, you may damage the connector. 10 Slide the hard drive into the bay until it is fully seated. 11 Replace and tighten the screws. 12 Use the Operating System CD to install the operating system for your computer. 13 Use the Drivers and Utilities CD to install the drivers and utilities for your computer. Adding a Bluetooth Module CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. 1 Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent scratching the computer cover. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Adding and Replacing Parts 169 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\r_r.fm 2 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. 3 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 4 Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 5 Wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then disconnect any attached devices. 6 Remove any installed PC Cards and the battery. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer. Continue to ground yourself periodically during this procedure. 7 Turn the computer overm, loosen the captive screw in the Bluetooth module cover, and remove the cover. 1 2 3 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 170 Adding and Replacing Parts FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\r_r.fm 1 Bluetooth module cover 2 captive screw 3 battery bay 8 If a Bluetooth module is not already installed, go to step 9. If you are replacing the Bluetooth module, remove the existing module:

a Pull the Bluetooth module out of the slot. b Disconnect the cable from the module. 1 2 1 Bluetooth cable 2 Bluetooth module (front) 9 Ensure that the front of the Bluetooth module (silver) is facing outward, and connect the cable to the module. 10 Insert the module into the slot. 11 Replace the cover and tighten the captive screw. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Adding and Replacing Parts 171 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\r_r.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 172 Adding and Replacing Parts 19 S E C T I O N 1 9 U s i n g t h e S y s t e m S e t u p P r o g r a m FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\setup.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\setup.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: Your operating system may automatically configure most of the options available in the system setup program, thus overriding options that you set through the system setup program.

(An exception is the External Hot Key option, which you can disable or enable only through the system setup program.) For more information on configuring features for your operating system, see your Microsoft Windows Help

(Windows 2000) or the Windows Help and Support Center (Windows XP). Overview You can use the system setup program as follows:

To set or change user-selectable featuresfor example, your computer password To verify information about the computer's current configuration, such as the amount of system memory After you set up the computer, run the system setup program to familiarize yourself with your system configuration information and optional settings. You may want to write down the information for future reference. The system setup screens display the current setup information and settings for your computer, such as:

System configuration Boot order Boot (start-up) configuration and docking-device configuration settings Basic device configuration settings System security and hard-drive password settings NOTICE: Unless you are an expert computer user or are directed to do so by Dell technical support, do not change the settings for the system setup program. Certain changes might make your computer work incorrectly. Viewing the System Setup Screens 1 Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2 When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 174 Using the System Setup Program FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\setup.fm System Setup Screens On each screen, the system setup options are listed at the left. To the right of each option is the setting or value for that option. You can change settings that appear as white type on the screen. Options or values that you cannot change (because they are determined by the computer) appear as blue text. The upper-right corner of the screen displays help information for the currently highlighted option; the lower-right corner displays information about the computer. System setup key functions are listed across the bottom of the screen. Commonly Used Options Certain options require that you reboot the computer for new settings to take effect. Changing the Boot Sequence The boot sequence, or boot order, tells the computer where to look to find the software needed to start the operating system. You can control the boot sequence and enable/disable devices using the Boot Order page of the system setup program. The Boot Order page displays a general list of the bootable devices that may be installed in your computer, including but not limited to the following:

Diskette Drive Internal HDD CD/DVD/CD-RW drive During the boot routine, the computer starts at the top of the list and scans each enabled device for the operating system start-up files. When the computer finds the files, it stops searching and starts the operating system. To control the boot devices, select (highlight) a device by pressing the or key, and then enable or disable the device or change its order in the list. NOTE: To change the boot sequence on a one-

time-only basis, see

"Performing a One-Time Boot."

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using the System Setup Program 175 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\setup.fm To enable or disable a device, highlight the item and press

. Enabled items appear as white and display a small triangle to the left; disabled items appear blue or dimmed without a triangle. To reorder a device in the list, highlight the device and then press or or down.

(not case-sensitive) to move the highlighted device up Boot sequence changes take effect as soon as you save the changes and exit the system setup program. Performing a One-Time Boot You can set a one-time-only boot sequence without entering the system setup program. (You can also use this procedure to boot the Dell Diagnostics on the diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive.) 1 Turn off the computer. 2 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 3 Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. 4 Turn on the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 5 When the boot device list appears, highlight the device from which you want to boot and press

. The computer boots to the selected device. The next time you reboot the computer, the previous boot order is restored. Changing COM Ports Serial Port allows you to map the serial port COM address or disable the serial port and its address, freeing computer resources for another device to use. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 176 Using the System Setup Program FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\setup.fm Enabling the Infrared Sensor 1 Enter the system setup program:

a Turn on your computer. b Press when the DELL logo appears. 2 Press until you locate Infrared Data Port under Basic Device Configuration. 3 Press the down-arrow key to select the Infrared Data Port setting, and press the right-arrow key to change the setting to a COM port. 4 Press

, select Save changes and reboot, and press to save the changes and exit the system setup program. If you are prompted to restart your computer, click Yes. 5 Follow the instructions on the screen. 6 After the infrared sensor has been enabled, click Yes to restart the computer. After you enable the infrared sensor, you can use it to establish a link to an infrared device. To set up and use an infrared device, see the infrared device documentation and the Windows Help and Support Center (Windows Help in Windows 2000). NOTE: Ensure that the COM port that you select is different from the COM port assigned to the serial connector. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Using the System Setup Program 177 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\setup.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 178 Using the System Setup Program 20 S E C T I O N 2 0 A l e r t S t a n d a r d Fo r m a t

( A S F ) FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\asf.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\asf.fm Alert Standrard Format (ASF) is a Distributed Management Task Force

(DMTF) management standard that specifies "pre-operating system" or

"operating system absent" alerting techniques. The standard is designed to generate an alert on potential security and fault conditions when the operating system is in a sleep state or the system is turned off. ASF is designed to supersede previous operating system-absent alerting technologies. Your computer supports the following ASF alerts and remote capabilities:

Alert Chassis Intrusion Physical Security Violation/Chass is Intrusion Physical Security Violation Event Cleared Failure to Boot to BIOS System Password Violation Entity Presence Description The docking device has been opened and the PCI slot has been compromised. The BIOS did not complete loading upon initiation. The system password is invalid (alert occurs after three failed attempts). Periodic heartbeats have been transmitted to verify system presence. For more information about Dell's ASF implementation, see ASF for Dell Portable Computers and the ASF Administrator's Guide for Dell Portable Computers, which are available on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 180 Alert Standard Format (ASF) 21 S E C T I O N 2 1 G e t t i n g H e l p FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Technical Assistance If you need help with a technical problem, Dell is ready to assist you. CAUTION: If you need to remove the computer covers, first disconnect the computer power and modem cables from all electrical outlets. 1 Complete the procedures in "Solving Problems."

2 Run the Dell Diagnostics. 3 Make a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist and fill it out. 4 Use Dell's extensive suite of online services available at Dell Support

(support.dell.com) for help with installation and troubleshooting procedures. 5 If the preceding steps have not resolved the problem, contact Dell. NOTE: Call technical support from a telephone near or at the computer so that technical support can assist you with any necessary procedures. NOTE: Dell's Express Service Code system may not be available in all countries. When prompted by Dell's automated telephone system, enter your Express Service Code to route the call directly to the proper support personnel. If you do not have an Express Service Code, open the Dell Accessories folder, double-click the Express Service Code icon, and follow the directions. For instructions on using the technical support service, see "Technical Support Service."

NOTE: Some of the following services are not always available in all locations outside the continental U.S. Call your local Dell representative for information on availability. Online Services You can access Dell Support at support.dell.com. Select your region on the WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT page, and fill in the requested details to access help tools and information. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 182 Getting Help FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm You can contact Dell electronically using the following addresses:

World Wide Web www.dell.com/

www.dell.com/ap/ (for Asian/Pacific countries only) www.euro.dell.com (for Europe only) www.dell.com/la/ (for Latin American countries) Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP) ftp.dell.com/

Log in as user: anonymous, and use your e-mail address as your password. Electronic Support Service mobile_support@us.dell.com support@us.dell.com apsupport@dell.com (for Asian/Pacific countries only) support.euro.dell.com (for Europe only) Electronic Quote Service sales@dell.com apmarketing@dell.com (for Asian/Pacific countries only) Electronic Information Service info@dell.com AutoTech Service Dell's automated technical support serviceAutoTechprovides recorded answers to the questions most frequently asked by Dell customers about their portable and desktop computers. When you call AutoTech, use your touch-tone telephone to select the subjects that correspond to your questions. The AutoTech service is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. You can also access this service through the technical support service. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Getting Help 183 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Automated Order-Status Service To check on the status of any Dell products that you have ordered, you can go to support.dell.com, or you can call the automated order-status service. A recording prompts you for the information needed to locate and report on your order. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. Technical Support Service Dell's technical support service is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to answer your questions about Dell hardware. Our technical support staff uses computer-based diagnostics to provide fast, accurate answers. To contact Dells technical support service, see "Technical Assistance" and then call the number for your country as listed in "Contacting Dell."

Problems With Your Order If you have a problem with your order, such as missing parts, wrong parts, or incorrect billing, contact Dell for customer assistance. Have your invoice or packing slip handy when you call. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. Product Information If you need information about additional products available from Dell, or if you would like to place an order, visit the Dell website at www.dell.com. For the telephone number to call to speak to a sales specialist, see the contact numbers for your region. Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit Prepare all items being returned, whether for repair or credit, as follows:

1 Call Dell to obtain a Return Material Authorization Number, and write it clearly and prominently on the outside of the box. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 184 Getting Help FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. 2 Include a copy of the invoice and a letter describing the reason for the return. 3 Include a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist indicating the tests you have run and any error messages reported by the Dell Diagnostics. 4 Include any accessories that belong with the item(s) being returned

(power cables, software floppy disks, guides, and so on) if the return is for credit. 5 Pack the equipment to be returned in the original (or equivalent) packing materials. You are responsible for paying shipping expenses. You are also responsible for insuring any product returned, and you assume the risk of loss during shipment to Dell. Collect On Delivery (C.O.D.) packages are not accepted. Returns that are missing any of the preceding requirements will be refused at Dells receiving dock and returned to you. Before You Call NOTE: Have your Express Service Code ready when you call. The code helps Dells automated-support telephone system direct your call more efficiently. Remember to fill out the Diagnostics Checklist. If possible, turn on your computer before you call Dell for technical assistance and call from a telephone at or near the computer. You may be asked to type some commands at the keyboard, relay detailed information during operations, or try other troubleshooting steps possible only at the computer itself. Ensure that the computer documentation is available. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Getting Help 185 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Diagnostics Checklist Name:

Date:

Address:

Phone number:

Service Tag (bar code on the back of the computer):

Express Service Code:

Return Material Authorization Number (if provided by Dell support technician):

Operating system and version:

Devices:

Expansion cards:

Are you connected to a network? Yes No Network, version, and network adapter:

Programs and versions:

See your operating system documentation to determine the contents of the systems start-up files. If the computer is connected to a printer, print each file. Otherwise, record the contents of each file before calling Dell. Error message, beep code, or diagnostic code:

Description of problem and troubleshooting procedures you performed:

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 186 Getting Help FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Contacting Dell To contact Dell electronically, you can access the following websites:

www.dell.com support.dell.com (technical support) premiersupport.dell.com (technical support for educational, government, healthcare, and medium/large business customers, including Premier, Platinum, and Gold customers) For specific web addresses for your country, find the appropriate country section in the table below. NOTE: Toll-free numbers are for use within the country for which they are listed. When you need to contact Dell, use the electronic addresses, telephone numbers, and codes provided in the following table. If you need assistance in determining which codes to use, contact a local or an international operator. Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Anguilla Antigua and Barbuda Argentina (Buenos Aires) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 54 City Code: 11 Aruba Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address General Support General Support Website: www.dell.com.ar Tech Support and Customer Care Sales Tech Support Fax Customer Care Fax General Support Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers toll-free: 800-335-0031 1-800-805-5924 toll-free: 0-800-444-0733 0-810-444-3355 11 4515 7139 11 4515 7138 toll-free: 800-1578 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Getting Help 187 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Australia (Sydney) International Access Code: 0011 Country Code: 61 City Code: 2 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Austria (Vienna) International Access Code: 900 Country Code: 43 City Code: 1 Bahamas Barbados Belgium (Brussels) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 32 City Code: 2 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers E-mail (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com E-mail (New Zealand): nz_tech_support@dell.com Home and Small Business Government and Business Preferred Accounts Division (PAD) Customer Care Corporate Sales Transaction Sales Fax Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Home/Small Business Sales Home/Small Business Fax Home/Small Business Customer Care Preferred Accounts/Corporate Customer Care Home/Small Business Technical Support Preferred Accounts/Corporate Technical Support Switchboard General Support General Support Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: tech_be@dell.com E-mail for French Speaking Customers:

support.euro.dell.com/be/fr/emaildell/

Technical Support Customer Care Home/Small Business Sales Corporate Sales Fax Switchboard 1-300-65-55-33 toll-free: 1-800-633-559 toll-free: 1-800-060-889 toll-free: 1-800-819-339 toll-free: 1-800-808-385 toll-free: 1-800-808-312 toll-free: 1-800-818-341 01 795 67602 01 795 67605 01 795 67603 0660 8056 01 795 67604 0660 8779 01 491 04 0 toll-free: 1-866-278-6818 1-800-534-3066 02 481 92 88 02 481 91 19 toll-free: 0800 16884 02 481 91 00 02 481 92 99 02 481 91 00 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 188 Getting Help FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Bermuda Bolivia Brazil International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 55 City Code: 51 British Virgin Islands Brunei Country Code: 673 Canada (North York, Ontario) International Access Code: 011 Cayman Islands Chile (Santiago) Country Code: 56 City Code: 2 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address General Support General Support Website: www.dell.com/br Customer Support, Technical Support Tech Support Fax Customer Care Fax Sales General Support Customer Technical Support (Penang, Malaysia) Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Transaction Sales (Penang, Malaysia) Automated Order-Status System AutoTech (automated technical support) TechFax Customer Care (home/small business) Customer Care (med./large business, government) Technical Support (home/small business) Technical Support (med./large bus., government) Sales (direct salesfrom outside Toronto) Sales (direct salesfrom within Toronto) Sales (federal government, education, and medical) General Support Sales, Customer Support, and Technical Support Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers 1-800-342-0671 toll-free: 800-10-0238 0800 90 3355 51 481 5470 51 481 5480 0800 90 3390 toll-free: 1-866-278-6820 604 633 4966 604 633 4949 604 633 4955 toll-free: 1-800-433-9014 toll-free: 1-800-247-9362 toll-free: 1-800-950-1329 toll-free: 1-800-847-4096 toll-free: 1-800-326-9463 toll-free: 1-800-847-4096 toll-free: 1-800-847-4096 toll-free: 1-800-387-5752 416 758-2200 toll-free: 1-800-567-7542 1-800-805-7541 toll-free: 1230-020-4823 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Getting Help 189 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code China (Xiamen) Country Code: 86 City Code: 592 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Colombia Costa Rica Czech Republic (Prague) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 420 City Code: 2 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Tech Support website: support.ap.dell.com/china Tech Support E-mail: cn_support@dell.com Tech Support Fax Home and Small Business Technical Support Corporate Accounts Technical Support Customer Experience Home and Small Business Preferred Accounts Division Large Corporate Accounts GCP Large Corporate Accounts Key Accounts Large Corporate Accounts North Large Corporate Accounts North Government and Education Large Corporate Accounts East Large Corporate Accounts East Government and Education Large Corporate Accounts Queue Team Large Corporate Accounts South Large Corporate Accounts West Large Corporate Accounts Spare Parts General Support General Support Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: czech_dell@dell.com Technical Support Customer Care Fax TechFax Switchboard 818 1350 toll-free: 800 858 2437 toll-free: 800 858 2333 toll-free: 800 858 2060 toll-free: 800 858 2222 toll-free: 800 858 2062 toll-free: 800 858 2055 toll-free: 800 858 2628 toll-free: 800 858 2999 toll-free: 800 858 2955 toll-free: 800 858 2020 toll-free: 800 858 2669 toll-free: 800 858 2572 toll-free: 800 858 2355 toll-free: 800 858 2811 toll-free: 800 858 2621 980-9-15-3978 0800-012-0435 02 22 83 27 27 02 22 83 27 11 02 22 83 27 14 02 22 83 27 28 02 22 83 27 11 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 190 Getting Help FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Denmark (Copenhagen) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 45 Dominica Dominican Republic Ecuador El Salvador Finland (Helsinki) International Access Code: 990 Country Code: 358 City Code: 9 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail Support (portable computers):

den_nbk_support@dell.com E-mail Support (desktop computers):

den_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers):

Nordic_server_support@dell.com Technical Support Customer Care (Relational) Home/Small Business Customer Care Switchboard (Relational) Fax Switchboard (Relational) Switchboard (Home/Small Business) Fax Switchboard (Home/Small Business) General Support General Support General Support General Support Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: fin_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers):

Nordic_support@dell.com Technical Support Technical Support Fax Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Customer Care Fax Switchboard 7023 0182 7023 0184 3287 5505 3287 1200 3287 1201 3287 5000 3287 5001 toll-free: 1-866-278-6821 1-800-148-0530 toll-free: 999-119 01-899-753-0777 09 253 313 60 09 253 313 81 09 253 313 38 09 693 791 94 09 253 313 99 09 253 313 00 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Getting Help 191 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code France (Paris) (Montpellier) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 33 City Codes: (1) (4) m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Germany (Langen) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 49 City Code: 6103 Grenada Guatemala Guyana Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/fr/fr/emaildell/

Home and Small Business Technical Support Customer Care Switchboard Switchboard (calls from outside of France) Sales Fax Fax (calls from outside of France) Corporate Technical Support Customer Care Switchboard Sales Fax Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Technical Support Home/Small Business Customer Care Global Segment Customer Care Preferred Accounts Customer Care Large Accounts Customer Care Public Accounts Customer Care Switchboard General Support General Support General Support 0825 387 270 0825 823 833 0825 004 700 04 99 75 40 00 0825 004 700 0825 004 701 04 99 75 40 01 0825 004 719 0825 338 339 01 55 94 71 00 01 55 94 71 00 01 55 94 71 01 06103 766-7200 0180-5-224400 06103 766-9570 06103 766-9420 06103 766-9560 06103 766-9555 06103 766-7000 toll-free: 1-866-540-3355 1-800-999-0136 toll-free: 1-877-270-4609 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 192 Getting Help FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Hong Kong International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 852 India Ireland (Cherrywood) International Access Code: 16 Country Code: 353 City Code: 1 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Technical Support (Dimension and Inspiron) Technical Support (OptiPlex, Latitude, and Dell Precision) Customer Service (non-technical, post-sales issues) Transaction Sales Large Corporate Accounts HK Large Corporate Accounts GCP HK Technical Support Sales Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: dell_direct_support@dell.com Ireland Technical Support U.K. Technical Support (dial within U.K. only) Home User Customer Care Small Business Customer Care U.K. Customer Care (dial within U.K. only) Corporate Customer Care Ireland Sales U.K. Sales (dial within U.K. only) SalesFax Fax Switchboard Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers 296 93188 296 93191 800 93 8291 toll-free: 800 96 4109 toll-free: 800 96 4108 toll-free: 800 90 3708 1600 33 8045 1600 33 8044 1850 543 543 0870 908 0800 01 204 4095 01 204 4444 0870 906 0010 01 204 4003 01 204 4444 0870 907 4000 01 204 0144 01 204 5960 01 204 4444 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Getting Help 193 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Italy (Milan) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 39 City Code: 02 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Jamaica Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/it/it/emaildell/

Home and Small Business Technical Support Customer Care Fax Switchboard Corporate Technical Support Customer Care Fax Switchboard General Support (dial from within Jamaica only) 02 577 826 90 02 696 821 14 02 696 821 13 02 696 821 12 02 577 826 90 02 577 825 55 02 575 035 30 02 577 821 1-800-682-3639 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 194 Getting Help FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Japan (Kawasaki) International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 81 City Code: 44 Korea (Seoul) International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 82 City Code: 2 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Website: support.jp.dell.com Technical Support (servers) Technical Support outside of Japan (servers) Technical Support (Dimension and Inspiron) Technical Support outside of Japan (Dimension and Inspiron) Technical Support (Dell Precision, OptiPlex, and Latitude) Technical Support outside of Japan (Dell Precision, OptiPlex, and Latitude) 24-Hour Automated Order Service Customer Care Business Sales Division (up to 400 employees) Preferred Accounts Division Sales (over 400 employees) Large Corporate Accounts Sales (over 3500 employees) Public Sales (government agencies, educational institutions, and medical institutions) Global Segment Japan Individual User Faxbox Service Switchboard Technical Support Sales Customer Service (Seoul, Korea) Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Fax Switchboard Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers toll-free: 0120-198-498 81-44-556-4162 toll-free: 0120-198-226 81-44-520-1435 toll-free:0120-198-433 81-44-556-3894 044-556-3801 044-556-4240 044-556-1465 044-556-3433 044-556-3430 044-556-1469 044-556-3469 044-556-1760 044-556-3490 044-556-4300 toll-free: 080-200-3800 toll-free: 080-200-3600 toll-free: 080-200-3800 604 633 4949 2194-6202 2194-6000 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Getting Help 195 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Latin America m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Luxembourg International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 352 Macao Country Code: 853 Malaysia (Penang) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 60 City Code: 4 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Customer Technical Support (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Customer Service (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Fax (Technical Support and Customer Service)

(Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Sales (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) SalesFax (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: tech_be@dell.com Technical Support (Brussels, Belgium) Home/Small Business Sales (Brussels, Belgium) Corporate Sales (Brussels, Belgium) Customer Care (Brussels, Belgium) Fax (Brussels, Belgium) Switchboard (Brussels, Belgium) Technical Support Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Transaction Sales Technical Support Customer Service Transaction Sales Corporate Sales 512 728-4093 512 728-3619 512 728-3883 512 728-4397 512 728-4600 or 512 728-3772 02 481 92 88 toll-free: 080016884 02 481 91 00 02 481 91 19 02 481 92 99 02 481 91 00 toll-free: 0800 582 604 633 4949 toll-free: 0800 581 toll-free: 1 800 888 298 04 633 4949 toll-free: 1 800 888 202 toll-free: 1 800 888 213 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 196 Getting Help FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Mexico International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 52 Montserrat Netherlands Antilles Netherlands (Amsterdam) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 31 City Code: 20 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Customer Technical Support Sales Customer Service Main General Support General Support Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail (Technical Support):

(Enterprise): nl_server_support@dell.com

(Latitude): nl_latitude_support@dell.com

(Inspiron): nl_inspiron_support@dell.com

(Dimension): nl_dimension_support@dell.com

(OptiPlex): nl_optiplex_support@dell.com

(Dell Precision): nl_workstation_support@dell.com Technical Support Technical Support Fax Home/Small Business Customer Care Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Sales Relational Sales Home/Small Business Sales Fax Relational Sales Fax Switchboard Switchboard Fax Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers 001-877-384-8979 or 001-877-269-3383 50-81-8800 or 01-800-888-3355 001-877-384-8979 or 001-877-269-3383 50-81-8800 or 01-800-888-3355 toll-free: 1-866-278-6822 001-800-882-1519 020 674 45 00 020 674 47 66 020 674 42 00 020 674 4325 020 674 55 00 020 674 50 00 020 674 47 75 020 674 47 50 020 674 50 00 020 674 47 50 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Getting Help 197 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code New Zealand International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 64 Nicaragua Norway (Lysaker) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 47 Panama Peru Poland (Warsaw) International Access Code: 011 Country Code: 48 City Code: 22 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers E-mail (New Zealand): nz_tech_support@dell.com E-mail (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com Home and Small Business Government and Business Sales Fax General Support Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail Support (portable computers):

nor_nbk_support@dell.com E-mail Support (desktop computers):

nor_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers):

nordic_server_support@dell.com Technical Support Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Customer Care Switchboard Fax Switchboard General Support General Support Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: pl_support@dell.com Customer Service Phone Customer Care Sales Customer Service Fax Reception Desk Fax Switchboard 0800 446 255 0800 444 617 0800 441 567 0800 441 566 001-800-220-1006 671 16882 671 17514 23162298 671 16800 671 16865 001-800-507-0962 0800-50-669 57 95 700 57 95 999 57 95 999 57 95 806 57 95 998 57 95 999 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 198 Getting Help FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Portugal International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 35 E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/

Technical Support Customer Care Sales Fax Puerto Rico General Support St. Kitts and Nevis General Support St. Lucia General Support St. Vincent and the Grenadines General Support Singapore (Singapore) International Access Code: 005 Country Code: 65 Technical Support Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Transaction Sales Corporate Sales Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: dell_za_support@dell.com Technical Support Customer Care Sales Fax Switchboard Customer Technical Support, Customer Service, and Sales (Penang, Malaysia) South Africa (Johannesburg) International Access Code:

09/091 Country Code: 27 City Code: 11 Southeast Asian and Pacific Countries 800 834 077 800 300 415 or 800 834 075 800 300 410 or 800 300 411 or 800 300 412 or 121 422 07 10 121 424 01 12 1-800-805-7545 toll-free: 1-877-441-4731 1-800-882-1521 toll-free: 1-877-270-4609 toll-free: 800 6011 051 604 633 4949 toll-free: 800 6011 054 toll-free: 800 6011 053 011 709 7710 011 709 7707 011 709 7700 011 706 0495 011 709 7700 604 633 4810 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Getting Help 199 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Spain (Madrid) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 34 City Code: 91 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Sweden (Upplands Vasby) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 46 City Code: 8 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/

Home and Small Business Technical Support Customer Care Sales Switchboard Fax Corporate Technical Support Customer Care Switchboard Fax Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: swe_support@dell.com E-mail Support for Latitude and Inspiron:

Swe-nbk_kats@dell.com E-mail Support for OptiPlex: Swe_kats@dell.com E-mail Support for Servers:

Nordic_server_support@dell.com Technical Support Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Customer Care Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Support Fax Technical Support Sales 902 100 130 902 118 540 902 118 541 902 118 541 902 118 539 902 100 130 902 118 546 91 722 92 00 91 722 95 83 08 590 05 199 08 590 05 642 08 587 70 527 20 140 14 44 08 590 05 594 08 590 05 185 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 200 Getting Help FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Switzerland (Geneva) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 41 City Code: 22 Taiwan International Access Code: 002 Country Code: 886 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: swisstech@dell.com E-mail for French-speaking HSB and Corporate Customers: support.euro.dell.com/ch/fr/emaildell/

Technical Support (Home and Small Business) Technical Support (Corporate) Customer Care (Home and Small Business) Customer Care (Corporate) Fax Switchboard Technical Support (portable and desktop computers) Technical Support (servers) Transaction Sales Corporate Sales Thailand International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 66 Trinidad/Tobago Turks and Caicos Islands Technical Support Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Sales General Support General Support 0844 811 411 0844 822 844 0848 802 202 0848 821 721 022 799 01 90 022 799 01 01 toll-free: 00801 86 1011 toll-free: 0080 60 1256 toll-free: 0080 651 228 or 0800 33 556 toll-free: 0080 651 227 or 0800 33 555 toll-free: 0880 060 07 604 633 4949 toll-free: 0880 060 09 1-800-805-8035 toll-free: 1-866-540-3355 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Getting Help 201 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code U.K. (Bracknell) International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 44 City Code: 1344 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Uruguay Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Website: support.euro.dell.com Customer Care website:

dell.co.uk/lca/customerservices E-mail: dell_direct_support@dell.com Technical Support (Corporate/Preferred Accounts/PAD [1000+ employees]) Technical Support (direct/PAD and general) Global Accounts Customer Care Home and Small Business Customer Care Corporate Customer Care Preferred Accounts (5005000 employees) Customer Care Central Government Customer Care Local Government & Education Customer Care Health Customer Care Home and Small Business Sales Corporate/Public Sector Sales General Support 0870 908 0500 0870 908 0800 01344 373 185 or 01344 373 186 0870 906 0010 0870 908 0500 01344 373 196 01344 373 193 01344 373 199 01344 373 194 0870 907 4000 01344 860 456 toll-free: 000-413-598-2521 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 202 Getting Help FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code U.S.A. (Austin, Texas) International Access Code: 011 Country Code: 1 Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Automated Order-Status Service AutoTech (portable and desktop computers) Consumer (Home and Home Office) Technical Support Customer Service DellNet Service and Support Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers Financial Services website: www.dellfinancialservices.com Financial Services (lease/loans) Financial Services (Dell Preferred Accounts [DPA]) Business Customer Service and Technical Support Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers Projectors Technical Support Public (government, education, and healthcare) Customer Service and Technical Support Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers Dell Sales Dell Outlet Store (Dell refurbished computers) Software and Peripherals Sales Spare Parts Sales Extended Service and Warranty Sales Fax Dell Services for the Deaf, Hard-of-Hearing, or Speech-Impaired U.S. Virgin Islands Venezuela General Support General Support Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers toll-free: 1-800-433-9014 toll-free: 1-800-247-9362 toll-free: 1-800-624-9896 toll-free: 1-800-624-9897 toll-free: 1-877-Dellnet

(1-877-335-5638) toll-free: 1-800-695-8133 toll-free: 1-877-577-3355 toll-free: 1-800-283-2210 toll-free: 1-800-822-8965 toll-free: 1-800-695-8133 toll-free: 1-877-459-7298 toll-free: 1-800-456-3355 toll-free: 1-800-234-1490 toll-free: 1-800-289-3355 or toll-free: 1-800-879-3355 toll-free: 1-888-798-7561 toll-free: 1-800-671-3355 toll-free: 1-800-357-3355 toll-free: 1-800-247-4618 toll-free: 1-800-727-8320 toll-free: 1-877-DELLTTY

(1-877-335-5889) 1-877-673-3355 8001-3605 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Getting Help 203 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\gethelp.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 204 Getting Help 22 S E C T I O N 2 2 S p e c i f i c a t i o n s Microprocessor System Information PC Card Smart Card Memory Ports and Connectors Communications Video Audio Display Keyboard Touch Pad Track Stick Battery AC Adapter Physical Environmental FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\specs.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\specs.fm Microprocessor Microprocessor type L1 cache L2 cache Intel Centrino Mobile Technology or Intel Pentium M 32 KB instruction and 32 KB write-back data cache 1 MB External bus frequency 400 MHz, source synchronous processor system bus System Information System chip set Flash EPROM Data bus width Microprocessor address bus width PCI bus PC Card CardBus controller PC Card connector Cards supported PC Card connector size Data width (maximum) Smart Card Read/write capabilities Intel 855GM 1 MBit 64 bits 32 bits 32 bits TI PCI7510 Cardbus controller supports one Type I or Type II card 3.3 V and 5 V 68 pins PCMCIA 16 bits CardBus 32 bits reads and writes to all ISO 7816 1/2/3/4 microprocessor cards (T=0, T=1) Cards supported Program technology supported Interface speed EMV level 3V and 5V Java cards 9600115,200 BPS level 1 certified D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 206 Specifications FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\specs.fm Smart Card (continued) WHQL certification PC/SC Compatibility Insert/eject cycles Memory compatible within a PKI environment certified for up to 100,000 cycles Memory module connector two user-accessible DDR SDRAM sockets Memory module capacities 128, 256, 512, and 1024 MB Memory type Standard memory Maximum memory Ports and Connectors 2.5 V 266 MHz DDR SDRAM 128 MB 2048 MB Serial Video Audio USB Dell D/Bay connector Infrared Mini PCI Modem Network adapter IEEE 1394 Communications Modem:

9-pin connector; 16550C-compatible, 16-byte buffer connector 15-hole connector microphone connector, stereo headphone/speakers connector two 4-pin USB 2.0-compliant connectors

(including the Dell D/Bay connector) 4-pin power supply and 4-pin USB 2.0-

compliant connector sensor compatible with IrDA Standard 1.1

(Fast IR) and IrDA Standard 1.0 (Slow IR) Type IIIA Mini PCI card slot RJ-11 port RJ-45 port 4-pin serial connector D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Specifications 207 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\specs.fm Communications (continued) Type Controller Interface Network adapter Wireless Video Video type Video controller Video memory v.92 56K MDC softmodem internal AC97 bus 10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN on system board Internal Mini PCI Wi-Fi and Bluetooth wireless support (optional) Intel UMA integrated 855GM chip set 1 MB with Intel DVMT up to 32 MB (with 128 MB of system memory) or 64 MB (with 256 MB or more of system memory) LCD interface LVDS Audio Audio controller Stereo conversion Interfaces:

Internal External Speaker AC97 (Soft Audio) 18-bit (analog-to-digital and digital-to-

analog) AC97 microphone-in connector, stereo headphones/speakers connector one 8-ohm speaker Internal speaker amplifier 1.2-W channel into 8 ohms Volume controls keyboard shortcuts, program menus Display Type (active-matrix TFT) XGA Dimensions:

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 208 Specifications FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\specs.fm Display (continued) Height Width Diagonal 214.3 mm (8.4 inches) 285.7 mm (11.3 inches) 357.1 mm (14.1 inches) Maximum resolutions 1024 x 768 at 256 K (or 262,144) colors Response time (typical) Refresh rate Operating angle Viewing angles:

Horizontal Vertical Pixel pitch 20-ms rise (maximum), 30-ms fall (maximum) 60 Hz 0 (closed) to 180 40

+10/30 0.28 x 0.28 mm Power Consumption:

Panel with backlight (typical) 6.5 W Controls Keyboard Number of keys Layout Touch Pad brightness can be controlled through keyboard shortcuts 87 (U.S. and Canada); 88 (Europe); 89

(Brazil); 91 (Japan) QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji X/Y position resolution

(graphics table mode) 240 cpi Size:

Width Height 64.88 mm (2.55-inch) sensor-active area 48.88-mm (1.92-inch) rectangle D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Specifications 209 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\specs.fm Track Stick X/Y position resolution

(graphics table mode) Size Battery Type Dimensions:

Depth Height Width Weight Voltage Charge time (approximate):

Computer on Computer off Operating time 250 count/sec @ 100 gf protrudes higher than surrounding keycaps 6-cell "smart" lithium ion (42 WHr) 4-cell "smart" lithium ion (27 WHr) 88.5 mm (3.48 inches) 21.5 mm (0.83 inch) 139.0 mm (5.47 inches) 0.32 kg (0.7 lb) (6 cell) 0.26 kg (0.57 lb) (4 cell) 14.8 VDC (4 cell); 11.1 VDC (6 cell) 2.5 hours 1 hour varies depending on operating conditions;

can be significantly reduced under certain power-intensive conditions See "Using a Battery" for more information on battery life. Life span (approximate) 300 full discharge/charge cycles Temperature range:

Operating Storage AC Adapter Input voltage 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) 90264 VAC Input current (maximum) 1.7 A D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 210 Specifications FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\specs.fm AC Adapter (continued) Input frequency Output current Output power Rated output voltage Dimensions:

Height Width Depth Weight (with cables) Temperature range:

Operating Storage Physical Height Width Depth Weight:

4763 Hz 5.5 A (maximum at 4-second pulse);

4.5 A (continuous) 90 W or 65 W 19.5 VDC 27.94 mm (1.1 inches) 58.42 mm (2.3 inches) 133.85 mm (5.25 inches) 0.4 kg (0.9 lb) 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) 29.7 mm (1.17 inches) 290 mm (11.42 inches) 242.5 mm (9.55 inches) Computer with 4-cell battery 1.7 kg (3.7 lb) Dell D/Bay (alone) CD drive (alone) 256 g (0.56 lb) 215 g (0.47 lb) Environmental Temperature range:

Operating Storage Relative humidity (maximum):

0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Specifications 211 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\specs.fm Environmental (continued) Operating Storage 10% to 90% (noncondensing) 5% to 95% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration (using a random-vibration spectrum that simulates user environment):

Operating Storage Maximum shock (measured with hard drive in head-parked position and a 2-ms half-sine pulse):

Operating Storage Altitude (maximum):

Operating Storage 0.9 GRMS 1.3 GRMS 122 G 163 G 15.2 to 3048 m (50 to 10,000 ft) 15.2 to 10,668 m (50 to 35,000 ft) D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 212 Specifications 23 S E C T I O N 2 3 A p p e n d i x FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm Ergonomic Computing Habits CAUTION: Improper or prolonged keyboard use may result in injury. CAUTION: Viewing the display or external monitor screen for extended periods of time may result in eye strain. For comfort and efficiency, observe the following ergonomic guidelines when setting up and using your computer workstation:

Position your computer directly in front of you as you work. Adjust the tilt of the computers display, its contrast and/or brightness settings, and the lighting around you (such as overhead lights, desk lamps, and the curtains or blinds on nearby windows) to minimize reflections and glare on the display. When using an external monitor with your computer, set the monitor at a comfortable viewing distance (usually 450 to 610 millimeters [18 to 24 inches] from your eyes). Make sure the monitor screen is at eye level or slightly lower when you are sitting in front of the monitor. Use a chair that provides good lower-back support. Keep your forearms horizontal with your wrists in a neutral, comfortable position while using the keyboard, touch pad, track stick, or external mouse. Always use the palm rest with the keyboard, touch pad, or track stick. Leave space to rest your hands when using an external mouse. Let your upper arms hang naturally at your sides. Ensure that your feet are resting flat on the floor. When sitting, make sure the weight of your legs is on your feet and not on the front of your chair seat. Adjust your chairs height or use a footrest, if necessary, to maintain proper posture. Vary your work activities. Try to organize your work so that you do not have to type for extended periods of time. When you stop typing, try to do things that use both hands. For more information about ergonomic computing habits, see the BSR/HFES 100 standard, which can be purchased on the Human Factors and Ergonomics Society (HFES) website at:

www.hfes.org/publications/HFES100.htm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 214 Appendix FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm References:

1. American National Standards Institute. ANSI/HFES 100: American National Standards for Human Factors Engineering of Visual Display Terminal Workstations. Santa Monica, CA: Human Factors Society, Inc., 1988. 2. Human Factors and Ergonomics Society. BSR/HFES 100 Draft standard for trial use: Human Factors Engineering of Computer Workstations. Santa Monica, CA: Human Factors and Ergonomics Society, 2002. 3. International Organization for Standardization (ISO). ISO 9241 Ergonomics requirements for office work with visual display terminals (VDTs). Geneva, Switzerland: International Organization for Standardization, 1992. Regulatory Notices Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) is any signal or emission, radiated in free space or conducted along power or signal leads, that endangers the functioning of a radio navigation or other safety service or seriously degrades, obstructs, or repeatedly interrupts a licensed radio communications service. Radio communications services include but are not limited to AM/FM commercial broadcast, television, cellular services, radar, air-traffic control, pager, and Personal Communication Services

(PCS). These licensed services, along with unintentional radiators such as digital devices, including computers, contribute to the electromagnetic environment. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) is the ability of items of electronic equipment to function properly together in the electronic environment. While this computer has been designed and determined to be compliant with regulatory agency limits for EMI, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference with radio communications services, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient the receiving antenna. Relocate the computer with respect to the receiver. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Appendix 215 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm Move the computer away from the receiver. Plug the computer into a different outlet so that the computer and the receiver are on different branch circuits. If necessary, consult a Dell Technical Support representative or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Dell computers are designed, tested, and classified for their intended electromagnetic environment. These electromagnetic environment classifications generally refer to the following harmonized definitions:

Class A is typically for business or industrial environments. Class B is typically for residential environments. Information Technology Equipment (ITE), including devices, expansion cards, printers, input/output (I/O) devices, monitors, and so on, that are integrated into or connected to the computer should match the electromagnetic environment classification of the computer. A Notice About Shielded Signal Cables: Use only shielded cables for connecting devices to any Dell device to reduce the possibility of interference with radio communications services. Using shielded cables ensures that you maintain the appropriate EMC classification for the intended environment. For parallel printers, a cable is available from Dell. If you prefer, you can order a cable from Dell on the World Wide Web at accessories.us.dell.com/sna/category.asp?category_id=4117. Most Dell computers are classified for Class B environments. However, the inclusion of certain options can change the rating of some configurations to Class A. To determine the electromagnetic classification for your computer or device, see the following sections specific for each regulatory agency. Each section provides country-specific EMC/EMI or product safety information. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 216 Appendix FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm FCC Notices (U.S. Only) Most Dell computers are classified by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) as Class B digital devices. To determine which classification applies to your computer, examine all FCC registration labels located on the bottom, side, or back panel of your computer, on card-

mounting brackets, and on the cards themselves. If any one of the labels carries a Class A rating, your entire computer is considered to be a Class A digital device. If all labels carry an FCC Class B rating as distinguished by either an FCC ID number or the FCC logo, (

considered to be a Class B digital device.

), your computer is Once you have determined your computers FCC classification, read the appropriate FCC notice. Note that FCC regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell could void your authority to operate this equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Class A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturers instruction manual, may cause harmful interference with radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case you will be required to correct the interference at your own expense. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Appendix 217 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm Class B This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturers instruction manual, may cause interference with radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. FCC Identification Information The following information is provided on the device or devices covered in this document in compliance with FCC regulations:

Model number: PPT Company name:

Dell Computer Corporation One Dell Way Round Rock, Texas 78682 USA 512-338-4400 Modem Regulatory Information This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the bottom of your computer is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for your equipment. If requested, you must provide this information to the telephone company. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 218 Appendix FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most areas, the sum of all the RENs on your telephone line should be less than five to ensure proper service from the telephone company. To be certain of the number of devices that you may connect to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. The registration jack Universal Service Order Code (USOC) used by this equipment is RJ-11C. An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant. This equipment cannot be used on public coin-phone service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. There are no user serviceable parts on the modem contained in your computer. If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that service may be temporarily discontinued. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service. If you experience trouble with this telephone equipment, see "Contacting Dell" to find the appropriate telephone number for obtaining customer assistance. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Appendix 219 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm Fax Branding The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent, identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges. IC Notice (Canada Only) Most Dell computers (and other Dell digital apparatus) are classified by the Industry Canada (IC) Interference-Causing Equipment Standard #3

(ICES-003) as Class B digital devices. To determine which classification

(Class A or B) applies to your computer (or other Dell digital apparatus), examine all registration labels located on the bottom, side, or the back panel of your computer (or other digital apparatus). A statement in the form of

"IC Class A ICES-003" or "IC Class B ICES-003" will be located on one of these labels. Note that Industry Canada regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell could void your authority to operate this equipment. This Class B (or Class A, if so indicated on the registration label) digital apparatus meets the requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations. Cet appareil numrique de la Classe B (ou Classe A, si ainsi indiqu sur ltiquette denregistration) respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le Materiel Brouilleur du Canada. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 220 Appendix FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm Modem Regulatory Information The IC label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The IC label does not guarantee that the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alteration made by a user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telephone communications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water-pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. NOTICE: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves. Contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. NOTE: The REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed the number five. The REN for the internal modem as stated on the IC regulatory label located on the bottom of the computer is 0.6 B. The following information is provided in compliance with IC regulations:

Dell Computer Corporation One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 USA 512-338-4400 D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Appendix 221 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm CE Notice (European Union) Marking by the symbol indicates compliance of this Dell computer to the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive of the European Union. Such marking is indicative that this Dell system meets the following technical standards:

EN 55022 "Information Technology Equipment Radio Disturbance Characteristics Limits and Methods of Measurement."

EN 55024 "Information Technology Equipment - Immunity Characteristics - Limits and Methods of Measurement."

EN 61000-3-2 "Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3:

Limits - Section 2: Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions

(Equipment Input Current Up to and Including 16 A Per Phase)."

EN 61000-3-3 "Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3:

Limits - Section 3: Limitation of Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker in Low-Voltage Supply Systems for Equipment With Rated Current Up to and Including 16 A."

EN 60950 "Safety of Information Technology Equipment."

NOTE: EN 55022 emissions requirements provide for two classifications:

Class A is for typical commercial areas. Class B is for typical domestic areas. This Dell device is classified for use in a typical Class B domestic environment. A "Declaration of Conformity" in accordance with the preceding directives and standards has been made and is on file at Dell Computer Corporation Products Europe BV, Limerick, Ireland. CE Mark Notice This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union Directive 1999/5/EC. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 222 Appendix FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm New Zealand Telecom Warnings General

"The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecoms network services."

"This equipment does not fully meet Telecom impedance requirements. Performance limitations may occur when used in conjunction with some parts of the network. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances."

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Appendix 223 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm

"This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergence Service."

"If a charge for local calls is unacceptable, the Dial button should NOT be used for local calls. Only the 7-digits of the local number should be dialed from your telephone. DO NOT dial the area code digit or the 0 prefix."

"This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line."

Important Notice

"Under power failure conditions, this telephone may not operate. Please ensure that a separate telephone, not dependent on local power, is available for emergency use."

"Some parameters required for compliance with Telecoms Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecoms Specification:

1 There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation, and the equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. 2 Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall go on-line for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. 3 The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing."

"All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is to be aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act of 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is used and what is disclosed to any other party."

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 224 Appendix FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm ENERGY STAR Compliance Certain configurations of Dell computers comply with the requirements set forth by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for energy-efficient computers. If the front panel of your computer bears the ENERGY STAR Emblem, your original configuration complies with these requirements and all ENERGY STAR power management features of the computer are enabled. NOTE: Any Dell computer bearing the ENERGY STAR Emblem is certified to comply with EPA ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Dell. Any changes you make to this configuration (such as installing additional expansion cards or drives) may increase the computers power consumption beyond the limits set by the EPA's ENERGY STAR Computers program. ENERGY STAR Emblem The EPA's ENERGY STAR Computers program is a joint effort between the EPA and computer manufacturers to reduce air pollution by promoting energy-efficient computer products. The EPA estimates that use of ENERGY STAR computer products can save computer users up to two billion dollars annually in electricity costs. In turn, this reduction in electricity usage can reduce emissions of carbon dioxide, the gas primarily responsible for the greenhouse effect, and sulfur dioxide and nitrogen oxides, the primary causes of acid rain. You can also help reduce electricity usage and its side effects by turning off your computer when it is not in use for extended periods of time, particularly at night and on weekends. Simplified Chinese Class A Warning Notice (China Only) On Class A systems, the following warning will appear near the regulatory label:

Warning: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Appendix 225 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm EN 55022 Compliance (Czech Republic Only) This device belongs to Class B devices as described in EN 55022, unless it is specifically stated that it is a Class A device on the specification label. The following applies to devices in Class A of EN 55022 (radius of protection up to 30 meters). The user of the device is obliged to take all steps necessary to remove sources of interference to telecommunication or other devices. VCCI Notice (Japan Only) Most Dell computers are classified by the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) as Class B information technology equipment (ITE). However, the inclusion of certain options can change the rating of some configurations to Class A. ITE, including devices, expansion cards, printers, input/output (I/O) devices, monitors, and so on, integrated into or connected to the computer should match the electromagnetic environment classification (Class A or B) of the computer. To determine which classification applies to your computer, examine the regulatory labels/markings (see "VCCI Class A ITE Regulatory Mark" and

"VCCI Class B ITE Regulatory Mark") located on the bottom, side, or back panel of your computer. Once you have determined your computers VCCI classification, read the appropriate VCCI notice. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 226 Appendix FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm Class A ITE This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) for information technology equipment. If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio disturbance may arise. When such trouble occurs, the user may be required to take corrective actions. VCCI Class A ITE Regulatory Mark If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class A product:

VCCI Class B ITE This is a Class B product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) for information technology equipment. If this equipment is used near a radio or television receiver in a domestic environment, it may cause radio interference. Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual. VCCI Class B ITE Regulatory Mark If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class B product:

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Appendix 227 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm MIC Notice (Republic of Korea Only) To determine which classification (Class A or B) applies to your computer

(or other Dell digital device), examine the Republic of Korean Ministry of Information and Communications (MIC) registration labels located on your computer (or other Dell digital device). The MIC label may be located separately from the other regulatory marking applied to your product. Line two of the label identifies the emissions class for the product"(A)" for Class A products or "(B)" for Class B products. NOTE: MIC emissions requirements provide for two classifications:

Class A devices are for business purposes. Class B devices are for nonbusiness purposes. Class A Device Please note that this device has been approved for business purposes with regard to electromagnetic interference. If you find that this device is not suitable for your use, you may exchange it for a nonbusiness-purpose device. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 228 Appendix FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm MIC Class A Regulatory Label If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class A product:

Class B Device Please note that this device has been approved for nonbusiness purposes and may be used in any environment, including residential areas. MIC Class B Regulatory Label If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class B product. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Appendix 229 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm Polish Center for Testing and Certification Notice The equipment should draw power from a socket with an attached protection circuit (a 3-prong socket). All equipment that works together

(computer, monitor, printer, and so on) should have the same power supply source. The phasing conductor of the rooms electrical installation should have a reserve short-circuit protection device in the form of a fuse with a nominal value no larger than 16 amperes (A). To completely switch off the equipment, the power supply cable must be removed from the power supply socket, which should be located near the equipment and easily accessible. A protection mark "B" confirms that the equipment is in compliance with the protection usage requirements of standards PN-93/T-42107 and PN-EN 55022. PNEN 60950:2000 i PNEN 55022:2000. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 230 Appendix FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm BSMI Notice (Taiwan Only) or If you find a mark on the regulatory label on the bottom, side, or back panel of your computer, the following section is applicable:

D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Appendix 231 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 232 Appendix FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm NOM Information (Mexico Only) The following information is provided on the device(s) described in this document in compliance with the requirements of the official Mexican standards (NOM):

Exporter:

Importer:

Ship to:

Dell Computer Corporation One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 Dell Computer de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11 Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 Mxico, D.F. Dell Computer de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. al Cuidado de Kuehne &

Nagel de Mxico S. de R.I. Avenida Soles No. 55 Col. Peon de los Baos 15520 Mxico, D.F. Model number:

Supply voltage:

PPT 100240 VAC D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Appendix 233 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\appendix.fm Frequency:

5060 Hz Current Consumption:

1.5 A Output voltage:

Output current:

20 VDC 4.6 A Warranty and Return Policy Dell Computer Corporation (Dell) manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your computer, see the System Information Guide. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 234 Appendix 24 S E C T I O N 2 4 G l o s s a r y FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\glossary.fm D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\glossary.fm Terms in this Glossary are provided for informational purposes only and may or may not describe features included with your particular computer. A AC alternating current The form of electricity that powers your computer when you plug the AC adapter power cable into an electrical outlet. ACPI advanced configuration and power interface A power management specification that enables Microsoft Windows operating systems to put a computer in standby or hibernate mode to conserve the amount of electrical power allocated to each device attached to the computer. AGP accelerated graphics port A dedicated graphics port that allows system memory to be used for video-related tasks. AGP delivers a smooth, true-color video image because of the faster interface between the video circuitry and the computer memory. A NT I V IR U S S O F T W A R E A program designed to identify, quarantine, and/or delete viruses from your computer. APR advanced port replicator A docking device that allows you to conveniently use a monitor, keyboard, mouse, and other devices with your portable computer. ASF alert standards format A standard to define a mechanism for reporting hardware and software alerts to a management console. ASF is designed to be platform- and operating system-independent. B B A CK UP A copy of a program or data file on a floppy disk, CD, or hard drive. As a precaution, back up the data files from your hard drive regularly. B A T T E R Y An internal power source used to operate portable computers when not connected to an AC adapter and an electrical outlet. B A T T E R Y L IF E S P A N The length of time (years) during which a portable computer battery is able to be depleted and recharged. B A T T E R Y O P E R A T IN G T I M E The length of time (minutes or hours) that a portable computer battery holds a charge while powering the computer. BIOS basic input/output system A program (or utility) that serves as an interface between the computer hardware and the operating system. Unless you understand what effect the settings have on the computer, do not change the settings for this program. Also referred to as the system setup program. B IT The smallest unit of data interpreted by your computer. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 236 Glossar y FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\glossary.fm B L UE T O O T H A wireless technology standard for short-range (9 m [29 feet]) networking devices that allows for enabled devices to automatically recognize each other. B O O T S E Q U E NC E Specifies the order of the devices from which the computer attempts to boot. B O O T AB L E CD A CD that you can use to start your computer. In case your hard drive is damaged or your computer has a virus, ensure that you always have a bootable CD or floppy disk available. Your Drivers and Utilities or Resource CD is a bootable CD. B O O T AB L E D I S K A disk that you can use to start your computer. In case your hard drive is damaged or your computer has a virus, ensure that you always have a bootable CD or floppy disk available. B P S bits per second The standard unit for measuring data transmission speed. BTU British thermal unit A measurement of heat output. B US A communication pathway between the components in your computer. B US S P E E D The speed, given in MHz, that indicates how fast a bus can transfer information. B YT E The basic data unit used by your computer. A byte is usually equal to 8 bits. C C Celsius A temperature measurement system where 0 is the freezing point and 100 is the boiling point of water. C AC H E A special high-speed storage mechanism which can be either a reserved section of main memory or an independent high-speed storage device. The cache enhances the efficiency of many microprocessor operations. L1 cache Primary cache stored inside the microprocessor. L2 cache Secondary cache which can either be external to the microprocessor or incorporated into the microprocessor architecture. C AR N E T An international customs document that facilitates temporary imports into foreign countries. Also known as a merchandise passport. CD compact disc An optical form of storage media, typically used for audio and software programs. CD D R I VE A drive that uses optical technology to read data from CDs. CD P L A Y ER The software used to play music CDs. The CD player displays a window with buttons that you use to play a CD. CD-R CD recordable A recordable version of a CD. Data can be recorded D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Glossar y 237 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\glossary.fm only once onto a CD-R. Once recorded, the data cannot be erased or written over. CD-RW CD rewritable A rewritable version of a CD. Data can be written to a CD-RW disc, and then erased and written over (rewritten). CD-RW D R I VE A drive that can read CDs and write to CD-RW (rewritable CDs) and CD-R (recordable CDs) discs. You can write to CD-RW discs multiple times, but you can write to CD-R discs only once. CD-RW/DVD D R I V E A drive, sometimes referred to as a combo drive, that can read CDs and DVDs and write to CD-RW (rewritable CDs) and CD-R

(recordable CDs) discs. You can write to CD-RW discs multiple times, but you can write to CD-R discs only once. C L O C K S P E E D The speed, given in MHz, that indicates how fast computer components that are connected to the system bus operate. COA Certificate of Authenticity The Windows alpha-numeric code located on a sticker on your computer. You may need the COA to complete the operating system setup or reinstallation. Also referred to as the Product Key or Product ID. C O NT R O L PAN E L A Windows utility that allows you to modify operating system and hardware settings, such as display settings. C O NT R O L L E R A chip that controls the transfer of data between the microprocessor and memory or between the microprocessor and devices. CRIMM continuity rambus in-line memory module A special module that has no memory chips and is used to fill unused RIMM slots. C UR S O R The marker on a display or screen that shows where the next keyboard, touch pad, or mouse action will occur. It often is a blinking solid line, an underline character, or a small arrow. D DDR SDRAM double-data-rate SDRAM A type of SDRAM that doubles the data burst cycle, improving system performance. D E VI C E Hardware such as a disk drive, printer, or keyboard that is installed in or connected to your computer. D E VI C E D R I V ER See driver. DIN C O NN E CT O R A round, six-pin connector that conforms to DIN

(Deutsche Industrie-Norm) standards; it is typically used to connect PS/2 keyboard or mouse cable connectors. D IS K S T R I P I N G A technique for spreading data over multiple disk drives. Disk striping can speed up operations that retrieve data from disk storage. Computers that use disk striping generally allow the user to select the data unit size or stripe width. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 238 Glossar y FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\glossary.fm DMA direct memory access A channel that allows certain types of data transfer between RAM and a device to bypass the microprocessor. D O C KI NG D EV I C E See APR. DMTF Distributed Management Task Force A consortium of hardware and software companies who develop management standards for distributed desktop, network, enterprise, and Internet environments. D O MA I N A group of computers, programs, and devices on a network that are administered as a unit with common rules and procedures for use by a specific group of users. A user logs on to the domain to gain access to the resources. DRAM dynamic random-access memory Memory that stores information in integrated circuits containing capacitors. D R IV E R Software that allows the operating system to control a device such as a printer. Many devices do not work properly if the correct driver is not installed in the computer. DSL Digital Subscriber Line A technology that provides a constant, high-

speed Internet connection through an analog telephone line. D UA L D I S P L A Y M OD E A display setting that allows you to use a second monitor as an extension of your display. Also referred to as extended display mode. DVD digital versatile disc A disc usually used to store movies. DVDs are double-sided, whereas CDs are single-sided. DVD drives read most CD media as well. DVD D R IV E A drive that uses optical technology to read data from DVDs and CDs. DVD P L A Y ER The software used to watch DVD movies. The DVD player displays a window with buttons that you use to watch a movie. DVD+RW DVD rewritable A rewritable version of a DVD. Data can be written to a DVD+RW disc, and then erased and written over (rewritten).

(DVD+RW technology is different from DVD-RW technology.) DVD+RW D R IV E A drive that can read DVDs and most CD media and write to DVD+RW (rewritable DVDs) discs. DVI digital video interface A standard for digital transmission between a computer and a digital video display; the DVI adapter works through the computers integrated graphics. E ECC error checking and correction A type of memory that includes special circuitry for testing the accuracy of data as it passes in and out of memory. ECP extended capabilities port A parallel connector design that provides D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Glossar y 239 FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\glossary.fm m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w NOTE: If your computer has two PC Card connectors, always install extended PC Cards in the top connector. improved bidirectional data transmission. Similar to EPP, ECP uses direct memory access to transfer data and often improves performance. EIDE enhanced integrated device electronics An improved version of the IDE interface for hard drives and CD drives. EMI electromagnetic interference Electrical interference caused by electromagnetic radiation. ENERGY STAR Environmental Protection Agency requirements that decrease the overall consumption of electricity. EPP enhanced parallel port A parallel connector design that provides bidirectional data transmission. ESD electrostatic discharge A rapid discharge of static electricity. ESD can damage integrated circuits found in computer and communications equipment. EX P A NS I O N C A RD A circuit board that installs in an expansion slot on the system board in some computers, expanding the capabilities of the computer. Examples include video, modem, and sound cards. EX P A NS I O N S L O T A connector on the system board (in some computers) where you insert an expansion card, connecting it to the system bus. E X PR E S S S ER V I CE C OD E A numeric code located on a sticker on your Dell computer. Use the Express Service Code when contacting Dell for assistance. Express Service Code service may not be available in some countries. EX T E ND E D D IS P L AY MO D E A display setting that allows you to use a second monitor as an extension of your display. Also referred to as dual display mode. EX T E ND E D PC CA R D A PC Card that extends beyond the edge of the PC Card slot when installed. NOTICE: Always remove an extended PC Card before packing the computer or traveling. If something strikes the exposed end of the PC Card, the system board may be damaged. F FA HR E NH E IT A temperature measurement system where 32 is the freezing point and 212 is the boiling point of water. FCC Federal Communications Commission A U.S. agency responsible for enforcing communications-related regulations that state how much radiation computers and other electronic equipment can emit. F L O P P Y D R I V E A disk drive that can read and write to floppy disks. F O L DE R A term used to describe space on a disk or drive where files are organized and grouped. Files in a folder can be viewed and ordered in various ways, such as alphabetically, by date, and by size. FORM AT The process that prepares a drive or disk for file storage. When a drive D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 240 Glossar y FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\glossary.fm or disk is formatted, the existing information on it is lost. FSB front side bus The data path and physical interface between the microprocessor and RAM. F TP file transfer protocol A standard Internet protocol used to exchange files between computers connected to the Internet. G G gravity A measurement of weight and force. GB gigabyte A measurement of data storage that equals 1024 MB

(1,073,741,824 bytes). When used to refer to hard drive storage, the term is often rounded to 1,000,000,000 bytes. GH Z gigahertz A measurement of frequency that equals one thousand million Hz, or one thousand MHz. The speeds for computer microprocessors, buses, and interfaces are often measured in GHz. G RA P H IC S M OD E A video mode that can be defined as x horizontal pixels by y vertical pixels by z colors. Graphics modes can display an unlimited variety of shapes and fonts. GUI graphical user interface Software that interacts with the user by means of menus, windows, and icons. Most programs that operate on the Windows operating systems are GUIs. H HA R D DR I V E A drive that reads and writes data on a hard disk. The terms hard drive and hard disk are often used interchangeably. HE A T S I N K A metal plate on some microprocessors that helps dissipate heat. HE L P FI LE A file that contains descriptive or instructional information about a product. Some help files are associated with a particular program, such as Help in Microsoft Word. Other help files function as stand-alone reference sources. Help files typically have a filename extension of .hlp or .chm. HI B E RN A T E M O D E A power management mode that saves everything in memory to a reserved space on the hard drive and then turns off the computer. When you restart the computer, the memory information that was saved to the hard drive is automatically restored. HTML hypertext markup language A set of codes inserted into an Internet web page intended for display on an Internet browser. HTTP hypertext transfer protocol A protocol for exchanging files between computers connected to the Internet. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Glossar y 241 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\glossary.fm H Z hertz A unit of frequency measurement that equals 1 cycle per second. Computers and electronic devices are often measured in kilohertz (kHz), megahertz

(MHz), gigahertz (GHz), or terahertz (THz). I IC Industry Canada The Canadian regulatory body responsible for regulating emissions from electronic equipment, much as the FCC does in the United States. IC integrated circuit A semiconductor wafer, or chip, on which thousands or millions of tiny electronic components are fabricated for use in computer, audio, and video equipment. IDE integrated device electronics An interface for mass storage devices in which the controller is integrated into the hard drive or CD drive. IEEE 1394 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. A high-

performance serial bus used to connect IEEE 1394-compatible devices, such as digital cameras and DVD players, to the computer. I NF R A R E D S E N S O R A port that allows you to transfer data between the computer and infrared-compatible devices without using a cable connection. I NT E G R AT ED Usually refers to components that are physically located on the computers system board. Also referred to as built-in. I/O input/output An operation or device that enters and extracts data from your computer. Keyboards and printers are I/O devices. I/O A D D R E S S An address in RAM that is associated with a specific device

(such as a serial connector, parallel connector, or expansion slot) and allows the microprocessor to communicate with that device. IRDA Infrared Data Association The organization that creates international standards for infrared communications. IRQ interrupt request An electronic pathway assigned to a specific device so that the device can communicate with the microprocessor. Each device connection must be assigned an IRQ. Although two devices can share the same IRQ assignment, you cannot operate both devices simultaneously. ISP Internet service provider A company that allows you to access its host server to connect directly to the Internet, send and receive e-mail, and access websites. The ISP typically provides you with a software package, user name, and access phone numbers for a fee. K K B kilobit A unit of data that equals 1024 bits. A measurement of the capacity of memory integrated circuits. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 242 Glossar y FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\glossary.fm KB kilobyte A unit of data that equals 1024 bytes but is often referred to as 1000 bytes. KE Y BO A R D S H O R T C U T A command requiring you to press multiple keys at the same time. Also referred to as a key combination. KH Z kilohertz A measurement of frequency that equals 1000 Hz. L LAN local area network A computer network covering a small area. A LAN usually is confined to a building or a few nearby buildings. A LAN can be connected to another LAN over any distance through telephone lines and radio waves to form a wide area network (WAN). LCD liquid crystal display The technology used by portable computer and flat-panel displays. LED light-emitting diode An electronic component that emits light to indicate the status of the computer. L O C A L B US A data bus that provides a fast throughput for devices to the microprocessor. LPT line print terminal The designation for a parallel connection to a printer or other parallel device. M MB megabit A measurement of memory chip capacity that equals 1024 Kb. MB P S megabits per second One million bits per second. This measurement is typically used for transmission speeds for networks and modems. MB megabyte A measurement of data storage that equals 1,048,576 bytes. 1 MB equals 1024 KB. When used to refer to hard drive storage, the term is often rounded to 1,000,000 bytes. MB/S EC megabytes per second One million bytes per second. This measurement is typically used for data transfer ratings. ME M O R Y A temporary data storage area inside your computer. Because the data in memory is not permanent, it is recommended that you frequently save your files while you are working on them, and always save your files before you shut down the computer. Your computer can contain several different forms of memory, such as RAM, ROM, and video memory. Frequently, the word memory is used as a synonym for RAM. ME M O R Y A D D R E S S A specific location where data is temporarily stored in RAM. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Glossar y 243 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\glossary.fm ME M O R Y M A P P IN G The process by which the computer assigns memory addresses to physical locations at start-up. Devices and software can then identify information that the microprocessor can access. ME M O R Y M O D UL E A small circuit board containing memory chips, which connects to the system board. MH Z megahertz A measure of frequency that equals 1 million cycles per second. The speeds for computer microprocessors, buses, and interfaces are often measured in MHz. MI C R O P RO C E S S O R A computer chip that interprets and executes program instructions. Sometimes the microprocessor is referred to as the processor or the CPU (central processing unit). MO D E M A device that allows your computer to communicate with other computers over analog telephone lines. Three types of modems include: external, PC Card, and internal. You typically use your modem to connect to the Internet and exchange e-mail. MO D U L E BA Y A bay that supports devices such as optical drives, a second battery, or a Dell TravelLite module. MO N I TO R The high-resolution TV-like device that displays computer output. MO U S E A pointing device that controls the movement of the cursor on your screen. Typically you roll the mouse over a hard, flat surface to move the pointer or cursor on your screen. MS millisecond A measure of time that equals one thousandth of a second. Access times of storage devices are often measured in ms. N NE TWO R K A D A P T E R A chip that provides network capabilities. A computer may include a network adapter on its system board, or it may contain a PC Card with an adapter on it. A network adapter is also referred to as a NIC (network interface controller). NIC See network adapter. NO T I F I C A T IO N AR E A The section of the Windows taskbar that contains icons for providing quick access to programs and computer functions, such as the clock, volume control, and print status. Also referred to as system tray. NS nanosecond A measure of time that equals one billionth of a second. NVRAM nonvolatile random access memory A type of memory that stores data when the computer is turned off or loses its external power source. NVRAM is used for maintaining computer configuration information such as date, time, and other system setup options that you can set. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 244 Glossar y FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\glossary.fm O O P T IC A L D R IV E A drive that uses optical technology to read or write data from CDs, DVDs, or DVD+RWs. Example of optical drives include CD drives, DVD drives, CD-RW drives, and CD-RW/DVD combo drives. P P A RA L L E L CO N NE C T O R An I/O port often used to connect a parallel printer to your computer. Also referred to as an LPT port. P A RT I T I O N A physical storage area on a hard drive that is assigned to one or more logical storage areas known as logical drives. Each partition can contain multiple logical drives. PC C AR D A removable I/O card adhering to the PCMCIA standard. Modems and network adapters are common types of PC Cards. PCI peripheral component interconnect PCI is a local bus that supports 32-

and 64-bit data paths, providing a high-speed data path between the microprocessor and devices such as video, drives, and networks. PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association The organization that establishes standards for PC Cards. PIN personal identification number A sequence of numerals and/or letters used to restrict unauthorized access to computer networks and other secure systems. PIO programmed input/output A method of transferring data between two devices through the microprocessor as part of the data path. P IXE L A single point on a display screen. Pixels are arranged in rows and columns to create an image. A video resolution, such as 800 x 600, is expressed as the number of pixels across by the number of pixels up and down. PL UG- A ND-P L A Y The ability of the computer to automatically configure devices. Plug and Play provides automatic installation, configuration, and compatibility with existing hardware if the BIOS, operating system, and all devices are Plug and Play compliant. POST power-on self-test Diagnostics programs, loaded automatically by the BIOS, that perform basic tests on the major computer components, such as memory, hard drives, and video. If no problems are detected during POST, the computer continues the start-up. P R OG R A M Any software that processes data for you, including spreadsheet, word processor, database, and game packages. Programs require an operating system to run. PS/2 personal system/2 A type of connector for attaching a PS/2-compatible keyboard, mouse, or keypad. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Glossar y 245 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\glossary.fm PXE pre-boot execution environment A WfM (Wired for Management) standard that allows networked computers that do not have an operating system to be configured and started remotely. R RAID redundant array of independent disks A system of two or more drives working together for performance and fault tolerance. RAID drives are typically used on servers and high-end PCs. The three most common RAID levels are 0, 3, and 5:

Level 0: Provides data striping but no redundancy. Level 0 improves performance but does not provide fault tolerance. Level 3: Same as Level 0, but also reserves one dedicated drive for error correction data, providing good performance and some level of fault tolerance. Level 5: Provides data striping at the byte level and also stripe error correction information, resulting in excellent performance and good fault tolerance. RAM random-access memory The primary temporary storage area for program instructions and data. Any information stored in RAM is lost when you shut down your computer. R E AD M E F IL E A text file included with a software package or hardware product. Typically, readme files provide installation information and describe new product enhancements or corrections that have not yet been documented. R E AD-O NL Y Data and/or files you can view but cannot edit or delete. A file can have read-only status if:

It resides on a physically write-protected floppy disk, CD, or DVD. It is located on a network in a directory and the system administrator has assigned rights only to specific individuals. R E F R E S H R A T E The frequency, measured in Hz, at which your screen's horizontal lines are recharged (sometimes also referred to as its vertical frequency). The higher the refresh rate, the less video flicker can be seen by the human eye. R E S O L U T IO N The sharpness and clarity of an image produced by a printer or displayed on a monitor. The higher the resolution, the sharper the image. RFI radio frequency interference Interference that is generated at typical radio frequencies, in the range of 10 kHz to 100,000 MHz. Radio frequencies are at the lower end of the electromagnetic frequency spectrum and are more likely to have interference than the higher frequency radiations, such as infrared and light. ROM read-only memory Memory that stores data and programs that cannot be deleted or written to by the computer. ROM, unlike RAM, retains its contents after you shut down your computer. Some programs essential to the operation of your computer reside in ROM. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 246 Glossar y FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\glossary.fm RPM revolutions per minute The number of rotations that occur per minute. Hard drive speed is often measured in rpm. RTC real time clock Battery-powered clock on the system board that keeps the date and time after you shut down the computer. RTCRST real-time clock reset A jumper on the system board of some computers that can often be used for troubleshooting problems. S SC A NDI S K A Microsoft utility that checks files, folders, and the hard disks surface for errors. ScanDisk often runs when you restart the computer after it has stopped responding. SDRAM synchronous dynamic random-access memory A type of DRAM that is synchronized with the optimal clock speed of the microprocessor. S E R IA L C O NN E C T O R An I/O port often used to connect devices such as a handheld digital device or digital camera to your computer. SE R V IC E TA G A bar code label on your computer that identifies your computer when you access Dell Support at support.dell.com or when you call Dell for customer service or technical support. S E T U P P R O GR A M A program that is used to install and configure hardware and software. The setup.exe or install.exe program comes with most Windows software packages. Setup program differs from system setup program. S H O RT C U T An icon that provides quick access to frequently used programs, files, folders, and drives. When you place a shortcut on your Windows desktop and double-click the icon, you can open its corresponding folder or file without having to find it first. Shortcut icons do not change the location of files. If you delete a shortcut, the original file is not affected. Also, you can rename a shortcut icon. S H UT D O W N The process of closing windows and exiting programs, exiting the operating system, and turning off your computer. You can lose data if you turn off your computer before completing a shutdown. S M AR T C A RD A card that is embedded with a microprocessor and a memory chip. Smart cards can be used to authenticate a user on computers equipped for smart cards. S O F T W AR E Anything that can be stored electronically, such as computer files or programs. S/PDIF Sony/Philips Digital Interface An audio transfer file format that allows the transfer of audio from one file to another without converting it to and from an analog format, which could degrade the quality of the file. S T A N DB Y M O D E A power management mode that shuts down all unnecessary computer operations to save energy. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Glossar y 247 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\glossary.fm S U RG E P RO T E C T O R S Prevent voltage spikes, such as those that may occur during an electrical storm, from entering the computer through the electrical outlet. Surge protectors do not protect against lightning strikes or against brownouts, which occur when the voltage drops more than 20 percent below the normal AC-line voltage level. Network connections cannot be protected by surge protectors. Always disconnect the network cable from the network connector during electrical storms. SVGA super-video graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers. Typical SVGA resolutions are 800 x 600 and 1024 x 768. The number of colors and resolution that a program displays depends on the capabilities of the monitor, the video controller and its drivers, and the amount of video memory installed in the computer. S- V I D E O TV- O U T A connector used to attach a TV or digital audio device to the computer. SXGA super-extended graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1280 x 1024. SXGA+ super-extended graphics array plus A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1400 x 1050. S Y S T E M B O AR D The main circuit board in your computer. Also known as the motherboard. S Y S T E M S E T U P P R O G RA M A utility that serves as an interface between the computer hardware and the operating system. System setup allows you to configure user-selectable options in the BIOS, such as date and time or system password. Unless you understand what effect the settings have on the computer, do not change the settings for this program. S Y S T E M T R A Y See notification area. T TAPI telephony application programming interface Enables Windows programs to operate with a wide variety of telephony devices, including voice, data, fax, and video. T EX T E DI T O R A program used to create and edit files that contain only text; for example, Windows Notepad uses a text editor. Text editors do not usually provide word wrap or formatting functionality (the option to underline, change fonts, and so on). T R A VE L M O D UL E A plastic device designed to fit inside the module bay of a portable computer to reduce the weight of the computer. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 248 Glossar y FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\glossary.fm U UPS uninterruptible power supply A backup power source used when the electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage level. A UPS keeps a computer running for a limited amount of time when there is no electrical power. UPS systems typically provide surge suppression and may also provide voltage regulation. Small UPS systems provide battery power for a few minutes to enable you to shut down your computer. USB universal serial bus A hardware interface for a low-speed device such as a USB-compatible keyboard, mouse, joystick, scanner, set of speakers, printer, broadband devices (DSL and cable modems), imaging devices, or storage devices. Devices are plugged directly in to a 4-pin socket on your computer or into a multi-

port hub that plugs in to your computer. USB devices can be connected and disconnected while the computer is turned on, and they can also be daisy-chained together. UTP unshielded twisted pair Describes a type of cable used in most telephone networks and some computer networks. Pairs of unshielded wires are twisted to protect against electromagnetic interference, rather than relying on a metal sheath around each pair of wires to protect against interference. UXGA ultra extended graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1600 x 1200. V V ID E O C O N T R O L L E R The circuitry on a video card or on the system board (in computers with an integrated video controller) that provides the video capabilities in combination with the monitorfor your computer. V ID E O ME MO R Y Memory that consists of memory chips dedicated to video functions. Video memory is usually faster than system memory. The amount of video memory installed primarily influences the number of colors that a program can display. V ID E O MO D E A mode that describes how text and graphics are displayed on a monitor. Graphics-based software, such as Windows operating systems, displays in video modes that can be defined as x horizontal pixels by y vertical pixels by z colors. Character-based software, such as text editors, displays in video modes that can be defined as x columns by y rows of characters. V ID E O RE S O L UT I O N See resolution. V IR U S A program that is designed to inconvenience you or to destroy data stored on your computer. A virus program moves from one computer to another through an infected disk, software downloaded from the Internet, or e-mail attachments. When an infected program starts, its embedded virus also starts. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY Glossar y 249 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w FILE LOCATION: S:\SYSTEMS\Pebble\UG\A00\English\glossary.fm A common type of virus is a boot virus, which is stored in the boot sectors of a floppy disk. If the floppy disk is left in the drive when the computer is shut down and then turned on, the computer is infected when it reads the boot sectors of the floppy disk expecting to find the operating system. If the computer is infected, the boot virus may replicate itself onto all the floppy disks that are read or written in that computer until the virus is eradicated. V volt The measurement of electric potential or electromotive force. One V appears across a resistance of 1 ohm when a current of 1 ampere flows through that resistance. W W watt The measurement of electrical power. One W is 1 ampere of current flowing at 1 volt. WH R watt-hour A unit of measure commonly used to indicate the approximate capacity of a battery. For example, a 66-WHr battery can supply 66 W of power for 1 hour or 33 W for 2 hours. W A L L PA P E R The background pattern or picture on the Windows desktop. Change your wallpaper through the Windows Control Panel. You can also scan in your favorite picture and make it wallpaper. WRIT E- P R O T E C T E D Files or media that cannot be changed. Use write-

protection when you want to protect data from being changed or destroyed. To write-protect a 3.5-inch floppy disk, slide its write-protect tab to the open position. X XGA extended graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1024 x 768. Z ZIF zero insertion force A type of socket or connector that allows a computer chip to be installed or removed with no stress applied to either the chip or its socket. ZI P A popular data compression format. Files that have been compressed with the Zip format are called Zip files and usually have a filename extension of .zip. A special kind of zipped file is a self-extracting file, which has a filename extension of

.exe. You can unzip a self-extracting file by double-clicking it. ZI P D RI V E A high-capacity floppy drive developed by Iomega Corporation that uses 3.5-inch removable disks called Zip disks. Zip disks are slightly larger than regular floppy disks, about twice as thick, and hold up to 100 MB of data. D E L L C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E L I M I N A RY 1 / 2 9 / 0 3 F O R P R O O F O N LY 250 Glossar y

 

 

Boadcom 802.11ag WLAN Card User's Guide, BCM94318MPAGH The Solution BCM94309MPC0 enables access to wireless local area networks (WLANs), enables the sharing of a local printer and files with others in the network, enables Internet connection sharing, and enables roaming about the officewire-free. This wireless LAN solution is designed for both the home user and businessesand it is scalable so that users can be added and new network features can be enabled as networking needs grow. Configuring a Network Profile in Infrastructure Mode (Windows XP Environment) Before you can connect to a wireless network, you must configure a network profile for that network on your notebook computer. If you purchased your notebook computer with the Boadcom WLAN Card already installed and set up at the factory, follow the network profile configuration instructions provided below. If this is not the case, first verify that the Boadcom WLAN Card has been properly installed in your computer according to the installation instructions. Then proceed with the following instructions for configuring your network profiles. To begin configuring a network profile, open Wireless Network Connection Properties. 1. Click Start, click Control Panel, and then click Network Connections. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection. 3. Under Network Tasks, click Change settings of this connection. NOTEFor more information on how to configure a network profile and IEEE 802.1x authentication, click Learn about setting up wireless network configuration. You can configure a network profile for networks that are listed under Available networks as well as those that are not listed. When you have completed configuring a network profile, the network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. Your computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the list. Follow the applicable instruction set below, based on whether or not the network is listed and whether or not the network requires network key information (check with your network administrator or access point (AP) installer to see if network key information is required). NOTEBoth the network name and the network key information are case-sensitive. m Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require Network Key Information m Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires Network Key Information m Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require Network Key Information m Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Requires Network Key Information Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require Network Key Information (Windows XP Environment) 1. Click the network name under Available networks and click Configure. 2. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. 3. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon page to verify that you are connected to the Internet. for that network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires Network Key Information (Windows XP Environment) Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) Security 1. Click the network name under Available networks and then click Configure. 2. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically check box. 3. From the Network Authentication list, select Open. 4. From the Data encryption list, select WEP. 5. Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. 6. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. 7. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that you are connected to the Internet. for that network. If the bubble does not appear, click Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) Security Encryption 1. Click the network name under Available networks and then click Configure. 2. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically check box. 3. From the Network Authentication list, select the network authentication type specified by the network administrator/AP installer. 4. From the Data encryption list, select the data encryption type specified by the network administrator/AP installer. 5. If required by the network administrator/AP installer, type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEA network key is not required for WPA type network authentication. 6. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. 7. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that you are connected to the Internet. for that network. If the bubble does not appear, click AuthenticationConfiguring the Network for Light Extensible Authentication Protocol (LEAP) Support NOTEConfigure the network profile before you begin. 1. Click Start, click Control Panel, and then click Wireless Configuration Utility 2. Click the LEAP tab. 3. Select the Enable LEAP check box. 4. Click the network name, and then click Properties. 5. Type the network name, LEAP user name, and LEAP password in the respective boxes and click OK. Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require Network Key Information (Windows XP Environment) 1. Under Preferred networks, click Add. 2. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box and Click OK. 3. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties. The computer is connected to the added network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that you are connected to the Internet. for that network. If the bubble does not appear, click Using Wireless Utility:

Windows XP Environment 1. Open the TrueMobile Wireless Utility. 2. Click the Link Status tab. The quality of the connection (signal strength and noise) of the particular network you are connected to is indicated by the horizontal bars and the decibel level values that are displayed at the bottom of the Link Status tab. The connection quality is also indicated by the appearance of the utility icon cursor over the icon. in the desk top system tray. The description of the signal strength appears when you hover the The table below shows the quality level and suggested action for improving the signal quality for each icon image that may be displayed. If the signal strength indications are anything other than very good or excellent, you should take the appropriate suggested action. Four vertical green bars indicate that the signal strength is very good or excellent. Three vertical green bars indicate that the signal is good. Three vertical yellow bars indicate that the signal strength is low. Suggested action: Move closer to the access point. Two red vertical red bars indicates that the signal strength is very low. Suggested action: Move closer to the access point. Uncolored vertical bars indicate that there is no signal being received. Probable causes:

l The computer is trying to establish an initial connection but has not yet succeeded. l You may have moved out of range of the access point. Suggested action:

l Wait l Move closer to the access point. Uncolored vertical bars with a superimposed red letter x indicate that there is no radio connection. Probable cause: The radio is disabled. Suggested action: Enable the radio. To enable the radio, right-click the utility icon Enable Radio. in the system tray and click Disabling the Radio To disable the radio on your Broadcom WLAN Card, right-click the utility icon in the system tray and click Disable Radio. To enable the radio, right-click the icon radio can be enabled/disabled by pressing Fn + F2. and click Enable Radio. On newer Dell TrueMobile enabled notebooks, the Diagnostics You can run a number of diagnostics on your Broadcom WLAN Card to verify its operational and functional status. NOTEThe network connection is lost when you run the diagnostics. When the test run is over, however, your network connection is automatically reestablished. Windows XP Environment 1. Open the Wireless Configuration Utility. 2. Click the Diagnostics tab. 3. To see a description of the test, click each test and look in the Recommendations area. 4. All tests are selected by default. To run an individual test or some but not all of the tests, clear the check box for those tests that you do not want to run. 5. Click Run Tests. 6. If your Braodcom WLAN Card fails any of the diagnostics tests, see Troubleshooting. Regulatory Information:

Information for the User Regulatory Information Information for the User Wireless Interoperability The Broadcom WLAN Card products are designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) and orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:

l IEEE Std 802.11b-1999. Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN l IEEE draft Std 802.11g. Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN l IEEE Std 802.11a-1999. Standard on 5 GHz Wireless LAN The Broadcom WLAN Cards and Your Health The Broadcom WLAN Cards, like other radio devices, emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by these devices, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Broadcom WLAN Card devices operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of a Broadcom WLAN Card wireless device may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:

l Using the Broadcom WLAN Card equipment onboard airplanes, or l Using the Broadcom WLAN Card equipment in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), ask for authorization to use the Broadcom WLAN Card device before turning it on. Regulatory Statements for BCM94309MPC0 Regulatory Information USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. CAUTION This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. CAUTION: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. CanadaIndustry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. The term "IC" before the equipment certification number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Pour empecher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit etre utilize a l'interieur et devrait etre place loin des fenetres afin de Fournier un ecram de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'emission) est installe a l'exterieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. CAUTION This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas website www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. EuropeEU Declaration of Conformity and Restrictions Hereby, Broadcom Corp, declares that this equipment complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. This equipment is marked with the community. 0682 symbol and can be used throughout the European This indicates compliance with the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC and meets the relevant parts of following technical specifications:

EN 300 328 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission Systems; Data transmission equipment operating in the 2,4GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive. EN 301 893 - Broadband Radio Access Networks (BRAN); 5 GHz high performance RLAN; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive EN 301 489-17 - Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17 Specific Conditions for Wideband Data and HIPERLAN Equipment. EN 60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment. EN 50385 Product standard to demonstrate the compliances of radio base stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems with the basic restrictions or the reference levels related to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields. Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. France - 2.4GHz for Metropolitan France :

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power

(EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band 802.11a Restrictions:

- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (51505350 MHz).

- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.

- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point in installed.

- This product can be used as shown in the table below:

5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Taiwan DGT warning statement Translation:

Article 14 Without permission granted, the frequency change, transmitting power enhance or alter of original design characteristic as well as function by company, enterprise, or user for approved Low-power radio frequency devices is not allowed. Article 17 Low-power radio-frequency devices shall not influence aircraft security and interfere legal communications; If found, shall cease operating immediately until no interference is achieved. Above mentioned Legal Communications is defined as radio communications operation follows Telecommunications Act. Low-power radio-frequency devices must susceptible with the interference from legal communications, ISM radio wave radiated devices. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only.

 

 

Contents: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Broadcom 802.11g Mini PCI Card, BCM94318MPG User Manual Introduction Completing the Setup Utility Functions Specifications Regulatory Information Company Copyright Statement Company Trademark Statement. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks owned by Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. WLCARD-UG200-D2 01.30.03 file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/index.htm [1/30/03 10:11:15 PM]

Introduction: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to Contents Introduction: Broadcom 802.11g Mini PCI Card User Manual Broadcom 802.11g WLAN Solution Using the Broadcom 802.11g WLAN Features and Requirements Broadcom 802.11g WLAN Solution The Broadcom 802.11g WLAN solution accesses wireless local area networks (LANs), enables the sharing of a local printer and files with others in the network, accesses the Internet, and enables roaming about the officewire-free. This wireless LAN solution is designed for both the home user and small businessesand it is scalable so that users can be added and new network features can be enabled as networking needs grow. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (defined in IEEE Std 802.11, 1999 Edition) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. The use of the WEP key is optional and can be enabled or disabled. If the network being connecting to has enabled WEP, WEP must also be enabled in the network profile and the WEP key must be set to match the WEP key used by the network. Otherwise, it is impossible to connect to the network. The Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook makes a wireless connection to a network, as illustrated on the following figure. Networks 1 and 2 are infrastructure type of networks. The two notebook computers connected by radio waves form an ad hoc type of network. Enterprise Users file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (1 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]

Introduction: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Obtain the following information from the network administrator:

l Network names (SSID) of the specific wireless networks to connect to l WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) key information (if any) for the networks to connect to l For Microsoft Windows networking, the customer name and workgroup name l For a network account, a user name and password l An IP address (if not using a DHCP server) Home Users The access point (AP) that communicates with the Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook has a preassigned network name

(SSID) that the notebook recognizes upon startup. To enable WEP, use any string of numbers for the WEP key. Upon startup, the Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook detects certain wireless networks (WLANs) that are within range. Before connecting to these and other wireless networks, configure a profile for each network.See Completing the setup. Using the Broadcom 802.11g WLAN The Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook is an IEEE 802.11g based wireless LAN device. A LAN is composed of two or more computers that are connected to each other to share files or common equipment such as a printer or an Internet connection. A wireless LAN provides the same functionality of a wired network, but it eliminates the need to install networking cables and other networking equipment. Not only is a wireless LAN easier to deploy, but it also allows for roaming. For example, when using the WLAN enabled notebook, it is possible to roam from a conference room to an office without being disconnected from the network. Features and Requirements An IEEE 802.11 based wireless LAN includes the following features:

l Support for IEEE 802.11g draft specification l Support for IEEE 802.11b standard l 2.4-GHz band operation l Network data rate of up to 54 Mbit/s l Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption The following items are needed for participating in a wireless LAN:

l Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook computer running on a Microsoft Windows XP operating system l Software compact disc containing the drivers, software reference guide, and Help file The Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook works with any Wi-Fi CERTIFIED base station or wireless client adapter. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (2 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]

Introduction: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to top Back to Contents Ccopyright and Trademark Information. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (3 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to Contents Completing the Setup: Broadcom 802.11g WLAN User Manual NOTEBefore starting, obtain the required network information from the network administrator or the wireless access point installer (see The Broadcom 802.11g WLAN Solution in Introduction). Modes of Operation Configuring a Network Profile Modes of Operation A wireless LAN can be configured for two different modes of operation: infrastructure network and computer-to-computer

(ad hoc) network. Whereas each mode has its advantages, one mode may be more appropriate than the other, depending on the location and type of network connection. Infrastructure Mode The key difference between the infrastructure type of network and an ad hoc network is that the infrastructure network includes a base station (host) computer that has a built-in wireless network adapter and is connected to a wireless access point (AP). This functionality allows computers on the infrastructure wireless LAN to access the resources and tools of the wired LAN, including Internet access, e-mail, file transfers, and printer sharing. Characteristics Networked computers communicate with each other through a dedicated AP. All data transmitted between the computers on this wireless LAN passes through the AP. Advantages l Extended range. The access point extends the range of the wireless LAN. Each computer can communicate with other computers equipped by wireless networks that are within the range of the access point. l Roaming. As the user moves around the home or office, the Company 54g enabled notebook determines the best access point to use to ensure continuous communication with the network. l Network connectivity. An access point can provide wireless LAN access to an existing wired network by bridging the two networks together. This gives users of the wireless LAN access to all the functions of a wired networkfrom file server access to e-mail and the Internet. Disadvantages Because the infrastructure mode offers more features, it requires additional components and setup time to deploy. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (1 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Requirements A base station computer having a wired connection to the Internet, a wireless network adapter, and a connection to an AP. Computer-to-Computer Mode A peer-to-peer (ad hoc) network is the easiest to deploy and is ideal for home use or in small offices. This mode allows the sharing of files with other employees, printing to a shared office printer, and access to the Internet through a shared modem. With ad hoc networking, however, the computer is only able to communicate with other wireless networks that are within a certain range and are in the same wireless workgroup. Characteristics Networked computers send data directly to each other. Advantages l Simple setup l Cost efficiency Disadvantages Communication is limited to those who are located within a certain range. Configuring a Network Profile To connect to a wireless network, a network profile for that network must be configured on the Company 54g enabled notebook. If the Company 54g enabled notebook computer came with the Company 54g WLAN card already installed and set up at the factory, follow the network profile configuration instructions provided below. NOTEFor more information on how to configure a network profile and IEEE 802.1x authentication, click Learn about setting up wireless network configuration at the bottom of the Wireless Networks tab of Wireless Network Connection Properties. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection you want to configure by doing the following. 1. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (2 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Click the Wireless Networks tab. You can configure a network profile for networks that are listed under Available networks as well as those that are not listed. When you have completed configuring a network profile, the network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. The computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the list. Follow the applicable instruction set below, based on whether or not the network is listed and whether or not the network requires a WEP key (check with your network administrator to see if a WEP key is required). NOTEBoth the network name and the network key are case-sensitive. l Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key l Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP key l Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key l Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (3 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Under Available networks, click the network name, and then click Configure. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (4 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (5 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 5. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (6 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Under Available networks, click the network name, and then click Configure. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (7 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 5. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 6. Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 7. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (8 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 8. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (9 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (10 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 5. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (11 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 6. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that network. If the Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (12 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (13 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box and again in the Confirm network key box. 5. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 6. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 7. Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 8. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (14 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 9. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Back to top Back to Contents Copyright and Trademark Information. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (15 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to Contents Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Running Utility Functions Adding a New Network to the List of Preferred Networks Viewing or Modifying the Wireless Network Properties Setting Up an Ad Hoc (Peer-to-Peer) Group Network for Connecting to the Internet Adding an Ad Hoc Network Disabling the Radio Running Utility Functions The utility functions and details for the wireless network connection are available in Control Panel. These functions include Disabling the network device, Renaming the connection, View status of this connection, and Change settings of this connection. Changing Settings 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Click Wireless Network Connections, and then click Change settings of this connection. l Click the Wireless Network tab to configure available networks, add and remove networks, and change network properties. l Click the General tab, then click Configure m To change the properties of the network adapter, click the Advanced tab. m To view details about the driver files, update the driver for the device, roll back to the previous driver, or to uninstall the driver, click the Driver tab. m To view resource settings, click the Resources tab. m To change power management settings, click the Power Management tab. The Advanced tab in Network Adapter Properties lists the properties for the Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) adapter. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (1 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual l IBSS Channel Number selects the independent basic service set (IBSS) channel number on which to operate. The Company 54g enabled notebook comes preset for use on channels 111. This setting is acceptable in most countries. Some countries allow use on more channels. If you travel to a country that allows the use of other channels, change the IBSS Channel Number to that number. l Locale selects the adapter properties that comply with the operating regulations for that locale. The Locale settings include USA, Israel, Japan, Jordan, Thailand, and Worldwide. This wireless LAN device is normally preset by default for the country in which the device is sold. Before operating this WLAN device, verify that the locale selection is correct by following the steps described in Changing Settings above. On the Advanced tab of HP WLAN 54g W450 Network Adapter Properties, m Click Locale m In the Value list, select the appropriate regional location If you travel to other countries with the Company 54g enabled notebook, follow the same steps to change the locale setting to match the destination country. Reset the locale setting back to the appropriate home setting after returning. If the destination country is not listed, change the Locale setting to Worldwide. l Radio Enable/Disable allows you to turn the radio on or off as necessary to comply with restrictions prohibiting the emission of radio signals, such as during takeoff and landing onboard a commercial aircraft. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (2 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual l Rate sets the transmission rate. The default setting is Use best rate. This automatically adjusts the data rate to the optimal rate based on the capabilities of the other clients and access points. The default values for the properties listed below are set for maximum performance. Therefore, It is not recommended for home users to change the settings for any of these properties. Only network administrators or persons having technical wireless LAN experience should attempt to change any of the settings. frames. available:

adapter. l Fragmentation Threshold is the threshold at which the IEEE 802.11 adapter break the packet into multiple l IBSS 54g (TM) Mode is used to set the connection type in an ad hoc network. The following options are m 54g - 802.11b compatible links at the best rate with an IEEE 802.11b and an IEEE 802.11g network m 54g - Performance links only with IEEE 802.11g networks at the highest rate. In addition it excludes m 802.11b Mode links only with IEEE 802.11b networks at the highest rate. In addition it excludes IEEE

(recommended setting). IEEE 802.11b networks. 802.11g networks. l Locally Administered MAC Address is used to override the MAC address of the Company 54g Wireless LAN l PLCP Header is used to set the header type used for CCK rates. Can be long, auto (short/long). l Power Output is used for putting out a percentage of the maximum output power. l Power Save Mode is used to put the Company 54g enabled notebook into the IEEE 802.11 Power Save mode. In Power Save mode, the radio is periodically powered down to conserve power. When in Power Save mode, packets are stored in the AP until the STA comes on. Adding a New Network to the List of Preferred Networks If the Company 54g enabled notebook is running at a location in which a wireless LAN is operating, and it is within range of the access point, the computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the list under Preferred networks. A network profile must be configured for each network to add to the list To add a new network to the list of preferred networks, first check to see if the new network is listed on the Wireless Networks tab under Available networks. If it is, follow the applicable instructions below according to which operating system your computer is running and whether or not the network requires a WEP key. NOTESee the network administrator or the wireless access point installer to obtain a WEP key, as necessary. l See Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key in Completing the Setup l See Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP Key in Completing the Setup. If the network being added to the Preferred networks list is not listed in the Available networks list, follow the applicable instructions below according to which operating system the computer is running and whether or not the network requires a WEP key. l See Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key in Completing the Setup l See Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key in Completing the Setup. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (3 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Viewing or Modifying the Wireless Network Properties 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 4. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings box is selected. If it is not, select it. 5. Under Preferred networks click the network name and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (4 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual It is possible to enable or disable WEP data encryption and change the network name and the network key (see Completing the setup for instructions). Setting Up an Ad Hoc (Peer-to-Peer) Group Network for Connecting to the Internet To connect the computers in an ad hoc group network to the Internet, the Windows Internet connection sharing (ICS) component must be installed. ICS installation is not required, however, for communication among a group of computers that have a Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) installed in each computer. An ad hoc network must be added under Preferred networks. See Running Utility Functions. Select a desktop computer to serve as the host computer; all other computers are called clients. The host computer must be running the Windows XP operating system. The host computer is the only computer that connects directly to the Internet. Company recommends using the desktop computer having the fastest microprocessor and the most memory as the host computer. NOTEInternet connection sharing requires that the host computer have either a modem or another network adapter in addition to a wireless network adapter. The modem or the additional network adapter is used to access the Internet. The file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (5 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Company 54g enabled notebook is used to share the Internet connections with other clients. Setting Up Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) on the Host Computer 1. Connect the host computer to the Internet. 2. From the host computer Start menu, select Help and Support. 3. Perform a search on Internet Connection Sharing. 4. From the Pick a task list, select Enable Internet Connection Sharing on a Network Connection. 5. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete setting up ICS

. Adding an Ad Hoc Network An ad hoc network (for peer-to-peer communicating) can either require a WEP key or not. Instructions for adding and configuring an ad hoc network for both types of ad hoc networks are provided below:

l Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key l Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Requires a WEP Key Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (6 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (7 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 5. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 6. Select the This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network; wireless access points are not used box. 7. Clear the Data encryption (WEP enabled) and the The Key is provided for me automatically boxes if they are selected. 8. Click OK. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (8 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 9. Click Advanced. 10. Select Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) networks only, and click Close. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (9 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 11. Click OK. The added ad hoc network appears at the top of the list under Preferred networks. 12. To verify that the computer is connected to the added ad hoc network, reopen the Network Properties window and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the added network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for the ad hoc network. Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Requires a WEP Key 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (10 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings box is selected. If it is not, select it. 5. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (11 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 6. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 7. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box and again in the Confirm network key box. 8. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 9. Type the network key in the Network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 10. Select the This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network; wireless access points are not used box. 11. Click OK. 12. Click Advanced file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (12 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 13. Select Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) networks only, and click Close. 14. Click OK. The added ad hoc network appears at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (13 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 15. To verify that the computer is connected to the added ad hoc network, reopen the Network Properties window and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the added network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for that network. Disabling the Radio l To disable the radio on the Company 54g enabled notebook, right-click the wireless network connection icon in the system tray and click Disable. Back to top Back to Contents Copyright and Trademark Information file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (14 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Specifications: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to Contents Specifications: Broadcom 802.11g WLAN User Manual Physical Characteristics Temperature and Humidity Limitations Power Characteristics Networking Characteristics Radio Characteristics Physical Characteristics Characteristic Form Factor Description Mini PCI specification, May 2002. Type IIIA form factor Dimensions (length, width) 59.6 mm 50.95 mm Temperature and Humidity Limitations Condition Description Operating Temperature 0 to 70C Operating Humidity 95% maximum (no condensation allowed) Storage Temperature 40 to 90C Storage Humidity 95% maximum (no condensation allowed) Power Characteristics Characteristic IEEE 802.11g Operation IEEE 802.11b Operation Values Doze Mode 40 mA Receive Mode 400 mA Transmit Mode 600 mA Power Supply 3.3 V 40 mA 220 mA 330 mA 3.3 V file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/specs.htm (1 of 2) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Specifications: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Networking Characteristics Characteristic Compatibility Description IEEE Std 802.11b and IEEE Draft Std 802.11g for wireless LAN Network Operating System Microsoft Windows Networking Host Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Medium Access Protocol CSMA/CA (collision avoidance) with acknowledgment (ACK) Data rate (Mbps) IEEE Draft Std 802.11g: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 IEEE Std 802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 NOTEThe Company 54g WLAN solution uses an automatic transmit rate select mechanism Radio Characteristics Characteristic Frequency Band Description 2.4 GHz (IEEE 802.11b, IEEE Draft Std 802.11g) Modulation Technique Direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) l CCK for high and medium transmit rate l DQPSK for standard transmit rate l DBPSK for low transmit rate Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) l 52 subcarriers with BPSK, QPSK, 16-QAM or 64-QAM l Forward error correction convolutional coding rate: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4 Spreading 11-chip Barker sequence Bit Error Rate (BER) Better than 10(5) ppm Nominal Output Power IEEE Std 802.11b: 18dBm; IEEE Std 802.11g: 16.5dBm NOTESee Regulatory Information for country-specific performance characteristics and use restrictions. Back to top Back to Contents file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/specs.htm (2 of 2) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Copyright and Trademark Information Back to Contents Regulatory Information Operational Information Regulatory Information Operational Information Wireless Interoperability The Integrated 802.11g enabled notebook is designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) and orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:

l IEEE Std 802.11b-1999. Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN l IEEE Std 802.11g-2002. Draft standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN Safety The Integrated 802.11g enabled notebook, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by this devices, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Integrated 802.11g enabled notebook operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of a Integrated 802.11g enabled notebook may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:

l Using the Integrated 802.11g enabled notebook onboard airplanes, or l Using the Integrated 802.11g enabled notebook in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airplane, for example), ask for authorization to use the Integrated 802.11g enabled notebook before turning it on. Regulatory Statements for BCM94318MPG USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements in normal operating conditions (lap and tablet), a separation distance of at least 0.5 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canada Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. The term "IC" before the equipment certification number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Pour empecher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit etre utilize a l'interieur et devrait etre place loin des fenetres afin de Fournier un ecram de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'emission) est installe a l'exterieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas website www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. EuropeEU Declaration of Conformity and Restrictions Hereby, Broadcom Corp, declares that this equipment complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. This equipment is marked with the community. 0682 symbol and can be used throughout the European This indicates compliance with the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC and meets the relevant parts of following technical specifications:

EN 300 328 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission Systems;

Data transmission equipment operating in the 2,4GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques;

Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive. EN 301 489-17 - Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17 Specific Conditions for Wideband Data and HIPERLAN Equipment. EN 60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment. EN 50385 Product standard to demonstrate the compliances of radio base stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems with the basic restrictions or the reference levels related to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields. Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. France - 2.4GHz for Metropolitan France :

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power

(EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Taiwan DGT warning statement Translation:

Article 14 Without permission granted, the frequency change, transmitting power enhance or alter of original design characteristic as well as function by company, enterprise, or user for approved Low-power radio frequency devices is not allowed. Article 17 Low-power radio-frequency devices shall not influence aircraft security and interfere legal communications; If found, shall cease operating immediately until no interference is achieved. Above mentioned Legal Communications is defined as radio communications operation follows Telecommunications Act. Low-power radio-frequency devices must susceptible with the interference from legal communications, ISM radio wave radiated devices.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Broadcom BCM92045NMD 02611/POSTEL/2005 1921 2.4FH1 397907-001 TA-2005/135 APPROVED Co nt ains FCC ID : Q DS - BRCM1018 IC : 4324A- BRCM1018 CCS094LPD0018 R-LARN-05-0240 Z233 SCT: XXXXXXXXX-XXX Place SIRIM label here N12075 CMII ID: 2005DJ0891 CNC: 16-4062 XXXX-XX-XXXX Complies with IDA standards. DA102889

(01) XXXXXXXXXXXXX-X

 

 

BCM94318MPAGH FCC, IC labels:

1. Module label: On the back of the card. 2. System label: On the back of the PC. Contains Broadcom Radio module Model: BCM94318APAGH FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017 IC: 4324A-BRCM1017

 

 

Date: June 13, 2007 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017 Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, We, Broadcom Corp., declare on our sole responsibility that the model BCM94318MPAGH, FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017 can operate as a client without radar detection in the band 5250 - 5350 MHz and 5470 - 5725 MHz. Adhoc or peer to peer modes are not supported in these bands. Channel moving time and channel closing time have been measured for channel 5280 MHz only. We, Broadcom Corp., declare on our sole responsibility that the results of DFS Test Report 07U10933-1 are also applicable for operations in 5470 - 5725 MHz band. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

 

 

BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94806 Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017 Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, Pursuant to Section 2.1043 of the FCC rules, we hereby request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID:

QDS-BRCM1017, originally granted on 3/8/2005. The major changes filed under this application are:

Change #1 Adding 5,470-5,725MHz band. The band is enabled via software. There is no hardware change. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Date: May 8, 2007 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Sincerely yours, Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

 

 

Date: August 15, 2007 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017 Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, We, Broadcom Corp., declare that the model BCM94318MPAGH, FCC ID: QDS-

BRCM1017 has been verified to comply with FCC non-occupancy requirements. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

 

 

Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information for ZRS Hitachi Cable, Ltd 1-6-1, Otemachi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, Japan Antenna Specifications Antenna Type (Material, Technology) Main ; Monopole Type Aux ; PIFA Type Antenna Model Number HMT05/HFT17-DL07 Operating Frequency Range(s) 2.40 2.4835 GHz / 4.90 5.875 GHz Peak Gain (802.11b/g / 2.4GHz Band)

(dBi) Main 1.5 / Aux 3.0 Peak Gain (802.11a / 5GHz Band) (dBi) Main 5.1 / Aux 5.4 Radio Connector Type Micro Coaxial Connector Mid-Line Connector Type (If Applicable) NA Note: Peak Gain should include all system losses (connector, cable, etc) Cable Specifications Cable Parameters Main Base Side LCD Side Total LCD Side Aux Base Side Total Length (mm) NA NA 385 NA NA 478 Loss (Including Connectors) (dB) 2.4 GHz / 5 GHz 1.0/1.6 1.3/2.2 Description (Color, Diameter, Manufacturer) White 1.37 mm Hitachi Cable Black 1.37 mm Hitachi Cable Note: For single cable assembly (no mid-line connector), use the 'Total' column for each cable length and list N/A in the LCD and Base fields Cable Loss should be reported for the total cable assembly (for both Main and Aux antennas)

(a) Main Antenna (b) Aux Antenna Picture of Antenna installed in the notebook Picture of Antenna Main Antenna (1) 2.412 GHz 2.437 GHz 2.462 GHz Vertical Horizontal V+H Vertical Horizontal V+H Vertical Horizontal V+H 270 90 270 90 270 90 180 180 180 Frequency (MHz) Frequency (MHz) Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) 2412

-0.8

-0.2 1.0 2437

-0.7

-0.8 1.7 Frequency (MHz) Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) 2462

-1.1

-1.1 1.6 Main Antenna (2) 4.900 GHz 5.150 GHz 5.350 GHz Vertical Horizontal V+H 270 90 270 90 270 90 180 180 180 Frequency (MHz) Frequency (MHz) Frequency (MHz) 5350 Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) 1.4 1.3 3.5 Vertical Horizontal V+H 4900

-0.1 0.3 1.3 Vertical Horizontal V+H 5150 1.9

-0.1 2.9 Main Antenna (3) 5.470 GHz 5.725 GHz 5.875 GHz Vertical Horizontal V+H Vertical Horizontal V+H 270 90 270 90 270 90 180 180 180 Frequency (MHz) Frequency (MHz) 5725 Frequency (MHz) 5875 Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) 2.3 3.4 4.2 Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) 0.1 2.9 1.3 Vertical Horizontal V+H 5.47 1.7 2.5 4.0 Aux Antenna (1) 2.412 GHz 2.437 GHz 2.462 GHz Vertical Horizontal V+H Vertical Horizontal V+H 270 90 270 90 270 90 180 180 180 Frequency (MHz) Frequency (MHz) 2437 Frequency (MHz) 2462 Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) 0.3 2.9 3.8 Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) 0.4 2.4 3.3 Vertical Horizontal V+H 2412

-0.1 2.8 3.9 Aux Antenna (2) 4.900 GHz 5.150 GHz 5.350 GHz Vertical Horizontal V+H Vertical Horizontal V+H Vertical Horizontal V+H 270 90 270 90 270 90 180 180 180 Frequency (MHz) 4900 Frequency (MHz) 5150 Frequency (MHz) 5350 Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) 4.1 1.1 4.1 2.1 1.8 3.9 Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) 4.2 1.8 5.6 Aux Antenna (3) 5.470 GHz 5.725 GHz 5.875 GHz Vertical Horizontal V+H 270 90 270 90 270 90 180 180 180 Frequency (MHz) Frequency (MHz) 5725 Frequency (MHz) Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) 4.8 1.5 5.8 Vertical Peak Gain (dBi) Horizontal Peak Gain (dBi) V + H Peak Gain (dBi) Vertical Horizontal V+H 5.47 4.1

-0.5 4.2 Vertical Horizontal V+H 5875 5.4

-0.1 6.2

 

 

X X X

5 1 6

5 0 8 COMPONENT SPECIFICATION APPROVED SUPPLIERS Address/Telephone Manufacturer 805-615 Manufacturers Part No. Centurion International, Inc. NOTE: -304 PART MUST CONFORM TO DOC #631869, INTERMEC RESTRICTED SUBSTANCES P.O. Box 82846 Lincoln, NE 68501

(402) 467-4491

-001 CAF94490

-101 CAF94720

-102 CAF94736

-201 CAF94857

-301 CAF94866

-302 CAF94856 Or CAF94950

-304 CAF94950 COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS, MOST CURRENT REVISION. 1.0 Scope: This specification describes the requirements for antenna assemblies designed for use in Model CV60 applications which includes two antennas for 802.11b/g or dual band a/b/g, an optional antenna for PicoLink, and a reverse polarity SMA connector for a remote antenna interconnection. Intermec P/N Nominal Frequency 2.0 Quality Assurance: Intermec Receiving Inspection reserves the right to 2.45GHz & 5.5GHz 2.45GHz & 5.5GHz 2.45GHz & 5.5GHz

-001

-101

-102

-201

-301

-302

-304 2.45GHz & 5.5GHz 2.45GHz & 5.5GHz No No No No No No Yes RoHS Compliant 2.45 GHz 2.45 GHz use AQL sampling techniques when inspecting a lot. 3.0 Packaging: All antennas will be packaged in containers capable of protecting them from damage in common carrier shipping and handling. REVISION HISTORY Description of Change

- - - Prerelease C3880 Release specification, Revise 1.0, 7.3 Add manufacturers name & P/N, 7.4 Was Poron 4701-40-20125-04 3.0mm thick, 8.0 Add drawing, 8.6 Add drawing & matl Insert 7.5 & 7.6, 8.0 Delete top view & add gnd wire assemblies & assoc dims C3940 C4000 8.0 Add grounding thru holes, add graphics, & add notes C4455 Add -101 and -102 parts, Revise 1.0, 5.1, 5.2, 5.6 & 7.1, Insert 8.1 & 8.2 C4850 Add -201, -301 & -302 parts, Revise 1.0, 5.1, 5.2, 5.6 & 7.1, Insert 8.3 thru 8.5, 8.6 7.6 was 7.7, 0.25 was 0.1, (3.18) was 3.250.25, & Add -201 & -3XX parts 308351 Add -304 part, Add alt mfr P/N, Add compliance note, Revise 1.0, 5.1, 5.2, 5.6, 2/15/06 Date 6/16/03 8/06/03 10/13/03 1/16/04 10/11/04 6/17/05 Approved T S J S J S J S L H L H S J Rev. File No. 1 A B C D E F REVISION LEVEL F F C D D E E F E 1 SHEET NUMBER COMPONENT ENGR. J. McROBERTS COGNIZANT ENGR. T. SCHUSTER APPROVED K. VORHIES by JS 8/06/03 3 2 DATE 6/18/03 DATE

DATE 7.1, 7.6 & 8.5 4 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 7 8 5 Intermec Technologies Corp. 550 Second Street S.E. Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 Telephone No. (319) 369-3100 Facsimile No.

(319) 369-3453 TITLE CV60 MULTIPLE ANTENNAS, 2.4/5.5GHz DRAWING NO. 805-615-XXX Sheet 1 Of 9 4.0 Markings: Each container will be labeled or otherwise marked with the manufacturers name or trademark, and the catalog designation. Major shipping cartons will be marked with the Intermec part number.

-001 & -201: 2.45 GHz

-101 & -301: 2.45 GHz and 5.5 GHz

-102, -302 & -304: 2.45 GHz and 5.5 GHz 5.0 Antenna Specifications:

5.1 Nominal Frequency, 5.2 Frequency Range, 5.3 Peak Antenna Gain: +1 dBi nominal 5.4 VSWR: 2.0:1 max over frequency range when installed 5.5 Power: Not specified 5.6 Polarization,

-001 & -201: 2400 MHz to 2485 MHz

-101 & -301: 2400 to 2495 MHz and 5150 to 5825 MHz

-102, -302 & -304: 2400 to 2495 MHz and 5150 to 5825 MHz

-001 & -201: Picolink & primary 802.11b/g antennas - linear vertical,

-101 & -301: Picolink - linear vertical, primary 802.11a/b/g -

802.11b/g diversity antenna - linear horizontal antenna linear, 802.11a/b/g diversity antenna - linear horizontal

-102, -302 & -304: Primary 802.11a/b/g - antenna linear, 802.11a/b/g diversity antenna - linear horizontal 5.7 Nominal Impedance: 50 Ohms 6.0 Mechanical Ratings:

6.1 Antenna Weight: Not specified 6.2 Ambient Operating Temperature: Not specified 6.3 Antenna Interconnection Means: Hirose U.FL or equivalent, MMCX, and reverse polarized SMA 7.0 Materials:

7.1 Radiator Element,

-001 & -201: 18 gauge wire, and PCB embedded

-101 & -301: D-Puck element, PCB embedded, and 18 gauge wire

-102, -302 & -304: D-Puck element, and PCB embedded 7.2 Coaxial Interconnection Means: Hirose U.FL receptacle or equivalent (for 802.11 antennas), reverse polarized SMA receptacle (for remote antenna), and MMCX receptacle (for PicoLink antenna) 7.3 Reverse Polarized SMA Receptacle: Centurion P/N CAP34270 or equivalent 7.4 Reverse Polarized SMA Gasket Material: Poron urethane gasket material, 3.0 mm thick with adhesive coating on one side (see Paragraph 8.1) 7.5 Ground Wires (2 ea.): Undefined insulated wire Intermec Part Number 805-615-XXX Sheet 2 7.6 Ring Terminals (2 ea.),

-001 thru -302: Solder style, uninsulated, tin or tin-lead plated brass terminals, 1.5 mm (ref.) diameter clearance hole size

-304: Solder style, uninsulated, tin plated brass terminals, 1.5 mm

(ref.) diameter clearance hole size 8.0 Outline Drawing (mm): 2.4GHz Antenna Assembly, -001 Part y t i s r e v D g i

b 1 1

. 2 0 8 y r a m i r P g

b 1 1

. 2 0 8 k n i l o c P i 1 2 3

I S R O T A D A R A N N E T N A l t e k s a G e c a t p e c e R A M S P R

) 1

. 8 h p a r g a r a P l i a t e D e e S

N P c e m r e t n I d n a

, l e v e l

. v e r

N P s r e r u t c a f u n a M

. 1 i g n d n u o r g r o l f s e o h h g u o r h t o w T

. 2

S E T O N Intermec Part Number 805-615-XXX Sheet 3 8.1 Outline Drawing (mm): 2.4/5.5 GHz Antenna Assembly, -101 Part

I S R O T A D A R A N N E T N A y t i s r e v D g i

b

a 1 1

. 2 0 8 y r a m i r P g

b

a 1 1

. 2 0 8 k n i l o c P i

. 1

. 2

. 3 l t e k s a G e c a t p e c e R A M S P R

) 1

. 8 h p a r g a r a P l i a t e D e e S

N P c e m r e t n I d n a

, l e v e l

. v e r

N P s r e r u t c a f i g n d n u o r g r o l f s e o h h g u o r h t o w T

. 2

S E T O N u n a M

. 1 Intermec Part Number 805-615-XXX Sheet 4 8.2 Outline Drawing (mm): 2.4/5.5 GHz Antenna Assembly, -102 Part y t i s r e v D g i

b

a 1 1

. 2 0 8 y r a m i r P g

b

a 1 1

. 2 0 8 1 2

I S R O T A D A R A N N E T N A l t e k s a G e c a t p e c e R A M S P R

) 1

. 8 h p a r g a r a P l i a t e D e e S

N P c e m r e t n I d n a

, l e v e l

. v e r

N P s r e r u t c a f i g n d n u o r g r o l f s e o h h g u o r h t o w T

. 2

S E T O N u n a M

. 1 Intermec Part Number 805-615-XXX Sheet 5 8.3 Outline Drawing (mm): 2.4GHz Antenna Assembly, -201 Part r o t c e n n o c A M S d n a t e k s a g n e e w e b t a e r a o t d e i l p p a V T R 0 4 1 5 e t i t c o L

. 4 r o t c e n n o c A M S f o s n p i d e e f

d n u o r g o t d e i l p p a V T R 0 4 1 5 e t i t c o L

. 3 t l n e a v u q e i r o 0 0 8 T H t e k s a g e n o c i l i s o c s B i

. 5

N P c e m r e t n I d n a

, l e v e l

. v e r

N P s r e r u t c a f u n a M

. 1 i g n d n u o r g r o f s e o h l h g u o r h t o w T

. 2

S E T O N Intermec Part Number 805-615-XXX Sheet 6 8.4 Outline Drawing (mm): 2.4/5.5 GHz Antenna Assembly, -301 Part r o t c e n n o c A M S d n a t e k s a g n e e w e b t a e r a o t d e i l p p a V T R 0 4 1 5 e t i t c o L

. 4 r o t c e n n o c A M S f o s n p i d e e f

d n u o r g o t d e i l p p a V T R 0 4 1 5 e t i t c o L

. 3 t l n e a v u q e i r o 0 0 8 T H t e k s a g e n o c i l i s o c s B i

. 5

N P c e m r e t n I d n a

, l e v e l

. v e r

N P s r e r u t c a f u n a M

. 1 i g n d n u o r g r o f s e o h l h g u o r h t o w T

. 2

S E T O N Intermec Part Number 805-615-XXX Sheet 7 8.5 Outline Drawing (mm): 2.4/5.5 GHz Antenna Assembly, -302 & -304 Part r o t c e n n o c A M S d n a t e k s a g n e e w e b t a e r a o t d e i l p p a V T R 0 4 1 5 e t i t c o L

. 4 r o t c e n n o c A M S f o s n p i d e e f

d n u o r g o t d e i l p p a V T R 0 4 1 5 e t i t c o L

. 3 t l n e a v u q e i r o 0 0 8 T H t e k s a g e n o c i l i s o c s B i

. 5

N P c e m r e t n I d n a

, l e v e l

. v e r

N P s r e r u t c a f u n a M

. 1 i g n d n u o r g r o f s e o h l h g u o r h t o w T

. 2

S E T O N Intermec Part Number 805-615-XXX Sheet 8 8.6 SMA Gasket Detail Drawing (mm):

7.6 0.25 19.1 0.25 5 2

. 0 6

. 7

. k h T 8 1

. 3

Materials:

-001 &-1XX Parts: Die-cut, flame retardant polyurethane, 3.18 0.76 manufactured thickness, dark gray color, Rogers Poron #4701-40-20125-04 or equivalent with 3M

#9425PC double coated polyester tape (one side)

-201 &-3XX Parts: Die-cut silicone foam, 3.18 0.76 manufactured thickness, black color, Bisco silicone HT800 or equivalent with 3M #468 pressure sensitive adhesive (one side) Intermec Part Number 805-615-XXX Sheet 9

 

 

CV60 with Antenna Radome Removed Shows Radio Placement CV60 Shows 805-615-304 Antenna Board and 802abg Radio Module

 

 

2.4GHz Multilayer Antenna AH 104F2450S1 Shapes 10x4x1mm Element-GND Distance: 1mm VSWR Characteristics for Bluetooth TM/ 802 11b Electrical Characteristics

*Peak Gain>+2dBi (XZ plane Vertical polarization)

*Average Gain>0dBi (XZ plane Vertical polarization)

(on Taiyo Yudens Evaluation Board) Freq.

(GHz) Average Gain (dBi) Measuring plane Bandwidth: 340MHz

(less than VSWR2) Ave.of V&H Ave.of V&H TX-V TX-H TX-V TX-H TX-V TX-H Ave.of V&H XY

-11.3

-3.4

-5.7

-10.6

-2.9

-5.2

-9.6

-2.6

-4.8 YZ

-7.6

-3.4

-5.0

-7.2

-3.1

-4.7

-6.6

-2.8

-4.3 Note: Total Ave.Gain={XY(V)+XY(H)+YZ(V)+YZ(H)+XZ(V)+XZ(H)}/6 GND size on evaluation board: 47x15mm YZ Plane@2.45GHz XZ Plane@2.45GHz Total

-4.4

-4.0

-3.7 XZ

-0.7

-7.6

-3.0

-0.4

-7.2

-2.6

-0.2

-6.7

-2.3 0 5

-5

-15

-25

-35

-45 VSWR=2 Radiation XY Plane@2.45GHz 0 5

-5

-15

-25

-35

-45

-90 90

-90 90

-90 90 Unit:dBi 180 Unit:dBi 180 Unit:dBi 180 TX-V TX-H TX-V TX-H TX-V TX-H TAIYO YUDEN CO.,LTD. 2.4 2.45 2.5 0 5

-5

-15

-25

-35

-45

 

 

Date: March 30, 2006 Compliance Certification Services Certification Division 561F Monterey Road Morgan Hill, CA 95037 To whom it may concern:

We, the undersigned, hereby authorize the Testing Division of Compliance Engineering Services, Inc., d.b.a. Compliance Certification Services and hereafter referred to as CCS, to act on our behalf solely with regards to the Certification (as defined below);

provided, however, CCS will not provide for any payments beyond published Corporate Contract between CCS and Broadcom without our prior written consent. Certification means only the following actions: Test and issue reports for our products upon request; sign FCC, IC and CAB application forms relating to our products on our behalf; pay certification fees on our behalf; submit FCC, IC and ETSI test reports and product documents for product approval; and answer questions from certification review on our behalf. We, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 853(a). In authorizing CCS Testing Division as our agent, we still recognize that we are responsible to:

a)

(individual Regulatory Authority requirements pertaining to Equipment Authorization);

b) provision for examining documentation and access to all areas, records (including internal audit reports) and personnel for the purposes of evaluation (e.g. testing, inspection, assessment, surveillance, reassessment) and resolution of complaints;

c) certification has been granted;

d) Division into disrepute and not make any statement regarding our product certification which the Certification Division may consider misleading or unauthorized;

e) matter that contains any reference thereto and return any certification documents as required by the Certification Division;

upon suspension or cancellation of certification, discontinue use of all advertising do not use our product certification in such a manner as to bring the Certification make all necessary arrangements for the conduct of the evaluation, including make claims regarding certification only in respect of the scope for which comply with the the relevant provisions of the certification program use certification only to indicate the products are certified as being in conformity endeavor to ensure that no certificate or report nor any part thereof is used in a f) with specified standards;

g) misleading manner;

h) ensure that any reference to our product certification in communication media such as documents, brochures or advertising, complies with the requirements of the Certification Division, which are governed by individual Regulatory Authority requirements;

i) keep a record of all complaints made known to us relating to the products compliance with requirements of the relevant standard and to make these records available to the Certification Division when requested;

j) found in products or services that affect compliance with the requirements for certification;

k) This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely Yours, take appropriate action with respect to such complaints and any deficiencies document the actions taken. Daniel Lawless Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

 

 

BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94806 Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Date: April 2, 2007 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017 Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, Pursuant to Section 2.1043 of the FCC rules, we hereby request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID:

QDS-BRCM1017, originally granted on 3/8/2005. The major changes filed under this application are:

Change #1 DFS function testing and evaluation for 5250-5350MHz band;

Change #2 Adding co-location with Intermec Bluetooth Transmitter, FCC ID: EHABTM210. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Daniel Lawless Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

 

 

Systems and Solutions 550 Second St SE Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 Dave Fry MS GR05 EMC Engineer tel 319 846-2415 fax 319 846-2475 Dave.Fry@Intermec.com www.intermec.com Date: March 27, 2007 Federal Communications Commission Reference: Transmitter Co-Location FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017 FCC ID: EHABTM210 Dear Application Examiner:

On behalf of Intermec Corporation, Broadcom is submitting the co-location of Intermecs Bluetooth transmitter, FCC EHABTM210 with Broadcom 802.11 ABG transmitter, FCC ID:

QDS-BRCM1017. The Bluetooth radio operates at 2.402-2.480 GHz while the 802.11 ABG radio operates in the 2.412 2.472 GHz, 5.15 5.35 GHz, and 5.725 5.825 GHz bands. It is a mobile spread spectrum transmitter that is compliant with IEEE 802.11a/b/g specifications, and will be used in the applicants CV60 Forklift mounted computer terminal. Each radio transmits through its own antenna. The 802.11 ABG antennas for the CV60 are of lower gain than the antennas tested with Broadcom radio, therefore no additional transmitter emissions data is required for use. Both radios continue to comply with 15.247 and 47 CFR 15E. User documentation will inform the installers and users of the CV60 to keep the antennas 20-cm from the user or persons near by. Let me know if you have any questions. Sincerely, Dave Fry Sr. EMC Engineer

 

 

Helen Zhao Subject:

FW: Broadcom Corporation, FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017, Assessment NO.: AN07T6771, Notice#1 CV60 Insert 578-100-097C.pdf CV60 QSG 930-162.pdf data.pdf BTM210 antenna 805-615_f.pdf From: September Radecki Sent: Tuesday, May 01, 2007 5:23 PM To: Helen Zhao Cc: Christine Vu; Chi Tsou Subject: RE: Broadcom Corporation, FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017, Assessment NO.:

AN07T6771, Notice#1 Hi Helen, Here are the replies to your questions regarding the above application:

Question #1: The Class II change cover letter indicates "Change #2 Adding co-location with Intermec Bluetooth Transmitter, FCC ID:

EHABTM210." If this is the case, please submit DTS filing.

<CCS Answer:> DTS filing has been submitted. Question #2: Please submit host manual of Intermac CV60.

<CCS Answer:> Please see attached host manual and insert. Question #3: Please submit the following antenna specs: one for BT radio, one for WLAN radio.

<CCS Answer:> Please see attached antenna specs. for both Bluetooth and WLAN module. Thank you. Kindest regards, September 1

 

 

BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94806 Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017 Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, I attest that the certified device does not have Ad Hoc capabilities on non-US frequencies. Ad-hoc operation cannot be enabled in the 5.25-5.35 or 5.47-5.725 GHz DFS Bands . If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Date: April 26, 2007 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Daniel Lawless Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

 

 

Applicant: Broadcom Corporation FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017 Correspondence Reference Number: 29460 731 Confirmation Number: EA934366 Date of Original E-Mail: 8/25/2005 2a) per reply to EA934366 corresp 29376 #2, filings containing SAR tests in specific products should include final product operating instructions, to support positions used in SAR tests. Please submit. Answer: Users manual will be uploaded. The users manual states a separation distance of 0.5cm. SAR testing was done at 0cm, therefore the statement of 0.5cm should be acceptable. 4a) per reply to EA934366 corresp 29376 #4, please submit SAR test setup photo. Answer: Setup photos will be uploaded. 4b) New SAR data seems very low for tablet-edge in contact with phantom - please submit internal photos or sketches showing specific antenna configurations. Answer: The correct conducted output power of the transmitter was verified before SAR testing. Later we measured the radiated power and found it to be low. Further investigation found that the connector on the antenna cable was damaged. The requested SAR plots were then re-measured and will be uploaded. SAR values from the original submittal were also re-measured to see if the antenna connector was damaged at that time. The re-measured values were consistent with the original values.

 

 

Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Date: June 30, 2005 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017 Dear Examiner, Pursuant to Section 2.1043 of the FCC rules, we hereby request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017, originally granted on 3/8/2005. The major changes filed under this application are:

Change #1 SAR testing is performed with the mentioned platform to demonstrate RF compliance. Co-location with Bluetooth module (FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1018) is also evaluated to ensure RF compliance. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Adding portable platform, HP HSTNN-C02C. Daniel Lawless Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

 

 

FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017 Correspondence Reference Number: 29470 731 Confirmation Number: EA542698 Date of Original E-Mail: 8/26/2005 Subject: FCC Equipment Authorization System 1) Cover letter states:

"The WNC antenna 81.EBC15.002 (main)/81.EBC15.001 (Aux) used for HP HSTNN-C02C, is the same type as WNC, 81.ED415.002 and Hitachi HFT17-DL03, which are already certified in previous filing for FCC ID: QDSBRCM1017, and has a lower gain." Antenna gain is most applicable for EMC and far-field conditions; host and antenna structures, shapes, and vicinity objects may influence near-field SAR conditions such that additional tests may be appropriate. Please submit details of all antennas used with this transmitter and explain how FCC RF exposure is maintained, or amend/revise SAR exhibits if appropriate. Answer: The statement in the cover letter is only related to the far field condition (spurious and EIRP). For the near field effects a full set of SAR tests were done and uploaded for this new platform. 2) Please submit user operating instructions for final product. Answer: Users guide will be uploaded. 3) Please submit FCC ID labeling for final product, including Bluetooth labeling where applicable. Answer: Bluetooth label will be uploaded. 4) FCC regularly reviews test procedures and test positions for new and developing technologies to support appropriate compliance demonstration for FCC RF exposure limits. Body in contact with antenna sections of a device may generally be expected to be inefficient for communications purposes, but evidently does apply for some (slate and convertible) tablet PCs. Thus edge of device near or in contact with person's body may reasonably be expected to be a normal use position. This filing presently may not contain appropriate info to support grantee responsibility for FCC RF exposure compliance. Tablet edge in contact with phantom may need SAR test if that represents some typical, expected, or normal use position, e.g., device has display orientations (0/180 portrait, 0/180 landscape) which allow regular contact with body. For high-

output channels, please submit SAR if appropriate. Answer: The tablet side position would not be a normal use position because the screen would be upside down during this position. An additional SAR plot for this position will be uploaded with a setup photo.

 

 

Tel: 408 543 3300, Fax 408 543 3399 190 Mathilda Place, Sunnyvale, CA 94086. Date: January 17, 2005 To whom it may concern:

We, the undersigned, hereby authorize Cetecom to act on our behalf in all manners relating to applications for FCC and IC equipment authorization for the following products, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by Cetecom on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. BCM94318MPAGH FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017 IC ID: 4324A-BRCM1017 This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely yours, ____________________ Daniel Lawless Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation

 

 

Answer to Correspondence# 28913, EA510655, FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017 1) The original filing was for Mobile equipment and the 20cm applies to those platforms. This Class II change is to add portable platforms to the same approval ID. Please find attached a a) modified example user guide for portable applications. BCM94318MPAGH User Guide_ Portable b) example user guides for the 4 portable laptops. PP02X User Guide, PP05L_User_Guide, PP07L - i5100 User Guide, PPT User Guide_modified) 2) See attached declaration document detailing the worst case platform/antenna combination for both 2.4 and 5GHz SAR testing. Manufacturer's Declaration Re Worst case SAR platform BCM94318MPAGH 5mmby2437 byst5mm5260 3) As detailed in declaration for under item# 2 above.

 

 

Date: January 17, 2005 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Re: Request for Confidentiality In reference to the application under FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017, and pursuant to Sections 0.457(d)(1)(ii) and 0.459 of the Commission's Rules, the Applicant hereby requests confidential treatment of the accompanying information as outlined below:

Schematics Part List Block diagram Theory of Operation The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful to the Applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The Applicant understands that pursuant to Rule 0.457(d)(1)(ii), disclosure of this Application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. Sincerely yours, Daniel Lawless Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

 

 

Tel: 408 543 3300, Fax 408 543 3399 Mr Daniel Lawless

+1 408-922-5870

+1 408-543-3399 Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale California CA 94086 USA Contact:

Tel:

Fax:

190 Mathilda Place, Sunnyvale, CA 94086. We Hereby declare under our sole responsibility, that the product To which this declaration relates, has been tested for radiated emissions in the worst configurations. The worst antenna gain for each antenna type is identified below in Red. Worst case Stamped Metal antenna is covered under original FCC filing with 3.24dBi/2.4GHz and 5.7dBi/5GHz antenna. The worst case PCB antenna is tested in PP07L. Broadcom 802.11ag WLAN Mini PCI Card BCM94318MPAGH Model Name:

Model No. FCC C2PC portable platforms and Antennas No Platform Model Name Dell PP05L Antenna Supplier Wistron NeWeb PIFA stamped Metal CA5-Q Antenna Type Model number Hitachi PIFA stamped Metal HFT01-DL01 Dell PP07L

(PP08L) Phycomp PCB Antenna 4313 334 01250 Left Antenna 4313 334 02250 Right Antenna Wistron NeWeb PIFA stamped Metal CAA-C 2.55 4.5 (Aux) Dell PP02X Hitachi PIFA stamped Metal Main Antenna HFT04-DL01-MAIN 1.1 Aux Antenna HFT04-DL01-AUX Wistron NeWeb PIFA stamped Metal CA9-C Max Peak gain Max Peak Gain 2.4GHz/dBi Main- 2.18 Aux- 2.26 Main- 1.2 Aux- .9 5GHz/dBi Main- 4.62 dBi Aux- 2.31dBi Main- 5.6dBi Aux- 4.9dBi 2.2 (Main, white) 3.9 (Main, white) 2.39 2.59 Main- 2.3 dBi Aux- 4.9 dBi Main- 3.29 dBi Aux- 3.47 dBi 4.09 (Main) Dell PPT Wistron NeWeb PIFA stamped Metal CAB-A Pursuant to Section 2.1043 of the FCC rules, we hereby request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017, originally granted on 3/8/2005. April 12, 2005 1 2 3 4 ______________________ Daniel Lawless Manager, Compliance Engineering

 

 

Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Date: April 12, 2005 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017 Dear Examiner, Pursuant to Section 2.1043 of the FCC rules, we hereby request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017, originally granted on 3/8/2005. The major changes filed under this application are:

Change #1 If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Adding portable platforms:

Dell PP05L, PP07L, PP08L, PP02X, PPT Daniel Lawless Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

 

 

Federal Communication Commission Equipment Authorization Division, Application Processing Branch 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21048 March 16, 2005 TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN Pursuant to Paragraphs 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules (47 C.F.R.) and Section 552(b)(4) of the Freedom of Information Act, Cetecom Inc. requests confidentiality for the following items:

Document: SAR tissue simulant liquids The above exhibits contain Cetecom Inc. trade secrets and proprietary information that could be of benefit to our competitors. This material is not customarily available to the general public and we request that it be withheld from public inspection. If you have any questions, please feel free to contact me at the address shown below. Sincerely, Lothar Schmidt Technical Manager Cetecom Inc. 411 Dixon Landing Rd. Milpitas, CA 95035 Ph: 408 586 6214

 

 

Tel: 408 543 3300, Fax 408 543 3399 Mr Daniel Lawless

+1 408-922-5870

+1 408-543-3399 Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale California CA 94086 USA Contact:

Tel:

Fax:

190 Mathilda Place, Sunnyvale, CA 94086. We Hereby declare under our sole responsibility, that the product To which this declaration relates, has been tested for radiated emissions in the worst configurations. The worst antenna gain for each antenna type is identified below in Red. Worst case Stamped Metal antenna is covered under original FCC filing with 3.24dBi/2.4GHz and 5.7dBi/5GHz antenna. The worst case PCB antenna is tested in PP07L. Broadcom 802.11ag WLAN Mini PCI Card BCM94318MPAGH Model Name:

Model No. FCC C2PC portable platforms and Antennas No Platform Model Name Dell PP05L Antenna Supplier Wistron NeWeb PIFA stamped Metal CA5-Q Antenna Type Model number Hitachi PIFA stamped Metal HFT01-DL01 Dell PP07L

(PP08L) Phycomp PCB Antenna 4313 334 01250 Left Antenna 4313 334 02250 Right Antenna Wistron NeWeb PIFA stamped Metal CAA-C 2.55 4.5 (Aux) Max Peak gain Max Peak Gain 2.4GHz/dBi Main- 2.18 Aux- 2.26 Main- 1.2 Aux- .9 5GHz/dBi Main- 4.62 dBi Aux- 2.31dBi Main- 5.6dBi Aux- 4.9dBi 2.2 (Main, white) 3.9 (Main, white) 2.39 2.59 Main- 2.3 dBi Aux- 4.9 dBi Main- 3.29 dBi Aux- 3.47 dBi 4.09 (Main) Dell PP02X Hitachi PIFA stamped Metal Main Antenna HFT04-DL01-MAIN 1.1 Aux Antenna HFT04-DL01-AUX Wistron NeWeb PIFA stamped Metal CA9-C Dell PPT Wistron NeWeb PIFA stamped Metal CAB-A 1 2 3 4 March 28, 2005 ______________________ Daniel Lawless Manager, Compliance Engineering

 

 

Broadcom Corporation Request for transmitter modular approval FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1017 Transmitter Module Characteristics Item 1 Have its own RF shielding Requirements EUT Device is equipped with Metal shielding to cover RF section. Refer to external photos All inputs to the modules are buffered through logic or microprocessor inputs. Internal 1.8V and 3.3V power regulators. Refer to Block diagram PIFA antenna with I-PEX connector Device will be tested external to a host on an extender board in a standalone configuration Two proposed FCC ID label format will be included in the filing. One of label is to be placed on the module and the other label is to be placed on the outside of system. Refer to FCC ID label format and location file. Refer to Users Guide Exhibit MPE calculation is provided to demonstrate RF compliance for mobile modular approval. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Have buffered modulation/data inputs (if such inputs are provided), Have it own power supply regulation Meet the antenna requirements of Section 15.203 Be tested in a stand-alone configuration, i.e., the antenna, AC or DC power and data input/output lines must be connected to the module but, the module must not be inside another case during testing Be labeled with its own FCC ID number, and if the FCC ID is not visible when the module is installed inside another device, then the outside of the device into which the module is installed must also display a label referring to the enclosed module. The modular transmitter is manufactured so that the user cannot influence the operation of the transmitter that will operate outside of the scope of the regulations. Address compliance with the Commission's RF exposure limits in Sections 1.1310 and 2.1093. In addition, spread spectrum transmitters operating under Section 15.247 are required to address RF exposure compliance in accordance with Section 15.247(b)(4).